CIHM/ICMH

Microfiche

Series.

CIHM/ICIVIH
Collection de
microfiches.

Canadian Institute for Historical Microreproductions / Institut Canadian de microreproductions historiques

.•a««M1Wltf^*"r'

Technical and Bibliographic Notes/Notes techniques et bibliographiques

The institute has attempted to obtain the best
original copy available for filming. Features of this
copy which may be bibliographically unique,
which may alter any of the images in the
reproduction, or which may significantly change
the usual method of filming, are checked below.

D
D

Coloured covers/
Couverture de couleur

I I Covers damaged/

Couverture endommagde

Covers restored and/or laminated/
Couverture restaur^e et/ou pellicul6e

Cover title missing/

Le titre de couverture manque

Coloured maps/

Cartes g^ographiques en couleur

Coloured inl( (i.e. other than blue or black)/
Encre de couleur (i.e. autre que bleue ou noire)

I I Coloured plates and/or illustrations/

L'Institut a microfilm^ le meilleur exempiaire
qu'il lui a 6t6 possible de se procurer. Les details
de cet exempiaire qui sont peut-dtre uniques du
point de vue bibliographique, qui peuvent modifier
une image repioduite, ou qui peuvent exiger une
modification dans la methods normale de filmage
sont indiqu6s ci-dessous.

I 1 Coloured pages/

Pages de couleur

Pages damaged/
Pages endommagdes

Pages restored and/or laminated/
Pages restaur6es et/ou pellicuides

Pages discoloured, stained or foxed/
Pages d6color6es, tachet6es ou piqu6es

Pages detached/
Pages d6tach6es

Showthrough/
Transparence

Planches et/ou illustrations en couleur

Bound with other material/
Reli6 avec d'autres documents

Tight binding may cause shadows or distortion
along interior margin/

La re liure serrde peut causer de I'ombre ou de la
distortion le long de la marge int^rieure

Blank leaves added during restoration may
appear within the text. Whenever possible, these
have been omitted from filming/
11 se peut que certaines pages blanches ajouttes
lore d'une restauration apparaissent dans le texte,
mais, lorsque cela dtait possible, ces pages n'ont
pas 6X6 filmdes.

Additional comments:/

Commentaires suppl6mentaires: '^

This item is filmed at the reduction ratio checked below/

Ce document est fiimd au taux de reduction indiqu6 ci-dessous.

10X 14X 18X 22X

I I Quality of print varies/

Quality in6gaie de I'impression

Includes supplementary material/
Comprend du materiel suppi^mentaire

Only edition available/
Seule Edition disponible

Pages wholly or partially obscured by errata
slips, tissues, etc., have been ref limed to
ensure the best possible image/
Les pages totalement ou partiellement
obscurcies par un feuillet d'errata, une pelure,
etc., ont 6t6 fiimies d nouveau de fa^on d
obtenir la meilleure image possible.

26X

30X

12X

16X

20X

24X

28X

32X

lt;.tfw^

ifier

ige

The copy filmed here has been reproduced thanks
to the generosity of:

Library of Congress
Photoduplication Service

The images appearing here are the best quality
possible considering the condition and legibility
of the original copy and in keeping with the
filming contract specifications.

Original copies in printed paper covers are filmed
beginning with the front cover and ending on
the last page with a printed or illustrated impres-
sion, or the back cover when appropriate. All
other original copies are filmed beginning on the
first page with a printed or illustrated impres-
sion, and ending on the last page with a printed
or illustrated impression.

The last recorded frame on each microfiche
shall contain the symbol — ► (meaning "CON-
TINUED"), or the symbol V (meaning "END"),
whichever applies.

Maps, plates, charts, etc., may be filmed at
different reduction ratios. Those too large to be
entirely included in one exposure are filmed
beginning in the upper left hand corner, left to
right and top to bottom, as many frames as
required. The following diagrams illustrate the
method:

L'exemplaire filmd fut reproduit grdce d la
g6n6rosit6 de:

Library of Congress
Photoduplication Service

Les images suivantes ont 6t6 reproduites avec le
plus grand soin, compte tenu de la condition et
de la nettetd de l'exemplaire film6, et en
conformity avec les conditions du contrat de
filmage.

Les exemplaires originaux dont la couverture en
papier est imprim6e sent filmds en commenpant
par le premier plat et en terminant soit par la
dernidre page qui comporte une empreinte
d'impression ou d'illustration, soit par le second
plat, selon le cas. Tous les autres exemplaires
originaux sont fiimds en commenpant par la
premidre page qui comporte une empreinte
d'impression ou d'illustration et en terminant par
la dernidre page qui comporte une telle
empreinte.

Un des symboles suivants apparaitra sur la
dernidre image de cheque microfiche, selon le
cas: le symbols — ► signifie "A SUIVRE ", la
symbols V signifie "FIN".

Les cartes, planches, tableaux, etc., peuvent dtre
film6s d des taux de reduction diffdrents.
Lorsque le document est trop grand pour fttre
reproduit en un seul clichd, il est film6 d partir
de {'angle supdrieur gauche, de gauche d droite,
et de haut en has, en prenant le nombre
d'images n^cessaire. Les diagrammes suivants
illustrent la m^thode.

ita

lure.

1 2 3

iaa^Mirarii iii<iHaB '

(gonikimiewL id

Iticfiiirdson Clotiert

(i»i-ia-'9i>-(ioo.)

miHi

dioalakfie

lei.

..^i

^fi«ct'iiL:t£i::Jr^^i]S?

-,^ :ruu'^iij/fa ?»

iiii

No. 100.

SAILING DIRECTIONS

roB

Gulf and River St. Lawrence and
Cape Breton Isund.

Compiled by
]{. H. ORI?. U. S. Hyduoghaphic Ofkick.

By (lirectiou of

Liiu T. Commander RICHARDSON CLOVER, (\ -. N.,

Hydrographer.

WASHINGTON:

GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE.

1891.

'''■^''•^^-■'''*''~^'-^

'i ' ■' '.
t'

•

f ■

<»•

i.fa— ■.>»i,'n"itrii ■' '•[ -y iVi'lti'V

i«1 % .Tif'>lJr\<i''i

CONTENTS

Preface V

Note VI

Index chart vii

CHAPTKR I.
Directionft auro88 the Onlf— winds, ioe, currents, etc 1

CHAPTER II.
iHlands in the Onlf of 8t. Lawrence '^8

CHAPTER III.
Cape Breton Island, NW.,SE., and east coasts 47

CHAPTER IV.

West shore of Gulf of St. Lawrence and south shore of river from Miramiehi
Bay to Green Island fi

CHAPTER V. '

North shore of Gulf of St. Lawrence from Grand Point to Cape Whittle I'i'S

CHAPTER VI.

North shore of Gulf of St. Lawrence from Cape Wliittle to Sagueuay River .. 14S)

CHAPTER VII.

River St. Lawrence from Green Island to Montreal, .Sagiienay River itii

ADDENDA.

List of Lights viJC

Coaling and docking facilities '^40

Opening and closing of ports. (Ice) -24^

III

»ll

' i'*^VfitMVi'..l» ;^«i^

IMiKFACK.

Tliis uditioii (joiitiiiiis sailing directioiKs for tim (JuU" and River Ht.
LawrHiico, l>('<;iiiiiiiii;' atUrand Point on the nortii and EscniuitnK^ Point
oil the weHt HJiore, and running; np the river as tar as Montreal, also
Cai»e Breton (exeept south shore), Aiitieosti, and smaller islands lying
in the Gulf.

Ill the (jonipilation oftiiis volume the following autliorities have been
consulted :

St. Lawrence Pilot, vol. r (Admiralty).

St. Lawrence Pilot, vol. ii (Admiralty).

Anihives, U. S. Hydrographic OtTice.

Ottlce of Naval Intelligen(!e, Navy Department.

Port Charges of tiie World (Hunter).

Hydrographic Oflice Charts.

Britiah Admiralty Charts.

TtioHA-RDSON Clover,
Lietit. Comvn xler, L. S. Narn, JJydrof/rapher.

IJ. S. Hyuroorapiiic Office,

Wanhington, August, 1891.

NOTE.

Tlie bearings, courses, and trend of the land are true. The direction
of the winds, Ww point from which thej' blow; of currents, the points
toward which they sot. Distances are expressed in nautical miles \
soundings, unless otherwise stated, are reduced to mean low water.

ilirection
ie points
a.1 miles f
ivater.

INDEX TO I

ALLUDED TO IN PUBLI

lliiisiiin ot'f'hiirt i'fii»tni'tu-ii OWLtalrhtiUs A:iai»liinl In I'hun/r.

INDEX TO H. O. CHARTS

UDED TO IN PUBLICATIONS N03 «9 AND IDO

•|

J^r-^ v n, ^ O.Jfomtx£iL JSn^r^tm'eti by JtAManjiAi ofut CAKoU

LIST OF HARBOK ;.ND SPECIAL CHARTS.

THE HANKS OK NEWFOUNDLAND, NOVA SCOTIA, AND THK GULF OF MAINE.

The Great Baiika of Nowfoundland, with the adjacent coast from Cape
Bonavista to Cape 8t. Mary ,

Virgin Rocks and Kastern Shoals

Cape St. Mary iind the Miquelou Islands to Halifax, with off-lyinj{ banks,
including (Jreen, St. Pierre, Artinion, Misaine, Canso, Sable I, and Sam-
bro l)anks, the Middle Ground and Banquereau

Halifax to New York, with Roseway, La Have, Brown, and Georges banks,
Cashes Ledge, Nantucket Shoals, aud the inshore banks

OULF OK ST. LAWHENCE AND ADJACENT COASTS AND J8LAND8. I

River and Gnlf of St. Lawrence, Nova Scotia, and adjacent banks, with

plans of Georges Shoals and Gut of Canso, Chedabuctou Bay etc

Gnlf of St. Lawrence

Magdalen Lsliinds, Gulf of St. Lawrence

Amherst aud Grand Entry harbors, Magdalen Islands

OULK OF ST. LAWRENCE— NORTH AND WEST COASTS.

Newfoundland; northern half

West coast of Newfoundland from St. Genevieve Bay to Bonne Bay, and

south coast of Quebec from Strait of Belle Isle to Cape MacKinnon

South coast of Quebec, Washtawooka Bay to Cape MacKinnon

Anticosti Island and adjacent coast of Quebec

Antioosti Island to Point de Monts

River St. Lawrence ; Point de Monts to Saguenay River

River St. Lawrence; Saguenay River to Quebec ...'.

Quebec Harbor '. JI!! !!!. .

Bay of Chaleurs aud adjacent coi.sts, New Brnnswick '.'.'.'.......

Gasp^ Harbor, Gulf of St. Lawrence, coast of New Brnnswick !..

Caraquette, Shippegan, and Miscou harbors, Bay of Chaleurs

Miraniicbi Bay, New Brunswick

PRINCE EDWARD ISLAND AND ADJACENT COASTS AND NEW BRUNSWICK

AND NOVA SCOTIA.

Prince Edward Island and adjacent coast, inluding Northumberland

Strait and northern approaches to the Gut of Canso ;

Shediac Bay and Harbor, New Brunswick ...! "I

Pngwash Harbor, Nova Scotia

Wallace Harbor, Nova Scotia !!!!!! !]!!i

Amet Sound and Anchorages, Nova Scotia !

Caribou Harbor, Nova Scotia "[j

Piotou Harbor, Nova Scotia, plan of entrance and liar ..[....".[].".

Merigomish Harbor, Nova Scotia ;

Pomquet Harbor and Road and Tracadie aud Li tile Tracadie harbors,

Nova Scotia

vii

»rtO
863

198
'J41

15
1013
1092
1107

581a

1105
1108
1109
1110
1111
1112
1-207
1067
1167
1217
1179

106<i
1081
1094
lli-1
1098
1140
1076
1099

1148

VIII

LIMT OK HARBOR AND SPECIAL CHARTS.

Title.

triiit,

rillN'CE KDWAKD ISLAXH.

INiiict- Kdwiiiillslaiul 1111(1 iidjaceiit coftHt, iiicIii(liiiK Nortliiiinboilan(l 8tr
aiKl tim iNortlioni Apiiroarlii'H to the Gut of CaiiNo

HfileciiU! Harbor, incliKliiij; Smninerside Harbor ....

C'rii|iaud Harbor

HillHboroiiffh Bay and Cbarlottetown Harbor..!... 11

Murray Harbor '.'.'.'.'.'.'..'.

Cardigan Bay, witli Cardinal), MontaKne'/and iW-mlmiVl'l Vivms.Panniure'
iHiaud, and Oeorjjetowii Harbor.

Nutiibcr

of
cbartf*.

io«o

10!»,5

10«.8

lir.()

CAl'K HRKTON ISLAND AND ADJACENT COAST.

Capo Brtstoii Island. Phin of St. Paul Island ....

Port Hood, Cape Breton Isbind

Great and Little Bran d'Or laken, Capo BretonlVland".

Saint Anne Harbor and Gr.-at Bias d'Or, Cape Breton Island
.Sydney Harbor, (Jape Breton iHl.tnd . . .

Scatan Island an<l .Menadoii Passawe, Cape Breton Island

Lonisbnrg Harbor, Cape Breton Island

Gut of Canso with itssonthern appi
Gnt of Cnnso and Cliedabnclon Bay
Madame Island and LtMiox Pas,sa<{i''
Gnysboroujrh Harbor, Cliedabuctoii Bay.

Gilt o(^ Canso with itssonthern approaebes and ChedabuctoiiBav
Gnt ot Canso and Cliedabnclon Bay. (See jilan on H. O. 15).....'

NOVA SCOTIA— BAST COAST.

Sainbro Island to Cape Canso; Sheet II

Cunso Harbor and Approaclies, including Glasgow Hr'r'bo'r anV Auil're'w"

Island and Passage

Whitehaven, Nova Scotia

Country Harbor, Nova Scotia .

Niconitau Bay, with adjacent coast and islands. Nova Scotia

.Sheet Harbor and adjacent anchorages, including Mushaboon, Sprv'.'and
•ope harl)ors, and Taylor, Spry, and Tomlees bays

Beaver Harbor, Nova Scotia

Ship Harbor, Nova Scotia, and adjacent anchorages

Halifax to New York, with Kosewav, La Have, Brown, and Georges" banks','
Cashes Ledge, Nantucket Shoals, and inshore banks..

Halifax Harbor, Nova .Scotia

Capo Sable to Sainbro Island; Sheet I ....'.'.".' j "

Port Moiiton and Liverpool bays, Nova Scotia

BAY OF FUNDY.

Bay of Fnndy, southern part

Grand Manau Island and adjacent coast, Bay of Fund v

Passamaq noddy Bay and Approaches '

L'Ktang Harbor and Approaches, with adjacent harbors" Vnd anchorageV."
including Bhss Harbor, Petite Harbor, etc .... '

Port St. Andrews. Pa88ahia(iuod<iy Bay

Bay of Fundy, northern part. Plan of Avon River !!..!.!!..'

.St. John, New Brunswick, enlarged plan of entrance to harbor..".

UNITKD STATES— KA8T COAST.

assainaquoddy Bay and Approaches, including Lepreau Bay, Beaver
Harlxn-, L Ltaug Harbor, Quoddy Roads, Cobscook Bay, Friar Roads.
St. Andrew Harbor, and the St. Croix River to Calais and St. Stephens

10T7

r.ii

ll)71»

ia:i7
1134
lOlil
1097

i3r>

18:<6

l.i

l-.i78

107.-)

0-&

1074
11-24
UK)
ll:«

1173
106tt
113.-1

041
147
524

not!

610
1057
1247

1054

1051

600

1247

NutlllliT

—

cbarts.

Ait,

- • • •

lotus

- - • •

10»0

I09i>

10t)8

....

1160

1077

fill
1079

ian7

1134
10(il
1097
155
12:'6
15

lara

1075

5!>5

1074
ll',>4
UK)
ll:«

1173
1069
1135

941
147
524

not)

610
1057
1247

1054

1051

609

149

1247

CHAPTER I.

DIREOTION.S ACROSS THE GULF. * " ' *'

General Remarks—The navigation of the gulf ami r.ver of St
Lawrence (m the present chapter spoken of as the g.ilf and the river)'
requires much careful attention ; the irregularity of the tides and cur-
rents, the severity of the climate, especially towards the close of the
navigable season; and, above all, the frequent fogs, are difficulties
which may well cause much anxiety iu the miud of the seaman, and
which call for the exercise of all his vigilance, prudence, and ability.

The Variation.— The navigator is reminded that the variation of
the compass differs nearly two points betwen the limits of the places
described in this work, viz, at Grand Point 36o, and at Quebec 17*0

The Deviation or local attraction of the compass needle is another
source of error, independent of charts altogether. This subject is one
ot great importance in approaching and navigating the gulf, as from
the increase of the magnetic dip and the decrease in the horizontal
magnetic force that is found here-two dements affecting the shin's
magnetism-tlie original deviation of the compass will, in all probabilitv
be much inoreased. In many vessels it has been ascertained by direct
observation that their maximum deviation have been increased by one-

Magnetic Attraction of the Shores.-An opinion is prevalent that
the compasses of vessels are disturbed in the gulf and river, and such
disturbance has been attributed to the magnetic ores of iron in the
hills, particularly those of the north coast. The magnetic oxide of
iron does exist abundantly, and attracts the needle verv powerfullv at
some points, particularly along the coast from the bay of Seven Islands
eastward. Among the Mingan Islands the variation was found to vary
from this cause from 19o to 31o w. At Port Neuf and on Manicougan
Point the needle was also disturbed. But these effects were onlv
noticed when the instrument was placed on the shore.

When running from place to place, at greater distances than 2 miles
from the coast nothing of the kind was noticed ; so that in nine cases out
oJZ '^^^'^ *,'»•« ««"r«e of erroneous reckoning has been alleged as the
cause of accidents to vessels they probably originated either in errors
of the chart or in th^ local attraction on board the vessels themselves
,v« T °^^^® difficulties of the navigation may be mentioned the

ZrJnfTT^' fr''^^ '" '^^ '°^°*^ °^ ^^y* ^^^ «°*^«°«« a°d eastern
parts of the gulf are frequently covered with drift ice, and vessels are

5489 ■!

•^■■i

GULF AND RIVER ST. LAWRENCE.

sometimes beset by it for many days. Being unprepared for contend-
ing with this danger they often suffer from it and are occasiotially lost ;
but serious accidents from tliis cause do not frequently occur, because
the ice is gcMierally more or less in a melting state fr >m the i)owerful
effect of the sun in spring. In the fall of the year accidents from ice
seldom happen, except when the winter commences unusually early, or
when vessels have lingered imprudently late from the temptation of
obtaining high freights.

Cabot Strait is never frozen over, but vessels built in the ordinary
way can not navigate it in safety between 1st January and 1st May on
account of (he heavy drift ice, and frecjuenily not until later on account
of the block caused by the " Bridge."

Sealing steam vessels i)ass through at all times, but are occasionally
fast in the ice for days together.

Nearly every year the great rush of ice out of the Gulf of the St.
Lawrence in the spring causes a stoppage, locally known as '• the Bridge,''
between St. Paul Island and Cai)e Riiy. The " Bridge " sometimes lasts
for 2 or 3 weeks, and completely prevents the passage of ships ; it is
recorded that 300 sail have at one time been detained by this obstacle,
and many wrecks have occurred in consequence on the Newfoundland
coast.

The usual time of the formation of the " Bridge" is between the
middle and end of April to thw middle of May.

Small vessels are engaged ui the seal fishery duving March and April,
and occasionally reach Anticosti. The diffl«ult portion is between the
Bird Rocks and Cape St. George as the stream presses the ice on to
the coast. The wind between NVV, and SW. closes the coast. A SW.
gale occasionally brings the ice out from the channel between the Mag-
dalen Islands and Cape Breton, which meets the main bodj' flowing past
the Bird Rocks and closes the strait between St. Paul and Cape An-
guille. The wind between NW. and NB. clears the strait rapidly and
the wind between NE. and south opens the Newfoundland coast. The
stream of the St. Lawrence is generally setting to the southward and
often with considerable speed, particularly during westerly winds.

The strait often appears to clear rapidly ; in 36 hours very little ice
may be seen from Cai)e Ray, but bodies of ice will pass many days
after navigation is open, particularly if the winds are northerly. NE.
of Anticosti ice may be met with in May, long after the strait is clear.
The ice usually presses out of the gulf in the direction of Banquereau,
the eastern edge extending half-way between Scatari and St. Pierre.
Occasionally it is drifted along the south coast of Newfoundland and
reaches St. Pierre. The coast between Cape North and Scatari often
holds the ice during easterly winds late in May.

The early stream of slob made on the Labrador coast and the north
nsuaily passes into the gulf during the month of December and mixes'
with the gulf sheet when it is made early, but it is often open water.

;^i-^t!a»rR " n r 'Wur ,ihn,r , . n" ■ ' fyf | - | -- , , , ' i ||ii ; i i i M,|j ,' u-;i

lOK. _ ^

The eaHt winds arwl snow bnild this thin ice and produce a form of white
slob. The northern slob enters tlie Rulf about tlie Otii of .lanuaiy with
variations extending over a niontii, but it may not be permitted to pass
lilanc Sablon if the wind is N\V. The ice can not at present be foL
lowed ; It may arrive off Bonne Bay during January or February, or it
may be driven into the Labrador coast, all depending on the wind.

The gulf sheet makes early and rapidly during tiie cold season and
is often in sheets a mile or two in length and occasionally it will be fast
for a few days from Meccatiua to Cow Head in February, (ienerally
spealviug, it is loose, with lanes and lakes extending in the direction of
tlie wind and current, and is navigated by snmll vessels during March
and Aprd sailing from Natashquan and Esquiineaux foint.

lOE IN THE GULP OF ST. LAWRENCE AND VHINITV.

During December and January the harbors and bays around theCJnIf
of St. Lawrence begin to freeze, and by January 20, ice will have fornied
over most of them. In some the ice made there will eventually become
thick enough to interfere with navigation, wliile in others it will com-
pletely close the i)ort and prevent the entrance of all vessels. By Feb-
ruary 1, the open water in the gulf will be full of ice-fields formed there
while other ice will enter through the Strait of Belle fsle and from the
River St. Lawrence.

Off the coast the ice is inconstant motion, drifting with the winds,
tides, and currents, and is slowly working down towards Cabot Strait',
through which it passes and finds its way to seaward. Its path broad-
ens when through the strait, and will be governed generally by the pre-
vailing winds. Under the influence of currents alone it will drift to
the southward and westward, and in latitude 45° N. may be from 10 to
75 miles wide. Much of this is very heavy, and will prevent the pas-
sage through it of all vessels not specially built to go through ''?e.

Its thickness will be anything from a few inches to several feet. It
is only in the Strait of Belle Isle that bergs are encountered, but rarely
farther west than Greenly Island, though a few have been known to
find their way south through Cabot Strait.

Field ice will be found in the gulf until May and often lasts until
June, when it is generally replaced by bergs.

Much of the ice in the gulf will be rough and rafted full of hummocks
and in extensive fields. Some of the Arctic ice in finding its way into
the gulf IS forced ashore at times, but large quantities mix with the gulf
ice and make it very heavy and close. Once the ice forms on open water
sufficiently strong to interfere with navigation it begins to drift, filling
some ports that may remain closed all winter, while a favorable or
adverse wind may continue to open or close them the entire winter.

Leads may be found extending through the ice at any time, but they
can not be depended upon for any length of time.
Heavy ice is noticed at the month of the River St. Lawrence in the

4 GULF AND RIVEIl ST. LAWRENCE.

latter purt of Deeeinlx^r, and IiiHtH until April 10 or 15, but all during
the aua.son luadn can be found when the wind drives the ice to either
sule of the river.

The Gut of CauHo is blocked at times by drift ice from the northward,
but will be opened with a southerly wind.

West of Cape Canso the ice rarely, if ever, interferes with navigation.
Halifax, for example, has only been closed once in 25 years, and then
only for a short time, by ice frozen in the harbor, though ice an inch or
two in thic'Miess frequently freezes there.

Fogs may occur at any time during the open or navigable season,
and they sometimes last several days in succession, but are most fre-
quent in the early part of summer, and seldom fail to accompany an
easterlv wind of any strength or duration. In the months of October
and November the fogs and rain that accompany easterly gales are
replaced by thick snow. During westerly winds they are rare, and
never of long continuance.

The above general observation is subject, however, to restriction, ac-
cording to locality or season. Thuswiuds between the south and west,
which are usually clear weather winds above Anticusti, are frequently
accompanied with fog in the eastern parts of the gulf. Winds between
the south and east are almost always aocom])anied with rain and fog in
every part. NE. winds above Point de Mouts are often east or more to
the southward in the gulf, changed in direction by the high lauds of
the south coast, and have therefore in general the same foggy charac-
ter. Winds of considerable strength and duration are here meant, and
which probably extend over great distances.

Moderate and partial Une weather winds may occur without fog in
any season and in any locality. In the early part of the uavigable sea-
son, especially in the months of April and May, clear weather NE.
winds are of frequent occurrence, and they also sometimes occur at
other seasons in every part of the gulf and river.

The fogs which accompany easterly gales extend high above the sea,
and can uot be seen over from the masthead of a vessel ; occasionally
they admit the land or other objects to be distinguished at the dis-
tance of ^ mile or more in the day time. The fogs that occur in calms,
especially after strong winds, are frequently so dense as to conceal
a vessel within hail ; these fogs are usually not much elevated above the
sea, so that when objects are hidden at 50 yards from the deck they can
be plainly seeu by a person 50 or CO feet up in the rigging.

When within sight of land in foggy weather the usual effect of fog
is that of causing estimations of distance to be erroneously in excess. No
great reliance should be placed upon an assumption of position de.
pending upon the distance at which the sound of surf breaking on a
rocky shore can be heard, but on many portions of the coast where
steep clifls extend to the shore the proximity of a steam vessel to them
may be detected by the echo of the whistle. There is no safe guide but
the constant use of the lead.

• I liinrniaii

>ll (luring
to eitlier

)r til ward,

iviRiitioii.
and tlitMi
kii iiiuli or

le season,
most fre-
npaiiy an
f October
gales are
rare, and

iction, ac-
and west,
requeiitly
9 between
bud fog in
tr more to
[i lauds of
;y clmrac-
leaut, and

)ut fog in
gable sea-
,ther NB.
I occur at

B the sea,
:asionally
■j the dis-
in calms,
D conceal
above the
c they can

3«t of fog
:ce88. No
isitiou de.
king on a
ast where
)1 to them
guide but

WIND8. 5

Winds.— Tlu' prevailing winds during the navigable season areeitiior
directly up or directly down the estuary, following tin- course ot the
chains of highlands on either side of the great valley of the St. Law-
rence. The westerly winds do not a|ipeiir to he so much guided in «lirec-
tion by the highlands, excepting along the south coast, where ,\ SW.
wind at the island of Hie was observed to become a N\V. wind at Cape
Oaspe. These winds frequently blow strong for .'{ or 4 days in succes-
sion; the westerly winds being almost always accompanied by line, dry,
clear, and sunny weather; the easterly winds as fre(|uently the tioii-
trary — cold, wet, and foggy.

In the si)ring easterly winds mostly prevail, frequently l)lowing sev-
eral weeks in succession. As the summer advances the westerly winds
become more frequent, and the SW. wind may be said to be the pre-
vailing wind in summer in all parts of the river and gulf. Light
south winds blow occasionally ; but north winds are not common in
summer, although they sometimes occur. Steady NW. winds do not
blow frequently before September, excepting for a f.-w hours at a time,
when they generally succeed easterly winds which have died away to a
calm, forming the comnieucemeiit of strong winds and usually veering
to the SW. The NW. wind is dry, with bright clear sky. Hying clouds,
and showers. After the autumnal equinox, winds to the northward of
west become more commoii, and are then often strong steady winds of
considerable duration. In the months of October and November the
NW. wind frequently blows with great violence in heavy squalls, with
passing showers of hail and snow, and attended with sharp frost.

Thunder-storms are not uncommon in July and August. They sel-
dom last more than an hour or two, but the wind proceeding from them
is in general violent and sudden, particularly when near the niountiiinous
part of the coast. Sail should, therefore, be fully and quickly reduced
on their approach.

Strong winds seldom veer quickly from one quarter of the comjiass
to the otiposite. They generally fail calm, and are succeeded by a wind
in the opposite direction. It is not meant, however, by this observa-
tion that they may not veer to the amount of several points. The N W.
winds seldom or never veer round by north and NE. to east and SK.,
but they do frequently by degrees to the S W., after becoming moderate.
SW. winds seldom veer by the NW. and north to the eastward, but
sometimes by the south to SK. and east. Easterly winds generally
decrease to a calm, and are succeeded by a wind from the opposite
direction.

In the fine westerly winds of summer a fresh breeze will often de-
crease to a light breeze or calm at nigiit, and spring ui) again from the
same quarter on the following morning. Under these ciniumstiiiices
only may a land breeze oft" the north coast be looked for. The same
has been observed oft' the south coast also, but not so(leci«leilly or ex-
tending so far oft" shore. The north land wind may occasioiiaily be

GULF AND HIVKU NT. LAWUKNCK.

I :

ciirriiMl lu^iirly over to tlie Noutli (iouHtjuHt boforii iliiyliKlit, Init t\w N<»utli
itiiitl vvihil Mt^ltloiii I'xteinlH mow tliuii 5 or «{ inilt^H oil", and that very
rarely. llrnU'r tlie Haiiie oirciiiiiMtaiKU'H, that in, with a tlim weather
westerly wind Koinj; down with the nun, a H\V. land breeze will tr«-
<iuently he found biowinj; otV the north eoaHt of AnticoHti at ni^ht
and duriny the earl.\ part of the niorninn. If, however, the weather
be not Mettled fair, and the wind docN not fall with the mm, it will
U8ually prove worse than iweleHH to run u vcBsel close inshore at
id);ht in the hope of a breeze otl' the land.

rtueh is the usual course of the winds in common seasons, in which a
very heavy ^ale of wind will probably not be experienced from May to
October, although close reefed topsail breezes are usually common
«notiKh. Occasionally, however, there are years, the character of which
is decidedly stormy. Gales of wind of considerable strengtii then fol-
low each other in «|uiek succession and from opposite quarters.

Barometer. — When, after a continuance of westerly winds and tine
weather, the barometer has risen nearly to its greatest height, say some
tenths above .JO inches, or begins to fall a little, an easterly wind may
soon be expected. If to this notice given by the barometer be added
a warm hazy atmosphere during the day, and a heavy precipitation of
dew at night, with very bright twinkling stars, or a colored aurora
borealis, the approach of a southerly or an easterly wind is almost cer-
tain. If land be in sight at such a time, and appears much distorted
by teri'estrial refraction, or if vessels in sight have the relative propor-
tion of their hull and sails changed by the mirage, or present double or
treble images, such appearances will render the before probable indi-
cations of the barometer certain. At the commencement the southerly
or easterly wind will probably be light, with tine clear weather; but
this will not last above a few hours if the barometer continues to fall-
On the contrary, the wind will gradually increase, and as itdt)es8othe
8ky will become overcast by degrees until it is comi)letely clouded.
Rain and fog will follow, and continue during the continuance of the
souiiierly or easterly wind, with little intermission until they are dissi-
pated by a fresh breeze from the contrary quarter.

If the fall of the barometer, during the continuance of the southerly
or easterly wind, be very slow, the gale will probably continue, and not
be violent ; if rapid, it will probably be of short duration, and of greater
strength ; at any rate, when the mercury falls towards 20 inches, a
change is certainly at hand, and the gale will, in general, come from the
N W. The strength of this succeeding gale will be in proportion to the
fall of the barometer, and to the strength of the southerly or easterly
gale which preceded it. In such a case there is seldom many hours
interval between the one gale and the other. The southerly or easterly
wind generally dies away to a Cdim, and in a very few hours, and some-
times in a much less time, tjie NW. gale springs up. A heavy cross
sea remains for some time from the previous gale.

JWlJUrumiUJiffi'^i -

It tllO N(»Utll

, tilut very
m w»'iitli«r
zo will fw
ri lit tii^lit
10 woiitlier
Htm, it will
iiiHliore nt

ill which u
tun Miiy to
y coiiiiiioti
IT of wliich
li tliuii t'ol-

I'H.

Ih hikI tliie
t, Hay Home

wiinl may
r be added
pitatlon of
led aurora
diiioHt cer-
I distorted
ive propor-
: double or
bable iiidi-
) Houthorly
ither; but
ue8 to fall-
lues so the
y clouded,
kuce of the

are dissi-

southerly
le, and not
of greater
inches, a
u from the
tion to the
•r easterly
any hours
>r easterly
find some-
savy cross

IIAUOMKTKK. 7

The Imroiin'ttT Homefimes bt<j,'ins to riniuii the interval of the i'lilin
which piect'des the N\V. gale, ur orlu'iH, at its coiiiiiienct'inent ; the fog
and rain <'ease, an«l the wciiln^r becoiiun quite dear, generally in a few
hours, and soinetiiu("< iilinost iinin'Mlirttely. The strength »>f the west-
erly gale is usually gii 'fst soon uUrr its coiiimeiKtemenl, ami dimin-
ishes as the barometer rise-*, veering gnvdually to the west and S\V.
It is worthy of remark that the cireumHtances Just mentioned are ex-
actl.v the reverse (»f those attending the easterly gale. Tlie latrer usu-
ally commeiKies with clear weather and a high barometer, light at llrst
from the south or SK., and gradually increasing as it veers to the east-
Vvard, with a falling barometer.

To return to the westerly gale. If, after it has veered to the 8VV. and
become moderate, the barometer remains steady at a moderate height,
tine weather may be expecttcd. If it remains at a considerable height,
but Htill Huctiiating and unsteady, within certain limits, variable, liut
not heavy, winds and variable weather may be expected. If, on the
contrary, it rises quickly to a great height, a repetition of the south-
erly or easterly gale will not lie improbable. Seasons have been ex-
perienced in which the l)arometer may be said to have lieen no sooner
blown up by one wind than it has been blown down l)y another, and
this stormy alternation to have (iontinned for several month , whilst ia
others there has been scarcely a ilouble-reefed topsail breeze during
the whole summer.

There is in fact so great adit!ereiicein tlie phenomena of the weather
^n different seasons, that it becomes dilllcult to write anything respect-
ing it that shall not be liable to many exceptions. There are, however,
some strongly marked cases of connection between the indications of
the barometer and changes of the winds and weather which have been
subject to few, or almost no exceptions. The (Irst of these cases is that
most common one, of a southerly or an easterly j;ale, with a falling
barometer, being always wet and foggy, and succet-ded by a strong
wind from the opposite quarter, with a rising barometer, and tine
weather.

A second case, not of so frequent occurrence in common seasons, ex-
cepting in spring or early in summer, is the northeasterly wind with a
rising barometer ; which, although it may not l)e at ti rst for a few hours,
will almost always become fine and clear, and end iii tine weather. A
third case may be considered certahi : If the barometer fall suddenly and
greatly at any time, a northerly, and most probably a NW. gale, of
great strength may be confidently expected. It does not follow tiiat it
will be immediate, for it may l)e preceded by a strong gale from SW.
for a few hours, during which the barometer will seldom rise, and event
probably, continue to fall ; but when the S W. gale dies away the north-
erly or NW. will soon succeed, with a rising barometer.

In conclusion it may bo remarked that as, on the one hand, a consid-
erable fall of the barometer may occur without being followed by a

mwii!Ul(U>^,,^4,

GULP AND RIVER ST. LAWRENCE.

Strong wiud, so, on the other, a breeze of considerable strength may
come on without any indication from the barometer; but not anything
that deserves the name of a gale. There has never, within our experi-
ence, occurred a gale so heavy as to be of serious consequence to a good
vessel the approach of which has not been indicated by the barometer.
But it must be remembered that a high barometer in this climate, and
under the circumstances which have been mentioned, is often indicative
of a southerly or an easterly gale. It is remarkable that in the gulf
and estuary of the St. Lawrence a iiigli barometer may be considered
as the forerunner of wet and foggy weather, which usually accompanies
its fall; whilst a low barometer renders it equally probable that dry
weather will ensue, since it as often accompanies its rise. The marine
barometer, therefore, is of the greatest assistance in the navigation of
the gulf and river; and by attending constantly to its state and
changes, with reference to the winds and weather which preceded them,
combined with the indications afforded by the appearance of the sky,
etc., those changes of the wind and weather which are about to take
place may be anticipated with a degree of certainty sufiBcient, in most
cases, to enable a vessel to avoid being caught on a lee-shore or in au
•ausafe anchorage, as well as to regulate her course in anticipation of
the coming change

Currents. — In the main entrance of the gulf, between Newfound-
laud and Cape Breton Island, a current is very often found setting to
the southeastward during westerly winds, or in calm weather ; but east-
erly winds retard it and sometimes cause it to run in the contrary di-
rection. It is frequently deflected to the southward towards Cape Bre-
ton Island by northerly winds, and by the current from the northward
which has entered the gulf through the strait of Belle Isle. But winds,
both present and at a distance, act so powerfully and irregularly on the
rate and direction of the currents and tides in this entrance of the gulf,
as to render it difficult to say anything respecting them that is not sub-
ject to exceptions.

Through Strait of Belle Isle.— The reality of a current inwards
through the strait of Belle Isle is confirmed by the presence of icebergs,
which it transports into the gulf every summer, against the prevailing
SW. winds, frequently carrying them as far as Mecattina, and some-
times to Natashquan, and the neighborhood of the east point of An-
ticosti. It is probable that this is a branch of the great current from
Davis Strait, which is known to run along the coast of Labrador, and to
transport numerous icebergs far to the southward every year. This
current will be mentioned again under the head of the strait of Belle
Isle. Its strength is much increased by a prevalence of NE. winds ; at
such times it runs at the rate of 2 knots through the strait, and for 30
to 40 miles farther to the westward, diminishing gradually in force as
it spreads out in the wider parts of the gulf. Usually, however, its rate
is much less. At times, when SW. winds prevail, it becomes very weak,

at »i>wg e*« szM-v^f^-m

wiia9t^K«eN3?N»aeea)iigaag^<WSai»'iaMtiwW^

CURRENTS.

rength may
ot anything

our experi-
ce to a {food

barometer,
slim ate, and
u indicative

in the gulf •

considered
ccompanies
lie that dry
The marine
vigation of
state and
ieded them,
of the sky,
out to take
)nt, in most
•re or in au
cipation of

Newfound-
I setting to
' ; but east-
iontrary di-
3 Cape Bre-
northward
But winds,
arly on the
of the gulf,
b is not sub-

ut inwards
3f icebergs,

|)revailing
, and some-
>int of Au-
irrent from
,dor, and to
V'ear. This
lit of Belle
. winds ; at

and for 30
in force as
^er, its rate
very weak.

aud it has even been reported that a current has been observed setting
out of the gulf in a contrary direction to the NE. for dayri together»
but this was never observed by us during either of the three seasons
which we passed there. There is, however, no doubt that tliis current
is extremely irregular, as might be expected at the narrow outlet of a
great inland sea, wh'-re winds, both within and without, must of neces-
sity possess great intluence.

After entering the gulf the current sets westward along the north or
Labrador coast, at a distance of 2 or 3 miles from the outer islands,
leaving a narrow space inshore in which the streams of the tides, when
uniniluenced by winds, are tolerably regular. Passing outside of Mis-
tanoque, the islands of the Great Mecaltina and South Makers Ledge,
it pursues a direction given to it by the trending of the coast till it is
turned gradually to the southward by the weak current, which is often
found setting to the eastward between Anticosti aud the north coast
during westerly winds, and which is set off to the southward from
Nathashquan Point. The united streams continue their southern course
at a rate diminishing as they become more widely spread, and which rate
seldom exceeds half a knot; and finally joining the main downward cur-
rent out of the river St. Lawrence, of which an account will be given
immediately, they all pursue a SB. direction towards the main entrance
of the gulf, between Cape Ray and the island of St. Paul. It is this south-
erly current which is felt by vessels crossing from off Bird Hocks to-
wards Anticosti, and which, together with neglecting to allow for the local
attraction of the compass, has been the principal cause of vessels so
often finding themselves unexpectedly on the south coast. Many ship-
wrecks have arisen from this cause near Cape Rosier, Gasp6, Mai Baj',
etc.

Both these currents, viz, that from the northward and the main down-
ward current of the river St. Lawrence, are modified by the tides, but
in a way directly contrary; for the. northern current in through the
Strait of Belle Lsle is accelerated by the flood and checked by the ebb,
whilst the other is accelerated by the ebb and cheeked by the flood tide.
These modifying causes, namely, the tides and winds, give rise to vari-
ous combinations and consequent irregularities in the direction and
strength of these streams, which it is extremely difflcultat ail times to
estimate and allow for correctly.

Main Current of the River. — The current along the south coast
appears to be superficial, at least it was found so in tlie lower i)arts of
the estuary, where observations upon the specific gravity of the water on
the surface aud taken up from different depths prove that the water
of the St. Lawrence and its numeviuis tributary streams was widely
diffused over the estuary. It has also been.observed that the current is
strongest in spring soon after the opening of the navigation, when the
rivers are swelled by the recently dissolved snows of the winter; but
although, generally speaking, there seens no doubt that this current is

sis#-

GULP AND RIVER ST. LAWRENCE.

! I

the tribute of the St. Lawrence ou its way to the ocean vet in H,«
upper part of the estuary, it is not alone and at a 1 times caused by tSe
discharge o the St. Lawrence, but depends also upon pecul arises in
he set ot the tales. Thus, when our observations had co.2i the
tru h ot the report that the current always ran down on the sonth s d!
of the estuary fro,n a few miles below Red Island towrnirtir/s land of

th^; ts tuld be'th""' '' '''' '' ^^^"^*"''^' ''' '' appeareXt;?b^'
tiiat this could be the comparatively fresh water of the St. Lawrence

^Ze'Zyl W "', '"T'^ *'^'' «^*' ^'•- '' -« known tiraHh
^bole I ody a few miles above, from shore to shore, on eituer tide of

t^e flood tm' "^ f ' •" ''' ^'*^'"°*^^ «'-^' --« running u, during
the flood tide. Attention and numerous observations, together wit I an

Z7:::rjtt: r*^"'^^"" ^^^ ^^^•'''^« ^^^^''^ ofTe wZ r

The flood tl ,' "'^"^'' '*^*^^ ^°"^' ^'^'^'^ •« '^^^ «-P'ainec.

The flood tide ascends in a wide channel more than 100 fathoms deen-

Tnd'R TrT?.'' ^''^ comparatively narrow pass formed by a^eenlsl'-
and, Red Islet Reef, and the extensive shoals off the entrant o? the

the' "Zefr:. "' " f ?' '''''''''' ^' ^«» - h^ the shol s of
ffreat a voh, n r 'T""^''^'^ ^^'' ^'^"''^' '^^''^ '« "^^ room forso
IZT U ""^^^^ '" ''^''' ^"♦^ P^*-* of >t is in consequence turned

the RrzadflT r "''f '^"' ^^'""^ ^^""^ ^^'-^ Ked Islet^eef towards
the Raza e Islets, as shown by the arrows in the chart. During the

a^r tltd^ :T '' ?: '*^"^"^^ ««^« -- ^'^ '^^ southward in he

estTary. ' ' '^^ '"'''■'°* ^° *^^' «*^« '« ^^^^y^ down the

There is no upward stream of the tide (excepting so close inshore as

to be useless to ships) all along the south coast from Cape C Ho a

flood":^tl thr "*'" ''''''' " consequence Of the union'of th f eddy
flood with the mam current of the river; and they have, therefore so

c:rir;re2,r"''°'' *" '' -"' ^-"^-^^^

Commencing from a short distance below the Red Islet Reef the enr
rent is there very strong, about 4 knots. It increases n velocity as [t
proceeds to the southeastward, slanting over towards t^e rI^^^^^^^
oft wh.ch Its rate is from 2 to 3 knots. It runs strongly ak.ng the
northern edge of the bank of soundings oft" the south coast^ upon which
esi^ciaily ,n spring tides, a weak stream of flood will be fouml flowing

marked b> a strong ripple. Prom Father Point to Oane Gh^tta fwl
rate of the <lownward current varies from J to H lots, aXrS to ll
tide, <l.reotiou.s of the winds, and the seasL of the year. '

the sZ'h thl?M' ''^V''''''''^- r""«down on both sides, strongeron
the south than the uorth coast, and weakest in the middle of the estuarv
It IS deflected, or turned off to the southward, by the po nts of MUIe
Vaches, Bersimis, Manicouagan, and Point de Monts, and by the ebb
•ng streauis of the large rivers between them, a cir umstance ^hich

msamnisim

SSSKSasges^

CURRENTS.

I, yot, in the
aiised by the
iuliarities in
nfirmed the
e south side
the island of
1 impossible
t. Lawrence
vn that the
tuer tide of
: up during
ther with an
I water, dis-
plained,
horns deep;
r Green Isl-
»nce of the
[loalness of
room for so
ince turned
Jef towards
During the
rard in the
down the

inshore as
j^asptS to a
this eddy
erefore, so
irace their

if, the cur-
>city as it
:ade Islets
along the
>on which,
id flowing
is usually
hatte, the
iog to the

Tongeron
B estuary.
I of Mille
the ebb-
ce which

should be carefully attended to by vessils coining up with a northerly
wind; as they will infallibl be set over to the southward upon a lee
shore, if they do not mak the necessary allowance by keeping their
wind well over to the northward.

During the flood tide this stream still continues to run down outside
the bank of soundings off the south coast, although with diminished ve-
locity, and it is lelt about halfway towards north shore. In the middle
of the estuary there is usually slack water, whilst along the north coast
the stream of flood is regular in its recurrence, increasing in force as
we ascend the estuary. The strength of the stream of flood is greatest
inshore, and diminishes as we proceed over to the southward, till at the
distance of about 9 miles it becomes imperceptible. These diftereuces
in the strength and direction of the streams produce strong ripples in
various parts of the estuary, but their position varies with the different
times of tide, and perhaps from other causes, so that they can not safely
be trustod for any guidance to the seamen.

Kouud Point de Monts there is little or no stream of flood, excepting
very close inshore ; the downward current is constant, or nearly so,
off" that point and it requires a fast-sailing vessel to beat round it
against a westerly wind. Point de Monts turns this current over to the
SE., at a rate varying from one to 2 knots, so that a vessel having a west
wind, and standing over to the southward on the starboard tack, will
be carried towards the south coast at a rapid rate, having the current
on her weather quarter ; during her board back to the northward she
will be retarded, the current being then directly opposed to her course.
When sailing at the rate of 4 knots it will usually require only about
half the time to go from near Point de Monts over to the south coast
that it will take to return from the latter to the former. This is a most
important circumstance, which it is necessary to carefully guard against
when beating up the estuary in this part during dark nights, and,
especially, in foggy weather.

Below Point de Monts the current is no longer felt near the north
coast, nor, indeed, anywhere to the northward of a line joining Point
de Monts and Anticosti. It is confined to the neighborhood of the
south coast, which it follows in its curve to the southward, running
strongly past Cape Gaspe, Flat Island, and Bonaventure Island ; whence
curving gradually to the south and SE, it continues its course to-
wards the entrance of the gulf, with a rate very much lessened in
consequence of the great space over which it is now spread. The usual
breadth of this stream from Magdalen River to Cape Gasp6 is 9 or 12
miles ; but this we believe is not uniform.

When SW. winds prevail it appears that this current, or a branch
of it, is driven over from the vicinity of Magdalen River towards Anti-
costi ; part of the stream running round the west point of that island sets
across nearly towards Large Island (one of the Mingan Islands), whence
turning gradually down outside the Mingan and Esquimaux Islands,

I iiii i ii 'tl l T i B i fiajg i igiBTiM| i BrHi^< u<« » .i Bfr.:- g^^>a- ffh rt

GULF AND RIVER ST. LAWRENCE.

^afiiiiaE^

and along the north coast, it sweeps round the cnrve to the westward
of Natasliqnan Point, and is turned off to the southward, as has been
already mentioned. The other part sweeps round the hirge curve,
or bay, between the west and 8W. points of Anticosti, and is turned
off to the southward by the latter point, frequently causing a great
ripple off it, which has been mistaken for breakers on a much more
extensive reef than exists tht^re. The rate of this current has been
noted, off different parts of the south coast between Cajjos Chatte and
Gaspe, in the months of June, July, August, aud September, and in
different years, and scarcely ever found the same. It varied between one
and '2 knots in westerly winds. It was weaker, often nearly insensible,
In easterly winds ; and in one instance, off Mont Louis Kiver, in a calm
which was followed by a strong breeze from the eastward, it could not
be perceived.

Vessels beating up the St. Lawrence against westerly winds usually
experience little difficulty in making good way to windward, after hav-
ing weathered the west point of Anticosti and arrived on the north
coast ; because there is seldom any current on that side, and the tides,
although weak, are tolerably regular. It is in general easy to beat from
the Seven Islands to Point de Monts, lor there the stream of flood is
stronger than the ebb ; the latter, as well as the current, being turned
off to the southward by the point. There seems at times also to be an
eddy current there, sweeping round the great bay or curve between the
above-named points. It sets off from about Egg Islet to the southward ;
and is the probable cause why vessels, which shape a direct course for
Point de Monts with a leading NW. wind off the land at night, so often
find themselves obliged to haul up for or unable to fetch the light.

Any further remarks respecting the tides and currents will be of a
more lo(!al nature, and will, therefore, be best given where the particu-
lar places or parts of the coast are described. The object here was to
give a condensed view of the princi|)al streams wliich mainly affect a
vessel ill her voyage either up or down through the gulf anil estuary.

Directions across the Oulf.— Lights.— All the lights in the gulf
and river St, Lawrence are lighted on the 1st April and extinguished
on 2()th December, except the lights on Bird Kock aud St. Paul Is-
land, which are exhibited until 31st December.

All the lightshii)s in the river St. Lawrence below Quebec leave
Quebec each spring for their stations as early as ice will permit.

Tlie Manicouagan lightship leases her station for winter quarters on
the lOth, and ti»e Eed Island lightship on the 15th of November an-
nually.

All the gas buoys in the river St. Lawrence will be set out as soon
as possible after the lUh of May each spring, and taken u|) as soon as
convenient after the 10th of November, when they will be replaced by
wooden can buoys.

All buoys in the river St. Lawrence below Quebec will be removed

CURRENTS — DIRECTIONS.

10 westward
a8 has been
large curve,
itl is turned
ing a great
much mure
It has been
Chatte and
ber, and iu
l)etween one
' insensible,
ir, in a calm
it couhl not

n<ls usually
, after hav-
1 the north
:1 the tides,
beat from
of flood is
)ing turned
so to be an
>etween the
southward;
; course for
ht, so often
) light,
ill be of a
he particn- '
ere was to
ly affect a
id estuary,
in the gulf
tiiiguished
t. Paul Is-

ebec leave
mit.

uarters on
ember an-

>ut as soon
as soon as
placed by

e removed

after the 14th of November, excepting five, viz: Those replacing the gas
buoys at each end of the Beaujeu Bank and at the Channel Patch, one
at the west end of Middle Bank and one at St. Roch, East Point, in the
Traverse, wliich will be left, weather permitting, until the last ocean
vessel has passed out.

Vessels bound to any of the ports in the Gulf of St. Lawrence should
endeavor to make St. Paul Island, which, being of considerable elevation
and bold all around, may with care and a good lookout, be made at night,
or even in fogs, unless the former be very dark or the lattei' very thick.

Caution.— In a[>proaching St. Paul from the SK. with northerly
winds, the current mentioned at page 8 as at times coming from the
northward and setting towards the shore of Cape Breton, should be
guarded against by attending to the soundings on the bank, which
extend 7 or 8 leagues off Scatari Island, and off the eastern coast of
Cape Breton Island as far northward as Ingouish, beyond which the
depth is too great to afford any guidance. The lights, together with
the soundings, afford abundant guidance to vessels passing the eastern
extremity of Cape Breton Island. The south coast of Newfoundland,
eastward of Cape Ray, is broken, rocky, and dangerous. The tides and
currents, being influenced by the winds, are irregular, whilst all south-
erly and easterly winds, and often also southwesterly winds, bring a
thick fog, which is most dense near the lee shore. On these accounts
this coast should not be approached, excepting with a decided north-
erly wind and clear weather.

St. Paul to Bird Rocks and Magdalen Islands.— After having
passed St. Paul Island vessels bound to Canada should endeavor, if
the weather be clear, to make the Bird Rocks ; Great Bird Rock, the
largest or southeasternmost, boars from the north point of St. Paul N.
48° W. 55 miles.

There is a deep channel between St. Paul and the bank on which
Magdalen Islands are situated.

Following the eastern edge of the Magdalen Bank to the northward,
inclining gradually to the NW., regular soundings extend from 28 to
35 fathoms over sand, stones, and broken shells, the latter depth being
where Great Bird Rock bears west, and when the same rock bears S.
45° W., distant Vih miles, there will be 50 fathoms over fine sand on the
edge of the bank, shoaling gradually in to 24 fathoms within one mile
of the rocks. In thick weather, which almost always accompanies east-
erly and southerly winds, this bank is an excellent guide up to Bird
Bocks, but under such circumstances if the light can not be seen it will
be safer to run along the northern edge of the bank, taking care not to
come into less than 40 fathoms than to attempt to make the rocks.
When well past them by the reckoning a course can be shaped up the
gulf.

In northerly winds the weather is usually clear ; and, if the vessel be
far enough to windward, it will be advisable to stand to the westward and

' TMi^sms i Mwt J lst ■nun— t i M i

GULP AND RIVER ST. LAWRENCE.

endeavor to make Entry Island, taking care to avoid Doyle Reef and
tlie sandy spit off the east end of Magdalen Islands by not approaching
tlio islands in that part nearer than the depth of 20 fathoms. Under
the lee of these islands a smooth sea will be found, sntticient guid-
ance by the soundings, and good shelter and excellent anchorage in
Pleasant Bay.

Another advantage of following this course arises from the circum.
stance that the winds generally veer to the SW. ; so that, if a vessel
has i)a.sse(l to leeward of Magdalen Islands with northerly or NW.
winds on the starboard tack, the succeeding SW. wind will enable her
to stand on the opposite tack towards Cape Gasped.

Bird Rocks to Anticosti Island. — In making this part of the voy.
age up the gulf, the frequent current from the northward, mentioned in
page 1>, should be considered, and the lead should be frequently hove.
By consulting the chart it will be seen that there are soundings to be
obtained nearly all the way upon, aud to southward of, a line joining
Bird Rocks and Cape Gaspe, whilst a few miles to the northward of that
line tiiere is no bottom with 80 fathoms of line.

With a fair wind the object should be to make the SW. point of An-
ticosti marked by a remlinnn light; and, with westerly winds, any part
of the coast of that island which can be attained. The fixed light on
Heath Point, at the east end of that island, will render it easy to make
the east end of the island at night, if the weather be clear; and, if the
weather be thick, the bank of soundings, which extends off it 28 miles
to the southeastward, may serve to determine the vessel's position by
the lead. At the distance from the island above named the depth is C2
fathoms, shoaling gradually in towards the island.

Passage North of Anticosti.— In the event of a vessel being near
the eastern extremity of Anticosti, and having succeeded in making
East Cape, or the light on Heath Point, with a SW. wind, it will often
be preferable to proceed to the northward of the island, where there is
a good channel, rather than to tack aud stand back to the southward
and eastward. Under the lee of Anticosti, she will in this case have a
smooth sea, and often also clear weather, whilst there is a heavy swell
and frequently a thick fog to windward of it. She will, moreover,
avoid the current out of the St. Lawrence, which runs constantly with
westerly winds between the south coast and Anticosti ; aud thus be
able at all times to make way to the westward in moderate weather.
At night, or in foggy weather, the bank of soundings off the north
coast, and farther westward the banks off Mingau Islands, will safely
guide her, even although the land should not be visible.

All the way from Natashquan Point to the river St. John, westward
of Mingan Islands, there are banks of sand, gravel, broker, ,0'ells, and
bits of coral extending off the coast many miles. Off Mi.igan Islands
these banks extend halfway across to Anticosti. The depth of water
varies upon them ; to the eastward, or below Mingan Islands, it is in

DIRECTIONS.

e Beef and
.pproacliiiig
ns. Under
iuient giiid-
icborage iu

;Uo circiiiu.

if a vessel
ly or NW.

enable her

of the voy.
entioiied in
lently liove.
dings to be
ine Joining
rard of tbat

int of An-
8, any part
ed liglit on
sy to make
and, if the
it 28 miles
►osition by
depth is G2

being near
in making
; will often
jre there is
southward
sase have a
leavy swell

moreover,
;antly with
id thus be
;e weather.

the north
will safely

westward
.O'ells, and
an Islands
1 of water
is, it is in

general between 30 and 50 fathoms; but in sonie few places it exceeds
the latter depth, whilst in others there is as little as 19 fathoms. I'ro-
cceding westward the depths gradually decrease to CO fathoms otV the
north point, where they become irregular tor a few miles, varying from
50 to 70 fathoms with occasional rocky bottom, and then deepen again,
with mud bottom, farther to the westward.

In all this deep-water channel, with the single exception which has
been stated, the bottom is, for the most part, of blue mud. vSuch a re-
markable difference in the nature of the bottom, as well as in the depth
of water, renders it comparatively easy to take a vessel throngli this
channel at night or in foggy weather. But in order to effect this with
safety the vessel should be furnished with Massey's patent sounding
machine .;'<'! lead, or other similar instrument, which must be (reely
used as she runs along the southern edge of the banks of sand, gravel,
and shells, sheering occasionally to the southward into the deep water
and muddy bottom to make sure of not getting too far to tiie north-
ward.

The reefs off St. Genevieve and Hunting Islands are very dangerous,
for there are some deep-water soundings, between 50 and 70 fathoms
inside the outer banks, which might lead to a mistake if care were not
taken to keep on the southern edge of the outer banks.

Proceeding westward, the channel contracts gradually to the nar-
rowest part, which is between the reefs off the north point of Anticosti
and oft" Mingan Islands, where it is 13i miles wide. To i)as8 this safely
at night or in foggy weather, it is necessary that the lead should be
kept constantly going as the vessel runs along the southern edge of the
bank oft" the Mingan Islands, and she should not be allowed to go to
the northward into less than 30 fathoms of water.

If the vessel should be met by a westerly wind, down the channel, it
will be attended with clear weather, and the white cliffs of Anticosti,
which extend from the east point westward to opposite St. Genevieve,
will easily be seen. A vessel may stand in without fear to within a mile
or two of this part of the coast, which, with the exception of the reefs
oft' Fox Bay, is bold and free from danger. Farther westward the coast
is low and shelving, and reefs extend further off. In the board to
the northward at night, the sounding oa the banks will show when to
tack.

Currents. — It has been remarked already (page 11) that, in westerly
winds, there is a weak current down this channel, but it is not constant
and its rate seldom exceeds half a knot. Sometimes it is imperceptible
during the flood tide and runs even the other way on the approach of
easterly winds. Vessels, however, should be aware that on arriving off
the north point of Anticosti with a west or SVV. wind this current will
almost always be found setting to the NE., being turned off' into that
direction by the west end of the island. Couflued within a compara-
tively narrow channel, it is here stronger than elsewhere, running iu

i»

• — ^u^Vmh;'^

•"

GULF AND RIVER ST. LAWRENCE.

the ebb tide, about a knot, and in the Hood tide, half a icaot in the
offiug.

Passage South of AnticostL — Vessels meeting with a westerly
wind in the soutli citannel Hhould stand over towards the island of An-
ticosti and make boards, off and on, of 9 or 12 miles, to avoid the cur-
rent out of tlie St. Lawrence. In beating between Oormorant Point
and Soutli Point, off whicli there is a dangerous reef, keep the ligbt-
houMc on Heath Point open of Oormorant Point.

Caution. — In moderate weather a vessel will generally gain ground
to windward all along the south coast of Anticosti, but care should be
taken to avoid being becalmed, near the shore between the SW. and
West Points, where both the swell and current set iusliore, and where,
the bottom bei?ig of clean flat limestone, an anchor wili not hold. It
is by no means uncommon off this part of the coast for the flue weather
westerly breeze of summer to die away suddenly to a calm, so that a
vessel beating here should stand off shore on the ftrat appearance of a
decrease of wind to avoid being driven on shore.

Having made the SW. Point, and being 4 or 6 miles off it, with a
fair wind, a course should be steered along the coast, so as to pass 8 or
10 miles to the southward and westward of Cape Henry and West Point.
N. 08'3 W. will be a safe course at night or in thick weather, when the
lead should be hove every hiilf hour. With this precaution there is no
danger of being too near the coast, even when the lights can not be
seen, since there are soundings in less than 40 fathoms, at a distance
varying from 5 to 3 miles off shore all the way from SW. Point to the
west end of the island.

Anticosti to Point de Monts. — When the vessel has arrived off
the West Point of Anticosti, with a fair wind still continuing, a course
should be steered well to the northward, especially with northerly winds,
say for about Egg Island. She will thus avoid the strength of the cur-
rent and the possibility of being set over too near the south shore by its
acting on her starboard- bow. When she has run about halfway across
she should haul more to the southward so as to insure clearing Point de
Monts.

Caution.— If the weather be thick, as it commonly is, with a fair wind
for running up, great caution is necessary. In such circumstances,
after having run within about 15 miles of Point de Monts by the reck-
oning, sail should be reduced, so as to have the vessel under complete
command, and she should be rounded to, and a good deep cast with
Massey's patent lead obtained, so as to insure that she is not to the
northeastward of the point, and this should be repeated every half hour,
until the light be seen, the fog gun heard, or until it is certain that it
is past.

If the vessel be to the northeastward of Trinity Bay, soundings will
be obtained in less than 60 fathoms, from 4 to 6 miles off shore. Di-
rectly off Trinity Bay, there is the same depth 3 miles off shore ; whilst

DIRECTIONS.

^DOt ill the

a westerly
laud of Au-
oid the cur-
>raiit Point
p the light-

aiii gronad
) should be
e SW. and
and where,
9t hold. It
Ino weather
I, 80 that a
mrance of a

f it, with a
to pass 8 or
West Poiut.
r, when the

there is no
can not be

a distance
?oiut to the

arrived oflF
ag, a course
lierly winds,
1 of the cur-
shore by its
f way across
ng Point de

ii a fair wind
Bumstauces,
by the reck-
er complete
) cast with
not to the
•y half hour,
'tain that it

ndings will

shore. Di-

lore ; whilst

at the same distance oft' Point de .Moats, there is no bottom at 100 fath-
cms. If the distance to Point de Monts has been run by the rockoning
without finding bottom at 70 fathoms, it will be almost c«»rtrti: at the
vessel is not to the northward; but still, as the effects of currents can
not be exactly calculate<l and reckonings are liable to error, it will be
prudent to shape a course well to the southward of the i>oint, till there
remains no doubt of its having been passed.

In making the light on Poiut de Monts, renuMubtT that it is not on
the extremity of the point, but has been placed (it is thought very im-
properly) 14 miles to the northeastward, along the coast towards Trinity
Bay.

The foregoing remarks apply where the object is to nmke the light-
house, or light, on Poiut de Monts, which should always be attempted
where there is any ehaiice of success, because it is extreniely desirable
to obtain a fresh departure before running ui) the comparatively nar-
row estuary. But if. the weather be so thick as to leave no reasonable
hope of succeeding, or if the wind be from the southward, a (lourse
should be steered more to the southward, so as to pass well clear of the
point.

Working to Windward.— Vessels beating up against westerly
winds should stand over to the northward, as soon as they can weather
Anticosti, unless the i)arometer, or other indications, render it probable
that the wind will veer to the southward, louring the Hood tides, make
short boards off" ami on the north coast, to take advantage of it, for it
runs strongest inshore. During the el)b, keep farther oil' the land, for
that tide svlso runs strongest near the shore. The tides, in general, are
weak along this coast, and a vessel will always make way to windward
in moderate weather.

From the Seven Islands to Point de Monts is, in general, the easiest
part of the passage, for the westerly wind, which, in this i>art, is the
most common, is oft' the land, so that a vessel can frequently fetch up
to Point de Monts in smooth water, particularly at night, when the wind
in tine weather generally veers a point or two to the northward. She
will also have the beneftt of the flood tide, whilst the ebb, being turned
oft' by Poiut de Monts, is scarely felt.

If it blow fresh, and the flood be nearly done on arriving near Point
de Monts, there will be no use attempting to beat roun<l it till next tide,
and then only in fine weather. In this case. Trinity Bay, where with
westerly winds is a good anchorage with moderate depth of water, good
ground, and plenty of room to get under way.

Point de Monts to Bicquette Island. — Prom the south extremity
of Point de Monts, the lighthouse on the north side of Bicquette Island
bears S. 50° VV. 80 miles, and Manicou«gan lightvessel S. Gio VV. 38
miles ; but as this great shoal extends towards English Bay, its NE. end
is only 28 miles distant from Point de Monts.
5489 2

OULF AND RIVKR 8T. LAWRENCK.

Currents.— After tukiiig adopartmo from Point de Monts, the course

to bo Htweri'tl must viiry umU'r difturout circumstances of wind and tide.

Tlic downward current is not only turned oil' to tiio soutliward by I'oint

de Monts, but tlie Mauicoua(jaii and Bersimis Points also protluce tlie

same effect, althoufjii in a less degree, during llio ebbtide; to wliicli

must be added tlie streams out of the large rivers ManicouaRan, Outiirde*

and Hersimis. During the Hood tide, the streams out of these rivers

cease, the general current is checked in the ottlng, whilst in-shore,

withiu a few miles of the north coast, a stream of flood will be found.

A vessel taking her departure fronj Point de Monts with a whole ebb

tide before her is therefore very differently circumstanced from one

which does the same at the commencement of the flood, and must

reckon ui)ou being set over towards the south coast much faster in the

former than in the latter case.

Directions will first be given for a fair wind, and afterwards for beat-
ing winds.

Directions up the Estuary. — Having made the light on Point de
Monts, and being 3 or 4 miles oft' it to the southward, nitb the nsual
easterly winds, nearly or right up the estuary, steer S. .''ii.^ W. until
nearly abreast the Manicouagan light vessel, then keep half a point
more to the southward, S. 47° W. These are safe courses with either
ebb or flood, and if the vessel has left Point de Monts at or near the
commencement of the ebb tide, will usually bring her into soundings
oft" Metis, where .lO fathoms over sandy bottom will be found 3 miles oft'
shore, and 50 fathoms 5 miles oft' shore, and on the edge of the bank.

If, on the contrar/, the vessel has left J';:ut da Monts early on the
flood, she will probably be farther to the northward ; we say, probably,
because the strength of the current is too uncertain to allow of saying
that she positively will be so. However, the degree of uncertainty,
which the irregular rate of current gives rise to, must be met by the
use of the lead. If, therefore, the weather be thick, and the land not
seen, round-to in time, i)articularly if the vessel has had the ebb tide
against her, and get a cast of the lead, to make sure that she has not
been set too near the south coast.

If no bottom be found at 60 fathoms, the S. 47° W. course may be
continued until the vessel is up as high as Metis by the reckoning, then
let soundings again be tried for, and if still without finding bottom
haul in gradually to the southward, under easy sail, and with the deep-
sea lead going, ao as to endeavor to strike soundings on the bank oft'
Father Point, which may be accomplished safely, since the bank in that
part extends several miles oft' shore.

To Pass Bicquette Island. — The revolving light on Bicquette Island
will now be distant about 15 miles to the SW., and visible in clear
weather ; but if it be foggy, and the light not seen, proceed as follows,
attending to the fog whistle: Run along the northern edge of the bank
of soundings, with the lead going, taking particular care not to go to

DIHECTIONH — PILOTS.

•f-'rait^' ■ wwi^

s, the (lourne
iiuliin*! tide,
ird by I'oiiit

prudiK'u the
le; to wliich
aii,Oiitiir(le>

tliese rivers
il8t iii-Hhore,
ill be t'oiiiid.

a whol*-! ebb
od IVuiii one
>d, and inuHt

faster in the

irds for beat-
on Point de
ith the usual
.'io-^ w. until
half a point
38 with either
It or near the
ito soundings
nd 3 miles off
)f the bank.

early on the
lay, probably,
low of saying
' uncertainty,
(i met by the
the land not
the ebb tide
,t she has not

jourse may be
ickoning, then
iiding bottom
ivitli the deep-
1 the bank off
a bank in that

jquette Island
isible in clear
ted as follows,
^e of the bank
e not to go to

the southward into less tlian 30 fathoms. When it is judged that the
vessel is approaching near Hicquetto, having passed Marnaby ishind,
haul out a little to the northward until siie is out of soundings, anil
then steer S. fiP VV., still heaving the lead, and having tiie vessel under
moderate sail for the purpose of getting bottom, till certain that she is
well above the NW. reef of Biccpiette. If soundings are striuik at all,
whilst running jiast this dangerous island, on which many vessels have
been wrecked, the vessel must be hauled off" immediately to the north-
ward out of soundings, and then steer as before. Two miles north of
Blccpiette there are 30 fathoms, and only 1\ miles north of the NW.
reef there is the same depth, with sandy bottom. Farther otf no bottom
will be found at fiO or «0 fatlioms. lioth the island and reef are bold to
the northward, having 12 fathoms close to them.

When it is quite certain the vessel is past Hicquette and its reefs,
haul in to the southward by degrees, till the edge of the bank is gained
again, and keep it up to Green Island reef.

It would not be prudent for vessels, without a pilot, to attempt run-
ning inside of Bic Island in foggy weather, unless well acquainted. If,
however, it be necessary to do so, for 'the purpose of anchoring, see
directions for that island.

Pilots. — Pilots for the St. Lawrence cruise in the^r schooners in the
entrance of the river, and during the day these vessels carry a white
and red ilag (upper half white, lower half red) ; by night two lights
vertically, the upper light white, the lower re<l. Their cruising ground
is comprised in four stations, namely. Pilot Station No. 1, between Fa.
ther Point and Barnaby Island on the south, and Jeremy Islands and
Cape Colombier on the north ; Pilot Station No. 2, between Barnaby
Island and Bic Island on the south, and Cape Colombier and Port Neufr
on the north ; Pilot Station No. 3, between Bic Island and the Itazades
on the south, and Port Neuf and the Escoumains Islands on the north ;
Pilot Station No. 4, between Kazades and Green Island.

Many of the pilots live on Father Point.

In a foggy night a tolerably correct opinion may be formed whether
the vessel be up to Father Point or not, for an inspection of the chart
will show that the soundings shoal more gradually to the southward
there than they do farther to the eastward. And if the vessel be hove
to, in 10 or 11 fathoms, low water, with her head off" shore, a gun or
two will sometimes bring oft' a pilot.

From Point de Monts with Southerly Winds.— We have hith-
erto been speaking of the case when vessels are running up with east,
erly winds and thick weather ; but a second case is when the wind is
from the southward ; then the direct course, S. 50° W., may be steered,
if the vessel be, as before, close off Point de Monts, or S. 56<^ W. if she
be nearer the south coast ; allowing still for the set of the current to the
southward, according to the tide, and sounding in time if the land be
not in sight. Whenever the weather is foggy, and the land can not be

!;i

'r .'

iJ '

, '•■,

t> 1 '

S»

GULF AND KIVKU 8T. LAWKKNCE.

seen, t\w oUJwit should alwiiyH h« to Htriko tlio bunk of houiuUiiks along
tlio Noiitli <!oiiHt about M««tiM, or Katlier Point at farthoMt, and then fol-
low it as a jjiiitle to the w«Htwanl.

With Northerly Winds.— A tliinl inwo, of fiJMiuent occnrrcnce in
th« autiuiui, is winMi tliore is a fnssh noithorly wind. Tliii weather is
then invariiil)ly elear, and, aH tlie land can l»e neen, there is no danger
of getting on shore witli a good look out; but tlie Htrengtii of llie cur-
rent to tlte Hoiitliwanl in lucreaHed by thin wind, and therefore the v««-
sel niUMt be kept well to the northward, to prevent l>eing set over to the
lee HJiore, being in consecpience ol»iigo<l to tack (upon tlie wind veering
a point or two to the westward) an<l Htand all the way bacjk again.

Suppo-sing the veMsel to be in the .same position as before, ,i or 4 miles
to the s<»ntiiward of Point de .Moiits, she may fearlessly steer 8.05^ VV.
for the first 'JO miles, or as long as tlie light is seen. Take tlie bearing
of the light every half hour, and lay it down on tlie chart, in order that
the effect of the current may be Been ; take care not to bring the light
to bear to the eastward of N. n;P B,, as in that case the vessel would be
set too near Manicouagan Shoals. Abreast Manicouagan, if the light-
vessel should be out of positi(ni, luff up in the wind, and get a deep cast
of the lead, for although these shoals are steep-to on their east side,
and also to the westward of Manicouagan Point, yet there are soundings
off' their south point. When Manicouagan Point bears N. 25° VV. the
depths will be from 50 to (50 fathoms, at the distancj; of 5^ miles off
shore, and from 30 to 40 fathoms at 4 miles oil' shore, the bottom being
of very tine sand. In the first case, she will bo li^ miles off' the south
point of the shoals, and in the latter case; only 1^ miles.

When past these dangerous and extensive shoals, the south point of
which extends 2^ miles off a low point of the same name, which can
seldom be clearly distinguished at night in consequence of the higher
land behind it, a vessel may haul up well under the north shore, coming
no nearer than 3 miles, and taking care to avoid the shoal off Bersimis
Point, which extends nearly li miles off a low point, also difficult to be
seen at night.

After passing Mille Vaches Point the north coast is bold and without
anchorage all the way to within 3 miles of the Saguenay River.

In running up to Green Island, after passing the NW. reef of Bic-
quette, a S. 4!)<^ W. course will, in general, take a vessel along the edgeof
the bank as far as Razades islets ; but above those islets both flood and
ebb .set to the SE., and render it necessary to steer more to the west-
ward, with a scant northerly wind. But the lead and a reference to the
soundings in the chart are the only sure guides. With an easterly
wind the fog will seldom be so thick as to prevent either the Kazades,
Basque, or Apple islands from being seen in the daytime. They may
be safely ai>proached by the lead, and an attempt should be made to
make the two last, especially Ai)ple Island, which is bold-toon the north
side, in order that the position of the vessel may be exactly ascer-

'*'WWa!»5K>JE»Sfl«B.«

, ,MawiMMwa > |JWIBMi ' .aWB«P '

DIKIU 'TION8.

idiiiKa liloiig
kiul then t'ol-

(•(Mirreiicp In
Li weather Is
H no (laiiitur
li of the liiir-
fort' tlio v««-
itnvtT to tlio
iviiul vooring
V a^aiii.
, 3 or 4 miles
KT 8. 06^ VV.
i tlie bearing
ill onl«'r tlirtt
liiiK tlie liRlit
Hsel would be
I, if the li^'ht-
I't a ileep (iast
eir east side,
iro soiindingB
N. 2'>° W. the
f 5A miles off
bottom being
off the south

Houth j)ointof

le, which can

of the hijjher

bore, coming

off Bersimis

lilHcult to be

and withoat
iiver.

reef of Bic-
(ug theedgoof
both tlood and
re to the west-
ference to the
h an easterly

the Kazades,
e. They may
Id be made to
on the north
exactly ascer-

rained before hauling out into det^p water for the luirpose of eloaring
the ilnngeroiiH (heen Islaiiil Iteef. In the eireuniHtances we are hu|)>
posing, of an easterly wind with fog in the daytime, it is much nxue
safe to attempt to make Apple Island than the lighthouse, since a vessel
can appro;i<-li within less than 4(H) yards of the former, but would be
ashore befun -the saw the latter if the fog were thick, since the reef
exteiuls nearly 1^ miles to the northeastward of it.

Having su<;ceeded in making Apple Island, the vohscI may be sheered
out to the eilge of the bank of soundings, and us the distance is short,
't is easy tojudge when she is coming near the ;vef, taking, of course,
^he tide into account, whether it be Hood or ebb, ami keeping the lead
constantly going. Then, if the lighthouse be not seen, sheer out to the
northward into more than .'tU fatlioms water, and shape a course up to>
wards the Brandy Pots, according to the tide.

If the lighthouse be seen, or the light at night, there is still less diill-
culty ill avoiding the reef and regulating the (!ourse afterwards, pro-
vided the chart be consulted, the lead used, and the tide considered.

But Green Island Heef is extremely dangerous, and is rendered
doubly so by the strong tides whi<th set upon it, and which produce
breaking ripples that try the nerves of strangers during a dark night
or foggy weather. Therefore, in a strong easterly gale, dark night, fog,
or snow so thick that there is little chance of seeing the light, the at-
tempt to run through between Ked and Green islands will be attended
with great risk, especially during the ebb tide, which, coming from be-
tween Hare Island Keef and Bed Islet, sets over towards the Green
Island Keef at the rate of 5 knots. It requires an experienced ])ilot to
take a vessel safely through this dangerous jiassnge under these circum-
stances; it will therefore be prudent, in the case of a vessel approach-
ing fiic, in such weather, towards the close of the day and without a
pilot, rather to heave to, or stand on and off the south bank, than run
this risk, although there may be sonie danger in so doing from other ves-
sels running up.

If the soundings about Bic be well known, or that island or Bicquette
has been seen the safest pian would be to run under the lee and anchor
to the westward of them in from 8 to 10 fathoms low water (page 119),
where the holding ground in excellent and the vessel would ride in
safety till daylight. Even as far as G or 7 miles to the westward of these
islands, in from 12 to 13 fathovns at low water, the Oulnare rode out a
heavy breeze from the eastward, the sea, although considerable, being
nothiu,<; in comparison with that which was running at the same time
in the deep water outside of her and oft" the bank.

Working from Point de Monts to Green Island, against westerly
winds, which are almost always accompanied with clear weather, there
is little difficulty, with the assistance of the charts, other than that
which arises from the set of the tides and currents.

It requires a tolerably good sailing vessel and a flood tide to beat

GULF AND KIVER ST. LAWRENCE.

i i

past Point de Monts against a foul wind, but short boards round the
point and along the north coast up to Cape St. Nicholas will most read-
ily succeed. It is not, however, advisable to keep this shore close aboard
mnch farther to the westward, lest the wind should tall to a calm, for
there is a strong indraught towards the mouth of Manicouagan Kiver
during the flood tide; and if an easterly wind should chance to spring
up, after the vessel had been drifted in near the mouth of Englis:! Bay,
it might be difficult to beat out, or to weather the eastern side of the
Manicouagan Shoals. The light on Point de Monts can not be seen on
any bearing to the southward of N. 07° E., being intercepted by the
high land to the westward of it ; and when it disappears a vessel oft
Godbout River will be only one mile from the bar, or off Cape St.
Nicholas little more than 2 miles off shore ; so that it is a safe rule, in
standing in towards the coast at night, to tack as soon as the light

bears N. 60° E.

Whpn the ebb makes, stretch over to the southward into the middle
of the estuary, where that tide is less strong than near either shore,
but do not go farther to the southward, and be back again at the north
coast at the return of flood.

The best time to get past Point de Monts, when fine weather and
westerly winds prevail, is at night, or in the first hours of the morning,
for then vessels are often assisted by a northerly land wind. If it has
blown fresh from the westward during the preceding day a heavy head
sea may be expected off the pitch of tha point ; the flood from along the
land in the direction of the Seven Islands meeting the downward cur-
rent off the point assists in causing this.

If, after passing Point de Monts in the morning, with a northerly land
wind, there are signs of itS dying away, or veering to the westward as
the day advances, continue the board to the southward and westward,
instead of tacking to keep the north land on board, as directed when
the wind is settled right down ; for the land wind of the night will pro-
bably be succeeded by the flne-weather day wind, which usually be-
comes a steady breeze about 9 a. m., after commencing at SW., and
thus affords an advantageous board towards the north coast.

In the fine weather of the summer the wind will probably veer by
degrees during the day back to west, thus ottering another good board
to the south westward. Pilots and others, who are experienced in read-
ing the indications of the winds and weather, frequently gain more
ground to the westward by calculating upon these probable changes of
the wind than by keeping on the north shore out of the current

With the exception of the low points of Manicouagan, Bersimis, and
Mille Vaches, the land can in general be plainly seen at night during
the continuance of westerly winds ; and where its features are suifi-
ciently remarkable, there will be little difficulty in making it out.
Mount Camille, especially being an isolated mountain, 2,036 feet above
high-water matk, can easily be distinguished, as well as the summit of

mimeiiM>.i.%jmi)mmmummM m

l^S^"

.•as^i:ivss^ft'iTf-.te'.

DIRECTIONS.

rds round the
vill most read-
•e close aboard

to a calm, for
jouagan Kiver
ance to spring
t English Bay,
5rn side of the
not be seen on
cepted by the
irs a vessel oft
r off Cape St.

a safe rule, in
)u as the light

nto the middle
ir either shore,
in at the north

le weather and
if the morning,
ind. If it has
J a heavy head
from along the
downward cur-

I northerly land
ie westward as
and westward,

directed when
) night will pro-
lich usually be-
ng at SW., and
coast.

•obably veer by
her good board
rienced in read-
lutly gain more
)able changes of
3 current.
n, Bersimis, and
at night during
itures are suifl-

making it out.
2,036 feet above
IS the summit of

the high land of Bic, 1,234 feet high. Their beatings will often be of
great service to vessels in clear nights, and will show when tliey are
high enough up to fetch Father Point.

On arriving ott" Father Point, or anywhere between it and Bic, if the
flood be done and the wind be ligiit it will hh better to anchor on the bank
of soundings, weighing again, if there be a breeze, in suflicient time to
stand over and meet the lirst of the flood on the north sliore. By this
mode of proceeding vessels will gain much more ground to the west-
ward than by remaining on the south shore, for although there be a
weak stream of flood upon the bank of soundings from Father Point to
the Island of Bic, yet there is little above that island, and none after
the first quarter flood, excepting so close inshore as to be useless to
large vessels.

From the Bay of Mille Vaches to within 3 miles of the entrance of
the Saguenay River, with the exception of a shoal extending a short
distance offshore from the bay next westward of Cape Bondesir, the
coast is moderately high and very bold, the flood strong, and the ebb
comparatively weak. Vessels should, therefore, make short boards
along this shore until up to Bergeron Coves, and then stretcli over to
the anchorage under Green Island Reef, to wait for the next flood ; for
it will retiuire a whole tide, even with a good working breeze, and a fair
sailing merchant vessel, to beat through between Green Island and
Red Islet, and reach good anchorage above, before the ebb makes.

Red Islet Bank is, however, very dangerous, and the first of the flood
sets strongly over it, in a direction from Bergeron Coves towards Green
Island. The ebb out of the Saguenay also sets upon it, so that a stran-
ger should not make too free with it. If a vessel can not fetch the
anchorage under Green Island Reef, she may anchor anywhere, in fine
weather, along the south bank between Bic and Green Island, and will
have good ground in 12 fathoms at low water, and plenty of room to
get under weigh.

In coming up with a NW. wind, the north shore should be kept close
aboard until up to Bergeron, and if it be flood tide, the vessel may pass
either northward or southwanl of Red Islet, as may be preferred, but
the former passage should not be attempted with this wind during the
ebb, nor yet the other, except by those who are well acquainted with
the set of the tides.

Although the passage to the northward of Red Islet is the quickest,
there being a much stronger stream of flood in that channel, yet it can
not by any means be recommended; on the contrary, it should never
be attempted unless the breeze appears certain to continue, for if it fell
calm the vessel would run great risk of being drawn in by the stream
of flood among the ?langerou8 shoals off the mouth of the Saguenay, or
being set down upon Red Islet Bank when the rapid ebb made out of
that river, which is so strong and the water so deep that no anchor
would hold. 1

«^*^?^^^^?^r!^?!!rr*~ "" " '

GULF AND RIVER ST. LAWRENCE.

! V

To pass to the southward of Red Islet with the same wind, haul round
the east end of the reef, and as close to the southward of it as is prudent,
coming no nearer than a depth of 20 fathoms until past the islet. To
those who are well acquainted both with the soundings and set of the
tides it maybe desirable to keep closer in attemptiug the passage with
an ebb tide but it can not be recommended to strangers.

Directions down the Estuary and O-ulf.— For the return voyage
down the estuary and gulf little or no instruction seems necessary as
long as the wind remains fair and the weather clear, beyond what may
be gathered Irom the charts and the preceding remarks. But where
vessels are met by easterly winds and thick weather anywhere above
Point de Monts, great caution, attention to the soundings and set of
the tides and currents, become necessary to insure safety, particularly
during the long nights and wild weather in the fall of the year.

Vessels beating down the St. Lawrence usually stop at the Brandy
Pots for a fair wind. But supposing, after they have passed Greeu
Island, that the fair wind fails, and they are met with an easterly wind
before they have arrived near the Island of Bic, they should, in that
case, run up again to the Brandy Pots, especially if late, or very early
in the navigable season ; for all that they will gain by beating about in
thick weather, probably for several days and nights in succession, will
not be worth the risk. But if they have reached farenough down at
the commencement of the adverse wind, the Island of Bic aifords good
shelter and anchorage, which should be sought in time, before ti«e fog
commences.

There is no other anchorage which can be recommended lower down
nearer than the Seven Islands, and after that Gasp^. There are other
places, which will be mentioned hereafter, in some of which vessels ride
for taking in timber; but such places are not fit for occasional anchor-
ages, or for a heavy laden ship to run for on an emergency.

In a vessel beating down, the south bank should be the guide in thick
weather or at night. She should tack from it, after striking soundings
on its edge, and should not stand to the northward more than lialf-chan-
nel over in any part ; thus keeping in the strength of the downward
current, and avoiding the possibility of accident from the shoals of the
north coast, which being very steep, and affording little or no warning
by the lead, have proved fatal to many vessels under these circuni.
stances.

Effects of Tides. — It will be almost always seen, when the vessel
comes upon the south bank of soundings, by there being so much less
sea there than in the deep water, and strength of the weather current,
outside; a strong ripple will be observed at the edge of the bank dur-
ing the flood tide.

In the board from near Blcquette, during the flood tide, the vessel
will go to the northward rather faster than to the southward bt«ck again,
whilst in the ebb the contra • will be the case. But ^bove Razade

iBtim-iimnimltigamfT:

■ ' i.Jf.KUM■.% ' l!":J^

'i^ ^:,-:,-^i^ '.r ;> ■■ .-im -i^ i.

DIRECTIONS.

, buul rouud
J is prudent,
le islet. To
(I set of the
assage with

turn voyage
necessary as
d what may
But where
Inhere above
3 and set of
particularly
year.

the Brandy
issed Green
isterly wind
»uld, in that
>r very early
ing about in
icessiou, will
igh down at
aObrds good
Bfore tiie fog

lower down
sre are other

vessels ride
onal auchor-

uide in thick
ig soundings
m iialf-chan-
le downward
shoals of the
• no warning
hese circuni.

m the vessel
so much less
ther current,
lie bank dur-

le, the vessel
I buck .again,
3ove Razade

Islets she will go much faster lo the southward than to the northward
in both tides. Lower down the estuary, and as far down as (Jape 3l.
Anne, she will generally go faster to the southward than to the north-
ward during the ebb tide; whilst in the Hood an iuilraft into the rivers
will be felt on approaching near the north coast from Bersimis Point
nearly down to Cape St. Nicholas. The least reflection upon what has
been previously said of the set of the tides and currents will account for
these eftects.

Caution. — In a vessel beating down in a dark night or thick weather
there is no safety unless the lead be kept constantly* going; when she
M approaching the south coast, in the board to the southward, sail should
be sufficiently reduced for soundings to be easily obtained and every-
thing iu readiness to tack or veer at the shortest notice. These pre-
cautions become the more necessary as the vessel descends the estuary
and the bank of soundings becomes narrower. Off Matane there are
30 fathoms, sat\dy bottom, I^ miles offshore ; and 60 fathoms at 3 miles
off, whilst at the distance of 5 miles from the land no bottom will be
found at 100 fathoms. The south bank becomes narrower still to the
eastward of Matane, and cease^s, in consequence, to be of use to vessels.
Off Gape Chatte there are 30 fathoms water little more than ^ a mile
from the shore; a short distance farther off' there are no soundings at
70 fathoms ; and between it and the Point de Monts, from 150 to 170
fathoms, blue mud bottom.

Below Point de Monts there is plenty of sea room, and although
the lead will there be of little use, yet the south coast is so high and
bold that it may generally be seen, if the fog be no thicker than is usual
with a regular easterly wind up i:he St. Lawrence.

Lower down still, with a beating wind and thick weather, soundings
may be struck off the west end of Anticosti, or between the west and
SW. Points of that island, if it be wished to ascertain how far the vessel
is over to the northward before night. Eastward of the SW. Point of
Anticosti to Pavilion River the bank of soundings oft' the south side
of the island is very narrow ; but from the latter to the East Point there
is plenty of warning by the deep-sea leaii, as will be seen by the i^ound-
ings in the chart.

The channel to the northward of Anticosti can not be recommended
in the voyage down the St. Lawrence, because there is not only less
room, but also less current in favor ; neither the route by the Strait of
Belle I.«ile, on account of the straggling icebergs, which are iu general
to be met with there through all the navigable season. Towards the
fall of the year, however, vessels occasionally pass through it, in antici-
pation oc the northerly winds which prevail at that season in the
Atlantic.

Systen?. of buoyage. — Approaching from seaward, all buoys on the
starboard side of the channel are painted red, and, if numbered, marked
with even numbers, and must be left on the starboard hand.

7-^-

■

GULF AND RIVEK ST. LAWRENCE.

Approaching from seaward, all buoys on the port side are painted
black, witli odd numbers, if any, and must be left on the port hand.

Buoys painted red and black, in horizontal bands, mark obstructions
or middle grounds, and may be left on either hand.

Buoys painted white and black in vertical stripes mark mid-channel,
and must be passed close to, to avoid danger.

All other distinguishing marks to buoys are in addition to the fore-
going, and indicate particular spots; a <letailed description of which
is given when the mark is first established.

Perches with balls, cages, etc., will, when placed on buoys, be at
turning points, the color and number indicating on which hand they
are to be left.

Starboard hand spar buoys, entering channels or harbors, will, in
some cases, be surmounted by a ball; these buoys will always be
painted red.

The rule for coloring buoys is equally applicable to beacons and other
day marks, so far as it may be practicaole to carry it out.

Telegraph and Signal Stations — The following stations of the
marine telegraph systems, established in the gulf of and river St. Law
rence, in the interests of navigation and fisheries, are now in operation

Nameof Mtatioo.

'11

§ I:

GroHse Isle Teloprapli Office

Etanc da Nonl Liglitlioiigt-

Amberat Inland LiuhtlxoiiHe

Heath Point. LiKlitlioiise

South Point Lit;l>thou8e

Scut Invest Point Lighthouse ...

West Point Litthtlionse

Cape d'Kspoir LiKlithoiige

Point Mavquureau Lij;ht-honge .
Point (1e Uonta LiKbthouau

SigoaU in
nse.

...do ..

...do..

...do.

...do ..

Maniconagan Telegraph Station |...do

Purtneuf Lighthouse ...do

Cape Rosier Lighthouse l..,do

Fame Point Ughtliouse L. do

Cape Maedalen Lightliouse i...do j

Martin Kiver Lighthouse j.. do i

Cape (;hatte Liglitlionse |...do

Matane Liglithouse ....do

Little Metis LighthouKe |...do

Father Point Liglithouse i...do

Brandy I'ots Lighthouse I Semaphore

I ami ilagg.

Riviere dn Loup Lighthouse .do

L'Islet Telegrapli Ottico | Flags

Escuininao Point i.. do

Meat Cove Telegraph Office, near Cape St. .. do

Lawrence.
Flat (Low) Point Lighthouse i...do

Situation.

Magdalen Islands.

Do'
Anticoiiti Island.

1)0.

Do.

Do.
Western shore, Gulf of St. Lawrence.

Du.
Northern shore of river and Gulf of St.
Lawrence.

Do.

Do.
Southern shore of river and Gulf of St.
Lawrence.

Do.

Do. •

Do.

Do.
New Brunswick.
Cape Breton Island.

.Do.

1. Vessels exhibiting their distinctive numbers will have their names
transmitted to the local press (for publication only), free of charge.

2. Dispatches to or from vessels within signaling distance, by the
international code of all nations, either by flags or semaphores, will be
duly delivered as addressed.

3. Dispatches will be charged for at the ordinary telegraph rates,

cs, will, in
always be

s aud other

)n8 of the
er St. Law
operation

y'Tl.av.'w.i^t-jiPi-mi'lifeaS-,' ■ , r-. :„<■-■... :--.^J--^-,.y'ji<.^^-.. J ,

BUOYAGE SIGNAL STATIONS.

re painted
t hand,
istructions

d-channel,

o the fore-
) of which'

oys, be at
hand they

between stations ; but no charge will be made for signaling between
coast stations and vessels at sea.

4. Dispatches may (by special re(iuest) be delivered in cipher, other-
wise tliey will be transmitted in ordinary language.

5. Vessels may obtain information as to winds, weather, and ice at
any signal station within the Gulf of 8r. Lawrence yV<'e of charge.

6. The stations on Anticosti, Amherst, Grosse Isle, and St. Paul Is-
lands, at Meat Oove and Cape Kay are kept specially informed respiMit-
ing the state of navigation in the river and gulf of St. Lawrence dur-
ing the mouths of April and May.

. Lawrence,
tnd Gulf of St.

ind Gulf of St.

heir names
harge.
ce, by the
■es, will be

aph rates,

CHAPTER II.

ISLANDS IN THE GULF OF ST. LAWRENCE.

St. Paul Island, lying in tbe main entrance to the Gulf of St. Law-
rence, between tbc SW. extreme of Newfoundland and the north ex-
treme of Cape Breton Island, ia composed of granitic rocks, dipping
at an angle of not less than 45° to the southward. It is nearly 3 miles
long, by one mile broad. Its NE. point is a small detached islet, sepa-
rated by a very narrow channel from a peninsula, the whole so precipi-
tous as to be nearly inaccessible. The remaining greater part of the
island, which is also i)recipitous towards the sea, has two parallel ranges
of hills, that on the eastern coast being the higher.

Two small lakes or ponds supply the principal stream on the island,
which is of yellowish brown water, well-tasted and wholesome, and de-
scending into the sea in the southern part of Trinity Cove. There are
several other, but much smaller, runs of water, one of which is into At-
lantic Cove. These coves afford the only 'shelter for boats, and the only
good lauding on the island, which is easier of ascent from them than
at any other part.

Supplies.— Tbe island is partially wooded with dwarf and scrubby
spruce trees, useless except for fuel. The only inhabitants are two men
in charge of a depot of provisions for tbe relief of shipwrecked persons,
supported by tbe government of New Brunswick. These men reside on
the north point of Trinity Cove, where there is a dwelling bouse and
store. A few foxes are the only wild animals upon the island j there is
no feathered game, or anything else to support life.

A Boat is kept on tbe island.

Anchorage.— Off Trinity and Atlantic Coves small fishing schooners
anchor, with the wind off shore, in 10 or 12 fathoms, sand and gravel
bottom, and at the distance of 400 yards from the rocks. In very fine
weather large vessels might venture to ride in from 25 to 30 fathoms,
about ^ mile off shore, but should be in constant readiness to weigh
at the first sign of a change in the wind or weather. There is little or
no warningby the lead in approaching this island in foggy weather. On
this account, although so bold and high, it is extremely dangerous, and
many shipwrecks, attended with sacrifice of human life, have taken
place upon its shores.

Tbe irregularity of tbe tidal streams and currents add much to the
danger arising from tbe fogs, which prevail in southerly, easterly, and
often also with SW. winds. During the whole of a fine calm day at the

: I

"^-wl

aHss!caw»!"*"

' lau^' r

'*»Aa,wt,timM^:^tti^<,, -^: ■.^■. .

BIRD ROCKS — BRYON ISLAND. 8^

end of June, the current set to the SB, at the rate of one knot past the
north point of the island.

Bird Rocks of coarse red sandstone, in strata dipping very slightly
to the SW., are constantly diminishing in size from the action of the
sea. They present perpendicular dirt's on every side, yet it is possible
to ascend them with great difficulty in one or two i)liices, but there is
no landing upon them except in the calmest sea. Every ledge and
fissure of the cliffs is occupied by gannets. The white i)lumage of these
birds gives these rocks the appearance of being capped witli snow, and
renders them visible through a night glass in a moonlight night from
the distance of 7 or S miles.

The two rocks are about '^ mile apart. Sunken rocks leave only a boat
passage between them. The southeastern most is the larger and higher,
though scarcely 400 yards long, and not more than 140 feet higli above
the sea. The otiier is divided into two precipitous mouiuls Joined
together by a low ledge. The lesser of these mounds resembles a tower.
A reef extends about .^ mile to the eastward, from the Little or NVV. Bird
Rock, and there is a patch of breakers nearly midway between the
two, and rather to the SVV. of the line drawn from one to tlie other.
The Great or SE. Bird Rock is quite bold, excepting in the direction of
the other rock.

Caution.— Between the Bird Rocks and Bryron Island there is a
ridge of rocky and foul ground, on some parts of which, it has been
said, there is as little as 4 fathoms water, because bottom has been
seen in calm weather. Nothing, however, less than 7 fathoms could be
found ; but it may nevertheless exist, so that a vessel of large draft
had better not cross this ridge when there is much sea running. The
two cliffy points on the north side of Bryon Island, in line, mark the
northern limits of it.

Bryon Island, which is uninhabited, is about 4 miles long, with the
extreme breadth of rather more than a mile. There was no opportu-
nity of measuring the height of Bryon Island, but it nowhere exceeds
200 feet above the sea. The cliff's on the north side are much higher
than those on the south, where there are several small coves in which
boats may land easily with the wind oflf shore.

The island is formed of alternating and nearly horizontal strata
of red sandstone, red ocherous clay, and shaley gray sandstone.
The rocks are soft and friable, forming perpendicular or overhanging
cliffs nearly all around the island, which are broken in holes and cav-
erns, snowing how fast they are giving way to the action of the waves.
A great part of the island is wooded with dwarf spruce trees, and
there is a large upland tract covered with good native grass.

Water.— Water may be had in small quantities by digging, and
there is a spring on the north side of the narrow isthmus which joins
the eastern peninsula to the remainder of the land.

Reefs.— There are three reefs off' Bryon Island. One oflf its east end

ISLANDS IN GULF ST. LAWRENCE.

exteiuls nearly 1^ of a mile to the nor tbeast ward; another off the west
end extends 1^ miles to the westward; and tlie third, off the sandy
SW. point, 1(1 miles to the southward. No marks can bo given for
clearing these reefs, but the bearings of the land will aftbrd suiTicient
guidance to the seamen. The reef otf the S W. point obstructs the chan-
nel so much that it may be useful to add, that from the southern ridge
of this reef Hryou Island subtends an angle of 07°, so that with the
island subtending any less angle the reef may be passed. The south reef
assists greatly in turning off the sea from tlic roadstead to the eastward
of it, where vessels may safely anchor in 6 fathoms water and a sandy
bottom, at the distance of a mile or more from the shore, and with all
winds from the northward. Small vessels during NW. gales lie at
anchor close under the reef.

ShoaL — There is an extensive patch of foul and rocky ground lying
8. 41° W. from the west end of Bryon Island, and having a clear chan-
nel on either side of it. Not less than 6 fathoms could be found here,
and although the tishermen see bottom upon it in calm weather, there
is every reason to think that there is no less water. Nevertheless, ves-
sels of large draft had better not run over it when there is a heavy sea
running, for a small point of rock, with a few feet less water, might
escape the most rigorous examination.

Fishing Grounds. — The rocky places are called fishing grounds by
the inhabitants of Magdalen Islands, because codfish abound upon
them. There is one having 11 fathoms water, 2| miles north of Bryon
Island, and which extends a considerable distance parallel to the island.
There is sandy bottom, and a great depth of water within this ridge,
and vessels may anchor in fine weather and southerly winds, off the
bay on the north side of the island. The soundings extend so far off
Bryon Island to seaward in every direction, that there is no possibility
of a vessel on a voyage being endangered by it if the lead be used.
Great caution is requisite in approaching the reefs, for they are very
steep, especially that which extends to the southward.

Magdalen Islands. — This chain of islands assume an irregular
curved direction, the greatest length of which, from the SW. cape of
Amherst Island to East Point, is 35 miles.

The central parts of these islands rise into hills, with rounded and
frequently dome-shaped summits, and which are in general of igneous
or trap rocks. No rock salt has been found upon the islands, but the
water of many springs and small streams is sufficiently saline to be
nearly unfit for use. Gypsum forms an article of commerce, and some
valuable oclierous pigments are also found upon the islands, but the
principal dependence of the inhabitants is upon the codfishery. The
herring and seal fisheries are also prosecuted to a limited extent. The
islands are partially wooded, but the trees are small, and mostly spruce,
juniper, birch, and Canadian poplar. The unwooded parts produce
good grass, and afford pasturage for cattle and sheep.

j|ijnyjii i BW,'i-J!.UMJ!.ni .■a'i, i ..jiJ i , ' Hju i j,ULnmi i j!jj

•aawseeg gjoi: :; ^^^fe^tg^.. :^^^

MA(»DALEN ISLANDS.

the west
he sandy
given for

Hufflcient
\ the chan-
tern ridge
b with the
south reef

I eastward
d a sandy

II with all
lies lie at

und lying
lear chan-
»und here,
her, there
eless, ves-
heavy sea
ter, might

rounds by
and upon
of Bryon
;he island,
his ridge,
is, oflf the
so far off
[)ossibility
I be used,
r are very

irregular
N. cape of

luded and
)f igneous
8, but the
line to be
and some
3, but the
ery. The
ent. The
ly spruce,
3 produce

The climate is severe; not quite so coM as at Quebec in winter, but
less warm in surunier. Rains, and especially fogs, are extrt-MU'Iv fre-
quent, and without this liumid atmosphere the islands would be deprived
of the little fertility which they possess, the dry and meager soil requir-
ing continual supplies of nwh <ire.

When first siglited from sea, Magdalen Islands appear like several
hilly islands, with channels between, but, on a nearer approach, thev
are seen to be all connected together, with the exception of Entry
Island, by a double line of sand bars and beaches, incloning extensive
lagoons, having very narrow entrances, by wliich the tide finds access
and egress. Tliese sand bars are in some parts only a few feet above
tiio sea, whil.3 in others they rise into hills of blown sand of consider-
able elevation. They appear to be increasing, since they are generally
ridges of sand with from 9 to 12 feet of water parallel to, and from 50
to 100 fathoms outside, the beach. Tliere are 3 and 4 fathoms water
between these ridges and the shore, a circumstance which has often
proved fatal to the crews of vessels wrecked upon these shores In
stormy weather it is dangerous to attempt making the islands, for in
approaching the lower parts the breakers would probably be the first
thing seen from a vessel.

Population.— According to a census taken in 1871, there were upon
Magdalen Islands 3,171 inhabitants; these are distributed on Amherst
Gnudstone, and Alright Islands, with the exception of about 11 or l'>
famdies divided between Entry Island, Grosse Isle, and East isluuf
near the NB. extremity of the chain. '

Seals.— During the spring of the year the fishermen leave the islands
for seal hunting on the ice of the gulf. Tliousands of seals which are
dnven on the ice to the shores of the islands by winds are kille«l by the
inhabitants. Seals are also taken by means of nets in PieasantBay

Supplies.— Vessels may obtain limited supplies of fresh provisions
especially at Entry Island, and water most readily from Amherst Har'
bor, either from a spring which issues from under Demoiselle Hill or
from a small stream which falls into A use A la Cabane, near the SW
cape of the island. Wood for fuel is becoming scarce near the set"
tlements. Large spars are not to be had, unless when they chance
to be saved from wrecks, but small ones, of spruce and juniper may be
obtained. The latter, of which the inhabitants build their flshinff
boats and shallops or small schooners, somewhat resembles larch wood •
It IS said to be extremely strong and durable. '

East Point is of low sand, inclosing several shallow ponds, and hav
ing several sand hills, some of which are near its extremity while
others, of greater elevation and farther to the westward, extend in a
Cham near y to the IfB. Cape. These last-mentioned sand hills are

Th "t?;*^ """ *^^ "''''^'" ^^ "'* "ortheastem part of the great lagoon.
The NE. Cape is a hill at the head of Grand Entry Harbor; it can be
seen oyer all the sand hills and sand bars, and at a distant appears
to be the eastern extremity of the chain.

i.j8SSf ■;?.'"'';''

ISLANDS IN GULF ST. LAWRENCE.

Loog Spit.— A ridgu of aand, with 2 to 3 fatlioma water, extcndfi S.
(50^ E. rather more than li miles ot!' East Point, and for i\ miles far-
ther in the same direction the deptii is from 4 to fathoms. To clear
this spit the north side of the peninsula on the south shore of Oyster
Pond, in line with Old Harry Head, beariuK S. ()1° VV., will lead over it
in 4 fathoms. North Cape in line with the east side of NE. Capo
leads nearly A mile to the south westward, a mark which will he useful
to a vessel approachiuf; it from the westward. This shoal is extremely-
dangerous, as tlie thles set rapi«lly over it and cause a heavy breaking
sea.

Doyle Reef,lyinK S. 7(P E. from East Point, isvery small, being only
(iOO yanls liinj,' and 100 yards wide, with a depth of (> fathoms on each
side of it. The least water is 3 fathoms on one spot, nearly in the cen-
ter, and there is deej) water all around it. The only nuirk for it is
Xortli Cape, open twothinis of its breadth to the ME. of NE. Cape.
This reef seldom shows, as the sea breaks upon it only in heavy gales.

Old Harry Head, tlie SE. ixnnt of Cot!ln Island, Is formed of red
sandstone clilVs of moderate height, with a reef otf it i\ mile to the SE.
Between it and East Point is Saudy Hay,, in which vessels may anchor,
witli good shelter, in all winds from west, round by north to NE. ; but
it is nf)t a place to be recommended, because a vessel would be there
very much embayed by the shoals on either side, and might find it ditB-
(!ult to get out on the occurrence of a sudden shift of wind, cither at
night or during a fog.

Columbine Shoals consist of numerous small ]>atches and ])ointed
rocks, on some of which there is not more than 3 feet at low water.
NE. Cape, well open of Old Harry Head, bearing N. 11° W., will lead
clear of the outermost of the shoals. There is no good mark for
clearing the west side. On the outer edge ol these shoals the angle
between Old Harry Head and the west extremity of Coffin Island is 77°.

Coffin Island has on its south side a lagoon with a very narrow out-
let, named the Oyster I'ond, and which boats can only enter in fine
weather. Off the coast of the island there are several rocks, besides
Columbine Shoals, but they are inshore, and out ot the way of vessels.

Grand Entry Harbor has its entrance between theSW. end of Cotfiu
Island and the sand bars to the westward of it, and has water enough
within it for large vessels ; but its entrance is extremely narrow, not
exceeding 100 yards in breadth, between sandy shoals which are said
to shift. A native pilot should be emjjloyed, or the channel buoyed
or staked, and even then the entrance should not be attempted except,
in? in fine weather. The depth that can be carried in, at spring tides,
is 13 feet. The tides run with great rapidity. There are no settle.
ments at the harbor, but there are a few families in the vicinity of the
NE. Cape who Iweed cattle.

Within this harbor there isa iargeex|)an8eof water, extending north-
eastward to the southern shores of Grosse Isle, and communicating by

.p)JU4.i i .iu i wi i nimigi,,..»,Ha.!i. '-

CAPE ALKIOUT — MKULK ROCKH.

XtOIulH S.

miles far-

To clear

jf Oyster

ad over it

NE. Cape

he iiReful

uxtremely

breaking

x'ingouly
IB on each
II the cen-
L for it is
NE. Cape,
avy gales,
led of red
to tlie SE.
i»y anchor,
NE. ; but
il be there
iiid it dilfi-
, either at

1(1 pointed

low water.

, will lead

mark for
the angle
and is 77°.
arrow cut-
ter in fine
{8, besides
of vessels.
idofOotfin
er enough
arrow, not
are said
lel buoyed
;ed except,
ring tides,

no settle-
lity of the

ling north-
icating by

a narrow ehannel with a large shallow pond, enstwiinf of the NE. Cape.
It also exteiiils southwestward, between a double line of sand bars, to
the eastern shores of (iriiidstone Island. There are three entrances
from the sea; namely, (irand Entry Harbor; another 3A iiiiles to the
westward, which is very shallow; and House Harbor, near its SW.
extremity, between Alright and Orindstone Islands.

Shag Island is small and low, and lies about A mile from the sand
bars, nearly midway between Cotllii and Alright islands.

Cape Alright is the southern point of Alright iKlnixI. The clitt's, of
a grayish white color, with occasional brick-red low down, are 400 feet
high at the highest part, which is about a mile to the eastward of the
cape, and those to the westward of the cape, towards House Harbor?
are also very high and of the same color. Nearly a mile inland is the
summit of Alright Island. lietween this summit and the cajie there is
a hill named Itutte Konde. The south extremity of the cape is low,
with a small rock close oft' it.

Alright Reef, the outer edge of which lies N. 72° E., 3^ miles from
Cape Alright, is 800 yards long by 600 yards wide, and is composed of
white and pointed rocks, with 6 feet least water. When on this reef the
Butte Konde is in one with the summit of Grludstone Island; the west
side of Cape Alright is in line with the west side of Cape Meule, and
the whole of the woody Wolf Island is Just open to the westward of
Shag Ik. ind. The well-rnarked summit of Grindstone Island, ojieii to
the south westward of Cape Alright, will lead to the 8W., and the east
side of the woods of Wolf Island (seen over the sand bars), open to
the eastward of Shag Island, will lead to the SE.

Pearl Reef is of white pointed rocks, like most of the reefs around
these islands. It is round and about 400 yards in diameter, with feet
least water; and even with a moderate swell the sea breaks heavily
upon it. From the reef Cape Alright bears N. 06° W., 8J miles j the
NB. point of Entry Island S. 53° W., 4^ miles. The Demoiselle Hill,
shut in behind the north side of Entry Island, S. 66° W., will lead to the
southward ; and the Demoiselle, kept more than halt a point open to
the northward of Entry Island will lead to the northward.

House Harbor is distant 2^ miles to the NW. from Cape Alright.
Its entrance is a narrow and crooked channel, carrying only 6 feet at
low water.

Meule Rocks, extending } mile seaward of Cape Meule, are marked
on their outer extremity by a red buoy moored in 14 feet water 100
yards N. 86° E. from a 6-foot patch. Nearly midway between the bay
and Cape Meule there is a channel having 18 feet water, but this should
not be used in rough weather.

Red Cape is the SE. point of Grindstone Island and the north
point of Pleasant Bay. The opposite point of the bay, Sandy Hook, is
the east point of Amherst Island, and bears from the Red Cape S. 40°
5489 3

-.' .jU ' iJ ^ UCJ.idii r .'- ■:j-'S'iMi^: ' * .,.,.-.■. '

5 '

V. ,

ii'

11 ;

H; li

IMLANUH IN GULP ST. LAWRENCE.

E., 6 inil«8. From thii* lino to tlie Hbore uf Auiberat ImIhihI, at the hettd
ot'thvi Imy, tlio diHtaiiKe In 4,^ miloH.

Q-rindatone Island iH tlie Hecuiul larg«>Ht of tlio chain, being, in tliiH
reHpect, int«rnie<liat« l>«twe«n Ainhei'Mt and Alrigtit IslandH. Itm Kimi-
init Ih 65(1 foet above tliu Hea.

Amherst Island, the larguHt sinl Houth\vi'8tt>rnnioHr of tlui Magila-
Ion iHlandH, is connoctod witli Grindstono iHliind by a doiiblo lino of
sand Imiih, incloHing an oxttMiHlvo lajjoon from one to 3 milt'n wi<lo, thd
Houthern i)art of wliich is called UaHque Harbor. TImh lagoon is full of
sandH, which are dry at low water, and Iuih three outlets into IMoasant
Bay, the Houthernmost boing the deepest, but having only A feet water
over its bar at low water. The others, indu<ling three through the sand
bars of the NW. coast, will ordy a<lmit boats at high water, and when
the surf is not too higli.

The hills in the interior of Andierst Islan«l riso to a height «»f 550
feet. About a niile to the westward of Amherst Harbor is the conical
hill, named the Dcmoisolle, of trap rock, and liHO feet high.

Amherst Harbor. — The entrance is 'J^ miles to the westward of the
extremity of Sandy Hook, which is a long and narrow sandy point with
sand hills. This harbor is the easie ' of access and egress of any in the
Magdalen Islands, and has, moreover, the advantage of an excellent
roadstead outside, where vessels may wait their opportunity of running
iu. The entrance to Amherst Harbor, which has been deei)ened to 13
feet (at high water), is 75 to 80 feet wide, and rather crooked, so that
without a pilot it would be necessary to buoy the channel. There are
from 12 to 17 feet iu the harbor, over a bottom of soft, black mud,
well sheltered from every wind.

Pleasant Bay is the best roadstead in the Magdalen Islands, and
the only one where vessels can venture to lie with all winds, during the
three finest months of summer, June, July, and August. In those
months a gale of wind from the eastward, so heavy as to endanger a
vessel with good anchors and cables, does not occur above once in
3 or 4 years. The riding, however, is often heavy enough iu NE. gales,
and a vessel should be well moored and all snug aloft.

Anchorage. — The best and most sheltered anchorage is in 4 fathoms^
with the rocky point of entrance of Amherst harbor bearing S. 27° W.,
§ mile, and a little more than ^ mile from high-water mark on the sandy
I teach to the southward. A vessel of large draft should anchor farther
off. The bottom is everywhere excellent for holding, and of red sandy
clay. Even when the wind comes right in, the sea is much lessened
by passing over so much of shoal water ; nevertheless, the attempt
to ride out a heavy easterly gale, either before June or after August, will
be attended with great danger.

Sandy Hook Channel, between Amherst and Entry Islands, has a
navigable breadth of little more than J mile between Sandy Hook Flat
and the rocky shoals off the west side^of EutryJIsland. There are sev-

M 'I

.m ^ , » ,gjym ! M!BJi.. ' t... < j <• < . d u.

miSiuuNi.

it tliti iiea«l
iti^, in tliiH

ItH Hlllll*

blu lino of
H wide, tb(i
>n is full of

IMoHHiint
fei'f water

;h tliu 8iUHl
, and when

gilt of 560
the conical

ivard of the
' point with
■ any in the

1 excellent
of running
)ened to 13
;ed, so that

There are
jlack mud,

iland8, ami
during the
In thoae
endanger a
ve once in
1 NB. gales,

4 fathoms
S. 27° W.,
ri the sandy
ihor farther
F red sandy
ih lessened
he attempt
Lugust, will

ands, has a

Hook Flat

ere are sev-

AMHERST ISLAND— ENTRY FfiLAND.

eral rocky patchen of 2* falhon.H off the HW. point ot Entry Island
reaching to f u 1 v i mile fron. the shore. The el.h tide sets Htrr'ngly
hrough this <,l,annel an.l over San.ly Flook Flat, so that vessels ..f
larue draft should go round to the eastward of Kntry Island

Sand.N Hook (,hannel by a good pilot, hut 3i fathoms is the utmost that
can >'« HHh>Iv reckoned on by a stranger. Off the NK. en.l of HauiW
Hook Shoal, which is steep-to, a re.l btn.y is „,„ore.l in T, fathoms '
To run through Sandy Hook Channel from the southward keep'tl.e
east snie ol Alnght Island ust op..,, to the westward of N W. spit, u, t^d

:!!zz:::'i::.r'-'"''''^-^^^^^'-^ th^su,..,ie

, ^"*Zw"^""^'' ^'"^ '''*'''""^ "'^ ^'"" ^^"»f«'"l«''« Islands, its sunnnit
bemg 5s,Meet above the sea at high water; the red clitVs .'ising TJ the

ni-'.r'in "■"*-"'' "*■ •''"'' '■""^' ""•' ''' *'"' «•»"»•' Po'-'t to 400 f,.et.
O the Nh. ,,o,„t the,e is the High F{o<,k, about 100 y«,,|s from the

- Ills ami on ,t« north side the Tower Rock, of red sandst.nu,, joined to
the island, ami whic'- can be seen from the S\V. over the low WV
point. ^1 »» .

Supplies.-The inhabitants of Kntry Island raise cattle and sheen,
depending mo.., upon the sale of fresh pn.visions than the fisheries
Vessels may, therefore, almost always obtain supplies.

Anchorage.-\'essels generally anchor under Entry Island in north'-
erly and easterly winds, but it is rough riding. The best anchorage ia
easterly winds ,s in Sandy Hook Channel, under the NVV. spit i„ 5
fathoms, sand. ' , m 1/

iuf^w^'~^f1"^ "" 7?^' '"'*"''"''' '" ^'"''^y "«°k Channel and ofl
the SW. point of Entry Island, there are others off the south and SE.
sides, extending i mile offshore.

Andromache Rocks are several mere points of rock with deei) '
water between them, extending * mile off the NE. point of Entry

«.„!^,?^f''** ^«/«"d— The south coast of A.nherst Island, consisting of
sand hiUs and beaches, curves round to the westward, for 6 or 7 miles

^ifUuT'T^ 1 '^' ''^'""' '"'•"'^ "^^""•^'^ '''^'^y ^^'^'^ the island to
w.thin less than ^ mile of Pleasant Bay. The basi,. is now so nearly

closed w,th sand that boats can only enter at high water and in the
finest weather. There is good anchorage off the entrance, in from 6
to fathoms, sandy bottom.

A mile and a half to the westward of the entrance of the basin
c itts commence and continue, except in Oabane Bay, to the West
Cape which is the highest cliff of Amherst Island, its' summit ZTg
cJUO feet above the sea. *

C.f"r!f V*, ^^?*f^* '' " '"'^" ^'^''^' ''^^^««" "'« '^o^th and SW.
er^vT/ T r* ?''f °''' ''^'''^ ''^''^^' "'"^ '■■'''^y '-^"^hor with north-
erly and easterly winds, and where good water may easily be obtained. "

HP*-

ISLANDS IN GULF ST. LAWRENCE.

"'i ' . -v..

The best berth is in 8 or 9 fathoms, sandy bottom, off the center of the
bay, ^ mile off shore.

beadman Islet, bearing N. 70° VV., I'i miles from the West (Jape
of the Magdalen Islands, is small, being not more than 600 yards long,
and less than half that in breadth. It is about 170 feet high, with
steeply sloping sides, meeting at the summit like a prism, so that when
seen end on it resembles a pyramid. On the west side a vessel may
pass within the distance of 400 yards with safety, but a reef extends
J mile oft" the east side. There is no dunger nearer than the White
Horse. At niglit or in foggy weather the lead will give little warning.
O-ull Island.— From the West Cape of Amherst Island the re.
mainderof the sea coast of Amherst Island consists of red cliffs, with,
out beach, all the way to West Lake, a small pond at the SW. end
of the sand bars, which joins Amherst and Grindstone Islands. At
the NE. extremity of these sand bars is Gull Islet, which is small,
rocky, and close to the western point of Grindstone Island, and has
shoal water off its west point to the distance of i mile. About IJ
miles to the SW. of it, and with the west side of Gull Islet and Gros
Cap in line, lies a rocky shoal with 3 fathoms at low water, and leav-
ing no good passage between it and the shore. Close to the NE. of
Gull Island is the Etang du Nord, a small inlet, affording good shelter
to boats.

Hospital Rock.— The northern shore of Grindstone Island is of red
sandstone cliffs, less high than those of Amherst Island. Near their
NE. extreme lies Bospital Rock, close to the shore, and also some rocky
3-fathom patches, more than J mile from the shore.

White Horse is the uame of a dangerous reef, lying N. 36° E., 7
miles from Deadman Islet, and west 5 J miles from Gull Islet. It is
scarcely more than 200 yards in diameter, and has 9 feet least water
over pointed rocks, on which the sea often breaks. Ou this reef the sum-
mit of Entry Island is seen over a low part of the sand bars, at the
NE. outlet of Basque Harbor, but this mark can not be easily discerned
by a stranger.

When on the reef the western extremity of Amherst Island and
Hospital Cape subtend an angle of 91° 30'.

Pierre de Gros Cap, another dangerous reef of rocks, nearly of
the same size as the White Horse, and having 18 feet least water, is
seldom seen, as the sea breaks upon it only in very heavy weather. It
lies N. 58° W., 3% miles off" Cape le Trou, the nearest point of Grind-
stone Island.

Wolf Island.— From Hospital Cape to Wolf Island, the northern
coast of the Magdalen Islands, con.sist merely of sand beaches and sand
hills for a distance of 9 or 10 miles. The low sandstone cliffs of Wolf
Island, which is about J mile long, interrupt the continuance of the
sandy shore for only ^ mile ; the sand beaches then recommence and
continue with high sand hills to the North Cape.

DIRECTIONS — TIDES.

enter of the

West (Jape
yards long,
higli, with

that when
vessel may
eef extends

1 the White
:le warning,
ind the re.

clitts, with.
10 SW. end
stands. At
cb is small,
nd, and has
About 1^
)t and Gros
r, and leav-
) the NE. of
^ood shelter

and is of red

Near their

) some rocky

N. 360 E., 7
Islet. It is
; least water
reef the sum-
bars, at the
ily discerned

Island and

IS, nearly of
ast water, is
weather. It
nt of Grind-

;he northern
les and sand
jliffs of Wolf
uance of the
tmmence and

North Cape. — The north coast of Magdalen Islands continues from
the North Cape, a precipice of considerable height, in a curved line of
sand beaches and sand hills as far as Bast Point.

North Cape Rocks, some of which always show, lie to the west-
ward of North Cape, the outermost being 1,200 yards offshore.

Water may be had in small quantities near the houses on the east
side of the North Cape.

Anchorage. — To the eastward of North Cape vessels inay ride in 8
or 9 fathoms, over sandy bottom, with all southerly winds, with good
holding ground.

• Directions.— Entry Island, when tirst made from the eastward, will
appear like a double-peaked hill, siloping somewhat abruptly down to
perpendicular and liigh cliffs on either side. The S W. point of Amherst
Island is also a steep cliff", but of less height, and as there is no land to
the southward and westward of it, it can not be mistaken. The land
rises from it in undulations to the higher parts of the island.

The general soundings around Magdalen Islands will afford an in-
valuable assistance to vessels at night or in foggy weather, and will be
better understood from the charts than by any written directions.

Tides. — The tidal streams or currents around Magdalen Islands are
so irregular that the most experienced and intelligent pilots ior the
islands, who are also fishermen, and have passed their lives in fishing
craft around them, can give no certain account of their rate and direc-
tion, but all agree in stating that they vary in both respects, either
from the effects of winds, or other and unknown causes. Nevertheless,
the following observations will hold good as a general rule, and although
Subject to occasional interruption, the set of the tidal streams about to
be described will be found to recur with considerable constancy in tine
weather.

A few miles outside Bryou Island and Bird Rocks there ai)pears to
be usually a current setting to the southeastward, out of the gulf of
St. Lawrence ; but the stream of flood tide flows between them and
Magdalen Islands. The stream of flood comes from the SE,, and is
divided by the east point of Magdalen Islands. One branch of the
stream sets strongly over the Long Spit, which, with Old Harry Head
and the shoals off' it, turn it off" to the southwestward towards Entry
Island, leaving nearly slack water in the bay between Coffin Island
and Cape Alright, and also in Pleasant Bay. The other branch, to the
northward of the islands, follows the shore from East Point round to the
SW. Cape of Amherst Island, whence the greater part of the stream
continues its course to the SW. ; whilst the remainder, following the
shore, runs round and along the southern coast of Amherst Island,
until it meets the before-mentioned other branch of the stream from the
East point, setting off the east side of Entry Island. It is overcome by
this other branch, and turned gradually round to join the general weak
stream of flood to the westward in the offing.

ISLANDS IN GULF ST. LAWRENCE.

On the SE. side of the islands the stream of the ebb tide sets strongly
out of the lagoons and out of Pleasant Bay, between the Sandy Hook
and Entry Island. It is also often found running to the westward
along the southern shores of Amherst Island, and right round it in like
manner, but contrary in direction, to the course of the flood already
described. In the offing, at the same time, the stream of ebb is from
the SW., and sets over the Long Spit oflf the east point, where it meets
the stream from the NW., which has followed the north shore of the
islands, round from Amberst Island to the east point. The meeting of
these two streams of the ebb tide, together with the shoalness of the
water, causes so heavy a breaking sea in strong easterly winds that
the fishing shallops dare not venture at times to pass the point.

The rate of either stream seldom amounts to a knot, excepting close
in shore, or round the points. The ebb, however, is generally the
strongest stream, and its rate is increased by westerly winds, as is that
of the flood by winds from the eastward.

Anticosti Island is 122 miles long and 30 miles in extreme breadth.
Its shores are everywhere of rock, affording in some parts excellent
building stone, of which the two lighthouses have been constructed.
On and near the coasts the limestone is covered with a thick and often
impenetrable forest of dwarf spruce, which, in some exposed situations,
is only a few feet in height, with gnarled branches, so twisted and
matted together that a man may walk for a considerable distance on
their summits. Extensive banks of limestone shingle, bush-swamps,
morasses, and also beds of peat are of common occurrence.

Anticosti ie nowhere higher than 700 feet above the sea. Its south
coast is low and shelving, with reefs of flat limestone which dry at low
water. There is, however, a range of highlands in rear of the S W. point,
and extending for some miles both to the northwestward and southeast-
ward of it. The north coast, for 70 or 80 miles to the westward of the
East cape, is bold, precipitous, and of considerable elevation. The head-
lands end in magnificent cliffs of limestone, which are externally so
nearly white from the effects of the weather as to resemble cbalk. The
remainder of the north coast is low, with reefs of flat limestone, like the
southern shores.

Harbors.— It is unusual to find an island so large as Anticosti with-
out a good harbor ; the best are only suitable for vessels drawing 10 to
15 feet. Limestone coasts are in general characterized by deep inlets
and bays and detached islets and rocks, but nothing of the kind will
be found here, and there is not a single detached shoal off any part of
the coasts.

Coasts. — The coasts of this island have been generally believed to
be extremely dangerous. The reefs of flat limestone, extending in some
parts to 1 J miles from the shore, the want of anchorage off most parts
of the coast, and above all the frequent fogs, justify this belief in part,
but not in so great a degree as to render reasonable the dread with

i;afeag!a^&femJAte«MUJWtd«a^^

-■^■■^•"'l'*"-''^-'^

ANTICOSTI ISLAND.

which they seem to have been occasionally regarded, and which can
only have arisen from the natural tendency to magnify dangers of which
we have no precise knowledge.

Productions. — The interior of Anticosti is probably less sterile, for
white spruce spars have been seen large enough for the masts of a
schooner of GO tons, and others of Juniper of excellent quality, and of
sufficient size to form the keel of a vessel of the same dimensions. Black
and white birch and ash, the latter of bad quality, complete the list of
trees which attain to any size upon the island.

Land birds appear to be very scarce ; in winter, however, the white
partridge, probably ptarmigan or willow grouse, is seen in the interior.
There are as few varieties of quadrupeds as of the feathered tribes.
The squirrel and Canadian hare are reported not to exist here. There
are only four or live species of quadrupeds upon the island, namely, the
black boar, fox, otter, martin, and a few mice.

Climate. — The climate of Anticosti, from its proximity to an open
sea, is probably not more severe in winter than that of Quebec, although
farther to the north, but the summers are cold, wet, and stormy, with
frequent fogs. Frosts are common in August, and in some severe sea-
sons they occur in every month of the year. It is probable that no other
grain but barley would ripen here, unless it might be oats occasionally
in r*^"1te''ed situations. Potatoes are frequently prevented hy v^arly
ftjisi; ' .-?;n coming to perfection, although planted in the roost favorable

situ ai!

li /; ^i.a. — Streams of excellent water descend to the sea on every part
of the coasts of Anticosti. They are generally too small to admit boats,
becoming rapid immediately within their entrances, and even the larg-
est of them. Observation River, to the westward of the SW. point of
the island, is barred with sand, excepting for short intervals of time
after the spring freshets of heavy rains.

Fisheries and exports. — Many of the above streams abound with
trout, and are visited periodically by great numbers of salmon, which
are taken by the two or three resident families, and salted for the Que-
bec market.

Codfish are taken occusionally off several parts of the coast in small
schooners from the Magdalen Islands and other parts of the gulf. Their
crews often join the occupation of wrecker to that of fishermen. The
black bears are very numerous, and may frequently be seen wandering
along the shores. Their skins, together with a few of the other animals
named, salted salmon, seal skins, and seal oil, are the only exports, and
are taken to Quebec, together with occasional cargoes of goods and
people saved from wrecks in a schooner, the only vessel belonging to
the island. Wild geese, outards, anrl ducks of various species are
abundant, and breed upon the island.

Provision Posts. — The people in charge of the lighthouses and i)ro-
vision posts, and one man at Fox Bay, are the only residient inhabitants

i|i

}

* ,.

V 1

ISLANDS IN GULF ST. LAWRENCE.

of Anticosti. The provision posts have been established by the Gov-
eminent o^ the Dominion of Canada for the relief of the crews of ves-
sels wrecked upon the island. Vessels are more frequently lost here
in the bad weather at the close of the navigable season than at any
other times, and their crews would perish from want and the rigors of
a Canadian winter if it were not for this provision. TLe first of these
posts is at Ellis Bay, the second at the lighthouse at the SW. point,
and the third at the lighthouse on Eleath Point.

There are<lirection boards erected on the shore, or nailed to trees from
which the branch»^N have been cut off, near the beach, and on various
parts of the roast. These boards are intended to point' out to ship,
wrecked per. ons the way to the provision posts, and were placed on
the following jarts of the shore: at 30 miles westward of Shallop Creek;
and at 21 mibs eastward of Shallop Creek. And there were formerly
others on Heath Point and the SW. point which the lighthouses have
rendered unnecessary.

East Cape of Anticosti is a perpendicular cliff of limestone, rising
100 feet above the sea. Between East Cape and Heath Point is Wreck
Bay, which is dangerous, and affords no anchorage. A reef extends
rather more than ^ mile to the SE. from East Cape.

Heath Point is of limestone, about 10 feet high, with a super-
stratum of peat, in which there are several ponds of dark bog water.
At the distance of a few miles the lighthouse appears like a sail off
the island, and is extremely useful in marking the extent of the low
land to vessels, either from the eastward or westward.

Heath Point Reef extends nearly 3 miles from Heath Point. Within
that distance the reef is composed of large, square blocks of limestone
with irregular soundings, so that vessels should not approach nearer,
with the point bearing between N. 03° W. and S. 72° W. With the
East Ca{)e bearing N. 40° W. a vessel will pass just outsi.Ie of the
shallow and irregular soundings in about 20 fathoms water.

Anchorage.— The best berth is in 10 fathoms, over a bottom of sand
and mud, with the lighthouse bearing N. 49° E., and Cormorant Point
nothing to the southward of S. 83° W.

The Coast from the South Point of Anticosti to Cormorant Point is
low and undulating, with points of low limestone cliffs, and beaches of
sand and shingle in the bays, inclosing large ponds or lagoons, into
many of which the tide flows, and also small streams from the interior
of the island. This part of the coast may safely be approached by the
lead, for the reefs nowhere extend farther oft' than ^ mile till we come
to the South Point.

South Point is low, and dense brushwood reaches nearly to the
water's edge. No trees intervene between the lighthouse and the
shore, nor does the ground rise until the lighthouse is appioached-
Eastward of the point the ground is flat for some miles.

Beacon.— On South Point is a beacon 40 feet high, painted white.

aaami«kif' iaf:',;f,:L£SA:

SOUTH AND 8W. POINTS.

y the Gov-
)W8 of ves-
' lost here
lan at any
e rigors of
nt of these
5W. point,

trees from
an various
it to ship-
phiceil ou
lop Creek ;
e formerly
juseshave

)ne, rising
: is Wreck
)f extends

a super-
tog water.

a sail off
>f the low

fc. Within
limestone
3h nearer,
With the
le of the

m of sand
ant Point

t Point is
teaches of
sons, into
e interior
ed by the
we come

ly to the

and the

51 cached*

ed white.

A reef runs out about 2 miles to the southward from South I'oint, and
the sea usually breaks upon it. The outer point of this shoal, stated
to be 600 or 700 feet in diameter with 21 feet on it, lies with South
Point bearing N. 72° E., distant about 3 miles.

Caution. — As the survey of this coast is very incomplete, mariners
are advised to give this locality a good berth.

Aspect of Coast — From South Point to the lighthouse on the
SW. Point, a distance of .TO miles west, there is such a sainoness in the
character of the coast, that it is very difficult to make out one part from
another.

•In this distance the coast is very low, but it begins to rise at Pavilion
River, there being a high ridge close in rear of the coast all the way to
the SW. Point and beyond it for some miles.

Beacon. — At the entrance of Pavilion Kiver, wiiere there is a lime-
stone clit), is a white beacon 40 feet high.

Beacon. — A large white beacon 40 feet high is placed 4 miles SE. of
Salt Lake Bay.

Salt Lake Bay has flue sandy beaches inclosing lagoons or ponds
into which the tide flows. Ott' the center of this bay, and with its N W.
point bearing N. 12° W., distant 1| miles, there is very indifferent
anchorage, iu 7 fathoms, over sandy bottom. Vessels should be careful
not to anchor farther to the southward and eastward, since there is
some foul and rocky ground about a mile in that direction from the
position which has just been recommended.

Caution. — Between the south and SW. points of Anticosti the reefs
extend a mile from the shore, and are so steep that there is little warn-
ing by the lead. This part of the south coast of the island should
therefore be approached very cautiously at night or in foggy weather.

The SW. Point of Anticosti island is a low projecting mound of
limestone, having a small cove on its north side, which forms it into a
peninsula. The land rises gradually in the rear of this to the summit
of the ridge already mentioned. Ou the south side of the point there
is a beach of limestone gravel on which boats may land, .as well as in
the cove ou the north side, when the wind is offshore and the sea
smooth. On the north side of the point, and for several miles along
the coast to Observation Kiver, the cliffs are perpendicular and washed
by the sea. A reef extends out from the point to the west and SW.
not more than ^ mile. At ^he distance of miles to the southward
and westward of the poii. ^ depth is about 110 fathoms, with mud
bottom, and increases to 200 fathoms nearly midway towards the south
coast.

Anchorage.— Vessels may anchor in the bay ou the north side of the
point, iu 12 or 13 fathoms, over a bottom of sand, gravel, and broken
shells, with the extremity of the point bearing south distant ^ mile, when
the cliffs to the eastward will be at the same distance. It is a danger-
ous state to be caught iu by westerly winds, which are preceded by a

■i.VjU^ty l*

i|:

,1
T

ii •■
I' '

\ q

ISLANDS IN GULP ST. LAWRENCE.

heavy swell. The ground is not to be trusted, and no vessel oaa be
recomnietided to anchor here unless in case of necessity.

From SW. Point to Ellis Bay the reefs of flat limestone extend oif iu
most parts fully a mile, and often have 10 or 12 fathoms of water close
outside of them.

Observation River ?'j the largest stream on the island, having 5 or
6 feet water in its entrance after the melting of the snows iu the spring
of the year, but soon becomes barred with sand by the SW. gales. Its
source does not appear to be known to the people of the island. Im-
mediately to the northward of this river there are conspicuous and high
8andy clift's.

St. Marys Cliffs, 21 miles from SW. Point, are also of sand, less
high, and less remarkable, but yet not difficult to distinguish.

Beacoa— On St. Marys Cliffs is a beacon 40 feet high, painted
white.

Becscie River, 12 miles southeastward of Ellis Bay, is a small
stream at the head of a cove affording shelter to boats, and where there
is a hut at which a hunter and fisherman occasionally resides.

BlUs Bay affords the only tolerably sheltered anchorage in Anti-
costi. Vessels, if their draft is not too great for a depth of 3 fathoms,
may safely lie there during the three finest months of summer, namely,
June, July, and August, but they should moor with an open hawse to
the southward. If of larger draft, and only wishing to remain for a
few hours, they may anchor farther out, in 3^ and 4 fathoms, but nei-
ther the ground nor the shelter will be found so good as farther up the
bay.

Anchorage.— The best berth in Ellis Bay is in a line between Cape
Heury and the White Cliff', Gamache House, bearing N. 15^ W., and
Cape Eagle, S. 51° E. The vessel will then be in 3 fathoms, over muddy
bottom, distant about 600 yards from the flats on either side, and about
i mile from those at the head of the bay. Southerly winds are of rare
occurrence, and never last long. When they do occur the sea is much
less at the anchorage than might be expected, although very heavy in
the entrance between the reefs.

Reefs.— The reefs are of flat limestone and dry at low water. The
entrance between them is 1,200 yards wide, from the depth of 3 fathoms
to 3 fathoms. Extensive flats proceed from these reefs quite round the
bay, and do not entirely dry at low water, excepting in very low spring
tides, but there are immense bowlder stones upon them which always
show. These flats occasion the landing to be very bad excepting at
high water, which is the only time that supplies of good water can be
obtained from Gamache River.

Directions.— In approaching Ellis Bay from the westward, with west-
erly winds, run down the outside of the reefs off Cape Henry by the lead,
and in 10 fathoms water, until the west side of White Cliff is in line with
the east side of the westernmostof two hills far back in the country, and

'~'»T'-"rT»ffnninir Tr— i nt n rr rii TTn-mn i

ELLIS BAY — CAPE 0H8ERVATI0N.

isel can be

ctend off in
water close

laving 5 or
the spring
gales. Its
iland. Im.
IS and high

' sand, less

h, painted

is a small
^here there
s.

e in Anti-
3 fathoms,
3r, namely,
a hawse to
aain for a
IS, bnt nei-
her up the

ween Cape
P W., and
ver maddy
and about
ire of rare
)a is much
7 heavy in

Iter. The
3 fathoms
round the
low spring
ch always
septing at
ter can be

with west-
y the lead,
a line with
intry, and

bearing N. 7° E. ; tlien haul nj) with these marks on, and tliey will lead
into smooth water close under Cape Henry Reef, in 3^ fathoms. Con-
tinue running in with these marks on till Gamache House bears N. 15^
W.. then haul up lor it, and anchor in the line between Cape Henry and
White Cliff, as previously recommended. The lead should be kept go-
ing, and the reefs on either side should not be approached nearer than
S fathoms in any part until the vessel arrives at the anchorage.

In running for the bay from the southeastward, with an easterly wind,
come no nearer to the west point of Cape Eagle Heef than the depth of
7 fathoms, until the east side of White Cliff comes in line with the east
side of the same hill as before; then haul up with this mark on until
the houses bear N. l8o W. ' I proceed as above directed. Take notice
that the west side oi hi., "ff is used for the let uh; nark in west,
erly winds, and the east side .^ easterly winds, the intention being to
keep the vessel in either case from going too near the lee side of the
channel.

West Point is low and wooded, with reefs which do not extend be-
yond a mile from the shore.

North Coast— The north coast of Anticosti, between the West and
North Points, is low, with reefs of flat limestone extending one mile
from the shore.

North Point is wooded, of moderate height, and without any cliff,
It can only be distinguished by the change which takes place at it in
the direction of the coast.

High Cliff Point, distant 13 miles from North Point, is easily recog-
ized, being the only cliff on the island that has a talu8 in front of it, or
that has not its base washed by the sea at high water.

Beacon.— On North Point is a whitewashed beacon, 30 feet high.

Coast— From High Cliff Point to West Cliff, a distance of 26 miles,
the coast is low in front, with rijdges of considerable elevation a few
miles back in the country. This is the most dangerous part of the north
coast, for the reefs extend nearly 2 miles out from high- water mark, be-
ginning at some low cliffs 7 miles eastward of High Cliff Point, and
continue to do so for 4 or 5 miles to the southeastward, after which
they gradually diminish in breadth till, at West Cliff, they are not more
than ^ mile from the shore.

Beacon.— On West Cliff is a whitewashed beacon, 30 feet high.

West Cliff has no other high cliff near it. It appears like a white
natch on the land, and can be seen from a distance of 20 miles. Low
cliffs commence 4 miles southeastward of West Cliff, and continue to
Charleton Point.

Cape Observation has on its west side a range of grayish whit«
cliffs several hundred feet high. At the extremity of the cape these
cliffs become suddenly much lower, and then rise again to their former
elevation for a short distance on the east side.

i M

f 1
>

1 :•.,

ISLANDS IN (JUL,F ST. LAWRENCE.

Supplies. — At Cliiiiietoii I'oiiit and Ca{ie Obaervntiuii wood and
wivtwr may b« obtained.

Bear Head coiiHJMtH of ^rayiHli white cliff's, 40i) feet high and reHein-
bliiij; in some «legrce Cape Observation. The coast between is also of
hifjh grayish white clitt's. (Jape Observation has no equally high head-
hinds to the westward of it, while Hear Elead lias, which will prevent
the one being mistaken for the other.

Beacon. — On the western extremity of Boar Head Clitf is a beacon«
30 feet higli, with diamond-shaped toi>, and whitewashed.

Bear Bay, is by far the best roadstead on the north coast of Anti-
costi, and, indeed, the only one in which a vessel of large draft would
like to anchor, unless she had some particular object in view. It is
sufliciently roomy, the bottom is excellent for holding, the depth of water
moderate.

Cape Robert consists of clift's of the same color and elevation as those
of Bear Head. There are two other points of cliffs 300 feet high, within
the bay, the southeasternmosc of which is named Tower Point. The
best anchorage is on the line between Tower Point and Cape Robert*
at a distance of one mile from the former, as well as from the wesiern
shore, and in 13 fathoms water over a bottom of brown mud.

Bear Bay is divided into 3 smaller bays by the two high points of cliff
already mentioned. In each of these bays there are fine bold beaches
of sand and limestone shingle, and streams where water may be easily
obtained. But the principal stream is Bear River, which enters the
southernmost of the three bays, close to the southeast side of Tower
P<»int. It is too shallow and rapid to admit boats, but the water is
clear and good. The cliffs in Bear Bay are of grayish white limestone.
At the extremities of the points they are rounded by the action of the
waves and atmosphere so as to resemble towers, which resemblance
is rendered stronger by the masonry-like appearance of the rock.

Table Head.— From Cape Robert to Table Head the coast is broken
into small bays, with shingle beach and small streams between high
headlands, terminating in perpendicular cliffs, the bases of which are
washed l>y the sea. None of these bays afford good anchorage. Table
Head is rendered remarkable by the hill from whence it derives its
name, and which rises immediately from the summit of the cliffs. Fox
Point is 4 miles farther to the southeastward, and much lower than
Table Head.

Fox Bay, situated a little less than 2 miles to the southward of Fox
Point, is about a mile wide, and deep, with a sandy beach at its head,
where there is a considerable stream issuing from a small lake. Boats
may enter the outlet of this lake at high water.

Reef Point, of very low limestone, is the southern point of Fox Bay,
from which a reef of flat limestone, covered with only a few feet water,
runs out to thedistance of fully \^ miles. There is a depth of 10 fathoms
close off the end of this reef, so that it is extremely dangerous. To be

wood and

and resell) •
III iH alHO of
hi^h head-
ill prevent

a beacuut

i8t of Anti-

1 raft would
?iew. It is
[)th of water

[on as those
ligh, within
.»oint. The
upe Robert?
the western
1.

)iuts of cliff
old beaches
ly be easily
enters the
e of Tower
lie water is
» iimestoue.
jtion of the
eseniblauce
rock.

jt is broken
tween high
r which are
ige. Table
derives its
cliffs. Fox
lower than

rurA of Pox
it its head,
ike. Boats

>f Fox Bay,
feet water,
10 fathoms

aus. To be

MliTl I iT'liliit

ii'ifl i'""^

NORTH COAST — TIDES.

4ft

Til

snre of clearing it to the northeastward a vessel should not staiid
nearer by the lead than IS or 17 fathoms.

From the northern point of Pox Bay, whiiih is a cliff of moderate
height, another reef runs out more than i mile to the eastward. A
point of the southern reef, before mentioned, extends to the northward
in such a way as to overlap the reef off the northern point, leaving an
entrance into the bay from the northward between the two reefs only
J mile wide and 13 feet in it at low water. Insido there in a space i
mile wide, from the dei)th of 2 fathoms to 3 fathonis, and with 16 feet
in the nuddle over muddy bottom. It is said that the sea does not roll
in, but in heavy weather breaks on the reefs and in the entrance. This
account we believe to be correct, and that small vessels would be quite
safe there during the summer months.

Coast.— Between Pox Bay and East Cape the coast is of limestone
cliffs 100 feet in height, bold, and free from danger. Between Cape
Sand-Top and East Cape vessels may anchor with all westerly winds,
in from 16 to 20 fathoms, over fine sand, at a distance of one mile from
the shore.

Tides and Currents.— The stream has run along the land for a whole
day at the rate of a knot an hour, in either direction, without any ap-
parent cause, and altogether regardless of the change of tide. At other
tiines the tides have been found regular inshore. Under these circum-
stances it is evident that the set of the stream, at any time or place, can
not be reckoned upon with certainty. Usually, however, there is very
little stream in any direction on the north coast from West Cliff southeast-
ward to Table Head. Prom the latter to East Cape, on the contrary,
there is frequently a stream from the northward, running at a rate varj'-
ing from h.alf to one knot. In one or two instances this stream has been
seen to commence and end with the flood tide, so that there was reason
to imagine a connection between them ; and, if this be the ca^e, it may
arise from the circumstance of its being high water sooner on i ;e north
coast up as high as the Esquimaux Islands than at the east point of
Anticosti. The waters having thus attained a higher level to the north-
ward may in consequence flew to the southward. On the other hand, it
must be mentioned that this stream was observed at times during the
ebb tide.

It frequently happens that when this current from the northward is
running another from the westward comes along the south coast, in
which case they meet at the reef pff Heath Point, and cause a great
ripple or irregular breaking sea. When this has been observed there
has been usually a fresh breeze along the land on either side of the
island, the wind on the north side of the island beiug from the north-
ward whilst that along the south side was westward. Both these winds
were observed blowing a smart double-reefed topsail breeze at the same
time, and for a whole day together, and yet never meet round the east
end of the island, which is nowhere more than 200 feet in height. Be-

ISLANDS IN GULF ST. LAWRENCK.

Mveen the two wi.uls there was a triai.KuIar space of cal,,. and licht baf.
liiijf airs. The base of this triangle extended from Heath Point to East
CHi)e, and its apex from 6 to 8 miles to tlio eastward of the island. This
oircmu«tuM.,e is mentioned because it would Ih> dangerous for a vessel
to stand into the calm space between the two winds where the hiirh
cross sea and constantly changing light airs might leave her at the
mercy of the current, in no sn.all danger of being set on the Heath
x^oint Iveei.

if-

■I ■

li^lit baf-
lit to East
11(1. This
r n v(>H8eI
the high
er at the
lie Heath

C II A P T K K I I I .

OAPE BRETON ISLAND.

Cnpe Breton Island i» of an irrcifular trian^iiliirHhupo, ntitl its weHt
coa>ft is duiij^uroiis ol' accoss and possosstis no harbor bnt Port Hood.
Its other Hliores, though rut^ged, are indented witii lunnt'roiis iiaysand
inlets, the hirgost of which, the Hraa d'Or Lake, nearly divides the
island into two, and, boinff deep enoujjh for vessels of large draft,
att'ords great facilities for commerce.

The Resources of the island consist ehietly in its tiinlun', its agri-
cnltnral productions, and its fisheries. The coal mines are wori<e«l in
the neighborliood of Sydney. There is abundant room and fair means
of providing subsistence for a population ten times its i)resent amount,
which numbers about 76,000.

West Coast. — Crossiug the northern entrance of the Out of Canso,
from the lightliouse to Cape Breton Ishiiid at Hett'ernan Point, a dis-
tance of IJ miles, the description will be continued northward along the
western shore of the island. For the first 7 miles there are no detached
dangers, nor does the sliallow water anywhere extend to the distance
of A mile from the shore. Tlie land is high and rather barren looking,
rising at the distance of ^ mile from the shore to the summit of a ridge
850 feet above the sea, and which continues ]>arallel to the coast line
for 5 or 6 miles. The only remarkable object in this interval is the
church at Craignish, which will be aeen distant 2'^ miles from the light-
house. At Long Point, a low cliff of red sandstone, the coast becomes
dangerous of approach, and continues so to Emersion Point, a distance
of 7 or 8 miles.

Judique Shoal, the greatest danger in St. George Bay, is of rock
and about ^ mile in length, if the very shallow part is only reckoned, but
there are patches with 2 or 3 fathoms and much rocky ground both to
the north and south of it. The least water, 4 feet, is close to the outer
point of the shoal, and when on it the western extremity of the high-
land of Cape Porcupine will appear in the same line as Flat and Hef-
fernan Points, bearing S. 20° B. By keeping the whole of the highland
of Cape Porcupine oi)en to the west of Heffernan Point, it will lead to
the westward of the shoal in 6 or 7 fathoms ; or if the church at Port
Hood be kept open to the west of Cape Susan the shoal will be cleared
in not less than 4 fathoms. There are 4 fathoms water between the
shoal and land, but only small craft should attempt the passage.

. iiMiBiif-wtMMiMBinattmwtw^^ tit bmiII

CAPE BBKTON ISLAND — N\V. COAST.

t i..

i J

A rw\ Imoy in placed on Ju(li(iue Slioal about the iHt of May, and
takiMi up in November.

Judique Bank Vh-h NW. 2^ miles from the Jndiqiie Slioal, 4^ futh-
oiiiM U'liMt water on a Hnuill rocky |»atcli, with much foul ground around it.
Wlien on tliiH pat(!h I'ortHmoutli l'oint(tiu' Hontli end of Smith iHhvnd)
and Cape Linzee will aj)|>ear touoiiiuK, and beariuK N. 4"^ K.; .luditpie
cliurch, N. H-l'^ It). 3.^ mlleH, and the left or eaHtern termination of the
hijjhiand of Cape Porcupine just shut in behind llett'ernan Point. A
veHHel will paHH to the weHtward of this bank, which i8 only danKerou.s
to vessels of larjfc <lraft when there is a heavy sea running, by keep-
ing; Cape liin/ee shut in behind Smith Island, or the whole of the
highland of Cape Porcupine open to the westward of llett'ernan Point.

Judique Pond, close to the north of Judique church, is barred by a
sandy ridge, so as only to admit boats at high water. The shallow
water extends ott'it to the distance of 1| miles. Catherine Pond and
Susan Creek, distant 3 aud 5 miles respectively to the north of the
church, are similar places.

Fort Hood, the only safe anchorage on the west coast of Oape Bre-
ton Island to the north of the Gut of Causo, was formerly a much more
secure harbor. Smith Island being theu a peninsula, united to the main-
land by a range of high sand hills, which has since been eutirely swept
away.

Anchorage.--At the anchorage in the NW. part of Port Hood,
formed by the east side of Smith Island, there are depths of 3 to 4J
fathoms, mud, and the heavy swell is prevented from rolling in round
the NE. extreme of the island by a shoal which extends about 800
yards to the southward from Smith Point, with 2 to 4 feet water, and
marked by a small red buoy.

Supplies.— The village of Port Hood will be seen on the mainland
opposite the northern part of Smith Island ; it is well situated, aud
will be recognized by the steejde of the church aud the court-house of
stone. Supplies of fresh provisions may be obtained there, but there
is no good watering place, the supply from the wells of Smith Island
being scanty aud not very good, while the brooks of the mainland are
difficult of access, and sometimes nearly dry in summer.

Spithead, a sandy flat, nearly dry at low water, extending 1,200
yards northeastward from Portsmouth Point, the south extremity of
the island, affords partial shelter from south winds, but a strong south
or southwesterly gale of any duration sends in a heavy swell.

Dean Shoal, on the mainland side of the port, extends from the
sandy beach at Mill Creek to the distance of 600 yards. It is a steep
sandy flat, which, together with the shallow water as far out as oppo-
site Portsmouth Point, but not farther to the south, will be cleared at
200 yards distance by keeping Oape Linzee and Isthmus Point in line,
bearing about N. 10° W. On the same side, but outside the entrance
of the harbor, a rocky shoal, with 12 feet of water, runs out 700 yards

HMITll IHLANI) COAHT.

May, aud

il, 4^ futh-
nrouiul it.
ith InIiiikI)
; Jiulique
ion of the
I'oiiit. A
ilatiKerouti
by keep-
ole of the
I all Point,
irred by a
e Hhallow
Pond aud
th of the

Dape Bre-
inch more
the main-
ely swept

jrt Hood,
of 3 to 4J
: in round
ibout 800
rater, aud

mainland
ated, and
;-house of
but there
;h Island
ilaud are

lug 1,200
remity of
mg south

from the
is a steep
as oppo-
leared at
it in line,
entrance
00 yards

from tile Hliore ^ mile to tlio nortiiward of Ilajjged Point. TIiIh, being
Htt-epto, must lie carefully avoided l)y a vensel of large driifr. Cape
Hu.san uml Kate I'oiiit in one, l>earing H. !;]'> K., juHt lead.s outside it,
but may not be eaHily mad«^ out Ity HtrangcrN.

Smith Island Ih 2 miles long and 210 feet high, and it po.sNeMNt's
miu!h IV'rtile laud. With the exception of tiie sanely \u:iw\i in the Imy,
the island is eveiywlu-it^ surrounded l)y dirt's of various luMglits up to
123 feet. Tln'y are foinied of soft reddish saiuistones, sluiles, and
marls, uontaining oecasioiuilly thin seams of coal, witli IhmIs of gyp>
sum, limestone, and trap, wliieli last are well shown at the N\V. end
of the island.

Henry Island, or Just au Corps, lies about one mile outside of Smith
Island. It is nuuth the smaller of the two, being one mile long, atid is
greatest height is lO.'i feet above the sea at high water. It is of the
flame rock fornuition, and also nearly surrounded wil.iclitt's, which yield
rapidly to the action of the waves and of the atnu)sphere, an<l which
on the outer side attain the elevation of 100 feet above the 3ea. It has
no permanent inhal)itants, but is much frecpu^nted by <i8herme:' during
the fishing seasons.

The island is l)old to seaward, but shallow water runs out from Fipb
ery Point, its SB. extremity, )( mile to the depth of 3 fathoms, ami jj
mile to 5 fathoms.

The passage between these islands is rendered so extreme'v in ricate
aud dangerous by rocky shoals, that it should never be attempted unless
in a very small ve^isel and with line weather.

Directions. — Uaving a fair wiiul, pass to the southward of Uenry
Island at a distance not less than ^[ mile, steering N. 77° E. until the
south end of the trees is in line with the spire of the Roma Catholic
church, l)earing N. 21° K., which will lead east of the Portsmouth and
Si)ithead Shoals, and when the east end of II, Smith's house is in line
with the west end of the chapel, bearing N. 24° W., steer for the an-
chorage in the NW. part of the port.

Tides. — The tidal streams are weak at the anchorage, and their rate
does not ordinarily amount to one knot anyw»'pre within the harbor.
The flood comes from the north and the ebb fr'^:,; ri.e south. The flood
stream from the north meets that which comes in through the (lut of
Oanso off Long Point, whence they set to the NVV., curving round the
bay towards Cape St. George.

Aspect of Coast — From Cape Linzee to Cape St. Lawrence, a dis-
tance of 73 miles, the coast is without either harbor lOr safe anchorage
for ships. The general character is high and bold, the dangers being
few and close in shore, but ii, is nevertheless a dangerous coast to be
near in autumn or early winter, when the prevailing NW. winds send
in a heavy sea, and the set of the current is often in the same direc-
tion. The swell frequently precedes the wind by many hours, and as
6489 4

g; » i twiii i wa»SM i »ii i a aBa^ifss irjW*»maiij:..i:ir7 iJ i . ti;a^^

CAPE BRETON ISLAND NW. COAST.

ill

}■,

;! j'il

there is no good holding ground, becomes dangerous to vespsls caught
close in shore.

The prevailing rocks of this coast are sandstones, shales, and con-
glomerates, with occasional beds of gypsum and thin seams of coal, to-
gether with a more ancient slate formation in nearly vertical strata,
forming the higher hills and rising in one part to nearly 1,300 feet above
the sea. These rocks form precipitous shores, on which boats can land
only in fine woather at the mouths of ravines or small streams. The
settlements continue along the coast as far northward as Clieticau,
after which the mountains approach close to the shore, excepting at
Grandanse, where there art seven resident families.

The Fisheries are valuable. Salmon are taken in all the principal
streams, and the Margaree is so celebrated for its salmon fishery that
it has sometimes been called the Salmon River. Herring, mackerel,
cod, etc., abound in their seasons, and are frequently taken in large
quantities. The seal fishery is also attempted occasionally, but is a pre-
carious pursuit.

Currents. — Eveu with a smooth sea and in fine summer weather
vessels are set in towards this coast, an effect which seems to be due
someiiuies to the general current from the NW. coming from between
the Magdale.T Islands and Prin(!e PJdward Island, and at other times
to the direction of the ebb stream from Northumberland Strait, inclining
towards these shores. These streams, being inconstant and irregular
both in strength and direction, are therefore the more dangerous, and
require the moro to be guarded against. In the summer months, how-
ever, the rate of the current or tides will not be found to exceed one
knot even close inshore, excepting round Cape St. Lawrence and Cape
North, where it sometimes runs at the rate of 2 or 3 knots, causing a
heavy breaking sea. Its direction for three-fourths of the time is from
the westward ; this appears to b", due to the combined action of the
current and ebb tide predominating over the flood stream from the NE.,
so as to render it nearly imperceptible, excepting at or near the spring
tides. There is no doubt that winds, present or at a distance, also in-
fluence these streams, as they have been observed to do in all parts of
the gulf.

IvZabou River, at 5 miles from Fort Hood, admits small schooners,
having 6 feet at low water over its bar of sand through a dredged chan-
nel. The bar shifts occasionally during heavy NW. gales, but is seldom
disturbed during the summer months, when those gales are of rare oc-
currence.

From the er. trance to the bridge, a distance of 3 J miles, this river
resembles a mountain lake, being in one part 5 miles wide and carrying
8 fathoms water. Boats can ascend with the tide to 2 or 3 miles above
the bridge, where the fresh water forms only a small stream. Besides
the Mabou, which is the main branch, there are two other smiiHer
streams, the SW. Arm and Becket River, which last enters from the

astward.

i*t^e=5»;s»K ^*&^

MABOU RIVER — CHETICAN ISLAND.

P3l8 caught

ss, aiu? con-
5 of coal, to-
tical strata,

feet above
ata can land
eanis. The
8 Clieticau,
xceptiug at

lie principal
flahery that
J, mackerel,
eii in large
but is a pre-

ler weather
} to be due
)in between
other times
;it, inclining
id irregular
gerous, and
onths, how-
exceed one
e and Cape
!, causing a
time is from
ition of the
om the NE.,
r the spring
nee, also in-
all parts of

1 schooners,
edged chan-
ut is seldom
) of rare oc-

s, this river
nd carrying
miles above
in. Besides
her smiiHer
!rs from the

The shores of the Mabou are well settled, principally by Scotch
highlanders; flourishing farms are seen on either side, and there IkS a
church on the northern bank 3 miles within the entrance. The scenery
is very beautiful, the mountains rising immediately from the northern
shore to the height of 870 feet.

Tides.— The entrance to Mabon River, at the southern end of a low
sand bar, is only 100 yards wide, and the tides frequently run there at
the rate of 4 knots , it is therefore a dangerous place to enter, except-
ing with a flowing tide and a smooth sea. NE, winds often cause high
tides ; SW. winds the contrary.

The Mabou Highland is a very remarkable feature of the coast,
seen from great distances seaward. It extends II miles along tlia coast
to the NE., forming a lofty and precipitous shore, and rising to the
height of 1,000 feet above the sea. After passing these highlands, the
coast becomes less elevated, the beaches and landing places more fre-
quent, and the settlements are continuous until past Chetican Island.

Sea Wolf Island is of an oval shape, I i miles long and 200 feet
high. It is of sandstone, precipitous and quite bold all around, excei)t-
ing at the NE. point, and there the shallow water extends only 200
yards, it attbrds some shelter to small Ashing vessels and boats, which
can land upon it only in tine jummer weather; at other times the sea
rolls completely round it, and the anchorage is never safe, the ground
being everywhere rocky. Between this island and the shore the bot-
tom is of rock, with loose sand and gravel occasionally. The neigh-
boring sea abounds with tish.

Margaree River has 5 feet over its rocky bar at low water, in a very
narrow and intricate channel, through which the tides run at tlic rate
of 4 knots. It is only under tVivorable circumstances of wind and
weather, and with a smooth sea, that schooners can safely attempt to
enter it. The surf on the bar is at times heavy and dangerous to boats,
especially when the strong tide is running out against the wind and
sea. The shores of this river are well settled, principally by Acadians
and Scotch highlanders, who, besides farming, prosecute the salmon
and other fisheries (1860).

Squirrel Pon«l.— Between the Margaree and Chetican Island there
are several places v-here boats can land in fine weather, especially at
Squirrel Pond, distant 3 miles from Chetican. There are farms all
along this part, the mountains running parallel to the shore, at a short
distance back, and attaining, at Mount Squirrel, in rear of Squirrel
Pond, the elevation of 1,220 feet above the sea,

Chetican Island, distant 10 miles NE, from the Margaree, is only an
island when high tides overflow the low and narrow beach of sand and
shinirle wliicii unites it to the mainland at its southern extremity. This
beadi forms the shore of the bay, within the SW, point of the island.
The depth of water in this roadstead is U ftithoms, but the bottom, of
sand and gravel, is so loose and bad for holding that the anchorage
becomes quite unsafe after the mouth of August.

f^S

V,,

I fif;
!ti;

^\:

CAPE BRETON I8LAKD — N\V. COAST.

Anchorage. — At no time is this anchorage to be recommended, and
therefore vessels merely wishing to communicate with the shore had
better anchor outside at the distance of a mile or two, where they will
have room to weigh in the event of the wind coming in from the west-
ward.

Coast— There is no landing on the outside of Chetican Island, where
the cliffs of sandstone, containing coal fossils, are everywhere perpen- .
dicular or overhanging, being constantly undermined by the sea. These
cliffs, which extend the whole len ?th of the island, from Chetican Point
northeastward to Enragee Point, are nearly equal in elevation to any
part of the island, rising in one part to the height of 200 feet above the
sea.

Chetican Harbor, between the island and the mainland, is entered
from the NE. between the shingle spit at Cape Gros, the NE. extreme
of the island, and Caveau Point. Within this entrance, but outside the
bar, which is ^ mile farther in, small fishing vessels sometimes anchor,
but the northerly winds send in so heavy a sea that this is considered
even less secure than the unsafe anchorage at the SW. end of the island.
There is a dept|i of 3^ fathoms within the harbor, but only 2 feet at low
water over its bar of sand, which is then in great part dry.

Supplies.— The establishment of Messrs. Robin & Co., of Jersey, on
Chetican Point, is the principal fishing station on this coast, and will be
easily recognized by the buildings, fish stages, and flagstaff. There are
several other houses on the inner side of the island, and a settlement of
Acadians on the mainland opposite, where supplies of fresh provision
to a limited extent may be obtained, and also water, which can not be
had good or in any considerable quantity upon the island.

Tides.— It is high water, full and change, in Chetican Harbor at 8 J h. ;
ordinary springs rise 3J feet, neaps 2 feet. NE. winds cause high tides,
and SW. winds the contrary.

Caveau Shoals. — The Caveau Shoals, which are much in the way of
vessels wishing to anchor oft" the entrance of Chetican Harbor, are two
rocky patches, with II feet least water, lying at the distance of J mile
oft" Caveau Point, and N. 30=> E. from J to J mile from Cape Gros.

The Jerome Ledge, with only 5 feet water, lies in the same direction
from Cape Gros, and at the distance of IJ miles. It is of considerable
extent, being 'i mile long, and its NE. point reaches to the distance of
a mile from the shore. The line of 10 fathoms water is only 600 yards
outside this ledge nd the Caveau Shoals; there is therefore little warn-
ing from the lead ; but vessels beating along shore, and standing towards
them, will avoid them by tacking when the points on the outside of
Chetican Island come in line, bearing S. 27° W.

At Fresqu'ile the foot of the niountains are close to the shore, after
which there are no inhabitants nor any good landing place, up to Grand
Anse, 15 miles from Chetican, where there is a settlement, and a small
river silted up by a shingle beach, on which boats can land, and be

CAPES ST. LAWRENCE AND NORTH.

tded, aud
bore had
they will
the west-
id, where
e perpeu-
a. These
jan Point
3ti to any
ibove the

s eutered
. extreme
itside the
IS anchor,
jnsidered
he island,
jet at low

ersey, on
tid will be
rhere are
:lement of
provision
an not be

rat 8 J h.;
igh tides,

ihe way of
r, are two
of J mile
rros.

direction
isiderable
istance of
600 yards
ttle waru-
g towards
oatside of

lore, after
I to Grand
id a small
id, and be

hauled up in case of need. From Grand Ause to Cape St. Lawrence, a
distance of 13 miles, the coast is mountaitious, with precipitous shores,
aftbrdiugau inditterent landing for boats at one or two places, an«l there
only with a smooth sea.

Cape St. Lawrence, svliich forms the termination of the NVV. coast
of Cape Breton Island, is of slate rock, affording no landing excepting
on the west side, where there is a brook, aud a steep stony beach, on
which a boat can be hauled up with ditticulty. Round this headland to
the SE. is Bear Hill, a sugar loaf 750 feet high, and close to the shore.
This is distant less than a mi'e fiom the cape ; and at an equal distance
farther is Black Kock, al»Vc.ys above water, and about 350 yards off
shore. Meat Cove, where there is a settlement, and good lauding for
boats, lies one mile NW. from Black Point. It is in telegraphic com-
munication with the Magdalen Islands, Bird Bock, and the United
States.

St. Lawrence Bay, between Black Point and Cape North, is 4^ miles
wide and IJ miles deep, with bold shores, and .i depth of water not too
great for anchoring; but the bottom is not to be trusted, being either
of rock or loose sand. Vessels requiring supplies may anchor there in
the summer months, when strong northerly winds are of rare occur-
rence, and will find 9 or 10 fathoms water at the distance of ^ mile
off shore in the bottom of the bay, but they should be ready to weigh
immediately on the anproach of a wind from the sea. At Wreck Cove
and at Deadman Pond there are settlements, and good landing, the
principal fishing establishment being at the last-named place.

Cape North, the NE. extremity of Cape Breton Island, is a bold
and rocky headLiud, of slate in nearly vertical strata, rising abruptly
from the sea to the height of 1,100 feet. There is no shallow water off
it, only some rocks above water, which at Money Point, a mile to the
SE. of the cape, run off a short distance.

SE. COAST OF CAPE BRETON ISLAND.

Coast. — From Michaux Point to Cape Gabarus the land is low and
has a barren aud rocky ajtpearance, and the shore is broken into numer-
ous lakes and ponds, protected from the sea by beaches of gravel and
some small rocky islands and ledges. Occasionally there are reddish clay
cliffs 70 to 00 feet high, but at a distance from the land there are no re-
markable features to be easily recognized by a stranger.

The Bank of Soundings again contracts off Santosprit Island, and
at 2 miles from the shore the depth is 40 fathoms. C i; thiM account, in
foggy weather, the lead should on no account be nc .r.^jted, and no jiart
of this coast approached nearer than the latter depth.

Current. — About 3 miles off this coast, a current is often experienced
running nearly one knot per hour to the SW. ; nearer the shore it is
much less constant.

Michaux Point, the eastern limit of Chedabucto Bay, is a wooded

( I

If '■

'* *■

CAPE BRETON ISLAND — 8E. COAST.

peninsula, not more than 40 feet high, joined to the !nain bind by a
beech of sand. The tliree low Basque Islets of clay resting on slate
lie to the (iaatward, and are distant one mile from it. There is deep wa-
ter north of these islets as well as between the islets and Michaux Point:
and m Michaux Cove there is good holding ground and some shelter to
vessels during the prevalence of westerly winds, on which account
coasters deeply laden occasionally anchor there. A few fishermen fre-
quent this cove during the summer, and their huts are found on the
north side of Michaux Point and on the Basque Islets.

Shoals.— The water is deep to the southward of Michaux Point, but
around the Basque Islets are several dangers. A shoal carrying 3 fath-
oms water extends SE. ^mile from the south islet; a reef of rocks west
3t)() yards ; a shoal, having a rock with 9 feet water on it, N W. 600 yards
from the same islet ; and a rock, dry at half tide, west 400 yards from
the north islet.

The Basque Shoal, lying 8. 24° E., J mile from the South Basque
Islet, has 4 fathoms of water on it, and breaks only in heavy weather.
Red Island, just open of Michaux Point, bearing N. 80'^ W., will lead to
the southward.

Directions.— When standing for the anchorage in Michaux Cove,
Vring the east side of Michaux Point to bear N. 24° VV., and then run in
for the cove N. 13o W. Having passed the point at the distance of 400
yards in 9 fathoms water, round to and anchor, with Michaux Point S.
20° W., in 4 or 5 fathoms, sand and clay.

Anchorage. — It would not be safe to remain at this anchorage if the
wind veers to the SE. or east, with a falling barometer. In leaving
it, if the wind is scant for the south passage, there is a good channel
free from danger between the Basque Islets and the Shag Ledge.

Black Breaker, with 6 feet water, is a rock lying one mile southward
of Bell Point. The north side of the Basque Islets and the north side
of IMichaux Point in line, S. 77° W., will lead i mile northward of the
least water on the Bad Neighbor, and the same distance southward of
the Black Breaker.

Coast— Between Michaux Point and Saut^sprit Island the shore is
rocky and dangerous of approach.

Grand River enters the sea about 4 miles east of Michaux Point,
between Ked Head (70 feet high) and Bell Point, which is a low point,
forming the east point of entrance, and from which shoal water and a
reef, with only 6 feet on it at low tide, extends i mile to the SW.
Although the tide flows up this river 3 miles, the narrowness of the
entrance, an<l the rapidity of the current, make it dangerous of access,
even for boats, except at high water. The shores are settled by people
of Highland desc( nt.

L'Archeveque Cove, at 3J miles west of Santesprit Island, affords
shelter at high water to small vessels drawing less than 6 feet.

Bad Neighbor, a rocky shoal with 2 fathoms water on it, lies S.

i<?^^£Srt±«^4«'SeT ^ i.-Kv^

SANTK8PRIT ISLAND OABARU8 BAY.

29° W., IJ miles from Sautosprit Lighthonse. It only breaks in heavy
weather.

Santbsprit Island is 30 feet high and nf clay banks resting on slate,
and partly wooded. A reef of rocks, partly dry at low water, extends
from it to the mainland, and leaves no channel. The island may be ap-
proached on its sonth side to 4 mile.

The Tilbury Rocks rise from a shoal of sand and stones, which ex-
tends i mile from the shore at 1^ miles to the westward of Capelin
Cove.

The Seal Rocks, a reef nearly dry at low water, lie 400 yards from the
shore, and 1 J miles to the eastward of Capeline Cove. A few fishermen
have their hnts on the east side of this cove, where their boats have the
protection of a point of rocks.

Frambois Rock, with 4 fathoms least water on it, lies off the center
of Frambois Cove, at 2 miles distance from the shore. The cove affords
no shelter, and has a dangerous reef named the Outer Breaker lying oft'
its western shore, 5 mile from Cape lied.

Pot Rock lies nearly ^ mile from Fourche Head, and only breaks
in heavy weather. The Shag Rock, kept in line with the Green Kock,
and touching Cape Gabarus, bearing N. 40° E., will lead to the SW.
of this danger, and outside all tiie shoal water in Fourche Bay.

Fourche Bay and Inlet. — Between Fourche Head and Cape Gabarus
are many rocks and shoals, inside of which is Fourche Bay, affording
no shelter, and dangerous of approach. Fourche Head, the west ex-
treme of the bay, is a hummock, bare of trees, and 40 feet high. A bell
buoy, surmounted by a staff" and cage, and painted red, is moored in 10
fathoms, about ^ mile SE. from Fourche Head.

On the north side of Fourche Head is Fourche Inlet, on the shores of
which are settled a few families engaged in fisheries. The inlet has a
bar at its entrance, nearly dry at lo w water, and only affords secure
shelter to boats.

Q-abarus Bay. — From White Point, a low rocky point, 2 miles west
from Louisburg, the land trends round to the westward, forming a deep
and capacious inlet, named Gabarus Bay. The fishermen, whose scat-
tered houses are principally situated on the southern shores of the bay
(1800), are an industrious and thriving people.

Rocks. — The centev of this bay is entirely free from danger, but on
the north shore, ^ milofrom Simon Point, lie some rocks nearly dry at
low water, and a shoal with 18 feet on it extends 600 yards from the
same point.

Cormorant and Harbor Rocks. — The Cormorant Kocks, of bare
slate and only 15 feet high, lie off the northern shore of Gabarus Bay,
800 yards from Kennington Head. They are bold-toon their south side ;
but east from them, rocky grounds extend 400 yards. Near the head
of the bay, NE. ^ mile from the Harbor Rock (a low dry ledge), lies a
rock with 18 feet water.

j.L i IWI4MJ i -l-UW |ii ^tf i> Utf Mi . l |Wi' liill W I,ilfclijl>

•itiii

CAPE BKETON ISLAND 8E. COAST.

Ronse Point— Rouse Point is a peninsula 60 feot liigh, witii clitts
ot slate, and wooded. It is bold to, except on the SE. side, where
a reef extends 200 yards from the shore. Between this peninsula and
Harbor i'oint is the only secure boat harbor in the bay.

Anchorage.— Oabarus Cove affords during the summer months toler-
ably safe ancihorage in i fathoms, sand and clay, to vessels of moderate
burden. The only other anchorage in Gabarus Bay is the roadstead,
north of Cape* Gabarus, where in 8 or 9 fiithonm, sand, and at the dis-
tance of 600 yards from the high red bauk, a vessel during the preva-
lence of westerly winds may find good shelter and smooth water.

Supplies.— Good water can be obtained with some difficulty from
Irish Brook, 1^ miles from Gabarus Cove, and small supplies of fresh
provisions may be obtained.

Cape Gabarus, low and rocky at its extremity, may be recognized
at the distance of some miles in clear weather by some houses and a
chapel situated on the rising ground, J mile Inland from the cape. A
rocky reef extends eastward 600 yards from the cape; whilst several
islets, ledges, and rocks lie at various distances to the southward.

Mark.— A vessel will pass to the southward of all these dangers by
keeping the Shag Rock— of slate, and 20 feet high— open south of Guyo'n
Island, which is low and bare of trees, and in line with the houses on
the north side of Fourche Inlet, bearing S. 66° W.

Tides.— The tidal streams in the bay are weak, seldom exceeding
half a knot. ^

Louisburg Harbor.— Louisburg contains now only a few scattered
houses, and the ruins of its walls may still be traced on the west side
of the harbor. Its population of 1,000 persons is principally employed
m the fisheries but all cultivate small farms. The land affords good
pasturage, and small supplies of fresh provisions maybe generally pur-
chased. Good water may be obtained from a brook near Gerratt Head,
on the western shore of the harbor. There are two churches on the
north sule of the harbor, but from sea they are not easily distinguished.
There is railway communication with the SE. bar and the town of
Sydney.

Pilots— There are no branch pilots, but any of the fishermen are well
qualified to bring vessels into the harbor.

Coal can be obtained in large quantities, and be put on board
quickly. It is shipped at wharves, alongside which vessels can lie at
all times when the harbor is open ; the mines are distant 21 miles bv
railway.

Ice. -The SW. Arm is sometimes accessible to vessels all the winter.
The NE. Arm freezes over about 15th January, but the ice breaks up at
anytime with southerly winds, andthat arm is only completely closed at
intervals. The first vessel usually arrives about 15ih March, and the
last one leaves about 20th February. Steam vessels coaled at Louis-
burg continuously during the winters of 1882 and 1883.

L0UI8BURU.

The entrance to the harbor is abuuc4()0 yards wide, and beinj; exposed
to the ocean swell, should not be attempted by vessels of hirijo driifr, ex-
cept with a leading; wind, as the shoals on either side are of rock, aiid
the wind often battling and unsteady. There is no channel between
the islands forming the SW. side of the entrance, and at low water
Fort Island is so nearly joined by a rocky ledge to Rocliford Point as
to leave oidy a boat passage.

Automatic Signal Buoy. — A buoy, painted red, and fitted with an
automatic whistle, is moored S. 73^ E., and distant 1^ miles from Louis-
burg Lighthouse. From this buoy a N. 8P W. course will dear the
Broad Shoal and lead to the fairway of Louisburg ITarbor.

Harbor Shoal, with 19 feet water, lies olt'the entrance to Fiouisburg
Harbor, N. 53° B. J mile from Green Island, and only breaks in very
heavy weather. There are reefs extending 250 yards in an easterly di-
rection from Rocky and Fort Islands. It is marked by two black spar
buoys.

The north nhore of the entrance to the harbor is bold-to, except south
from the lighthouse, and 200 yards from the shore, where there is a rock
with 4 fathoms on it.

Nag Rock. — The Nag Rock, which is marked by a red buoy, lies S.
87° VV. 800 yards from the lighthouse, with 5 feet least water on it. The
shoal extending about 750 yards from Rochford Point will be cleared by
keeping Loran Head and Lighthouse Point in line.

White Rock, the shoal ground oil" Russel Point, has extended to the
westward, and the red buoy is now moored in 4 feet at low water, with
Russell Point bearing X. 70° E. distant 300 yards.

Battery Shoal.— The Battery Shoal, lying half way between Battery
and Careening Points, has 3 fathoms least water on it; a black spar
buoy marks the NE. edge of this shoal. A black spar buoy is also
mooi'p<l about \ mile south of Battery Point.

Directions. — To enter the harbor with a leading wind, bring the
lighthouse on any bearing from N. 48° W. to S. 87° W., and run in
upon it until Fort Island bears S. 7<P W. Steer with Fort Island on
the latter bearing until the lighthouse bears N. 48° W., then after
course to N. 87° W., taking care, as the rocky ground ott" the Nag Hock
J9 approached, that Loran Head is not shut in by Lighthouse Point,
until the whol3 of Green Island opens westward of Fort Island; then,
if wishing to proceed to the best anchorage, steer N. 48° W. for about J
mile, then N. 36° E. as Railway Pier Point opens west of Careening
Point. Having passed Battery Shoal, which will be done by keeping
the summit of Green Island open east of Fort Island, steer to the
northward up the cove and anchor in 5 fathoms, over mud bottom,
when Rochford Point touches Careening Point.

Anchorage. — In this anchorage there will be some swell and under-
tow after heavy gales from the eastward, but the holding ground is
good, and the water generally smooth. Vessels sometimes anchor in

tr'P'

iri

CAPE BRETON ISLAND — 8E. COAST.

fi(,:

■ll

the western part of tbu hiirbor, but the Hiichorage is neither j^ood nor
well Hheltered.

Tides. — There is but little tidal stream except at the highest tides,
when at the entrance the rate of the flood is about ^ knot.

Aspect of Coast. — From Cape Gabarus to Cape Breton the land
is of moderate height, and the shore broken into coves and small liar-
bor8,with some hummocks in the back ground, rising to the height of 200
feet. The north coast of Gabarus Bay is steep, the hills 200 feet high, '
rising abruptly ftoui the shore; on the south coast the land is much
lower.

Between Louisburg and Cape Breton there are three small harbors,
Baleine, Little and Big Loran, too intricate and rocky in their entrances
to admit vessels of any harden, but affording excellent fishing stations.

Cape Breton, the extreme eastern point of Cape Breton Island, is
low, rocky, and covered with grassy moors. It is bold to the eastward,
with the exception of a rocky 12foot patch bearing S. 53° E. distant 4
mile.

Lansecoin Island is about 400 yards in diameter and 50 feet high,
and IS bold to seaward ; but a rock, dry at low water, lies between it
and the cape.

Portnova Island is rocky and precipitous, 300 yards in diameter,
and 50 feet high. It is bold to seaward, with the exception of a rock
with only VJ feet water lying 650 yards from its SW. side; but the
Chameau Rock, which is awash, and on which a French frigate was lost,
lies nearly midway between it and the cape, leaving no passage for ships.

The Bar Reef, which runs out from Bar Point to the southward of
]\Ienadou Bay, and more than half way across to the island of Scatari,
was formerly a dry bar covered with sand and grass ; at present the
only part uncovered at high water is the Bar Stone, a single mass of
rock, about 4 feet high, but at low water the reef still dries extensively,
and completely shelters Menadou from the south wind and swell. The
Bar Stone lies <{ mile off shore, and the reef continues ^ mile farther out
towards the west point of Scatari. The eastern extremity a' this dan-
gerous reef, in 5 fathoms, bears S. 15° E. 1^ miles from the west point
of Scatari, and north 2 miles from Cape Breton. A line from one of
those points to the other passes over the east end of the reef iu 6 feet at
low wat^r; and vessels wi.l pass to the eastward of it, if Portnova Is-
land be not entirely shut in behind Cape Breton.

Menadou Harbor, on the north side of Menadou Bay, ^ mile within
Moque Head, is a semicircular cove ^ mile wide. Its shingle beach is
occupied by flsh stages, and its shores by a busy village of fishermen
and small traders. It has two chapels, one of which is distinguished
by a steeple.

The depth at low water in this small harbor is from 10 to 14 feet over
sandy bottom. It is sufficiently sheltered by the numerous rocks in the
bay, and by the island of Scatari, to afford safe anchorage to fishing

i. '-'I

est tides,

the land
mall har-
jUt of 200
feet high,

is much

harbors,
Hitraiices
stations.
Island, is
lastward,
distant ^

;et high,
itween it

liameter,
of a rock

but the
was lost,
for ships,
iward of

Scatari,
sent the
mass of
Misively,
ill. The
rtherout
his dan-
!st point
a one of
6 feet at
nova Is-

e within
beach is
shermen
guished

ieet over

:s in the

fishing

mrm

MENADOU HAKliOli AND I'AHHAGK.

schooners and coasting vessels drawing less than 1«) feet water. Tiie
approach to the harbor, however, is so ditticult and dangerouH that no
written directions could avail.

Tides. — It 1(4 higii water, full and change, at Menadou, at 8h. lam.;
springs rise 5^ feet, neaps .'J^ feet.

The Menadou Passage has a clear deep-water channel of nearlj* ^
mile in the narrowest i)art, which is between the (Ireatand Little Shag
Itocks in the northern part of the entranue. Nevertheless, it should
only be used iu cases of emergency, or in such circumstances of wind
and weather as would insure the not being surprised by the i)revailing
deiMe fog in a channel rendered indirect by numerous dangers, desti-
tute of good holding ground, and in which there is no shelter from the
heavy sea which accompanies all easterly and southerly winds.

Shag and Gary Rocks.— The Shag liock is black, (10 yards long
and 15 feet high. It will, therefore, readily be seen; but a rocky shoal
extends from it 800 yards NB., and nearly 400 yards to the eastward.
In this latter direction there is a patch with 12 feet least water on the
extreme edge of the shoal. The Little Shag and the Cary Rocks, ^ mile to
the eastward of it, can also be seen, being small black trap rocks, respec-
tively and 4 feet above high water. The Little Shag lies 300 yards
north from the west point of Scatari, and the shoal water outside of it
does not extend more than 100 yards.

Neering, Duck, Dick, and Black Rocks. — Neering P^ck, with 9
feet least water, lies 700 yards N. 70° W. from the Shag Kock. Duck
Rock is awash at high water, and lies 330 yards 8. 25° E. from Moque
Head ; and the Mad Dick, with 3 feet least water, lies 400 yards far-
ther to the south. To these <langers on the west side of the channel
may be added the Black Rock, which can always be seen, and the other
rocks in the mouth of Menadou Bay, but they are out of the way of
passing vessels.

Hatch and Ragged Rocks. — The reefs oft' the SW. side of Scatari
can always be seen, and do not extend more than 400 yards offshore.
The Hatch Rocks and Ragged Rocks need only to be mentioned here;
the former being most in the way, will be cleared, as long as the Shag
Rock is not shut in behind the west point of Scatari.

Directions. — The Menadou Passage may be taken without danger
iu case of need under favorable circumstances of wind and weather.
All southerly and easterly winds are unfavorable because either accom-
panied by or liable to the sudden arrival of dense fogs. Winds between
west and north are as constantly free from fogs, and being, moreover,
smooth water winds, are favorable for this passage.

A vessel approaching from the southward with a westerly wind, and
wishing to avoid running to leeward outside of Scatari, should pass
Portnova Island and Cape Breton at the distance of J mile or more,
steering for a remarkable hill called Steering Hummock, which rises
1,200 yards to the eastward of the west point of Scatari. Take care

CAPE HRETON ISLAND — NE. COAST.

'•j'l

V '
l\ :

' :"i

uut to shiit in I'ortnova IhIuikI huliind Caix* Hri^ton until Nurt> tliat the
Kill' Iti^et' lias Ix^eii pasHcd ; ami wIkmi tliit weMi point of Stiatari hflarit
N, .'{(»o \V. or nior*^ to tlic weHtwanl Nt«M'r ho as to toiumI it at a <li.stan«;o
iM^wtu'ii \ iind A niii(>i, io't^pini; ^'railually awn)' to tlie nortliward and
HaHtwnrd, su hh to ]>artH ItetwtuMi tlit^ Litti«t Sliat; Koul^ and tli*^ ii\mg
SIiohI. WlH-n tiic Little Sliay Hocii conioHiu onu with tlu' wost point of
Scatari, or wlu-n the latter Iumii-h to the Kontliwaid of 8. li(»° K. the
8ha^ 8iioaI will lie past, and a conrne may be shaped tor dapu Morien.

It'e.oniin}; from the northward with a fair wind, brinj; the west point
of a(!atari to bear to the Honthward of H. 2<io K., and Hteer Utr it until
the eastern extremity of the Slia^ 8hoal is past, which will be when
the Shat; itoek an<I Mo(pie Head come in one ; then alter course so an
to pass the Little Sha^ and the west point of Scatari at the distance
of o(K) yard;4 ; which having doiie, steer out to the 8E., remembering
the marks for clearing the Hatch Uocks and the east end of the Bar
Reef.

Tides. — The ordinary rate of the tidal streams in the Menadoti pas-
sage is from one to 2 knots, the flood from the southward and the ebb
in the opposite direction ; but they are often very irregular.

Scatari Island. — The natural fe.aturos of this island are similar to
those of the adjacent mainland, the highest hill rising 100 feet above
the sea. It is not permanently inhabited, but is much frequented by
the flsbermen in the summer season (ISflO). Near the center of its
northern shore is the NW. Cove, aflfording a smooth-water anchonige
in southerly winds ; but the holding ground is not good, and vessels
shonUl be |)repare<l to weigh promptly with the change of wind. The
SW. and the SE. sides of the island are broken by the heavy and almost
incessant Atlantic swell into rocky points and coves, which attbrd ex
cellent iislijug stations, but no shelter to shipping.

East Harbor, formed by Hay Island, on the south side of the east
l)oint t H<!atari, does not deserve the name, being merely a very inse-
cure iiiiehorage within the reefs ; but it is used occasionally in tine
summer weatlit>rl)y small vessels employed in the fisheries and in sav-
ing things from wrecks.

Caution. — The principal dangers are on the SE. side, where a reef
runs out ^ mile from Hay Island. Outside of this, and bearing 8. 25^
E. 1^ miles from the lighthouse, lies the Wattie Hock, with 4 fathoms
on it at low water ; and still farther ont, and bearing S, 30° E. H miles
from the lighthouse, there are two rocky patches, 5 fathoms, on which
the sea occasionally breaks.

The Cormandiere Rocks lie nearly ^ mile to the eastward of the
ighthouse. They are small black trap rocks from 6 to IG feet high,
and can therefore always be seen. They are bold to seaward, and
there is no passage between them and the lighthouse for ships.

Mira Bay is open to winds from the eastward, and affords no safe an-
chorage. The Mira River, after tiowing for several miles between pre-

'•y^

MIIU HAY — CAI'E PKRCY.

vi tliiit the
iiri hfliirN
» (listaiKiu
want iind

Ht point of
TP 10. the
)e Muriuii.
veNt point
or ir until
bo wlieu
ir.se HO aH
^ distance
einberinf?
r the Bar

adou pas-
d the ebb

liniilar to
iuet above
lented by
ter of its
nuhopiige
id vessels
nd. The
h1 almost
iittord ex

the east
ery inse-
ly in line
d in sav-

?rH a reef

i{? s. 250

fathoms
, H miles
on which

d of the
eet high,
ard, and

safe an-
reen pre-

cipitous hanks, enters the head of tin bay between points of sand and
shingle, so yards apart. It disciiarm's the waters of the -Mira Lake and
Salmon Itiver, and is the outlet of an interior navigation of al»out '-'(►
miles; 'mt the ordiiuiry tiepth on its bar of sand and stones is oidy I
feet at low water, and seldom exceeds 8 feet, except in extraordiimry

spring tides.

Catalogne Lake has only one foot at low water in its very narrow
outlet, through a sand and shingle beach, 2 miles south of the Mira
Kiver. It is broken into coves, peninsulas, au«l islets, forming pictu-
reH(|ue scenery. There is a church at its head, '{ miles in from the
entrance, and its shores are occ upied by farmers and Hshermeu.

Coast.— Mii'rt Hay, and probably the valley ts river and lake,
define another very remarkable change in the character of the coast
and nature of tue country. Instead of the undulating and compara-
tively fertile laud, and the loug ranges of sandstone cliffs, abounding
in coal, which form the north side of the bay, the country to the south-
ward, including the island of Scatari, is all hummocky land, in wliich
small round or conical hills rise from among swamps, shallow ponds,
and dwarf spruce trees.

Morion or Cow Bay is 2^ miles wide at its entrance, between Capes
Percy and Morien. On its north side, just within Cape Percy, lies
Cow Ueef, dry in part at low water, and extenditig to ^ mile from the
shore. The head of the bay is occupied by fiats of sand and mud,
partly dry at low water, and through which a narrow and shallow chan-
nel leads to False Bay Beach, on the north side of Mira Bay. Being
completely open to easterly winds, Morien Bay affords no safe anchor-
age.

Cape Morien is a bold headland, the shoal water exteiuling only 300
yards from its sandstone (difVs, which abound m coal, and rise on its
south side 150 feet above the sea. It is the NE. extremity of a penin-
sula, which forms the precipitous north shore of Mira Bay for a dis-
tance of 5 miles, and terminates at the shingle isthmus of False Bay
Beach.

Coal.— About 400 tons can be shipped from the wharf in one day
the mines are distant one mile (and one, 100 yards) from the wharf.
About 130,000 tons are shipped annually from Cow Bay.

Ice.— Cow Bay rarely freezes over ; drift ice arrives about the mid-
dle of February and usually disappears about 1st May, tlie bay being
only closed at intervals by field ice. The first vessel arrives early in
March and the last one leaves about Ist February. In 188« coal was
shipped at Morien (Cow) Bay every month in the year, and an iron ves-
sel has made fortnightly visits during the whole of one winter.

Cape Percy is a precipitous headland, where the cliffs of coal-bearing
sandstone rise 110 feet above the sea. Off its north side lies Schooner
Rook, with 6 feet least water, being the shallowest part of a reef which

•

: i'r

;•*

(i2

(.'AI'K URKTON ISLAND — NK. COAHT

vxtuiitlH 8(H) yards from tli« hIiohj. Th« IVniy Rock, witli ■ 'wtt WBter,
lieH 4(M» yiinl.H off tliti NK. Hlioiiltlur of tli« cap«.

Flint Island, Imurinjj N. "r)^ 10. 1 ,"„ milcH from i)n\w Percy, in of hhimI-
Atone, Itrtiki'ti Ity tlio wiiveM, preiMpitoiiN, (i(> f(>(>t lii^li xiid (HMI yanlH
lon^;. On itM nortli point there is a llsli store, where alone boats eaii
hind. Ott" its west end, to tlie distanite of SOO yartls, there are very
irre(;idar NonndiiiKs, >A to 12 fatliomsin a east of th(*h'ad, whittii eause,
witli tile tide, a stron^^ rippling, and nt times a lioavy l)reakin<; sea.

lietween these dangers and tlieeape tliere isaclear einmnel a mile in
breadth, throii);li wliieli an irreunlar tidal stream runs at times li knots.

Glace Bay atVords nosafeanclioia^e. At its head is Dyson i'ond, ex-
tending; 1! ndles inland, and havinfra narrow outlet through sand hills
and sand l)ea(;li, whi(;li is usually dry at low water.

Indian Bay atVonIs a safe anehora^re only in olVstiore winds and fine
weather. At its lieati a dry sand-bar a mile Utun (>.\tendH aiMoss iVoiM
the southern to within 150 yards of the northern shore, leavintj an en-
traiKH' of that breadth into Hrid;;e])ort Harbor, which is a shallow pond
extending L' miles inland. Tlie depth of S feet at low water is all that
can be (tarried into this harbor, the interior of which is occupied by
tiats ol sand and weeds, i>artly dry at low tide.

Coal Mines.— Tlie coals from the mines at nrid^e|)ort, on the south
side of Indian Hay, is conveyed by a railroad alon;; the dry sand bar to
a wharf at its nortliern extremity ; but as tlie shallow and narrow en-
trance admits only small vessels, and the anchorai^e outside ia unsafe,
the export in this manner is limited. The t^oal is said to be of excellent
(|uality and easy of access ; and with the aiiove exception all the out-
jmt is conveyed by railroatl across to the South Arm of Sydney Harbor
for shipnienf.

Anchorage' — The best anchorage is near the middle of the bay, and
within tlie de|>ths of 5 fathoms ; in greater depths the bottom is in geu-
eral rocky, and not to be trusted.

Tides. — The ordinary rate of the stream In tlie entrance is 2 knots.

Sydney Harbor is a tine harbor, being eipially easy of access and
egress, and capable of containing a large number of vessels in safety.
It is 3 miles wide at the outer entrance ; but the navigable clianuel
contracts rai>idly to the breadth of ^ mile between the two bars, which
are of sand and shingle, and extend from tlie shore on eithei side. The
West Arm is open to NE. winds, except at the coal loading ground,
where vessels anchor under shelter of the NW. Bar; and at North
Sydney, where they may lie in like manner under Allen Point.

The South Arm, being completely sheltered from the sea by the SE.
Bar, affords safe anchorage iii every part. Tlie town of Sydney, 3^
miles up this arm, is exceedingly well situated on the west side and sum-
mit of a peninsula 55 feet high, and has a population of about 0,000. It
has deep water close to its wharves, and the arm continues navigable
for vessels to Sydney Bridge, a distance of 2 miles ; and for Imats to

^«i.iii.

SVDNHY — DIRKCTIONH.

Ih of Hand'
<MM> ynnU
ItoiitH rail
1 nvvt ^■^^ry
>i(!li cuitHe,
\ji sen.
I a mile in
'H IJkiiotH.
I'oiid, ox-
Hand liillH

H and tliio
uuss troiH
injr an en-
How pond
H all Mmt
I'Upied by

tlie Noutli
ud bar to
iirrow en-
is nnNafe,
excellent
I the out-
V Harbor

bay, and
is in sen-

; 2 knots.
cesH and
n safety.

channel
•8, which
le. The

ground,
It North

' the SE.
diiey, 3J
md Hiini-
,000, It
ivigable
boats to

ForkH Hridjje, where the tide ends miles aliove the town, and front
which a roatl leads across to the Kast Hay of the Itrasd'Or.

The only drawl)a(!k is the lateness of the spring ; the advance of sum-
mer iM'ing retarded by the cold winds from the neighboring sea, which
is )isnally, until late in May, laden with drift ice, large masses of which
are frequently driven into the harltor by the Nl<]. winds.

Coal (Mill be obtained in any ipiantity, and put on board at the rate
of r)00 tons per day. It is shipped at the wharves, alongside which
vessels (miii lie at any time when the harbor is open ; thu mines are Uitt*
taut tVoin North Sydney L*A miles by railway. .

There are coal wharves, with railway to the mines, at Fishery (!ove,
Wintering Cove, and northward of Freshwater (Jreek ; there is also a
ballast wharf 400 yards southward of .Vinelia Point, at the entrance to
Crawley Creek.

Telegraph and Railway. — Sydney is in telegraphic commnnuratioti
with St. I'ierre, I'laccntia, Xewtouiidland, and Magdalen Islands by
Hiibmarino cables, and with Canada by land lines. It is connected
with Lotiisbui'g by rail.

Telegraph Cables. — (Ireat <;are must be used win^ii aiK^lioring in the
outer anchorage to avoiil the teleguijih cables, four in number. Tlieso
cables are laid down in a southerly direction from Lloyd Cove across
the hariior, and thence in a northeasterly direction seaward.

Water. — The most convenient watering place is at the creek, which
discharges the waters of the Sawmill Lake, a short distance to the
westward of the coal loading ground ; but goo«l water may be obtained
on the east side of the South Ann, also opposite the town of Sydney,
or by the steam water tank, and in several other places where brooku
enter the sea. The country is well settled around thu harbor, and sup-
plies of every kind may bo roadilj' obtained.

Charges. — I'ilotage for vessels of 100 tons to Sydney, !J12 ; to North
Sydney, $11; and for each additicmal 50 tons, |l. Vessels not taking
pilots are re(iuired to pay half pilotage. Tugboat charges as per agree-
ment ; light dues, 2 cents per ton.

The United States is represented by an agent.

Directions. — When approaching the harbor from the eastward pass
the lighthouse no nearer than J mile, and to avoid the Petre Reef
do not haul into the harbor until Daily Point opens out to the north,
ward of Gillivray Point; and to clear the shoal at Petre Point and
farther in, do not approach nearer than A mile, or than the depth of
5J fathoms in running along the eastern shore. When the lighthouse
and Petre Point come in line keep them so, which will lead clear of the
NW. Bar, which is very steep, having .5i fathoms dose-to. When the
wharves at the loading ground bear N. 71° W. the vessel will be well
within the bar, and may haul in and choose her berth in 5 or fathoms,
mud bottom, and at a short distance from the wharves. If bound up
the South Ann or to Sydney, run wilh the lighthouse and Petre Point

•i.
I,
li

H-

CAPE BRETON ISLAND NE. COAST.

in line, or with the former only just shut in, until Mines Point bears
N. 8° E., thence steer i'\ 8^ W. until the SE. Bar lighthouse bears N.
64° E. ; the western extreme of the SE. Bar will then be passed, and
the vessel may either haul to the eastward and anchor in Fishei-y Cove
in 6 or 7 fathoms, mud bottom, or proceed on to the town of Sydney.

Caution. — In beating into this harbor great care must be used, espe-
cially when between the NW. and SE. Bars, both of which are so steep
that the lead will afford little or no warning.

Anchorage. — The anchorage is good anywhere off the wharves of
the town outside a line joining the English church and Shingle Point ;
within that line there are shoals. TLe depth of this anchorage is from
5 to 8^ fathoms, over mud bottom, and there is suflBcient depth for large
vessels all the way to the bridge, between which and the town is the
most secure part of the harbor.

Tides. — The ordinary rate of the streams is half a knot off the town,
but much weaker farther out in the wider parts of the harbor.

The Bird Rock, C feet high, will be seen on the reef, lying 800
yards from Mope Head, and the Bonar Rocks dry at low water, at the
same distance off Bonar Head. There is also a rocky shoal off Katon
Pond, the least water on which, 3 feet, bears from Lawler Point N. T^
E., nearly 1,200 yards. In addition to these dangers, observe that, in
the distance of 6 miles from Aconi Point to Cranbarry Head, the shoal
water for a vessel of large draft frequently extei'ds to nearly a mile off-
shore.

Little Bras d'Or can only be entered by small v-^.raft and boats under
fai'orable circumstances, the entrance being closed with breakers when
there is a heavy sea running, and especially when the strong tide is run-
ning out against the wind. There is a fishing establishment on the
shingle point just within the entrance and scattered houses and farms
at either side.

Great Bras d'Or. — Its entrance, between Carey Point and Noir
Point, is only 340 yards wide, with deep water, and at a short distance
outside the channel is still further contracted by shoals to 220 yards,
measuring from the depth of 3 fathoms on either side.

Within the entrance, off the small light between Duffus and Macken-
zie Points, lies the Eddy Eock, with one foot least water. A vessol will
pass clear to the westward of it by keeping Blackrock Point open to
the northward of Noir Point. On the opposite or northern side of the
channel, from Carey Point to Kolley Cove, a distance of one mile, the
shore is quite bold.

Anchorage. — Off' the mouth of Kelly Cove, in 5 or 6 fathoms, over a
bottom of sand, the anchorage is good, and out of the strength of the
tide ; but it is still more secure farther in, within 200 yards of its head,
where the bottom is of mud and the depth 3 to 4 fathoms.

To this cove, which is a convenient anchorage, we shall restrict our
present notice of Bras d'Or, the object of this chapter b^ing the eastern

GREAT BRAS D*OR ENTRANCE.

*oint bears
56 bears N.
>assed, and
shei'y Cove
■ Sydney,
used, espe-
re so steep

ivharves of
igle Point ;
ige is from
b for large
3WU is the

the town,
)r.

lying 800
iter, at the

off Katon
»oiut N. 1^
ve that, in
, the shoal
a mile off-

9ats under
iikers when
bide is run-
mt on the
and farms

and Noir
■t distance
320 yards,

i Macken-
vessiil will
t open to
ide of the
mile, the

ns, over a
?th of the
f its head,

(Strict our
le eastern

seaboard of Gape Breton Island, leaving the description of its inland
waters for another part of the chapter.

Carey Point, the NW. side of the entrance of Great Bras d'Or is a
shingle beacli, quite bold at its southern extremity, but having a dan-
gerous shoal running out froni it so as to form tbe northern side of the
channel outside for I mile. On many parts of this shoal the depth is
only 3 feet at low water, so that it is shown by breakers when there is
any sea running ; and a wide bar commences immediately outside of it
and continues a mile farther out, with irregular soundings, from 3 to
6 fathoms, over gravel and sand bottom. The shallowest pait, 3 fath-
oms", called the Middle Shoal, lies on the north side of the cliaunel, and
1 J miles from Carey Point. Nearly opposite to this, and on the south
side of the channel, is Blackrock Shoal, extending 400 yards north from
the red cliffs of Blackrock Point, and i mile in a NE. direction.

The Haddock Bank has 4 fathoms least water, and lies from one to
IJ miles off shore midway between Table Head and Aconi Point, the
last k,"ing the NB. extremity of Boulardrie Island, formed in cliffs of
the coal formation, which are ftist yielding to the waves, and from
which a rocky shoal extends to the distance of | mile.

Supplies.— There are houses and farms on either side of the entrance
of Great Bras d'Or, at whi'ih supplies of fresh provisions may be ob-
tained. Water is easily i)rocured. (1860.)

Directions.— Before advancing farther in than Table Island, bring
Carey Point and Duncan Head to touch, bearing S. 36° W., and steer
for them until Cape Smoke and" the north end of Hertford Island are in
one ; then alter course to tie southward and keep those marks in one
astern, running from them for about 400 yards until Mackenzie and
Duffus Points come in one, when steer S. 30° W. for them, or so as not to
open out Mackenzie Point until Blackrock Point and Table Head come
in one.

These last-named well-defined points kept in one astern, or as the
vessel runs from them on a S. 47° W. course, will lead nearly in mid-
channel through the narrow- entrance between Carey and Noir Points;
after which there is nothing in the way of a vessel hauling up for Kelly
Cove. Should, however, the strong flood tide carry her above the cove,
she will find good anchorage 2 miles farther in on the same side, in 5
fathoms, and to the westward of Jane Point.

If the weather should be so hazy that Cape Smoke can not be seen,
run in upon the S. 36° W. course, with Carey Point and Duncan Head
touching, until Blackrock Point is abeam ; then sheer to the southward
until Mackenzie and Duffus Points come in one, and proceed as before
directed.

Tides.— The usual rate of the tidal streams in the entrance is from 4
to 5 knots ; but in the spring, or after long-continued NE. gales, which
have previously raised the level of the Bras d'Or Lake, thev may
o489 5

CAPE BRETON ISLAND — NB. COAST.

amount to G knots. Tbey form strong ripples and eddies, especially off
Carey Point.

In tine settled weather the stream runs out until half an hour before
high water by the shore, and in until half au hour before low water;
but strong winds cause great irregularities. It will be observed, there-
fore, that the stream runs out nearly all the time the water is rising
and in nearly all the time it is falling.

The rise of the tide diminishes rapidly within the Bras d'Or, and be-
yond Barra Strait it becomes nearly or altogether insensible.

Caution. — The dangers of this coast are such as to render great cau-
tion necessary at night or in fogs, when 30 fathoms, or at least 20 fath-
oms, water is as near as a stranger should approach ; the latter depth
beiug in some parts within 2 miles of the shore.

Hertford and Cibouz (Bird) Islands are long and narrow islands
of sandstone, precii)itous on every side, nearly bare of trees, and ^ mile
apart. There is uo passage for ships between them, but boats or small
craft can pass through a narrow channel which is distant from 100 to
200 yards from Hertford Island and between it and the middle rock.

Hertford Island is the highest, and 100 feet above the sea. It is dis-
tant from Cape Dauphin 1^ miles, but the dangerous Hertford Ledge,
which has 5 feet least water, extends from it nearly halfway across to
the cape, leaving a channel 1,200 yards wide and carrying 7 or 8 fathoms
water. To avoid this ledge vessels should keep well over towards the
cape, from which the shallow water does not extend beyond the dis-
tance of 400 yards.

Ciibouz Rock. — From the outer point of Ciboux Island a reef runs
off ^ mile to the NE. ; and the dangerous Ciboux Shoal, with 15 feet
least water, and on which the sea at times breaks heavily, lies g mile
farther out in the same direction.

St Anne Harbor (formerly Port Dauphin) is capable of containing
any number of vessels in security, but the entrance is very narrow,
with a tide of 4 knots; and there is a dangerous bar outside, over
which a stranger unacquainted with the leading marks could only
safely rely on finding 12 teet.

In a strong NE. wind, and especially when the tide is running out,
the bar is covered with heavy breakers. The harbor is completely
sheltered by Be;tch Point, whioii is formed of large rolled stones and
shingle, and reaches across from the northern to within 180 yards of the
southern shore ; it is quite bold at its southern extremity, and the en-
trance channel between it and the Weed Pond Shoal carries 13 fathoms
water, but is only 130 yards wide. Within the entrance, on the north
side of the channel, lies the Port Shoal, of mud, extending J mile in
from Beach Point, and just cleared to the southward by the line of
Weed Pond Beach and Bar Point in one.

Cape Dauphin, the dividing point between St. Anne Bay and the
Great Bras d'Or, is a hifeh and precipitous headland and the northeast-
ern termination of the range of mountains which separate them.

8T. ANNE HARBOR — DIRECTIONS.

Water.— Tbe best watering place (18G0) is oti tiie northern side of
St. Anne Harbor, 1=| miles from the entrance, where a torrent descends
a ravine in the mountains o*" St. Anne, which rise preoipitonsly to the
heiffht of 1,070 feet above the sea.

Directions.— Vessels bound to St. Anne Harbor from the northward
with a fair wind should pass to the NW. of Ciboux and Hertford
Islands, avoiding, if it be wished, the rocky Gfathom fishing ground,
iu the mouth of the bay, by keeping welt over towanls Cape Dauphin.
Go no nearer to the shore between Bentinck and Island Points than
the depth of 7 fathoms. Observe that the line of Bentinck Point and
Cape Smoke in one clears the shoal off [sland Point in 5 fatiioins, and
that in approaching the bar Cape Smoke should be kept open. Before
arriving at the steep outer side of the bar, which is distant one mile
from the entrance, bring the white gypsum cliff of Macleod Point in line
with the summit of Old Fort, and steer for them until Fader Point is
seen oidy just open dear of VVilhausen Point (the vessel will then be
only about 100 yards distant from the shore near Bar Point) ; then i)ort
the helm instantly and run from the last-named leading marks, keep-
ing Fader Point a little open, until Conway Point is seen to the west-
ward of Ijead-in Point, or until the gypsum elite of Macleod Point is
open only half a point to the southward of Beach Point, or until the
latter bears S. 20c W., and is distant J mile ; then again alter course,
and keeping Conway Point in sight (to avoid Weed Pond Ledge), steer
so as to pass Beach Point at a distance between GO and 100 yards.

If the gypsum cliff of Macleod Point can uot be made out, pass VVil-
hauseu Point, at the uistanye of 250 yards, steering for the Old Fort
until Fader Point is only just open; then proceed as already directed.

Having now entered the harbor, avoid Port Shoal by not opening out
Bar Point to the northward of Weed Pond Beach, until the shingly
Price Point bears to the northward of N. 71^ W. ; the vessel will then
be within the shoal and may haul to the northward and anchor to the
westward of it, in 8 fathoms, mud, and out of the uvsam of the en-
trance.

Anchorage.— The best sheltered anchorage is in t'.M i-ntrauce of the
north arm, the riding elsewhere in so large a harbor being at times
rather rough for a small vessel. The XK. gales, on entering thi har-
bor, between mountains 1,000 feet high, and jn^y 2 miles aj'^rt, blow
with concentrated force. They may be expected at any time after the
middle of A igust, and a vessel should be well moored to withstand
their fury.

Tides.— The rate of the tidal streams iu the eiilrance is from 3 to 4
knots.

The Coast from Bentinck Point to Cape Smoke assumes a les.s sterile
appearance, the mountains receding a short distance from the sho-e, so
as to leave space for scattered farms. At a brook called French River,
and especially at Breeding Cove, there is good landing for boats.

CAPE BRETON ISLAND NE. COAST.

At the distance of IJ miles south of Beiitinck Point there are clitts
of white gypsum ; and at Indian Brook, one mile north from Island
Point, there is good lauding. Island Point looks like an island, bnt is
a small wooded peninsula joined to the main laud by stony beaches
inclosing McDonald Pond.

Ingonish Island is of rock, ^ mile in diameter and 200 feet high.
The Kast Kock.s, 12 feet high, lie ott' it to seawrrd and extend out
to the distance of nearly 800 yards. There are several high rocks
close to the outer shores of the island, and a small rock oft" its SVV. ex-
tremity at the distance of 1(50 yards. The NW. side of the island forms
a small bay, in whi(!h there are several buildings (18(50) and where the
small fishing vessels and boats are sheltered from the swell from the
southward, and from all but easterly winds. From the west point of
this small bay a spit and reef exte?id nearly halfway across to Archi-
bald Point, leaving a channel of 18 or 20 feet in de()th, but so narrow
and crooked that only 14 feet can be relied on at low water.

Ingonish Bay, between Archibald Point and ('ai)e Smoke, is S-^ miles
■wide and 2;| miles deep. It is divided into north anvl south bays by
Middle Head, a long, narrotv, rocky, and prei}ii)it()us peninsula, off
which lies the Fisherman Rock at the distance of 200 yards to the SE.
At the head of South Bay there are two ponds, having a common outlet,
which boats can enter only at high water. Th(Me are several houses
near these ponds, as well as on the tongue dividing the two bays, but
the principal settlement of Ingonish is on the north side of the bay.

The mountains in rear of Ingonish are the highest on this coast, at-
taining an elevation of 1,390 feet ; and Cape Smoke, its south point,
rises precipitously from the sea to the height of 050 feet. The squalls
from these highlands are at times very violent.

Anchorage. — Vessels usually ancshor on tho north side of ingonish
Bay within Archibald Point, shifting their berths as the winds may
render necessary. The bottom is a thin coating of sand over hard mud.
The anchorage is unsafe with easterly winds, which send in a very
heavy sea.

Cape Egmont is a comparatively low headland of granite, and nearly
bare ot trees. At Neal and Blackbrook Coves, which are distant 2^
miles and 4 miles respectively, to the southward, thero is good landing
for boats. Oft' South Point, between those coves, there is a sunken rock
lying 400 yards offshore ; and there is also a rocky shoal, with 2 fath-
oms least water, i mile from the shore at Rocky Bay, where there are
several buildings, 2 miles to the northward from Ingonish.

Aspee Bay is 8 miles wide and 4^ miles deep. There are flourishing
farms in the neighborhood ; the principal trade is with St. Pierre, con-
sisting of the following exports, viz., cattle, sheep, butter, oak staves,
etc.

The fishermen supply the Newfoundland fisheries with a large quan-
tity of squid for bait.

A8PEE BAY — CURRENTS.

Telegraph. — The shore ends of the Atlantic telegraph cables from
Newfoundland are lauded hero, and the telegraph station, a prominent
building, is seen standing to the westward of a small village on the
north side of the bay. A fishing village is situated on a barren part of
the ba> inside White Head, and a church stands far back on the hills in
the center of the bay. On its north side is Wilkie Sugar Loaf, a re-
markable conical hill 1,200 feet high.

Supplies. — To the southward of this, and occupying the head of the
bay, are three ponds with narrow entrances through sandy beaches, and
into which boats can only psiss at high water. There arc settlements
at all these ]>ond8, where fresh ^.rovisivjns and water may ive obtained.

Anchorage. — The best anchorage in Aspee Bay with NW. winds is
off the North Pond, in 8 or 9 fathoms, sand bottom j a-m with south
winds off the South Pond, or in the cove under White Head, which,
with a small inland lying close off it, forms the SB. point of the bay.
In this cove there is a settlement for prosecuting the fisheries, and good
landing for boats in all but northerly winds. It is the anchorage gen-
erally preferred, especially by small vessels, as being the least embayed,
and the most sheltered from the prevailing swell from the SE. Fisher-
men state that there is good holding ground in this cove inside the
depth of 10 fathoms (blue mud). To vessels unable to beat around
Cape North, or in want of supplies, this bay affords convenient anchor-
age; but it is only safe in fine weather and with westerly winds; a
vessel should therefore be in readiness to weigh instantly on the
approach of a wind from the opposite quarter.

Coast. — The NE. coast from St. Anne Harbor to Cape North is bold,
mountainouit, and f.ee from outlying dangers, except near Ciboux or
Bird Island. The mountains attain the elevation of 1,390 feet above the
sea, and are composed of primary and metamorphio rocks, principallj'
granite, with clay slate, in nearly vertical strata. These rocks form the
princii)al headlands ; while sandstone, conglomerate, shale, limestone,
and occasionally beds of gypsnm and red and yellow marl occur on the
intervening shores. These last-namiMl rocks, the lowest members of the
coal formation, rest uucouformably on the older rocks, and they are
occasionally covered with beds of drift oand, red clay, and bowlders.
They are seen in the valleys and are di-splayed on the eastern slopes of
the mountains, where they form cliffs which are washed by the sea.
They furnish, with the beds of drift, tolerably productive soil, support-
ing, with the aid of the fisheries, a thinly scattered population (1860).

Currents.— Notwithstanding the bold nature of this coast wrecks
have not i)een unfrequent upon it in the dense fogs which accompany
the easterly winds. They have generally occurred to vessels running
and steering, as they sujiposed, a safe course to pass St. Pauls Island
into the Gulf of Sr. Lawrence. Unaware of, or not allowing for, the
current so frequently found "uoning onto" the gulf from the northward,
and which had been actin;, upon their starboard bows for many hours.

Ksu-a^.

BRAS DOR LAKES.

' ;;i

setting tliein many miles to the SW. of their reckoning, they ran on
shore under full sail.

On one oceasioii this current was found running out of the gulf for
many successive hours at the rate of 2 knots from the north ; at another
time its rate was one knot from the NW.; and at a third it was imper-
ceptible. After long-continued winds from the east or NE., which raise
the level of the water in the Bras d'Or Lake and neighboring harbors, it
is not unusual to Hud a current of one knot running for several succes-
sive days along the laud from olf St. Anne to near Cape Iforth, wliere it
meets the current oat of the gulf and is turned to the east with a great
rippling. The iisherraen afllrm that it as ofteu runs in the opposite
direction; and again, that at other times there is a regular alternatiou
of the flood and ebb streams.

These remarks are intended to show th« inconstant nature of these
currents, and the consequent great (tare required for the safety of a ves-
sel when ap:-.roachinf.>. this neighborhood in the fogs which so often hide
the lights on St. Pari Island.

OAPE BRETON ISLAND; UTTLK AND GREAT BRAS D'OR LAKES.

Boulardrie Isit-. id — The Great and Little Bras d'Or are two channels
'•ading to the Bras d'Or Lake. BonUirdrie Island, which forms these
' Ixannels, is 22 miles long, with an extreme breadth of 5 miles. Sand-
stone, in some parts containing coal, shale, limestone, and gypsum, are
found on its shores, which are thinly settled (1860); the interior being
thickly wooded, and risin^' to the height of 400 feet above the sea.

St. Andrew Channel, on the SB. side of Boulardrie Island, is
easily navigable, being from IJ to 2J miles wide, with a great de[>th <rf
water, but it is only accessible to shipping from within or round tine
SW. extremity of Boulardrie Island, the direct entrance from sea through
the Little Bras d'Or Channel, adu.i' ting only small craft and boats.

Five miles within this narrow entrance th« ekannwl bn^cins tot.vpand,
and there is secure anchorage ott" the establisiiment of Messrs. Gammel
and Moore ; which, with its wharf and a chapel, will be seen on Chapel
Point (1860). From the settlement here tUtse are roads across to Syd-
ney and its coal mines.

Great Bras d'Or Channel.— Having entered the Great Bras d'Or
Channel, as already directed, there is nothing in the way of vessels
until they approach tht - >.al ui'ands. These two islands are low and
wooded, and separated from the meuntainot ^ northwestern shore by a
narrow and difficult chi^uif^l, which is almost closed to large ships at
its NE. end, by a reef which runs out J mile from the islands in that
direction.

The Seal Reefs, with 2 feet least water, lie to the SB. of the Seal
Islands, directly in the fairway of vessels. There is no passage for
yessels of large draft between them and the islands, and thP ship chan-
nel between them and the shore of Boulardrie Island is only 240 yards

im^-Kite-

SEAL REEFS — COFFIN ISLAND.

wide. This narrow passage has 2 small rocky shoals on the eoutheast-
erii side of the channel ; one, vrith 11 feet water on it, lying 200 yards
west from Long Beach, and* the other, with only 4 feet on if, 400 yards
'n the same direction from McLean Point.

The sonndings in this narrow part of the channel are from to 13
fathoms, over rocky bottom, the rate of the tidal streams from '2 to 2 J
knots, and the mark which hads tliroujjh is, Dnffus I'oint kept jnst
open of Duncan Head, bearing N. 43° E.

Otter Harbor is to the northward of the island, and affords seciire
Jinchorage in from 5 to 9 fathoms, mnd, the best berth being ott" the
nioath of the small bay of the main, which forms the head of the har-
bor, and has a small islet in its center. The western point of this bay
has a reef oflf it to the distance of 100 yards. Its eastern point, a i)en-
insula separating it from the shallow cove to the eastward, is named
Harbor Point.

Directions. — When approaching the anchorage in Otter Harbor from
the eastward the reef ott" the islets will be cleared by keeping some
part of the Seal Islands to the southward of Seal Point until Harbor
Point appears to tlie westwar<l of the westernmost islet, then haul in,
so as to pass the islet at a distance betwen 60 and 200 yards, and when
Otter Point is seen to tlic northwnrd of Otter Island the vessel will b©
within the reef and may choose her berth at pleasure.

Port Bevis is a large cove running in to the NVV., and curving round
the southwestern termination of thd range of mountains, which has
continued unbroken all the way from Cape Dauphin.

Anchorage. — The anchorage in the port is quite secure, in from 7 to
4 fathoms, mul; the latter depth being ^ mile in from the entrance,
where the cove is divided into two shallow arms.

Th'o ontuiii :e to this port being free from danger, the only direction
necessary is t3 anchor about two-thirds over towards tlie northeastern
shore; the Sdundings being rocky and comparatively shoal, 3 to 4
fathoms, 200 ,\ anls out from the opposite shore.

Gypsum abounds in the cliff on the SW. side of Port Bevis, and also
along the shore to Red Head at the entrance of St. Patrick Cliannel, a
distance of 5 miles.

CofBn Island, a small narrow bank of red clay fast wasting by the
waves, lies i mile to the northward of Kemp Head, the B^Y. extreme
of Boulardrie Ishmd. A leef extends off either end of Cothn Isiand to
t'e distance of ^ mile; and there is a channel for small craft, but not
for ships, between it and the ishore. A vessel will pass to the north-
ward of the ret-f if McParland Point be not shut In behind Krazer Point.

Rocky Patches. — In the channel, to the northward ot Coflin Island,
tliere are two small rocky ])atcbe« on which no less tlian i fathoms could
be found, hut Nrhich nevertlieiess had better be avoidoil in a large ship.
One of* them lies N. 52^ W. HiU) yards from Coflin Point, .wl the other
S. 30° E. 900 yards from Macrae Point, on the northwestern shore.

HBA« DOR LAKES.

In the 17 iniloa of the Great Bras d'Or Channel just described from
Carey Tuiut to Kemp Head, the only good anchorages are those which
have been noticed. In tlte channel tho long reaches allowing of con
Hiderable swell, and in many parts the great depth of water, amounting
ott' Otter Island to 58 fathoms, render the anchorage insecure.

St. Patrick Channel extends from lied Point to Whycocomagh, a
distance of 21 miles in a westerly direction, with an average breadth
of one mile. It is navigable throughout for vessels of large draft, but
not much frequented nor much known. Its banks, moderately high,
rise into hills of considerable elevation at a short distance from the
shore, and the land is generally susceptible of profitable culture. Tbis
channel during rough and blowing weather is subject to heavy squalls
of wind, making navigation often dangerous to open boats under sail.

Anchorage.— There are excellent anchorages iu Baddeck, Cow, and
Indian Bays on the north side of the channel, and Washaback liiver
on the south side; indeed, the whole affords fair anchorage and good
holding ground. But for these anchorages, as well as to navigate safely
St. Patrick Channel, a pilot should be employed, and on this account
the directions will be brief.

Baddeck Bay is free from danger to its head, where it receives the
waters of a small river. The best anchorage is after passing the long
shingle beaches.

Baddeck Harbor, formed by Eidston Island on the western shore
of Baddeck Bay, affords snug anchorage for small craft. The village
of Baddeck derives some little importance from being the county town.
One or two vessels of large burden are built here annually, and several
schooners sent with agricultural produce to Newfoundland, whilst a
small steamer i)lios between Baddeck and Sydney twice a week during
the summer months. Fresh meat can be purchased at the village, and
good water obtained from a brook one mile west o^ the harbor.

Directions. — With a fair wind, having passed Bed Point, which is
bold-to, steer N. 35° W. for the church, which, situated close to the
shore, foims a prominent object about ^ mile east of the village. Con-
tinue on this course until the western passage opens, then steer S. 55°
W., and passing the low beach point of Kidston Island, anchor in 4^
fathoms, mud.

Cow Bay has a sandy shoal with 18 feet water stretching from its
west pointy and by passing round its east end good anchorage can be
obtained in 7 fathoms, rau i.

Indian Bay receives the waters of two rapid but shallow streams
called Middle and Baddeck Elvers; the latter flows through a rich
alluvial valley for some miles. This bay is gradually filling up and is
very shoal near the mouth of the rivers, but there is good sheltered
anchorage in other parts.

Washaback River, on the south side of St. Patrick Channel, is
more i)roperly a (jreek, as it only receives a small run of indifi'erent

kmtumJkd

8T. PATRICK CHANNEL.

water about 3 miles from its entrance. Ve.s.sels of large draft may
ttnd siiii}? aiKiliorafjo soiiie little (lisJtaiice up tliis (sreek, but tlie eutraiiee
is narrow, and tbe deep-water channel runs clone to Plaster Point, the
east point of entrance. Oysters of a jjood quality abound up t!ie creek.

Directions.— St. Patrick Channel, to the eastward of Maciver Point,
being wide and free from danger, may bo navigated without dilliculty,
the use of the lead giving sutticient warning in approachingeithei' shore ;
but to the westward of Maciver Point, a shoal extending ^ mile east
irom a small stony islet called Bell Rock, and on the oth^'r side of the
Maciver Bank, of mud, with 4 feet least water, extending SVV. one mile
from Maciver Point, narrows the channel to 4 mile.

To pass between these shoals, bring Cranberry Point to touch Cow
Point, bearing X. 43^ E., and steer with this mark on astern until Bell
Eock comes in line with Flume Islet, when alter course to the south-
ward, keeping this latter mark astern until the Narrows church is seen
touching the bank of Curlew Point, S. 48° W. This latter mark
will lead in raid channel between Kel Shoal and the rock off Green
Point; on approaching Curlew Point alter course to 8.65° VV., when
ba\ iug cleared its low marshy point, steer for the sandy spit on the
Houth side of the entrance.

Having parsed this spit, which is bold- to, steer with the Narrows
church and sandy spit astern, to clear the shoal extending 200 yards to
the southward from Narrows Point, which having passed, the vessel
will enter a lake l^ miles wide, 6 miles long, and free from danger.

The water is shoal towards the head of the lake, but the bottom is
mud, and the anchorage safe. There are sheltered anchorages, with
deeper water, on the SW. side of Indian Island and the south side of
Maciver Island, but as these ''vc not frequented, it is not necessary to
describe them.

There are no tidal currents, nor any perceptible rise of tide, but the
waters of the lake are affected by the prevalent winds, being highest
during NB. winds, and lowest during SW. winds; the difference of
level is seldom more than one foot.

Little Bras d'Or Lake is miles long from Kemp Head to Bara
Strait, and from 3 to 5 miles wide. The depth of water in it is very
irregular, exceeding 60 fathoms in some parts, while in others there
are tlangerous shoals. There are settlements thinly scattered along
the shores of the lake (1860).

Double Island and Burnt Shoal.— Double Island, lying at the
entrance of St. Patrick Channel, between Red and McKay Points,
should not be approached on its eastern side nearer than J mile, or
the depth of 6 fathoms. Half a mile SW, from McKay Point is Burnt
Point, from which a reef runs out 350 yards.

Boulaceet Harbor is 700 yards wide at the entrance between Par-
liament and Gillis Points. The latter is the western point of entrance,

taife»aai^<'i.. 'a tt.iii! fc ifet>fj- -

URA« DOR LAKK8.

'<lt^

Ui;,t

and tlu' only dniiKer tu \m avoidt'tl \h the nw( whicli ruiiH out 200 yards
to the «'ust ward.

Prowedinj; suiilliward from Iloulaciu^t Harbor, llie 8li<»r« iis l)ol«l for
the lir.st li iiiilea; it th<Mi lie»H)ine!S daiiv:eroitH to HtraiijjtMa for th« re-
iiiaiiiiii;; 2 iiiiles to liarra Htrait ; nhoaU extending otY' Lit' )f.( iiaiit Pond
and .Mn<!pli(>rs(ni Point,

Macphee Shoal. — OW tlie southeastern shore of the Little Hras d'Or
Ij!ik(' tlie eastei'nniost daupn- is ]\Iac|>ii('eSii(»al, witii 18 feet least water
and 'f mile ofl shore. It l.oars from Hla(!i< Point N. 14° K. one mile;
and with muoh rocky and irnvidar souiulinj^s to the northward of it,
lies in the entrance of Ht. Andrew Channel.

Big Bhoal is an extensive rooky bank with very irregular sournlinKS.
Uesiiles several patcjhos of 3 fatiioms, there is one near the northern
edjj:e wliieli dries at low water.

Christmas Island. — The shoal water extends only 300 yards ott" this
island l,o liie northward, and there is an excellent harbor within it for
boats and small craft, the narrow etdrance, carryingO feet water, being
from the westward.

A channel has been dredged southeastward of Christnnis Island; the
west side of the ehanuel is marked by 4 red spar buoys, and the east
side by 4 black spar buoys.

Anchorage. —There is good anchorage, excepting in sti'ong NE.
wind.s, .\ mile to the westward of the island, in the bay between it
and Neilban Cove, in 9 fathoms, mud ; observing that the shoal water
extends 400 yard.s from the island in that direction. A chapel, a large
white wooden ?niiiding, will be seen on the mainland near the island
(18f!<>\

Barra Btralt, cotnmo ily called by the country people the Big Nar-
rows, is l\ ndl 's long and ^ mile wide, excepting at its northeastern
entrance, whe;e the breadth is reduced by the sand and shingle beaches
of Uniacke and Kelly Points.

These points are connected by a railroad bridge, the draw of which is
on the southeastern side of the strait.

The beaches are bold at their extreme points, but shallow on their
northeastern sides to the distance ^ mile from the shore. There are
settlements, on the siiores of the strait.

Barra Shoal, of rock, .md ^ mile in length, lies across I he entrance
of the strait, and, together with t!',e sh<'al oft" Kelly Point, render the
passage indirect and ditlicult at times for n vessel of large draft. The
least water, 1 1 feet, bearing from Uniacke Point X. 32° B, 1,300 yards,
is just cleared to the southwaril by the line of Derby Point and Kelly
Point in one, bearing S. 11° W., or by the summit of Hector Eill in
line with Uniacke Point S. 4G° VV. ; but those marks only clear the
least water, not the whole of the shoal, which they lead over in 3 fath-
oms water. Kelly and Hector Points, touching and bearing S. 43° W.,
lead into the entrance of the ship channel, which is to the southward

HAKRA 8H0AL — DKNNY RIVIiR.

of the shoal, betwutiu it niid the shoal oti' Kelly Point, and wlii(;li carrioH
from to 15 fathoms water over rocky bottom. Within the strait the
depth in miicli K>'t)<i>ter. an<l the HliuaLs art* bold on either Hi<h*.

Tides. — Tlh' rise of tlie tide in Harra Strait in nearly insensible,
ainonntin^ onis to a few inehes; it is ditllciilt to distin^nisi* it tVnm
changes of level caused by the winds. The rate of the streams is also
very irrejfnhir, and seldom exceeds one knot, excepting when incri-ased
by winds, prt'sent or at a distance.

Directions. — With the assistance of the chart, and the des(;ription
of the dangers already };'^'«"i little dirtlunlty will be expt'rieiiecMl in
passinn throiigli the Great Hras d'Or Oiiannel imd into the LittU' Uras

■'■ preferreil, in order

ssci 1ms advanced as

iirds the western

Mats are tonching,

points tonchin}; until

d'Or Lake, the northern shore of which hIk

to avoid the daii(<;erous 131^ Shoal until

far as Bonlaceet Harbor; from thence stei

end of Christmas Island nntil Kelly and !.•

when alter course to SW., or so as to keep tli

the west side of Neilban Cove bears S. 26° E.; then steer 8. 08° VV. for

Uiuacke Point nntil the leadinj; marks for clearing the shoal ofV Kelly

Pond, namely, Derby Point open to the northward of Kelly Point, come

ou; then a course may be shapetl so as to pass through the strait into

the Great Bras d'Or Lake.

The Great Bras d'Or Lake is 12 miles wide, fron; Barra Htrait to
the entrance of St. I'eter Inlet, and 37 miles long, measuring from the
head of the west bay to that of the east bay. The <lei>th of wat jr in
this marine lake is extremely irregular.

McKinnon Shoal is an extensive rocky bank, with 18 feet least
water, stretcliing out 1^ miles from McKinuon Point. A vessel will
pass to the eastward of it by keeping Hector and Kelly Points touch-
ing anil bearing NE.

The Rivor Denny has its source in the eastern slope of the hills east
of Judiqiie. It enters the Great Bras d'Or Lake through two deep water
inlets called North and South Basins, the real mouth of tlie river being
at the west extremity of the South Basin. Eight feet water can be
carried up the river for 2 miles, and boats may ascend, with some <lini-
culty, on account of sunken driftwood, about o miles farther to the
bridge ; but above this the stream becomes rapid and shalKr.v.

The main entrance of this river from the lake lies between the low
wooded entry island and Mackeane Point, and is one mile wide. It may
easily be recognized as the first opening in the low land after passing
the hilly country forming the west side of Barra Strait. If the channel
be kept, more than 4 fathoms water can be carried for a distance of 6
miles into the South Basin, and an excellent anchorage obtained off the
settlement at Plaster Cove.

Excepting the range of hills between this river and W^est Bay, the
land is generally low and wooded, and the absence of any remarkable

■••MdiiiMi

!<P***'-7S

7fi

BRAH DOK LAKKFl

III!'

fiMituroH iiDikeH it (|iiito tuuinHHiiry for itM Hiit'e nuvi^atioii that there
Hhouhi \w II loiiiil kii<>\vUMl);(4 of thu ixiiiitH and oltji^utH iiaiiuMl.

Cod Shoal. — Th«^ (Jod ShoaU, i^xttMi.sivu rocky tlsliin^f baiikH, with 21
tu(>t Uy.iHl wati^r, atitl lyiiiK ^ to .'iiniluH to tho south of the Moiitlii^ni <-ii-
traiKte of Harra Strait, are only ilaii}(eroiiH to vhhmoIh of htr^e draft.
IIt><;tor and (Iniacku Poitits in oms and hearing N. 'JU^ K, lead h mile
to the \v«^st^vard of them, and thronjfh the chanind, 2 mile.s widi^, be-
tween them and MuKinnnn Shoal.

Kelly ShoaL — 'L'iie approach to this Hhoal in indicated by the open-
ing out of the marks for leatling to the north wanl of them, namely, the
Houtli extremity of the Red iHlandH bearing X. (iU^ !<}., and in one with
Mill Cape, a rocky and precipitoiiH point, distant 2 miles from the islands.
There is deep water all around these shoals, but the passage to the
westward, between them and Macrae Point, is the most direct ; and the
marks for ulearing them on that side are Trap Point and Indian Point
in one, bearing 9. 21° B., the former being the extreme western point
of Chapel Island, in St. Peter Inlet, and which will be recognized by the
large crosH on its summit. These marks lead over the west end of the
Kelly Shoals in .'> fathoms water, and also close to the eastward of the
3-fathoms shoal otf Cape George, which having passed, the vessel will
enter St. Peter Inlet.

St. Peter Inlet. — On the eastern side of the entrance to this inlet
are Macnab Creek and Soldier Cove, which have depth of water sutti-
oient for vessels of large draft, but can only be approached by passing
between dangerous nhoalr ; but '>v keeping over towards Cape George,
and steering so as to pas:-. tb .i^estward of Chapel Island, there is
nothing in the way until t'le vessel arrives oil' its west point, where the
ship channel between < and Dock Point, a shingle beach of the main-
land inclosing a smali i>ound, ia ^ mile wide.

Anchorage. — Off the western side of Chapel Island there is good
anchorage in 11 fathoms water, mud, with the large cross bearing N.
10° E., the chapel near the south end of the island, S. 64° B., and at a
distance of 3U0 yards off shore. This anchorage is between Chapel and
Doctor Islands, the latter lying ^ mile to the westward of the former
and diagonally across the inlet, leaving passages on either side about 4
mile wide.

Of these passages the easternmost, between the island and ludian
Point, is so intricate as to be only fit for small vessels ; but the ship
channel, which curves round the island and between it and the main-
land to the westward, is clear from detached dangers, and carries from
8 to 10 fathoms water. It is, however, reduced by shoals on either side,
and is still narrower and more crooked in several other parts of the in-
let. Referring, therefore, to the chart, the aid of which, or a properly
qualiUed pilot, would be indispensable to a stranger, it will merely be
added that the channel is everywhere deep enough for the largest ves-
sels that could enter the Bras d'Or, until they arrive at the Haulover,

that there
(I.

ikH, with 21
oiithurii (;ii-
hir^e (Iriit't.
lend A inilo
iM wide, be-

y the open-
iiaiiieiy, the
ill one with
the IhUiikIs.
uige to the
it ; and the
(liaii Point
Hterii point
ized by the
end of the
vard of the
vessel will

this inlet
(rater siitti-
by passing
pe George,
id, there is

where the
' the main-
re 18 good
t)eariug N.
M and at a
/hapel and
the former
de about :J

ad Indian
it the ship
the main-
irries from
ither side,

1 of the in-
a properly
merely be
^rgest ves-
Hau lover,

-'^^'^S^^&ii^^mm^^i^^^^^^f^^^mmmsm^^mmm&mwmms'rrrw^

..■^.-^

*^.*r.

IMAGE EVALUATION
TEST TARGET (MT-3)

1.0

I.I

liilM |2.S

1.8

ui lii

31°

■UUu

Photographic

Sdences

Corporation

1.25

1 1.4 |l.6

■« 6"

►

23 WEST MAIN STREET

WEBSTER, N.Y. M580

(716) 872-4 Jd3

«'

CIHM/ICMH

Microfiche

Series.

CIHM/ICMH
Collection de
microfiches.

Canadian Institute for Historical Microreproductions / Institut Canadian de microreproductions historiques

-■ '.-wjiiP^ffBJSSMWeS

ST. PETER INLET — MtADAM POINT.

at St. Peter. To reach the wharf they would have to paas over 15 feet,
whicli is the depth of water between st and Cara[)l)ell Ishmds.

Barachois and Johnson Harbors. — For these, togetlier with Camp-
bell Harbor, and other csoves and poud» capable of attbrding ahi^lter to
small vessels and boats, and also for the dangers in tl.n passage between
those places and the Kelly Shoals and lied Islands, the mariner is re-
ferred to tlje chart.

Red Islands, so called from their cliffs of red sandstone and clay,
are four in number, two of them very small, and they are so arranged
as to form a secure boat harbor, open to the southward towards the
mainland, in wliich direction they are prolonged under water, so as to
leave a navigable passage onlj' J mile wide.

Lochmore Harbor, a harbor for small craft, on the southern shore,
distant 10 miles from the Red Islands, is formed by a long shingle
beach, having its entrance from the eastward, and 8 feet water on its
bar. There is a chapel here, and the country is well settled between
the sea and the hills, which rise to the height of 500 feet i mile back
from the shore.

Christmas Fond. — Directly opposite, on the northern shore of East
Bay, arid distant 2i miles, Christmas Island will be seen, and i mile to
the westward of it the sand and shingle beach of Christmas Pond,
forming another boat harbor, rendered difficult of access to strangers
by the shoals off either end of the island. On the mainland, nearly
opposite the island, and ou the banks of a considerable stream, are the
Indian chapel and settlement of Eskiscogumic (1860).

Macphee Island is composed of three parts connected together by
shingle beaches. The easternmost part of the island is joined to the
mainland by a beach of sand and shingle, one mile in length in a NW.
direction; and to the westward of this beach, and ou the northern side
of the island, there is a small but secure harbor for small vessels and
boats. The reefs off' the southern side of this island, and also off its
east and west points, are exceedingly dangerous, being covered by only
2 or 3 feet of water, and extending J mile from the shore.

Marble and Macdougal Points. — Half a mile eastward of Marble
Point, a shingle beach incloses a large pond, and has a long reef run-
ning out from it to the eastward, and at the distance of ^ nn\e from the
shore. On the eastern side of Macdougal Point, 1 J miles farther to the
east, there is a similar pond. The shoal water runs out 400 yards from
this point towards the shoals which have been mentioned off the oppo-
site shore, the channel between them being 1,300 yards wide.

Cosset Point. — On the northern shore of East Bay, and 3 mil^s
eastward from Macphee Island, there is aiiother small harbor open to
the eastward, and formed as usual by a sand and shingle beach, from
which a dangerous reef runs out 800 yards to the SE.

McAdam Point, one mile farther to the eastward, has also a reef off
it to the distance of 350 yards; and one equally long runs out from a

BRAS D OR LAKES.

point a little farther up the bay on the southern shore. The remaining
tlistance of.'U miles to the head of Bast Bay is free from danger.

Head of East Bay.— At the head of East Bay shingle beaches iu-
close a large pond, which boats can enter, and ascend to the bridge, a
distance of '^ mile. The pond continues one mile farther, shallow and
full of mud and weeds; and from its head the distance is 2 miles to
Forks Lake, and 4 miles to the south arm of Sydney Harbor, into which
thelake.just named discharges its waters.

The main |)ost road from Elalifax, which crosses the Gut of Canso at
Port Hastings, and passes by St. Peter, continues along the southern
shore of East Bay, and from its head across to Sydney Harbor. There
is a chapel on this road near the head of the bay, and there are thinly
scattered houses along the whole route.

Malagawatchkt Harbor.— The entrance of this fine harbor, between
Gillis and Pellier Points, the latter on the south side, is f mile wide,
but Sheep Island, separated by a narrow channel from Pellier Point,
reduces the breadth to 800 yards. At the distance of one mile in from
the entrance, at the first Narrows, the channel contracts to 320 yards,
and the deep water tb half that width ; it then expands into a flue basin,
affording secure anchorage to any number of the largest ships. Prom
the north side of this basin the second Narrows, 270 yards wide, and
carrying 4 fathoms water, communicates with the inner harbor, which
has deep water quite to its head.

Oillis Shoal, lying otf Gillis Point, is the principal danger to be
avoided iu entering Malagawatchkt Harbor. There is deep water all
around the shoal, but the widest and most direct channel into the har-
bor is to the southward of it, where the breadth of the deep water be-
tween it and the reefs off Pellier Point and Sheep Island, is 600 yards.
Pellier Point Reef is also dangerous. The marks which just lead
to the southward of it are Militia Point and the south extremity of
George Island in one, bearing S. 60° W., and it will be cleared to the
NE. if the south side of the first Narrows be not shut in behind Sheep
Island ; this last-named mark leads over the northern side of the reefs
off Sheep Island.

Directions.— To run into Malagawatchkt Harbor with a leading wind,
bring Militia Point and the south extremity of George Island in one,
bearing S. 60° W., and run towards them until the northern side of
Sb'dep Island comes on with the eastern point of Johnson Cove, bearing
S. 88° W. ; then alter course to 8. 88° W. or so as to keep those marks
on, until Militia and Pellier Points are in one, bearing S. 47° W.; then
steer N. 58° W. until Militia Island and '^ellier Point are touching,
aiKl then N. 75° W., or so as to keep in aannel, until the vessel

arrives at the first Narrows, when the oou. ^ust be changed 2 points
to the northward, or so as to avoid the shoal just within the Narrows,
which extend 250 yards from the southern shore, causing the channel
to curve to the northward. Having passed the Narrows, which will

-^!iH.^->,*?S-

■ mil I > LM i'i ,

MALAQAWATCHKr HARBOH — WEST BAY.

The remaiiiiiig
>iu danger,
ingle beacbes in-
to the bridge, a
her, shallow and
uce is 2 miles to
irbor, into which

Gilt of Oanso at
ng the southern
Harbor. There
there are thinly

harbor, between
, is 5 mile wide,
n Pellier Point,
one mile in from
5ts to 320 yards,
into a tine basin,
St ships. From
yards wide, and
r harbor, which

tl danger to be
i deep water all
lel into the har-
i deep water be-
id, is 600 yards,
which just lead
th extremity of
B cleared to the
n behind Sheep
3ide of the reefs

I a leading wind,
i Island in one,
ortheru side of
n Cove, bearing
lep those marks
J. 47° W.; then
t are touching,
intil the vessel
iianged 2 points
n the Narrows,
ig the channel
3WS, which will

require great care, the deep water being there only 100 yanks wide, the
vessel may be anchored over towards the northiM-a side of the basin, in
6 or 7 fathoms, mud, and sheltered from all winds.

Pellier Harbor, into which, with a fair wind, the depth of 21 feet
can be carried without dilHculty, is formed by the peninsula of Pellier
Point, which has several buildings on its SVV. extrenuty, and a long
shingle beach which shelters the harbor and forms the eastern side of
the entrance.

Directions.— Approaching Pellier Harbor from the eastward, and by
the preferable channel to the northward of Militia Island, where the
deep water is 250 yards wide, attend to the marks already given for
clearitig the reef off Pellier Point. Bring Militia Point to bear B. 06^
W., and run towards it until Pellier Point and Sheep Island are touch-
ing ; then steer for the harbor's mouth, observing that George Island
must be shut in behind Militia Point to clear the reef off Militia Island.
In entering the harbor, haul round the shingle beach at 200 yards dis-
tance and anchor within it in 4 or 4^ fathoms, mud.

West Bay is 3^ miles wide at entrance, between Militia Point and
Poor Islet, on the southern shore. The soundings are irregular to an
extraordinary degree, numerous rocky shoals, covered by only a few
feet of water, having a depth of 20 fathoms or more near and between
them. In this bay cliffs of red sand and clay, and of sandstone alter-
nating with shingle beaches, inclosing ponds or uniting [)eninsulas to the
mainland, form the predominating features of the southern shore, in
rear of which, and at distances varying from a half to one mile, ri(?os
a range of wooded hills to the height of 600 feet. On the northern
shore a parallel range of wooded hills runs westward from Little Har-
bor, separating West Bay from the River Denny, and attaining the ele-
vation of 750 feet. These hills are more steep than those on the oppo-
site side of the bay, leaving a smaller space for settlements, which are
not extensive, excepting at Little and Malagawatchkt Harbors.

Little Harbor, which is distant IJ miles to the NW. from Militia
Point has a narrow but unobstructed entrance, 80 yards wide, and with
3 fathoms water, and which leads into a land-locked basin f mile across,
and carrying 3.J to 4^ fathoms water, over a bottom of mud.

Between George Island and Madeod Point on the southern shore, a
distance of 3J miles, are numerous rocky shoals, so scattered about that
a chart on a large scale resulting from this survey, and to which the
following remarks refer would be indispensable to the safety of a large
ship among them.

Paddle Shoal lies S. 58° E., one mile from George Island, and ex-
tends ^ mile farther in the same direction, the least water on it being
13 feet. Malagawatchkt Point kepi in one with Pellier Point, bearing
N. 26° E , or midway between it and Militia Island, will lead to the SE.
of the shoal, and between it and the Outer Shoal, which, with 22 feet
least water, lies ^ mile from it to the southward. The marks for the

'::^"'Lv'i^^^*Wr?*^i^t-liV^i^eEtr^'.'^fe?v.'.-

HRAS D'oK lakes.

soutlieasfein edge of the last-named shoal are Malaga wachkt Point just
open to the eastward of Militia Island bearing NE.

Morrison Head will easily be recognized, being a small peninsula,
60 feet high, with red clirts, and united to tiie southern shore by a shingle
beach. It has a small boat harbor on its eastern side, and shallow water
off it to the distance of \ mile. There is also a rocky bank, with 4i
fatlioms water, lying jj mile from it to the NE.

Macrae Point is distant 2^ miles to the SE. of Morrison Head, and
midway between them lies a rocky l)ank, with 21 feet water, the north-
ern end of which is .listant !f mile north from Scott Eiver. A more
dangerous shoal, hiiving only U feet water, lies northward of Macrae
Point, and CAM yards off sliore ; after which there are no farther dangers,
exce|)t a small patdi of 4:\ fathoms up to the 3fathoms shoal off Cape
George, at the entrance of 8t. Peter Inlet.

Mcintosh Cove is easily recognized by Mcintosh Islet, which, with
the reef uniting it to the mainland, shelters the cove from easterly
winds. The anchorage here is good in 4^ tiithoms, mud, but there is
little room, the cove being only ^ mile across, and the deep water only
200 yards wide, from .'? fathoms to 3 fathoujs on either side.

The Mclnnis Shoals, of rock, lie off the mouth of this cove, the
least water, 18 feet, bearing from Mcintosh Islet N. 80° W. about 300
yards; and from Mclnnis Point, on the west side of the cove, north
i mile. Vessels may pass between these shoals and the islet, but the
widest and best passage is between them and the point. The outermost
of these shoals, on which the de|)th is 22 feet, extends to the distance
of J mile ]Sr. 80oW. from Mclnnis Point.

Black River — Off" the mouth of Black River, 2 miles farther west-
ward, there is another confined anchorage sheltered by McKae Islet
and its reefs, which to the eastward unite it to the peninsula of Goose-
berry Pond, and to the NW. run out to the distance of 750 yards;
but the place is narrow and intricate and only lit for small vessels.

Ballam Shoal is an extensive rocky bank, with 17 feet least water,
running out ^ mile to the eastward from Ballam Head, from whence to
Head Bay Cove, which affords shelter to boats, the distance is 2 miles.
Clarke Cove.— On the northern shore of West Bay a group of
wooded islands, about 50 feet high, with cliffs of red sand, clay, and
bowlders, and connected by shingle beaches when not separated by nar-
row channels, will be seen extending from George Island to Ranald Is-
let, a distance of 4 miles to the westward. The anchorage is good be-
tween them and the northern shore of the bay, but especially in
Clarke Cove, which may be approached either through the narrow
channel between George and Cameron Islands, or by the wider one
between Cameron and Green Islands. This last is J mile wide, but a
dangerous reef, with only 5 feet water on it, extends from Cameron
Island 600 yards across towards Green Island, and reduces the navi-
gable breadth to 400 yards.

fichktPointjust

mill! peiiiimnia,
ore by aHliirif^Ie
(I shallow water
y bank, with 4i

ivsoii Head, alul
ater, the north-
iiver. A more
i^ard of Macrae
irtlier dangers,
slioal ott" Cape

at, which, with
from easterly
I, but there is
eep water only
de.

this cove, the
5 W. about 300
lie cove, north
e islet, but the
The outermost
to the distance

i farther west-
y McKae Islet
isula of Goose-
of 750 yards;
ill vessels.
et least water,
rom whence to
nee is 2 miles.
ly a group of
and, clay, and
arated by nar-
[ to Ban aid Is-
ge is good be-
especially in
:h the narrow
the wider one
le wide, but a
rom Cameron
uces the navi-

WE8T BAY — HEAD BAY COVE.

Ploda and Crammond Islands.--Floda Island and the two Cram-
mond Islands are of similar formation to those already described, pre-
senting cliffs of red sand and clay to the sea, and being from 50 to 70
feet in height.

Between the two Crammond Islands there is a secure harbor for
small craft and boats, having otf its SH. entrance Smitii Shoal, one of
the principal dangers in West Bay. The least water, only 3 feet, is on
the southwest side of the shoal, and bears SK. 050 yards from the south
point of the eastern Crammond Island, and N. 77° E. 1,100 yards from
the south point of the western island, from which a reef runs out to the
distance of (iOO yards towards it, leaving only a narrow channel bo-
tweeu. The SE. extremes of Floda and Tailor Islands touching, and
bearing N. 21° E., lead close outside of this shoal, which is i mile in
diameter.

The anchorage is not good around these islands, because of the great
depth of water, which amounts to 25 fathoms between them and Mid
Shoal, which has 3 fathoms on it, and lies N. 43° W. l mile from the
NE. point of the Crammond Islands.

There is a deep and clear channel on the west side of the Crammond
Islands, between them and Spruce and Widow Points, the only dangers
being a shoal, with 15 feet least water, in Malcolm Cove, and the reefs
off either end of Dumpling Island.

Macleod and Moss Creeks, and North Cove to the northward of
Widow Point, afford secure anchorage in from 3 to 3i fathoms, mud,
but must be entered through channels only 80 yards wide, from the
depth of 3 fathoms to 3 fathoms on either side.

Head Bay Cove.— The head of West Bay between Spruce Point
and Ballam Head, is 1?^ miles wide, and 3 miles deep from Spruce Point
to Head Bay Cove, which affords shelter to boats. The head of the bay
has no secure anchorage, and on its northern shore there are dangerous
reefs, especially at Magnus Islet, which lies SW. nearly one mile from
Spruce Point, and J mile off shore. Off the first point, westward of
Spruce Point, a reef extends eastward J mile, and oft" Magnus Islet, in
the same direction. A reef partly dry connects this islet with a po'int
i mile to the westward, and then runs out i mile to the southward to
the depth of 3 fathoms, and an equal distance farther with 22 feet
stretching nearly across the head of the bay, and to within A mile of
Ballam Head.

5489 6

CHAPTER IV.

WEST SIIOUE OF GULP OF ST. LAWRENCE AND SOUTH SIIOIIE OF
EIVER ST. LAWRENCE FROM MIRAMICHI BAY TO GEEEN ISLAND.

Escuminac Point, theSE. poiut of Miraraichi Bay, is of peat, upon
a very low sandstone cliff, and is wooded with spruce trees, which
form a dark ground for the white lighthouse on it, rendering it so ci ii-
spicuous that it can be seen at times from a distance of 13 or 14 miles.
It is 80 difficult, especially for a stranger, to distinguish one point of
this low coast from another, that this lighthouse is very useful to ves.
sels bound to Miramichi, and making the land trom sea. It also
points out the jmsition of the dangerous Escuminac Keef, which exiends
2 miles out to the northward from the lighthouse to the 3fathoms mark,
and 2.^ miles to 5 fathoms at low water. A vessel, drawing 21 J feet, is
reported to have stirred up the mud 4 miles N. 78° E. of Escuminac
lighthouse without touching bottom.

Miramichi Bay is nearly 14 miles wide from the sand bars of Black-
land Poiut to Escuminac Point, and GJ miles deep from that line across
its mouth to the main entrance of the Miramichi, between Portage
and Fox Islands. The bay is formed by a semicircular range of low
sandy islands, between which there are three small passages and one
main or ship channel, leading into the Inner Bay or estuary of the
Miramichi.

Tides.— It is high water, full and change, at Escuminac Point at
4h. 10 m.; springs rise 4 feet, neaps 2 J feet.

Coast— At 6| miles from Escuminac Point, along the low shore of
the mainland, is Huckleberry Gully.

Several lobster factories have been built between Escuminac Point
and Escuminac village, the most conspicuous at Herring Cove and Win-
ter Portage, distant one and 2 miles respectively from Escuminac light,
house.

The lioman Catholic church, west of Escuminac village, has a square
tower, and is a conspicuous object from the eastward, when north of
Escuminac Point.

There are houses, where some of the pilots reside, for 2 miles along
the shore to the eastward of the South beacon.

Huckleberry Island has decreased considerably, being now only one
mile long, and elevated 33 feet above high water. The gullies on each
side of this island are almost dry at low water. Fox Gully is difficult
88

FOX ISLAND PILOTS.

TTH SHORE OP
3EN ISLAND.

I of peat, upon
ce trees, wbich
Bring it so con-
13 or 14 miles,
h one point of
y useful to vea.
I sea. It also
, which extends
•-fathoms mark,
ring 21J feet, is
of Escuminac

I bars of Black-
}hat line across
tweeu Portage

range of low
isages and one

estuary of the

ninac Point at

e low shore of

cuminac Point
Cove and Win-
3cumiuac light.

:e, has a square
when north of

r 2 miles along

g now only one
gullies on each
uUy is difficult

to distinguish, and the church at French village can not be recognized.
There is, liowevcr, a conspicuous clump of pine trees on French Kiver
Point. A black spar buoy, in 2 feet water, marks the entrance to
Huckleberry Gnlly.

Fox Island, 3'| miles long, in a SK. direction, is narrow and partially
wooded ; like I'ortage Island, it is formed of parallel ranges of sand
hills, which contain embedded drift timber, and have evidently been
thrown up by the sea in the course of ages. These islands are merelj'
sand bars on a large scale, and nowhere rise higher than 50 /eet above
the sea. They are incapable of agricultural cultivation, but yet they
abound in plants and shrubs suited to such a locality, and in wild fruits,
such as the blueberry, strawberry, and raspberry. Wild fowl of vari-
ous kin<is are also plentiful in their season, and so also are salmon, which
are taken in nets and weirs along the beaches outside the island as well
as in the gullies.

Portage Island has extended considerably southward, and the north-
ern part of Fox Island has been washed away. Several conspicuous
houses have been built on Portage Island, the most prominent, a lob-
ster factory with <lwellings attached, on the east coast, about lA miles
from the south extreme of the island ; also a similar group of buildings
on the west coast, at the same distance from the north extreme. Port-
age Island shows from a distance in three parts, composed of clumps of
trees (JI feet high, with marshes between.

Miramichi Bar commences from the SE. end of Portage Island, and
extends across the main entrance, and parallel to Fox Island, nearly 6
miles in a SE. direction. It consists of sand, and has not more than a
foot or two of water over it in some i)arts at low spring tides. There
is a part near its SE. end called the Swashway, where the depth has
increased to 10 feet, whilst it has decreased in the Ship Channel to 17
feet at low water, or 22 feet at high water in ordinary spring tides.

Horseshoe Shoal consists of sand and gravel, and is of great ex-
tent. The least water on it is 3 feet, and it is se})arated from the shoal
on the inner side of Portage Island by a narrow and intricate channel,
which is seldom or never used.

Inner Bar. — To the southward, the Horseshoe is separate' '"om the
shoal which connects together Fox, Egg, and Vin Islands, by lie very
narrow ship channel (over the Horseshoe or Inner Bar), which is only
200 yards wide.

Pilots. — Pilotage is compulsory in Miramichi Bay and Itiver. Pilots
are generally to be met with in the entrance of the bay, though their dis-
trict extends eastward to Magdalen Islands, southward to Kouchibou-
guac Kiver, and westward to Miscou Point.

Tugs may be obtained from Chatham by signal to Escuminac light-
house, but there is no regular charge.

Bar Buoy, a can buoy, painted black and white, in vertical stripes,
and numbered 1, is moored in 22 feet water, at the south extreme of

MirUMICni BAY TO ORKKN I8LAND.

tlie outur bar, with K.sciiminiu; li^^litliouHO bearing S. 75<^ 10., diHtaiit (\\
inlioH, iiiul soiitli extreme of Hiicjkli'berry Isliiiid 8. 20*3 VV. (Jhme
Hotitli of this buoy thoru in n (h^ptli of ',\2 feet, tlie western liiiiit of u
deep (^liiuiiiel from seaward.

Lump Buoy, a can buoy, painted lilack and numbered 2, i8 moored
in 1({ feet water on a shoal between tlie Hli, extreme of the bar and Vox
Island, and lies N. 43'^ VV. -westerly, distant 1,.S(M) yards from \i\\v IJuoy.
A black spar buoy lies a short distaiuie northward of liiimp Huoy.

A can buoy, painted red and numbered 3, lies in 13!) feet water, N. 34°
W. nearly 1 ,-„ miles from Bar Buoy, and at the HVV. anj^le of the bar
northward of the Swashway. Tlie water shoals rapidly to 11 feet,
northward of this buoy.

Spit Buoy, a can buoy, painted black and numbered 4, is moored iu
18 feet water, at tlie east extreme of a shoal extending; one mile from
the northern end of Fox Island, and lies with Portajjc Island lijjfht-
houso bearinfj N. 40^ W., distant nearly 1{\) miles, and NW. extreme
of Fox Island S. Mo W.

A can buoy, painted red and numbered 5, is moored in 18 feet water,
bearing 8. SCP W. distant 1 1',, miles from Spit Buoy, and at the eastern
edge of the inner bar. Three buoys similar to No. 5, numbered re-
spectively 0, 7, and 8, mark the channel southward of Horseshoe 8hoal,
Nos. and 7 being eastward and No. 8 westward of the lightvessel.
They are moored in 18, 21, and 20 feet water respectively.

A can buoy, painted red and numbered 9, is moored in 23 feet water,
at the SW. extreme of Horseshoe Shoal.

Three spar buoys, painted black, lie southeastward of Grandoon
Island, the two eastern buoys are in a depth of 16 feet, and the western
one in 1!) feet.

Grandoon Buoy, a can buoy, painted red and numbered 10, is
moored in 25 feet water, 400 yards southeastward of a shoal extending
from the shore eastward of Oak Point.

Anchorage. — There is good anchorage, in 4 or 5 fathoms, between
the Horseshoe and the southern end of Portage Island, where vessels
may safely anchor during the summer mouths.

Within the buoy, on the SW. extreme of the Horseshoe Shoal, is the
usual place where vessels, bound to sea, anchor, to wait for a wind, or
high tide, to enable them to cross the inner bar.

Tides. — It is high water, full and change, at Portage Island light,
house al 4h. 45m. ; springs rise 5 feet, neaps rise If feet, and neaps
range 5 of a foot. Easterly winds cause the highest tides and north-
westerly winds the lowest.

Prom observations made during the survey of 1885, the flood stream
was found to flow strongest through ship channel towards Portage Is-
land; whence it divided, a strong stream that runs southward along
the vfest coast of that island meeting the flood stream there. The
stream then decreases in strength, and distributes itself generally over

.iA.*.

MIKAMICM' HAV — DIRKCTIONS.

K., (liHtailt 0:^
)o W. Close
>rii limit of a

il L', Ik moori'd
<^ l)ur hihI Fox
rom Hiir lUioy.
inp IJiioy.
t water, N. 34°
{le of tli« bar
lly to U feet,

I, is moored in
one mile from
I Island liglit-
NW. extreme

1 18 feet water,
[ at the eastern
, numbered re-
jrseshoe Shoal,
he lifjhtvessel.

I 23 feet water,

of llrandoon
Au\ the western

mbered 10, is
loal extending

lonis, between
where vessels

oe Shoal, is the
for a wind, or

e Island light.
uet, and neaps
lies and north-

le flood stream
ds Portage Is-
athward along
m there. The
generally over

MiramicJii Hay, tlu^ greatest veloeity being obstTVed in the ehannel
south of Horseshoe Shoal, and between that shoal and the I'ortage
Island.

Southward of Horseshoe Shoal, the ebb stream runs in the dirirtion
of the ehannel, straight to seaward, its velocity gradually ditninishing
as ihe bay is reached. It is joined by a stream running down the west
side of I'ortage Island, which tletlects it slightly to the southward.
The stream down Ship (Jhannel is not very strong, and runs in the line
of that channel. There is scarcely any ebb stream eastward of the
liar Buoy.

The greatest velocity of tidal stream ascertained near Miramichi Bay
was 2^ miles an hour.

At the anchorage south of Portage Island, the ebb stream makes
about an hour after high water, and runs 7 hours, whilst the Hood
stream begins about 1^ hours after low water, ami runs 'itV hours, with
about half an hour slack water between each tide.

Directions. — Kscuminac Point, having been made, should be rounded
in 5 fathoms by day and 10 fathoms by night, or at distances of 2^ and
4 miles, respectively ; thence steer for the liar buoy, which should be
passed close to on its south side, and immediately alter course to bring
the beacons or lights at Preston beach in line, bearing S. 4P B.

Keep the Preston Beach beacons or lights in line until theSwashway
beacons or lights are also in line, bearing S. 8(P W. ; then steer N. 54°
W. for a distance of 3 miles, which will lead to the Spit buoy. Con-
tinue that course until the light-vessel at the inner bar bears S. 72° W.,
when the spit oft" Fox Island will be cleared, and a course may be
steered for No. 5 buoy, at the eastern edge of the inner bar. With a
long vessel, buoys 5, 0, and 7 should be brought in line before reaching
No. 5 buoy, and then to obtain the deepest water in the channel, 18
feet, vessels should pass (luite close to the buoys and on the south side
of them. From No. 7 buoy steer for No. 8 buoy, and thence for No. 0,
at the southwestern extreme of Horse Shoe Shoal. From No. 9 buoy
steer N. 82° VV. to the eastern extreme of Oak Channel, passing GOO
yards northward of the southeastern spar buoy. Not more that 10 feet
at low water will be found over the flats southeastward of Oak Channel.
There are only 15 feet for a short distance in the direct line from No.
9 buoy to the southeastern spar buoy, but the mud is so soft that with
a strong fair wind vessels can force their way when drawing 2 feet more
water than the apparent depth.

From the eastern end of Oak Channel the course is S. 50° W. to
Grandoon buoy, passing close north of the northwestern spar buoy ; or
if the spar buoy be seen steer for it, and then for Grandoon buoy. Pass
close southward of Grandoon buoy, and then alter course to S. 72° W.
until Oak Poiut beacons are in line, bearing N. 30° E. ; keep these
beacons in line astern past Mussel-bed buoy, and up to Narrows buoy.

The mark, Black Brook mill-chimney, on St. Andrew Point, open

■.•tH^^rr^^^ B?a i!r>a-,jK WSi'itW

i-f.t^^-'^

.Aim

MIKAMICHI HAY TO (JKl.KN IHLANI).

north of till"! tr»M>H on Slmldriike InIiuhI, now IimkIh ovvv 13 U>H water
only, and Sln'l(lraU«^ Islantl IlKlitH in lino ovor 15 ftn't. Tim Hlioal Moutli-
wPMtwanl nl .Slii^ldniko Island has apparently oxtcndtMl.

Hlack Krook mill is sitnated on St. Andrew I'oint, ami has a larjjo
chimney, whieh mIiowh plainly from (Jrandoon hnoy.

The Inner Bay of Miramichi is ot' tjreat extent, beinj; about l.'i
miles lonK IVom ils t^itrantie at Fox Island to .Sheldrake Island (where
the river may prop«'rly be said to (loinmemie), and 7 or 8 miles wide.
The depth ol" water aeroHs tli- bay is snllhiient for the hufjest vesselH
that ean moss the iniuM- bar, Ik nff li'j lathoms at low water in onlinary
spring tiili's, with mnddy bottom.

Egg and Vin Islands are on th(> southern sitle of the bay ; the tlrst
gmall, l()w, and swampy, the other much larger, beintf 'J j miles l«)n|,',
and for the moKt part thickly wooded.

Vin Harbor is to the southward of Vin iHland, and must be ap-
proached around its west cud, which is distant nearly M miles from the
north point of Fox Island. It is quite sheltered from all winds, ami
has plenty of water for the larjyest shiiis that can enter the inner bay

Anchorage.— Anchor near the center of the harbor, in 10 or 11
fathoms, mud bottom.

Tides.— Spriiifjs rise 5 feet, neapH 3 feet, but the rise is at nil times
uncertain, neap tides sometimes not ranginfj above a foot and sprinp tides
not above 2 feet. It must also bo remembered that the a. m. tides rose
hipther in fjeneral by 2 feet than the p. m. tides in the beginning of
Aufrust, which was the only opportunity of observing them.

Directions.— A pilot can readily be j)rocured to take a ship into Vin
Harbor, or with the assistance of the chart, as follows : Steer S. 5(P VV.
from the 8VV. buoy of the Ilorse-shoe for about 3 miles, and then to the
southward around the west end of Vin Island, at a distance not less than
3 mile, until the sandy i)oints on the south side of the island open, bear-
ing N. 5!)o E. Steer for them, keeping them just open, and on a|»proach-
ing the sandy S\V. point of the island sheer to the southward sudi-
ciently to give it a berth of 150 yards as the vessel rounds it into the
harbor. Do not go to the southward of the line joining the sandy jmints
of the harl)or, or she will be on shore on the sandy shoal whieh extends
off the main land opposite. The harbor is a bay of the island, '^ mile
wide and 000 yards deep.

The long sandy Vin Spit and shoal of the main runs out to the north-
ward, nearly to the line joining the sandy points of the harbor, but
leaves a narrow channel to the eastward, which continues for about 2
miles, and may be considered as a prolongation of the harbor in that
direction, or towards French River Point. French liiver is small and
shallow, and has a village of Acadians and a church, which bears S.
65° \V. from Fox Gnlly, from which it is distant 1^ miles. The space
to the eastward of the line joining Egg Island and French Kiver and
in the bay to the southward of the latter, is occupied by flats of sand,

;y.ii*i:,v_-

VIN HARHOIt — HIIKLDHAKK INLAND.

( f«'i>t water
hIioiiI .south'

lia.s a liirf^e

IK about 13
III ml (wlit>ro

miles widi'. '
y:t'st vvh.scIh

ill onliiiiiry

ly ; tlio llfHt
iiiik>.s l«)iit;,

iiUHt h(> ap-
ilt'sfrom the
wiiuls, aiui
e inner bay
ill 10 or :i

at nil times

sprinp tides

II. tides rose

lepfinniiig of

tiip into Via

Br 8. 5()o VV.

then to the
ot less than
lopen, bear-
11 approach-
iward siilJi-

it into the
andy jmiiits
lich extends
land, '^ mile

the north-
harbor, but
for about 2
bor in that
< small and
ch bears S.

The space

1 Kiver and
Its of sand,

mud, and eelgracs, the home of oysters, lobsters, and otiu'r shell (Ish.
Shallow and intrieate boat ehannels lead through the.se Hats to Fox
and Huckleberry (}ulli(>s.

Vin Bay is re than .'{ miles wide and nearly as deep. I'oint Quart,

its western point, is a l(»w eliir of sandslone with hiuh trees, .{(^ mJloH
from the west end of V\n Island. Tiiere is rooiI an<!hora;,'e in the east-
ern parr oi this bay in .'{ fatiioms, 'inid bottom, and about ■} iiiil«> to the
westward of the i.sland. The western side of the l)ay is shallow. In
its SW. corner is HIack IMver into which )» feet can be carried at low
water throiiph a narrow and dilllciilt channel, and the river has 3
fathoms in it for .some distainie \>ithiii tlu^ eiitraiuie.

Vin River also runs into this bay -J^ miles to the southward from
the HVV. point of the island. It is a .smaller river than HIack Uiver,
haviiijj only (I feet at low water in its entraiuie. There is a small but
neat church on its eastern shore, a short distaniie within its entrancie,
and llourishiiif; farms on either side, where supplies may best be ob.
tabled. The best watering place will also bo found at this river; but
it is ditlleult to obtain large supplies of good water in so tiat a country
near the sea. There is a tolerable road from V' in Itiver to Chatham,
the principal town on the Miramichi Itiver.

Point Cheval, bearing S. 87° VV. nearly 3 miles from I'oint Quart,
is sandy, with a clump of high trees ui)on it.

Immediately to the westward of Point Cheval is the shallow Napan
Bay and Kiver, which boats can ascend for several miles, or as far as
the tide reaches. Above that point the river, which is small, runs
through a fertile and well-cultivated valley, extending westward in rear
of the town of Chatham.

Middle Ground is a long sandy bank, which stretches down the
center of the estuary from I'oint Cheval and (-vtends Irom it n miles to
the eastward. The east end of this bank will be i'l.-ared by keeping
Freii(!h Kiver Point open to the eastward of Vin Island, bearing S. (}80
E. The Ship Channel is between the Middle Ground and tin' north
shore of the bay.

Sheldrake Island is low, swampy, partly wooded, and has two
buildings on its eastern side, which were formerly used as a cholera
hospital. The island is i\ mile long by \ mile wide, and is separated
from the north shore by a channel A mile wide, but with only one or 2
feet in it at low water. Shallow water extends far oil' this island in
every direction westward to Bartiboque Island and eastward to Oak
Point

Murdoch Spit and Murdoch Point are two sandy points on the
south shore, 4 mile apart, with a cove between them, and about a mile
SW. of Sheldrake Island. The entrance of Mirimichi Kiver is ^ mile
wide between these points and Moody Point, which has a small Indian
church upon it, and is the east point of entrance of Bartiboiiue Kiver.

St. Andrews Point, lA miles above Murdoch Point, and on the same

ill

8.8

MIRAMICHI BAY TO GREEN ISLAND.

or Houtl), side of the river, is St. Amlrews Point showing as tlie extreme
of the land from Sheldrake Island. Both these points were wooded at
the time of the survey, in 18;i7, and used as leading marks.

Bartiboque River is ^ mile wide at the entrancse, between Malcolm
and Moody Points, but contracts to 300 yards a short distance within,
where a wooden bridge is thrown across. Bartiboque Island lies in the
entrance of tlie river, and has steep banks or clay clifts on every side,
and is nearlyjoinetl to the shore to the northward by asandy spit. The
narrow channel into the river passes close to the east end of the island,
^iid has not more than 4 feet in it at low water.

Oak Point. — Returning back to the eastward, along the north shore,
the first point requiring notice is Oak Point, nearly opposite Clieval
Point. The eastern part of this point has dark-colored sandstone
clitt's, about 12 feet high and forming au extreme point, with a beacon
on it; it is used as a leading mark with a white beacon which stands
N. 34° E., at the distance of % mile from it on the shore of the l)ay.
The latter beacon is lofty and large, and shows so consi>icuously on the
dark background of the wojds that it can be easily seen on a fine day
from Fox Island.

O-randoon Island, low and marshy, and difficult to distinguish from
the main land till very near, is distant 2 J miles from Oak Point; and
3J miles northward of Quart Point. Farther eastward, along the
northern shore of the Inner Bay, are Burnt Church and tlie Indian
vilhige and small river of the same name; also Hay Island, and the
Acadian villages of Upper and Lower Il^"eguac, inhabited bv fishermen
and farmers, lie out of the line of ship navigation.

They will require no further notice here than to remark that there is
a clear channel, with 3^ to 2^ fathoms water in it, to the northward of
the Florseshoe and the shoals of Portage Island as far northeastward
as Hay Island, where a narrow channel leads out to sea through the
Neguac Gully.

Miramichi River maj^ be said to commence at Shi Idrake Island ;
for below that point the Inner Bay, with its low and widely receding
shores, bears no resemblance to a river. At its entrance, the country
begins to rise into gentle undulations, terminating in steep banks and
clili's of sandstone, which in some places at tain a height of 50 feet above
the river. The settlements, too, increase in number and extent, and soon
become continuous on either side, dot ted here and there with steam saw-
mills. Written directions, however, will not much avail above Shel-
drake Island, not only on account of the contracted nature of the navi-
gation, but also because there are few leading marks of a permanent
nature which could be certainly recognized by a stranger. Directions,
too, are not so requisite for this inland navigation, for which there are
abundance of well-qualified pilots.

Jjeggat Shoals at the time they w ere surveyed had 12 feet upon them
at low water ; but this depth is said to vary, and also upon the banks

^--t

CHATHAM — NEWCASTLE.

ig as tlie extreme
i were wooded at
irks.

etweeii Malcolm
distance within,
[slandlies in the
fs on every side,
sandy spit. The
id of the island,

the north shore.
Dpposite Clieval
lored sandstone
t, with a beacon
in which stands
ore of the hay.
>icuously on the
en ou a fine day

Llistinguish from
Dak Point ; and
rard, alonj; the
and the Indian
Island, and the
id bv fishermen

irk that there is
e northward of
■ northeastwaid
ea through the

Idrake Island ;
^'idely receding
ce, the country
teep banks and
tf 50 ft*et above
stent, and soon
^ith steam saw-
lil above Shel-
ire of the uavi-
f a permanent
r. Directions,
'hich there are

"eet upon them
)on the banks

of St. Andrew, in consequence of old trees, logs, and other lumber lodg-
ing upon them. The same (sause is said to render the depth uncertain to
the soutliward of these shoals, where thero is a wider channel (1800).
Tlie river is clear of detached slioals to Middle Island, which, together
with its shoal, confines the ship cliannel to the north side of the river,
where the aiiore is so bold that there are 7 or 8 fathoms close to the
sandstone dirts until the vessel is ort' the Gilmour Mills and Cove,
nearly opposite the west end of Middle Island.

Middle Island is rather smaller than Sheldrake Island, and there is
no channel to the southward of it at low water. There is nothing in
the way of vessels from Gilmour Mill to the wharves at Chathan>.

Chatham, the principal tow u on the Miramichi, and containing, in
!i83, about 6,000 inhabitants, commences ft a mile above Middle Island,
and extends along the south shore for 1\ miles to the westward. It is
conveniently situated for shipping, having to 8 fathoms water close
to its wharves. It is a straggling, but rapidly increasing town, having
some good houses, 3 (jhurches, and 2 other chapels or places of worship.

Water and Supplies. — The surface water is quite fresh, on the ebb
tide, at (Jhatham. Supplies of any kind can be procured at Chatham
or Newcastle.

Coal. — A.bout 1,000 tons of coal are usually kept in store at Chatham,
and about 200 tons at Newcastle, butany (luantity can easily be obtained
at short notice by Intercolonial Railway from Springhill or Pictou.

Trade. — The chief exports from Chatham and Newcastle are timber,
deals, palings, salmon, lobster, and extrac t of hemlock bark for tanning.

Repairs. — There is neither dock nor slip in Miramichi Kiver, but at
Chatham there is a wharf for heaving down vessels in need of repairs.

Telegraph and Railways. — Chatham is in telegraphic communica-
tion with all towns of the Domini on of Canada and the United States,
and is <lirectly connected by the Intercolonial Kailway with Halifax, St.
John in New Brunswick, and Quebec, also by a direct rsiilway with
Fredericton, New Brunswick.

Ice. — Prom observations taken each year from 1830 to 1885, the
average date of the opening of navigation at Chatham is April 20, and
of the close Decembers, the river being completely closed between those
dates. At Portage Island, navigation opens about a week earlier, and
closes about a week later than at Chatham.

Douglastowu, on the opposite or northern shore, about 1.^ miles
above Chatham, is a much smaller place, containing about 1,100 inhab-
itants. It is prettily situated on a rising ground, and has sufticient
water at its wharves for large vessels. The most remarkable building
is the Marine Hospital, built of stone. Mr. Abram's shipbuilding es-
tablishment is li miles above Douglastowu, on the same side of the
river; and opposite to it on the south side shore is the church of St.
Paul.

Newcastle, 12 miles farth er up the river, and on the north shore, is

■m-ir-.tt-^i' — —

MIRAMICHI BAY TO GREEN ISLAND.

i
j
s

the county town, containing the court-house and jail, a church a chanel
and sou.e ew other good buildings. The nulei of . I ab ta. t? i'

vie« ovir rh T * "* ",'"'" '™"' "•« "^'•^'''^"•^ connnand.nga
v.e« over the lower ground westwanl a..d southward to BeaubL

ne uTv r: ,^^'T"^"-'' .«-l ^1-- t"« "ver to Chatham, a disttnoe o f
ne. Ij o , des, ,ts s.tuat.on is as beautiful as could have been selected,
whde at the sa.ne tnne it is not unfavorable for mercantile purpose '

and <» or < fafho.ns water close to the wharves of the town.

riSnTsT? '"'/•''' 1"^^' ^*''"" ''^•^ "^^^''S'^^'« ^^^t«rs of the Mi-
nim, ch, IS a straggling place with L>0() or 300 inhabitants, pnucipally

Is" urs'lf " ""^ '-«-f "^^^ '-Se wooden church, which stands on

banks'"'l!'.*^'^, '^^*'°*; ^* '"""' '^"^ ^^'"^ * ™"« ^^••l^' ''«« «teep clay
ban , based on sandstone, and rising toabout 20 feet above the river

critsTH' '' 7''^"r^"^^>'*^ to this poiut by any vessels that
can cr( 88 the Horseshoe or Inner Bar. There are some parts of the
channel above Chatham where there are only 2i fathoms and whch
would have to be avoided by a large vessel at low water, but there is
on. V one detached shoal, which has feet least water, and lies ess than
Do'Sto'r." "" '''"""' sbore,S.28ow.fr;nx the hospital at
Tides.-The usual average rate of the ebb tide is 2 knots and the

'HnoT alir- 'T' ''''' ^'*'^' ^'^^«-^- ^"« «^^ •" some pSce" r u
Jth Mu,' A '" . T""^ ^* '^' '''^'' '« «^"'^ ''' ^« «ti» stronger. In
Jid;^ and August, when the observations were made, exceptin-^ for 2
or 3 days at neap tides, the morning tides rose 2 or 3 feet h ght^r than
the evening tules, and were of longer duration by one or even two

nul'lvb^r"" """' "'." " "'"^'' •"""•^"«^^" by winds, and cine
qnently by no means regular. The mean length of the flood tide is 6
hours, and of the ebb G,^ hours. The <luration and length o tl ti a!
streams are also inrtuenced by the winds, but in general they cont ue
in^the Channel about half an hour after it is higli or low water by th"

NW. and SW. Anns.-At Beaube.e Island the two great arms of
he M.rannch, meet. The NW. Am. is much the largest, as respects
he fda water, although the SW. Arm is considere.1 the n ain brTnch

i^^,-..,.. ^i' . . 7 .c v.wi.omcic«i Lue main oi

ben.g ot greater length, and discharging more water. The N W Arm
would be navigable for large vessels to Shilelah Cove, 7 miles above
BeauWre Island, as there is sutHcient depth of water if he channel
were buoyed or staked in the narrow parts, which are' not .^c!;' Zn

watt , in ntricate and narrow channels between shoals of m.ul and low
marshy islands, all the way to the rapids, which flow in narrow chl

%su^

MIRAMICHI RIVER NEQUAC QULLY.

lurch, a cbapel,
inhabitHiit8 iu
i>h rises to the
cummaiidiiig a
il to Beaub^re
1, a distance of
been selected,
utile |)iir|)08e8,
ilear of shoals,
u.

ters of the Mi-
ts, i)riiicii>ally
liich stands on
I, and 1^ miles

las steej) clay
)ove the river,
y vessels that
5 parts of the
ns, and which
r, but tiiere is
lies less than
he hospital at

nots, and the
e places runs
stronger. In
cepting for 2
t higher than
> or even two
s, and conse-
lood tide is 6
of the tidal
hey continue
water by the

reut arms of
, as respects
lain branch,
le NVV. Arm
miles above
the ciiaunel
>t more than
H fathoms
nud and low
arrow chan-

nels between meadow islands. There the tide ends, and the water be-
comes quite fresh 13 miles from Beaub^re Island, and 39 miles from the
entrance of the inner bay at Fox Island.

The SVV. Arm is not navigable for large vessels, as not more than
(J or 7 feet, at low water, si)ring tides, can be carried through between
Beanbfere Island and the mainland; and even above tliat shallow
j)art, although therv is often -lore than 2 fathoms wat(M-, yet the chan-
nel is too narrow and intr' te for any but very small vessels. The
arm is about ^ mile widt f iie lirst 5 miles, or up to Barnaby Island ;
after which it varies from :., -0 to 400 yards up to the rajtids. 12 miles
from Beaubere Island. Botli shores of this arm are settled, and niany
of the farms appear to be in a flourishing condition.

Tides —The tide, which ends at the rapids, was observed to rise 2
feet there, and it was high water on the day of the full moon at about
8 hours; as it was also at the foot of the rapids in the NW. Arm.

The Neguac Gully, between the saml bar of the same name and
a small one to the S\V., is nearly 600 yards wide and carries 3
fathoms water; but a sand bar, of the usual mutable character, lies
off it nearly a mile. Within the gully a narrow channel, only fit for
boats or very small craft, leads westward up the Inner Bay. The shoal
water extends IJ miles off this gully, but there is excellent warning by
the lead here, and everywhere in this bay. Shoals, nearly dry at low
water, extend from the Neguac Gully to Portage Island, a distance of
li miles. A can buoy, paijited red, is moored in four fathoms at the
entrance to Neguac gully. A similar buoy is moored northwestward of
the first buoy, to show the direction of the channel. A church with a
spire has been built at Neguac Village, about 2| miles northwestward
of Neguac Lighthouse.

Blackland Point, the north point of Miramichi Bay, is low and
swampy, with steep and black peaty banks, and there is a conimuni-
catiou round it for boats within the sand bars, from Tabusintac lagoon
into the Inner Bay of Miramichi.

Tabusintac River.— Tabusintac Gully is about 30() yards wide at
high wa er, and has a shifting bar of sand, over which or 7 leet could
be carried at low water when it was surveyed, and II or 12 feet at high
water in spring tides. The entrance of the Tabusintac Kiver from the
lagoon inland is 3 miles to the northward of the gully and can be seen
over the sand bars. There is plenty of water iu this river when once
over the bar ; 2 and 3 fathoms is the depth in the channel through the
lagoon, and there is as much as 4 and 5 fathoms in some jmits of the
river ; but the channel is too narrow and intricate for anything larger
than boats or very small vessels. The tide flows 10 miles up the river,
through an undulating country, and occasionally between steep banks
of sandstone, which rise to about 100 feet above the .«ea. There are
settlements on either shore, consisting principally of Scotch fjimilies,
and there is a church on the south bank 1| miles up from the lagoon.

MIRAMICni BAY TO GREEN ISLAND.

Salinon are taken iu considerable quaatites in tbe Tabusintac. There
are lobsters, oysters, an.l other shell fish in the lagoon ; ami coddsb

tl Jp!!L!.*^* ^'''*' !' f '"^^^'^^f l^'-g^r, but in other respects si.nilar to
the I okemouche. It has a church and village on the south side of its
entrance fro„, the lagoon inland, which can be seo- over t e ^a cl bars
but the church bears SW. 3i miles frou. the nortl, ,a.d princina gullv'
instead ot west, as at Pokemouche, which will help to d s hc^^ st h'

td d^ls. "''" '"'''"^ " considerable quantity of pine tiLber

th^'vefv'll't.t-"-' ?' ''^'"'*?'' '^ "' '^'^^^"^ *^« P^'"«'I»-' «"trance to
the very extensive lagoon, through which the river flows in a narrow

channel between flats of sand, mud, and weeds. There are everarhuti

S wZ. tutVkrr:? ^' *? r:''^ ^^^^' ^« '^ yardr:i't

s n ofJ rL ' M "^^^ '""* *** ^'^'^ «'^^«*' »»«« a ^''ifting bar of
sand ott t, causing the depth, breadth, and directions of the clmnnel to

ou?s .r«L!n '"'"'*""" ^'^ ''^^ ^""^' *^°*^ «'>«l«^«r«d by the bar

lage bJt tL L r'1 '" "*' "•"^"°"' ^*" '^^ river opposite the vil-
will . ? ^"'^ ""^ '^^''^^^ ^^' t»^««'n& through the la^^oon

:i;e:rrtr;:t'" ^-^^^^""^^ ^^^"^-^^- ^«— -'^v-

At 2 miles to the southward of the North Gully is the Old Gullv now
nearly blocked up with sand, but which was formedy he SaT

traversing a lagoon, by the Little Traca<lie Gully into the sea is spn»
rated from the Iforth Tracadie by a point of the linLunhi.L an"
t'hr f'm'Zr ^"^"^ 'T '^"^^"^ 'eaves a comZSil "with n
tJnntrT,u.e of 1^'" n' ''" f ''"'• ^^^'^^ ""'^ ^'"*« ^"^ fish stores at
tie ri i WiH tr''^' T^ ^""•'''*° settlements at the entrance of
the rn er. VV ith.n the send bars which inclose the lagoons of Tracadie
th^e ,s a wellsheltered boat or canoe navigation fori or 9 miles "

Tracad!e TaTa r^l TT"" *'" '^"^""^ "*' Pokemouche and Great
iracadie, has a rocky shoal extending off it 3 mile to the denth of S
fathoms and 1^ miles to 5 fathoms at low water ^

Pokemouche River, 5* miles SW. of Shippegan Gullv after trav
ersing as allow and extensive lagoon, enters the g^lf by a gully S. rough

Tener^lfv t^s :"' ''' T'^ "l'^' ^ ''^''''' bar'of 3 oZd
generally leaves a narrow channel with 4 or 5 feet in it at low water

— ^.vmmm^Yr^mt^s^^:

8HIPPE0AN GULLY — MISCOIT ISLAND.

;busintac. There
)on ; ami codttab
fished tor upuu a

>ii through Raft
, but it is nearly
ay between Raft

aspects similar to
south side of its
er the sand bars ;
1 princii)al gully,
9 distinguish the
are principally
;y of pine timber

cipal entrance to
ows in a narrow
' are several huts
yards wide at
k shifting bar of
of the channel to
jctious for enter-
tered by the bar
{ fathoms water,
opposite the vil-
ugh the lagoon,
;s can only pass

Old Gully, now
the principal
its waters, atter
;he sea, is sepa-
land whiuL ap-
nication within
d fish stores at
the entrance of
ons of Tracadie
ar 9 miles,
uche and Great
the depth of 3

illy, after trav-
i gully through
sand outside
at low water

into the gully, and there are from to 12 feet for some distance witiiin.
The spring tides rise 5 feet, so that large schooners can be taken in by
a native pi' Jt, ;md in line weather. On the south side of the entrance
of the river from the lagoon inland and 1^ miles from the gully, there
is a church, village, and sawmill. The inhabitants, 300 or 400 in num-
ber, and principally of Acadian French and of Irish origin, live by fish-
ing, a very limited agriculture, and lumbering.

Shippegan Gully, with its bar of sand, its rapid tide, and danger-
ously heavy surf occasioned by easterly gales, is distant 22 miles from
the north point of Miscou. The bar of sand, which dries in part at low
water, shifts in heavy gales; but there is generally a channel with -l
or 5 feet in it at low water, and the tide rises from 3 to 5 feet, accord-
ing as it may be neap or spring tide. The 3-fathora8 edge of the shoal
water outside the bar is '^ mile ott' shore, after which thedei)th increases
rapidly.

Birch Point. — About li miles to the southeastward from the north
point of Miscon is Birch Point, a steep clift" of sandstone about 10 feet
high, and which will be easily recognized by the white birch trees, which
are higher there than in any other parts near the shore. A reef of
stones and sand extends there J mile out from the shore. The sound-
ings in the chart will euable the mariner easily to avoid the shoal off
the North Point, either by night or by day. There is good anchorage
on either side of it ; under the North Point in from 5 to 10 fathoms, in
southerly winds, and oft" the light-house on Birch Point, in from 3^ to 6
fathoms, in westerly winds, the bottom being of sand, which holds suf-
ficiently well for ottshore winds.

Miscou Island. — The Miscou Flats, which are of sandstone, coiitinue
4 or 5 niiles to the NK. of the harbor; and near their northern termina-
tion there is an opening in the trees which extends across the island,
and which has been mistaken by vessels, at night or in foggy weather,
either for the harbor or the gully, according as they were west or east
of the island. There is moderately good anchorage during the summer
season with this opening S. 52° E. in 10 to 11 fathoms; it is easily dis-
tinguished, very useful in pointing out a vessel's position, and espe-
cially to clear Miscou Flats when working out with a light breeze and
flood tide. The remainder of the shore is tolerably bold, with steep,
sandy beaches which surround the north end of the island, where sev-
eral stores and huts of the fishermen will be seen along the shore. The
north point is distinguished by a green mound, or grassy sand hill, and
the shallow water does not there extend to more than ^ mile off shore ;
but a sandy shoal commences immediately to the eastward of the point,
and fronting the outlet of a small lagoon, where there are several fish-
ng stores and huts, stretches oft" a mile to the NE.

Miscou Banks extend about 22 miles to the eastward of Miscou, and
the soundings upon them will afford full and sufticient guidance for a
vessel approaching this part of the coast.

MIRAMICHI BAY TO GREEN ISLAND.

Tlioir nortbern edge, in 30 fathoms, is 7 or 8 miles to the northward
of the liglit-hoiiso on Birch Point, and passes tlie north point of Miscou,
at tlie distance of 4 miles, into Chaleurs Bay, thus aftbrding excellent
guidance to vessels. These banks continue to extend off the coast to
the southward, but with more regular soundings and a greater general
depth than in the part to which the name of Miscou Banks has been
applied.

Bay of Chaleurs is the largest bay in the gulf, being 25 miles wide
from Cape d'Espoir to Miscou Island ; but the entrance is more gener-
ally considered to be at Macqnereau Point, from which the north point
of Miscou Island is distant 14^ miles. The depth of the bay from Mis-
cou to the entrance of the Restigouche River is about 75 miles.

The northern shore of the bay is of moderate height, but an irregular
range of hills of considerable elevation is every where visible a few miles
back from the coast, the predominating features of which are red cliffs of
sandstone and shale, with intervening shingle and sand beaches. Trap
rocks and limestone are occasionally met with also, but more sparingly.
The southern or New Brunswick shore is, generally speaking, much
lower, and for the most part composed of similar rocks ; but between
Batliurst and Caraquette the cliffs of red sandstone rise to a height of
200 feet above the sea. The sandstone either belongs to or is very
nearly connected with the coal formation, fossil vegetable remains of
which, as well as thin veins of bituminous coal, being not unfrequently
met with. There are numerous settlements all around the bay, and the
several harbors, roadsteads, and rivers are frequented by numbers of
vessels engaged in the lumber trade and the fisheries.

Tlie climate is warmer and the weather in general much tiner within
this bay than it is outside in the adjacent parts of the gulf. The fogs,
which prevail so much with southerly winds on the Miscou Banks, sel-
dom enter the bay, although rain and mist accompany easterly gales
here as elsewhere.

The navigation is by no means difficult ; for although there are some
dangerous shoals, yet there is everywhere good warning by the lead.

Tides. — The tidal streams are regular within the bay, and seldom
amount to the rate of one knot per hour ; but outside, off' its mouth, and
especially on the Miscou Banks, the currents and tidal streams are so
irregular, both in strength and direction, that nothing deflnito can be
said of them ; and their dangerous effects upon the course of vestols
can only be guarded against by the constant use of the deep-sea lead
and attention to the soundings.

Directions at Night and in Fogs. — Vessels bound for Chaleurs Bay
and approaching its entrance in a dark night or foggy weather should
not attempt to make Macqnereau Point, which is so bold that there is
little or no warning by the lead ; but should strike soundings on the
Miscou Banks, which extend nearly 22 miles to the eastward of Miscou
Island. A cautious lookout should be kept for the numerous fishing

f ti j rj ^ i^' umw ati Myw

BAY OF CHALEUK8 — MI8C0U HARBOR.

to the northward
I point of Miscou,
tl'ordiug excellent
il off the coast to
a greater general
1 Banks has been

ng 25 miles wide
ee is more geuer-
h the north point
he bay from Mis-
75 miles.
, but an irregular
risible a few miles
Bh are red cliffs of
d beaches. Trap
t more sparingly.

speaking, much
is ', but between
se to a height of
gs to or is very
table remains of
uot unfrequently
the bay, and the

by numbers of

uch finer within
gulf. The fogs,
jcou Banks, sel-
easterly gales

there are some

by the lead,
ay, and seldom

its mouth, and
streams are so
definite can be
urse of vesbols

deep-sea lead

r Chaleurs Bay
eather should
1 that there is
mdings on the
if ard of Miscou
uerons fishing

schooners, which are generally riding on the banks ; and the northern
edge of the latter, being followe«l in 30 fathoms of water, will safrly
conduct vessels past the north point of Miscou, at the distance of i
miles, and form a sure guide up the bay.

The bank of soundings off the north shore is also sutticiently wide to
guide vessels everywhere within Macquereau Point; nevertlielcss, in a
dark night and bad weather, vessels had better not approa(;h the shore
much nearer than the depth of 30 fathoms in any part of the biiy to the
eastward of Carlisle Point. The soundings are generally of sand and
shells on the banks, while in the central parts of the bay black and
brown mud pievail, with depths between 30 and 50 fathoms. Within,
or to the westward of Carlisle Point, and theop])osite bay of Nipisighit,
the depth decreases to less than 30 fathoms, but there is still sulllcient
warning everywhere by the lead quite up to the head of the bay.

Miscou Harbor, freiiuently called Little Shippegan by the fishermen,
lies between Miscou and Shippegan Islands, and just within the sandy
spit at the SVV. extreme of Miscou, where the space of deep water, trom
4 to G fathoms, forming the harbor for large vessels, is 400 yards wide
and upwards of a mile in length. The harbor for small craft is more
extensive, with 2 and 2J fathoms water, and also a narrow channel
extending eastward through the fiats of mud and weeds to within a
mile of Miscou Gully, which boats can only enter at high water. The
bottom within the harbor is soft mud ; in the channel, Just outside the
entrance, sand, and between the shoals, farther out, sandstone.

Directions. — The Miscou Channel, leading to the harbor, between the
Shippegan and the Miscou Flats, is in one part only 350 yards wide, be-
tween shoals so steep that there is not the slightest warning by the
lead. In short, none other than small vessels should attempt this har-
bor without having first buoyed the channel or secured the assistance
of a competent pilot. A vessel of 12 feet draft may, however, run in
with the assistance of the chart and the following brief directions :

If to the eastward of the harbor, cross the Miscou Flats to the SW.,
at the distance of 3 miles offshore, in no less than 4 fathoms wa-
ter; if to the westward, follow the northern edge of the Shippegan
Flat, in 4 or 5 fathoms. In either case, open out the NE. extreme of
the trees of Shippegan Island, just clear of the SW. extreme of the
trees of Miscou Island, or keep the former in one with the extreme
of the sandy spit at the SW. end of Miscou Island, the latter being
preferable if it can be made out. These marks will bear a little to
the eastward of S. 69° B. ; steer for them until the water shoals to
less than 4 fathoms, which will be on a point of the Miscou Flats.
Sheer to the SW. for about ^ mile, or so as to deepen the water to 4
and 5 fathoms ; then steer S. 64° B. or for Pandora Point, a wooded
extreme of Shippegan, ^ mile within Pecten Point, which is the sandy
south point of entrance of the harbor.

In running this course the vessel will cross a bay in the Miscou Flats

i^f

MIRAMICHI BAY TO UREBN ISLAND.

ill 4 and 5fatlioiiiH; if tliu HOUiidint^H duepcn to more tlitiii tlu^ latter
depth at low water, sheer to the eastward, for the object is to keep on
the MiNco'.i and least dangerous side of the channel; and that will lie
ettected withont dilllcnlty by the load, since there are 8 and 1) fathoms
ill the channel. After runiiiii}; a short mile towards Pandora Point,
the points on the north side of Shippej;aii will be observed to come
in one, bearing S. 4?)'^ VV. ; and about the same time a liifili sand hill,
on the sand bars at the heatl of the harlxu', will come on with the
high-water extreme of the sandy spit of Miscoii, bearing S. 83° E.
The vessel will now beat the narrow part of the channel, and must fol-
low the edge of the Miacon Flats by the lead, in from 4 to (J fathoms,
sheering to the eastward the instant the depth is more than the latter,
and to the westward when less than the former. Tiie general direction
of the conrse will be still towards Pandora Point, until the points on
the SK. shore of Miscoii within the harbor open out, when the vessel
will be in safe anchorage, although outside the entrance. If wishing
to proceed farther, hanl up for the high sand hill on the sand bars already
mentioned, and when within the sandy point, steer for the gully, for a
short distance, choosing a convenient bertli.

Tides — The tides appear to set fairly in and out of the harbor, at a
rate seldom amounting to a knot.

Shippegan Flat is an extensive shoal of sandstone, thinly and
l)artly covered with sand. It is the most northern of the Shippegan
Shoals, and extends 2'^ miles off the north side of the island, separating
the channel leading to the harbors of Caraquette and Shippegan from
that which leads into Miscou Harbor. There is good warning by the
lead all along its northern side, which may be safely approached to 6
fathoms in a large and to 3 fathoms in a small vessel.

Foquesuedie Shoal is an extensive tlat of sand extending 2 miles
to the northward and eastward from Poquesuedie Island, and having
only C or 7 feet water over the greater part of it. Caraquette Steeple
and the sandy SE. extreme of Uaraquette Island in line, bearing S.
03° W. lead over its north point in 2 fathoms at low water ; and if the
steeple be kept halfway between the extreme of the sandy point and
the extreme of the trees on the same island, the north point of the shoal
will be cleared in 4^ fathoms; but as both the sandy point and the trees
may change in the course of years, those marks should not be relied on
without previous examination.

Shippegan Sound. — On the western side, within Poquesuedie
Island, is Simon Inlet, the best harbor in the sound. Within its en-
trance, between Marcel le and Brule Points, the anchorage is quite land-
locked, with water sufficient and space enough for vessels of large
draft. On the opposite or Shippegan side are the bays of Aleniek
and Little Aleinek. The latter is a shallow place, but has good anchor-
age off its mouth. The former, which is most to the southward, and by
far the larger bay of the two, is an excellent harbor with 3 and 4

tafc

)re than tlm latter
)juct is to ktH^p on
1; and that will Im
ru S and fathoms
Is Pandora I'oint,
observed to »!oin«
3 a hi^h sand hill,
jomo (Ml with the
bearing S. 83° B.
iinel, and ninst tbl-
)ni 4 to (> fathoms,
)ro than the latter,
e {general direction
mtil the points on
it, when the vessel
ranee. If wisiiing
e sand bars already
for the gully, for a

jf the harbor, at a

[stone, thinly and
I of the Shippegau
a island, separating
ul Shippegau from
}d warning by the
ly approached to 6

extending 2 miles
Island, and having
Jaraquette Steeple
n line, bearing S.

water ; and if the
sandy point and

point of the shoal
point and the trees

d not be relied on

thin Poquesuedie
Within its en-
rage is quite laud-
vessels of large
bays of Alemek
has good anchor-
iouthward, and by
)or with 3 and 4

HHII'PEGAN HARHOK — CARAyUKTTK ISLAND.

fathoms vor, and secure in all winds. There is a chunih and village
of A(!adian.s at the head of this bay; and on Alexander Point, its
north |)oiiit. stands the establishmtMit of Mr. Alexander. There isa l)ar
of sand and mud extending across the sound from Alexander Point to
Brule Point, which limits the depth that can be (Mrrietl into Alemek
Bay to 2'f fathoms; and into Shippegau Harbor to 'J^ fatlioiiis at low
water.

Shippegan Harbor. — On the mainland, nearly o|)i)(>site the south
point of Alemek Hay, there is a windmill on Bornaclie Point, the sandy
north point of Basse Bay. On the soiitii |>oiiit of this l»ay stands the
church and village of Shippegan, and oil" them is Shippegau Harbor,
which is a narrow channel with '2S to 1 fatiioms water, and between
shoals of mud and eelgrass nearly dry at low tide. This narrow chan-
nel cuitiiiues 2<V miles beyond the chur(!li, terminating at Shipi»egan
Gully, the southern entrance of the sound. Tlie gully is used by shal-
lops and lishing boats. The tide is generally extremely rapid in it, and
there is often a heavy surf on its bar of sand, which dries in part at
low tide, leaving a cliaiinel with only 4 or .T feet water. Shippt^gan
Harbor is (piite seiuire in all wiuils, Tlie watering place is at a small
stream in Basse Bay, a short distance to the westward of the chunth.

Slii|)pegan Channel, leading into the sound, is dee|>, but the pa.ssage
is narrow and without leading marks. For 3 miles the breadth of the
channel between the shoals is only \ to !\ mile. Four buoys mark the
edges of the shoals and render the navigation comparatively easy.

Tides. — It would require a much longer experience than was afforded
by the few weeks employed in the Admiralty survey' to be fully ac-
quainted with the set of the tides in the entrance of the Oaracpiette
and Shippegan Channels, where they doubtless change with the time
of tide and other circumstances. The rate of the tides, however, .sel-
dom exceeded a knot even in the channels, where of course they are
stronger than elsewhere. In Shippegan Harbor the stream was very
regular in fine weather, running in at the gully and to the northward,
through the sound, into Ohaleurs Bay from about half ebb to half Hood
by the shore, and in the reverse direction, or to the southward, from about
hivlf flood to half ebb. It is high water, full and change, in Shippegau
Harbor at 3h. 42m., which is about an hour later than at Caraqiiette
and Paspebiac; springs rise 54 or 6 feet, neaps 3 feet.

Shippegan Sound. — Ice. —The sound is usually frozen over about
1st December and clear of ice about lOth May, being completely closed
between those dates. The tirst vessel arrives from sea about 21st May
and the last one leaves about 13th November. In 1870 fleld ice drifted
into Shippegau Sound on 14th .May and «lid not disappear until 4th
June.

Caraquette Island is of sandstone, low and wooded, and 1.^ miles
long in a direction nearly parallel to the coast. Sandy points extend
from both ends of the island towards the mainland, or to the southward,
5489 7

MIKAMICHI BAY To (iRKKN ISLAM).

(toiiH to form It l))i,v,iii which thitrti \h Imidlockcd aiiulioiaKc for vchnoIs not
<li'<iwiii(; more tliaii lo fcot wiitor. Thu iHhiiul riHt'H Iroiii iiii (txtuii.sivu
bank of Hat Handstoni^, puitially (M)V(>t'i><l witli Hand, and wliii^h, com-
in«'n(;iiiK at Mi/xctivttu Point, oxttMidH to tlii^ eastward parallel to tliu
coast all the way to the entrance of tShippcgau Hound, a distance of 8
or miles.

Caraquette Shoal extends i\ ndles to the eastward of the island,
from which it dries out occasionally in very low tides to the distance of
2 miles, and is shallow in every part. From its east end Cara<]iiette
steeple and the HIC. extreme of the trees of Caraquette Island are
in line, bearing H. (V<i° W., und Shippegan steeple and I'oquesnedie
Point beariiij^ 8. li(P E. The laat-named marks in line lead totlit^ east-
ward of this shoal in 3 fathouiH at low water, but a large ship requiring
a great depth of water would have to i)a8s farther to the eastward by
keeping Marcelle and Poquesuodie Points in line, bearing 8. 2° K.

Fisherman Ledge is a detached bed of rocks, with 10 feet least water,
lying to the northward of the Caraquette Bank and separated from it
by Fisherman Channel, which is one mile wide and carries from 4 to 7
fathoms water. This dangerous ledge, which lies more in the way of
vessels than any other in Chaleurs liay, is 1;^ miles long and k mile wide
from the dei>th of 3 fathoms to 3 fathoms. There are no marks for it.
Its northern edge is distant 3 miles from Caraquette Tsland, and its east
and west ends bear north from the corresponding points of the island.
The points of cliff's at Great Anse and Doua Point in one, bearing S.
77° W., lead through Fisherman Channel, which, however, has not been
examined very closely, and can not in any case be recommended to ves-
sels of large draft.

Caraquette Channel, between the Poquesuedie and Caraquette
Shoals, forms the entrance to the harbor of Caraquette for a distance
of 2j miles, and has water enough for vessels of the largest draft ; but
it is crooked and only 450 yards wide between very steep shoals, and
without sufficient leading marks, hence it becomes a very difficult chan-
nel.

Caraquette Harbor may be said to commence immediately within or
to the westward of Poquesuedie island, extending westward between
the maiidand and the Caraquette Shoal and Island. The church at
Caraquette will be seen standing conspicuously on the ridge nearly
opposite to Mizzenette Point, and the houses and fish stores of Lower
Caraquette nearlj' opposite to the island. In the eastern part.of the
harbor, immediately within Poquesuedie, the depth is o and fathoms,
and there is not less than 3^ fathoms till within i mile of the SE. point
of the island. Between the islandand the main the channel is only 250
yards wide and carries only 2J fathoms water ; but farther westward it
increases to J mile and 4^ fathoms water, and is there sheltered by the
Mizzenette sands, which dry at low water nearly across to the island.
The bottom is of mud within the harbor and of sand in the entrance,
or Caraqnette Channel.

CAKAt^UHTTE IIAItUUR — DIHKCTIONS.

1)9

;t» for \ t'ssi'ls imt
[>tu III! (txt(;ii.sivu
iind \vlii(;|i, foiii-
I i»aral!('l to tliu
, a (liHtancc of 8

1 of tlio islatii],
I till' (iJHtancu of
tMid CaiiKjiictte
otte Inland are
lid L'oqnosticdie
lead totlici east-
e Mbip requiring
;lie eantward by
ing S. 2o K.
feet least water,
iparated from it
•rioH from 4 to 7
e in tlie way of
and !^ mile wide
10 marks for it.
ud, and its east
8 of tlie island,
one, bearing S.
)r, lias not been
mended to ves-

id Caraqiiette
I for a distance
rest draft ; but
ep sboals, and
difflcnltcbau-

.tely within or
ward between
The church at

ridge nearly
ores of Lower
rn part, of the
nd a fathoms,

the SE. point

el is only 2.50

ir westward it

jltered by the

to the island.

the entrance,

Caraquette Bay extends 4 or ri miles to tin- wt^stwardof Mizzcnette
Point, being all shoal watiT exci-pt the narrow channel of the harl»or
and terminating in the two shallow rivers, the South and the North, in
the inoiitlis of which there are oyster beds. Tlie best watering place is
at a siuhII stream which descends the steep banks at Ifpper ('araqnette,
near Hrideau Point.

Ice.— The harbor is usually frozen over about llth I)e(!ember, and
clear of uw about 8th May, being completely closed between those
dates. Tiie (Irst vessel arrives from sea about l-'th May, and the last
one leaves about 2.'>th November.

Directions.— If bound from the eastward, having brought the en*
trance of Miscou Harbor to bear to the eiistward of S. 2P I'}., stand in
towards it to 8 fathoms water; then run to the westward in that de|>tU
until the NK. extreme of the trees of Shippegan Island opens to the
southward of the SW. extreme of Miscou Island, bearing S. «5o E.,
when, if the weather be clear, Caraquette steeple will be seen in line
with the north extreme of Caraquette Island, bearing S. 51° W. From
thence steer for Blanchard Point, the wooded north extreme of Pocpie-
suedie Island, which may or may not be made out, as it will be on with
the mainland and distant 7 or 8 miles. Do not a|>proach the Shippe-
gan Flat nearer than the depth of 7 fathoms, and having run about 3^
miles, Marcelle Point, the wooded SE. extreme of Poquesuedie Island,
will be in line with Poquesuedie Point, which is the sandy east extreme
of the same island.

These points in line bearing south will lead westward of the NW. ex-
treme of the Shippegan Flat. Steer for these points in line until Cara-
quette steeple comes in line with the SB. extreme of the trees of Cara-
quette fsland, bearing S. 03° W., immediately after which, or when the
north extreme of Shipjiegan is in line with the south extreme of Mis-
cou, bearing N. 74° E., steer towards Blanchard Point, bearing S. 37°
W. IJaviiig run not <piite 1.^ miles towards Blanchard Point Shippe-
gan steeple will come in line with Poquesuedie Point, bearing S. 24° E.,
and at the same time, or immediately afterwards, Caraiiuette steeple
will be ill lino with the sandy SB. extremity of Caraquette Island, bear-
S. 03° W.

The vessel will now be within the entrance of the Caraquette Channel,
between the Caraquette and Poquesuedie Shoals, and must haul to the
westward immediately for Caraquette Steeple, keeping it carefully in
line with the sandy SE. extreme of Caraquette Island, until the wind-
mill on Alexander Point (Shippegan Isl<ind)is in line with Poquesuedie
Point, bearing S. 47° E,, when the course must instantly be changed to
S. 40° W. The vei^sel will now be about to pass through the narrowest
and most difficult part of the channel, and the course must be strictly
attended to, and the lead kept going on both sides. If the water shuals
to less than 4 fathoms, after the vessel has run upon this course from
4 to ^ mile, it will be on the Poquesuedie side, and she must therefore

100

MIKAMK'MI KAY To OKKKN isLAiNt).

Hteor to tlio north wiinl li littlu, or into 5 t'litlioiiiH, iinil thou rcHitnio tho
&. 40 ' W. cuiir.Hc iii;iiiii until (<iini(|n«tt«^ 8t('(^pl«> coint'M in lino witii tho
uliil' of Itriih'siii I'oint, Itoiirin^ 8. Tf W. Alter tlio conrHt* uKain ini-
nnHliiitoly tlic liiMt-niitncMl iniirks (M)ni«« in lin*', and intoor tor tlh'ni tor <{
iniUs tluMi Mlu'or to tho Hontliwiirtl ii little, ho tliiit th» Mteeple iiiuy bw
Hccii u little within an*l over the extremity of the point, or in line with
tlie Htore npon it ; keep it ho nntil the clitVy points on the SK nide of
CariKpn'tte IhIsiihI are all nlint in behind tlie east point of the isliind,
anil it will have led elear of the Honth extremity of the ('arutpiette
Shoiil. Tiie vessel will now be in nafe aiuthora^e, and a Iterlh may be
chosen at pleasure with the asHintanue of the chart, and in from 1 to '2^
fathoms at low water.

Mizzenette Ledge of rockn, with T) feet leant water, bearn X. 4'P \V.
1\ miles from the west end of (7ara(iiiette Island, and a vt'ssel will pass
to the northward of it, in .'M fathoms, by keeping Dona Point.just open
to the northward of Mi/,zeiiette Point, luMirin^ S. H.'Jo VV. Tlu'se marks
will alst) lead to the eastward alou); the northern ed^re of theCaraqnette
Shoal until they strike Scallop Patirli, wliitdi has 10 feet least water over
a rocky bottom; and on whittli tlie NW. extreme of Caraijuette Island
and Caracpu'tte Steeple are in line, the SIC. extreme of the island
beariii),' S. 4'^ VV'., distant nearly 2 miles. The marks for clearing
the northern edjje of the Caraqnette Shoal, to the eautwurd of Scallop
patch, and in .'i fathoms water, are the south extreme of Miscou Island
kept plainly oi)en to the northward of the north point of ShippeKan
Island, bearing; N. 74° K. But those marks are low and distant, and
often not well dellned, therefore they should not be trusted alone,
neither will they be reipiired if the northern edjje of the shoal be not
api>roa(rhed nearer than the d«'pth of 4 fathonm at low water.

Norton Shoal, carrying; 3 fathoms water, and lyiii}; 'i of a mile ot}
shore, one mile to the westward of Norton Point, and U miles eastward
of the NipiHighit, is the only dan^^er in the way of vessels alonp; the
coast from Mizzenette Point to Bathurst Harbor, a distance of 2.1 nnles.

The Coast, which for the most |)art is of high sandstone clitls, is very
low near Mizzenette Point ; and about 3 miles to the westward of that
point, where the sandy cliffs end, the shoal water extends to ^ mile
from the shore ; but in |ruiii>ral it docs not extend to more than half that
distance, and the coast may everywhere be approached by the lead to
10 or 12 fathoms with care, the greater depth being quite near enough
at niy;ht time. There are settlements all along the coast, and villages
and llsliing establishments at Great Anseand Pokeshaw. Great Anse,
where there is a church, is 8 miles, and Pokeshaw 11 miles westward of
Mizzenette Point. There are small bays at both places where boats
find shelter, and a small river at Pokeshaw.

Bathurst Harbor, at the mouth of the Ni|)isighit River, is 400 yards
wide at the entrance between Alston and Carron Points, which are of
sand, with several stores and other buildings upon them (1800).

^Ss*

BATHirRST IIARHOR — HKRON IHLAND.

101

I \hw with tliu
ii'Ho i\\tii\\\ iiii-
tor tlh'in lor Jf
(tt'cpli^ limy b«
or ill liiit^ with
lit« NK. Hidti of
t of tli<t ishuid,

IxM'lli limy bu
ill from 1 to '2if

jiU-M N. 4->'^ VV.

■CMHOI will pIlSH
'oillt jllHt 0|)(MI

Tiicsu timrkH

tlU'ClUlKHUlttO

•list wiitcr over

luiiu'ttci Isltuul
of Mie ishviKl

:n for cloiu'iiif;

'anl of Sjiullop
Mis<;ou IhUiikI

: of Shippefrau
(1 (liNtant, and
triiHted alone,

e HJioal 1)0 not

liter.

1'^ of a mile off
niles ciiHtward

Isels along the
ice of 2.» miles,
le (!litt8, is very
stward of that
nds to ^ mile
than half that
|by the lead to
near enough
, and villages
(jlreat Anse,
8 westward of
where boats

^r, is 4(K> yards
which are of

1(1800).

The lightlioiiHeN kept in line will lead in through the imrrow clmiinel
over the l»ar in 7 feet at low watt>r, or in 1 1 feet at high wat;-i' in the
beHt Hpring tides. The distance trotii the outsulr of tlie bar in .'i lath*
ouiM to Mie entraiiee of the riviTls l,j inlleN; and for the whole of that
distaii(;u the very narrow channel -< between sandy shoah, nearly dry
at low water, and extending from fitlierside of the tivrr's month.

Within the entraiKie there is an extensive anil well shellereil bitsin,
nearly .'< inileN long and 2 miles widt^ but nearly all dry at low water,
excepting thtt cliannels of the four rivers, whicrli, alter uniting their
streams beh)W Batlinrst, How through it to the entrance, Idiining by
theirjuiictioii what is called the Main (Miannel. On the eastern sitle
of the basin tliere is an islet (!alled tliu Imlian or liathiirst Island. The
town of Uathurst is well situated at the head of the basin, 2^ miles
within the entrance, and oii the point of land wlii(;h divides the Hiver
Nipisighit tVom the Middle and N.n-th Rivers.

Anchorage. — In the entrance between the sandy points, or rather
just outside it, there are.'iand 4 fathoms water; and here vessels usually
moor to take in timber, sheltered by the bar and the sandy shoals on
either side. Some of the larger ones complete their loading outside
the bar, where the anchorage, in U or 7 fathoms, muddy bottom, is con-
sidered safe in the summer months, although the NK. gales send in a
heavy se;i.

Pilots. — There are good pilots for the Hiver Nipisighit, and no one
should attem|)t the bar without one, excei>tingin case of necessity.

Tides. — It is high water, full and change, at Bathurst at 3 h. 1 .*» m.;
springs rise 7 feet, neaps 4 feet. The rate of the tides in the main chan-
nel is about 2 knots, and over the bar about \ft knots. The stream sets
fair in and out and over the bar.

Belledune Point is 13 miles from Heron Island, and the extreme
seen from it is low and sandy, and has shoal water oil it to the east*
ward ''^ mile. At 8 miles to the southward of this point, on the west-
ern shore of Nipisighit Bay, is the chnrch and village of Kochette ; and
8.<{ miles farther in the sane direction is the entrance of the Nipisighit
River at the head of the bay. The whole of this coast is low, and com-
posed of sandstone, limestone, and trap rocks. The shoal water gen-
erally extends to ^ mile from the shore ; and vessels of large draft had
better not stand nearer than the depth of 10 fathoms, especially at
night, unless it be in the head of the bay, where they may safely ap-
proach the sandy beach to 7 or 6 fathoms.

Heron Island. — Heron Island, at 5:^ miles to the southward of Tra-
cadigash Point, is of moderate height, wooded, and with red sandstone
clilfs at both its NVV. and SE. points. Shoal water extends off both
those points at the distance of ^ mile ; »« it does also all along the
northern side of the island, where the 3-fathoms line of soundings is ^
mile out from the shore. The island is 4 miles long, i)arallel to the
coast, and there is gooi\ anchorage in the channel between it and the

.■t«p*wtfr>r'Eft".^:cT""'^

■•■I

I: t

102

MIRAMIf'HI BAY TO GREEN ISLAND.

mainland ; but the channel is rendeivl narrow and difficult by shoals,
which extend a great distance out on either side.

Heron Channel — At the western end the cliannel is only 40U yards
wide, with ."{ fathoms water in it. It becomes wider to the eastward,
and the deptlis are 4 and 5 fathoms; but there the dangerous Heron
Kock lies, nearly in mid-channel, and consequently right in the way of
vessels. When on this small rock, which has feet least water, and 4
or b fathoms all around it, the SB. extreme of Heron Island bears N. 44°
E., about one mile ; the nearest sandj' south point of Heron Island
N. li3o W., 1,200 yards; Beaver Point S. 18° W., ^ mile; and a rock
lying 600 yards north of Beaver Point and almost always above water,
S. 67<^ VV , 700 yards. This latter rock, which lies on tiie edge of the
shoal oft' the mainland, is quite bold; and a vessel, by sailing within
the distance of 300 yards of it, will pass to the southward of the Herou
Bock ; as she will also to the northward, by running along the southern
edge of the shoal oft" the island, in 3 fathoms at low water. But this
is an intricate and dangerous channel for a vessel of any size, and
requires the aid of a good pilot.

Anchorage. — Vessels occasionally anchor, for the purpose of load-
ing with timber, in the bay of Nash Kiver, in 4 fathoms, mud bottom,
where they are much exposed to easterly winds, but the ground is so
good that they ride safely during the summer months. At this anchor-
age the east point of Heron Island bears N. 37° W., 2^ miles; and
Black Point N. 08° W., one mile.

The shoal water extends off Fowler Point a mile out to the 3-fathom
line of soundings. There is also good anchorage in 4 fathoms, mud
bottom, to tiie westward of Heron Island, and nearly midway between
it and the River Charlo. Tiiis river will only admit boats.

Carleton Road. — This name has been given to an excellent and
capacious anchorage safe in all winds. It is situated on the west side
of Tracadigash Point, which consists of silnd, inclosing a shallow
lagoon, capahlo of admitting boats, or very small craft, at high water.
On the northern shore of this lagoon stands the church and village of
Carleton, the latter extending to the westward to the shore of the bay,
where the sand beach of the lagoon joins the mainland. A small stream,
with a bridge across it, there enters the NW. corner of the lagoon ;
and one mile farther to the westward, near the commencement of the
Clay Clitts, another small stream will be seen, which is the watering
place. Immediately in rear of the village, the Carleton Mountain rises
abruptly to the height of 1,830 feet above the level of the sesi — the
hills of the range trending from it both to the northward and westward
for many miles.

Anchorage. — Vessels may anchor anywhere in from 5 to 6 fathoms,
remembering that although the sandy beach of Tracadigash Point is
quite bold on the west side within the spit, yet shoal water extends olf
the mainland to the distance of nearly i mile. The best berth, espe-

lifflcult by shoals,

l is only 400 yards
' to tiie eastward,
dangerous Heron
nght in the way of
least water, and 4
[aland bears N. 44°
; of Mer<)n Island
\ mile ; and a rock
ways above water,
)n tlie edge of the
by sailing within
ward of the Heron
iilong the southern
V water. But this
}1 of any size, and

B purpose of load-
oius, mud bottom,
the ground is so
s. At this anchor-
W., 2^ miles ; and

ut to the 3-fathom
n 4 fathoms, mud
y midway between
boats.

an excellent and
I on the west side
closing a shallow
aft, at high water,
rch and village of
! shore of the bay,
. A small stream,

r of the lagoon ;
neiicement of the
is the watering
;on -Mountain rises

1 of the sea — the
ard and westward

>ni 5 to G fathoms,

cadigash Point is

water extends oti"

best berth, espe-

CAKLETON ROAD — DALHOUSIE IIAKBOK.

10.5

cially with easterly* winds, is in 5k fathoms, mud, with Tra(!ailigash
Point bearings. 38^ R. ; Carleton steeple N. 78^ K, ; and tlie watering
place N. 37° W.

Tides. — The tides are weak in Carleton Itoad, seldom exceeding one
knot.

Maguacha Point, of red sandstone cliffs, is the NE. point of en-
trance of the liiver liestigouclie, atul bears frou) Tracadigasii Point
S. 81° W., ()A miles. In the X\V. corner of the bay between them is
uew basin and river, nearly dry at low water.

Directions. — Tracadigash 8pit, of sand, aiul running out fi mile to
the SW. from the sandy point of the same name, is the only danger
in the way when approaching the anchorage in Carleton lioad from
the eastward. Observe that Maguacha Point and the summit of Dal-
housie Mountain in line, bearing S. 83*^ W., pass the extremity of the
spit in 3 fathoms. Therefore, to clear it keep the 'nountain well open,
or at night go no nearer than 10 or 9 fathoms water. As soon as Carle-
ton steeple comes in line with the southwest extreme of Tracadigash
Point, bearing N. M3° E., the spit will have been passed, and the vessel
may haul in to tiie northward, going no nearer than 7 fathoms till the
point bears to the southward of east.

Bonami Rocks.— The entrance of the Restigouche River, between
Maguacha Point and the Bonami Rocks, is nearly two miles wide. The
rocks are steep and high, and so rough and broken that a stranger
would be led to expect danger on their side iustead of on the opi)osite,
where the steep red cliffs of Maguacha Point give the usual, although
in this case deceptive, indications of a clear channel.

Tiie extreme point of the Bonami Rocks may be safely passed within
the distance of 400 yards, but shallow water extends from the rocks to
Bonami Point, from which a reef runs J mile, aiul the shoal continues
from it to Dalhousie Island.

Maguacha Spit, of sand and stones with only H feet at low water
runs out nearly a mile to the west from Maguaciia Point, or towards
the Bonami Hocks, thus occujyying fully half the channel. To clear
the SW. extreme of this steep aiid dangerous spit, keep the highest
summit of the Scaumenac Mountains open to tlie SW. of Dalhousie
Island ; tor the summit of the mountain and the south side of the
island in one, bearing X. 08° W., lead over the extieme end of the
spii; in 34 fathoms. The eastern side of the sjjit will be avoided l)y not
entirely shutting in the south extreme of the Carleton Mountains be-
L h\ the east side of Maguacha Point.

Dalhousie Harbor. — Dalhousie (Douglas) Island, 400 yards long,
is high and rocky, round-backed and wooded, and joined by a shoal,
which dries, to the low jmint of Dalhousie. On that point there are
large storehouses belonging to the town of Dalhousie, which with its
church will be seen situated on the side of a hill to the SW. of the
island. Westward of Dalhousie Island there is a small rocky islet at

1U4

MIRAMICHl BAY TO GUEEX ISLAND.

the oxtremity ot a uarroNv san.ly spit fonniii- tbe western side of the

Zlr'l ; ; " ^'V ''""''"''''• ^'"^ «'^""«^^ ^^'*^'^'- -steads from
the iHlet to the island, and the timber ships lie moore<l along its e.lge
in 6 or < athoms, muddy bottom, directly off the town ; by keeping just
outs.de these deep water is obtained. This is Dalhousie liarbo which
IS quite secure in all winds.

thf *h^°?',^ f *'^°' '"?^' ^' approached ia two ways, either through
the dnec but narrow channel between the Middle Ground and Dal-
hous.e Island, or round to the northward and westward of the .Vlid.lle

!^Z'" '.T .T '*''' f '''""^"' •' '"^"^"•^^ ^^^ "««"««*'•>• «f P'i^^i^g over
a Hat ol .{ fathoms at low water, is the route usually taken, because of

there be.ng plenty of room there, whereas the channel firs mentioned

IS only 3()() yards whle. The naz-row channel has, however, the a.lvl!:^

tage ot g()o<l leading marks, and carries (J fathoms water

Tho Middle Ground, separated from Dalhousie Island by the uar-

Jt Iw ;r;" /''' ;"'^""""«'^' •« ^'^^O ^^^^^^ 'o»g. nnd SOO yards wide.
It consists ot saml and stones with (i feet least water, and is very steep
on Its eastern side, where a buoy is placed near its north point. ' There
are no sntticient leading marks, but beacons might be easily so placed
on the shore as to clear ,t on every side. The main channel between
th s shoal and the shore to the northward and eastward is more than l
mile wide, and in some places there are 15 fathoms water. The rate of
kn'ots ' ' *' '''"""^^' *'**'™ ^^'^'' elsewhere, does not exceed 2

Supplies.— Fresh provisions can be obtained at Dalhousie
Anchorage—The best anchorage in Dalhousie Harbor is in GA or 7
fathoms, with Dalhousie Island and Bonami Point in line

Directions.-When within a mile or two of Maguacha Point, bring
summirof tZ's' ^'^^"'"^ *^« Maguacha Spit; namely, the highest
iZ!. i . .^"^"''"•^"'^« Mountains open to the SW. of Dalhousie

h...n 1 !' «w"'"'''.^ '^'''' ^•''"^ ^''" ^« ^^^^«" the Bonami Rocks
Oe..r about SW,, and are distant about J mile. Then haul to the

nol"n?Tn H ' '*" "! '" ""f " '" '^*' ^^'P'"' ""^'^ ^^•''"^ Point (the extreme

point to the westward on the Xew Brunswick shore) comes just open to

he northward of Dalhousie Island and of the islet and r^ ks o be

wes ward ot ,t bearing S. 80o W. Then, if wishing to enter the har-

.ZX ^no'u'™'' ;"'"' **" '^^ southward of the Middle Ground,
steer b. SOo W . upon those leading marks until near Dalhousie Island
which leave to the southward at a distance of 200 yards, an,l the ves-
sel will pass safely into the harbor.

If wishing to take the more roomy route to the northward of the
Middle Ground, instead of steering S. 80o W. for Lalime Point, as soon
as It opens to the northward of the island, sheer over to the NE until
the soundings are S lathoms, and follow thatdepth round to the north-
ward and westward until Dalhousie Church opens out to the westward

DALHOUSIE HARBOR — RESTIGOUCHE RIVER.

105

tern sIiIh of tbo
Br exteuils from
I aiou^ its edge
b.vkeeiiiiigjust
i Harbor, wbicli

either through
romul aiul Dal-
i of the Miiiaie
of pAssiugover
ken, because of
first mentioned
ver, the ad ran -
ir.

and by the uar-
iOi) yards wide.
id is very steep
li point. There
jasily so placed
1 aim el between

is more than $
sr. The rate of
i not exceed 2

ousie.

jor is in 6J or 7

la Point, bring

y, the highest

of Dalhousie
' or 8 fathonjs
Boiiami Rocks
■n Iiaul to the
t (the extreme
esjustopen to

rocks to the
uter tlie har-
ddle Ground,
lousie Island,

auil the ves-

hward of the
Point, as soon
the NE. until
to the north-
tlie westward

of the island bearing S. 10° W. Then steer uj) the estuary, until Dal.
bnusie Church appears midway between Dalhousie Iisland and the islet
to the westward of it, bearing S. 12° K. Steer now for the church,
taking care not to bring it to bear to the southward of S. 12° E., or
with the two churches in line, the vessel will pass over the extensive
3-fathon)s flat, to the westward of the Middle Ground, into the harbor.

Tides. — The rate of the tidal streams in the entrance does not ex-
ceed 2 knots.

Restigouche River, from its entrance at Maguacha Point, varies in
breadth, for the first 17 miles, from IJ to 3 miles. At that distance
.Oampbelltown is situated on the southern or New Brunswick shore,
and at the foot of a remarkable conical mountain called the Sugar
Loaf. Between Campbelltown and Indian Point, on the northern shore,
the breadth of the estuary is only ^ mile; but it expands again to IJ
miles at its head, just below the islands. At Indian Point, a mile above
Oampbelltown. the navigation for shipping ends, there being only 12
feet in a narrow channel at low water ; but small craft may ascend
through very narrow passages, on either side, carrying from 6 1<» 9 feet
water, to within '^ mile of the head of the estuary ; where the Resti-
gouche Kiver, properly so called, enters it through narrow channels
between the islands, 21 miles from the head of Chaleurs Baj'.

Off Loup River, which enters a bay from the northern shore 2 miles
below Oampbelltown, there is a shallow part of the channel called the
bar, over which there is not more than 1 4 or 14 feet at low water ; but
the tide, which rises from 6 to 9 feet, enables vessels of moderate draft
to ascend to Oampbelltown, off which they may moor in from 3 to 3J
fathoms at low water. Vessels of about 18 feet draft may ascend
at all times of the tide nearly to Oak Point, which is about 14 miles up,
and within a mile of the bar ; and larger vessels might proceed 10 miles
u|), or nearly to Guarde Point, with assistance of buoys and a good
pilot.

The charts and directions will enable the seaman to take his vessel
in as far as Dalhousie Harbor, or the anchorage off Fleurant Point ;
but to proceed farther up, the services of a pilot should be engaged, for
there are no good leading marks beyond the above places, where the
shoals become too steep for the lead to give sufficient warning, and the
channels too narrow for a large ship.

Anchorage. — The most convenient amhorage for men of-war, or
other vessels visiting the Restigouche for supplies of wood or water, is
off Fleurant Point on the northern shore, and about 2 miles to the north-
ward of the Harbor. There a vessel can weigh in all winds, and at all
times of tide ; and no other directions are necessary than to anchor
anywi.i're off the point in 6 or 7 fathoms of low water. There is a tol-
erably good watering place at a brook i mile to the westward of the
point, and a little farther westward the Mussel Bank, a dangerous reef,
extends out from the high cliffs, nearly halfway across tiie estuary.

106

MIRAMICHI BAY TO GREEN ISLAND.

Cascapediac Bay \n of considentble extent, being L3 inileH wide
and 5 or (( inileH deep. At its lieud is the Casitiipeilisic River, a eonaid-
entble Htreain, but wiii(;li can only l)e entered by boats, in consequence
of the extensive shoals of sand and mud, which dry out 2 miles from its
entrance, and occupy all the iiead of the bay. Black Point, bold and
rocky, and risinfj 400 feet above the sea, is the eastern point of the bay.
The shoals commence about lA miles to the northward of Black Point,
and at Indian Point, on the east side of Little River, they extend out
to the westward nearly li{ miles, sheltering; the anchorage from SE.
winds.

Duthie Point, the east point of entrance of the Cascapediac River,
bears N. 51 ° W., 5 miles from lilack Point. One mile to the eastward
of Duthie Point, and in the bay between it and Little River, stands
the church and village of Richmond.

The Settlements on the western side of the bay are mostly of French
Canadians and Acadians, and they extend alongshore all the way from
the river to Tr.'icadigash I'oint, which is the west point of the bay. lu
rear of the settlements the Carleton mountain range will be seen 2 or
3 miles back frouj the shore.

Anchorage. — The anchorage in Cascapediac Bay, where the timber
ships moor in 3 fathoms, is off Richmond village, with Duthie Point
bear.ng N. 23° W. f mile, the church N. 33° E., and Black Point S.
57° E. Vessels may anchor farther out in 4, 5, or G fathoms, but they
will not be then so well sheltered from easterly winds.

Directions. — In running for this anchorage from the eastward, ob-
servt^ that the marks for the southwestern or outer edge of the shoal
oft' Indian Point (already mentioned as sheltering the anchorage from
•SK. winds) are Red Point a little open to the southward of Bliick
Point, bearing S. 72° E. Keep these marks therel'ore well open as the
vessel runs to the westward with the lead going, and go no nearer the
shoal than the depth of 5 or 4 fathoms, until the church I)ears N. 33° B.
Then haul boldly in, steering directly for the church until the vessel
is at the anirliorage already pointed out.

Bonaventure Point is formed by a low red sandstone clitt", with a
thin superstratum of sand and clay containing tertiary shells. The
Bonaventure River, with only 2 feet over its bar at low watei'. together
with the village and church with tall spire and red roof of the same
name, will be seen in the bay 2 or 3 miles to the northward of the point.
A rocky sh(»al extends oft" this point to the westward fully a mile, and
continues round the bay to the northward and westward nearly to Red
Point, a distance of 7 or 8 miles.

In the bay between Red and Black Points, aud ~> miles to the NW,
of the former, is the small river Caplin, remarkable only for a reef
whi(;h lies oft" its mouth i mile from the shore.

Anchorage. — There is good anchorage under Bonaventure Point,
with easterly winds, in tathoms, mud bottom, with the point bearing

ii_.

PA8PEBIAC BAY — CARLISLE.

107

13 miles wiile
Kivor, a conaid-
in consequence
2 miles from its
Point, bold and
>ointof thebay.
if JMack Point,
:liey extend out
iiage from SE.

apediac River,

the eastward
i River, stands

ostly of French
II the way from
of the bay. In
ill be seen 2 or

ere the timber

1 Duthio Point
Black Point 8 .
loms, but they

eastward, ob-
re of the shoal
nchorage from
\'»r(l of Black
ell open as the

no nearer the
ears N. S'io E.
ntil the vessel

e cliif, with a
V shells. The
atct', toj^ether
f of the same
d of the point,
ly a mile, and
nearly to Red

s to the NV7.
ily for a reef

inture Point,
[)oint bearing

S. 74° B.. the church N. 27° E., and the entrance of the river N. 61°
E., li miles.

Faspebiac Bay.— Paspebiao has an excellent roadstead, and is the
princii»al fishing establishment in Chaleurs Bay. A triangular point of
sand and shingle beach, inclosing a lagoon, extends out from the niaiii-
laiid to the distance of a mile, and has on its west side several buildings
together witn numerous huts belonging to the fishermen. On the west
side of the sandy point, and close to the cliffs, the lagoon has an outlet,
which has a rough bridge across it, and will admit boats at high water.
In rear of this the mainland rises from the edge of dark red sandstone
.cliffs. ,

Carlisle, the county town, with its jail and court-house, stan(iing on
the ridge in rear of Carlisle Point, are seen from the anchorage. Car-
lisle Point, which is wooded, and consists of sand, is distant 3* miles
from the sandy point of Paspebiac, and the roadstead is between them,
but much nearer the latter. In this excellent and convenient anchorage
vessels are sheltered from the west, round north and east, to SE.; and,
although it is completely o|)en to the SW. winds, which send in a very
considerable swell, yet the ground is so good that the Jersey vessels
ride here moored all through the season without accident.

Anchorage.— The best anchorage is in G fathoms, clay bottom, with
Robin's flagstaff", the most eastern one adjacent to the store with a green
verandah, and Single Tree Point (the extreme to the eastward seen over
the sandy point) in line, liearing N. 67° E. and the extremity of the sandy
point, 8.07° B. A sandy spit extends under water rather more than
^ mile to the westward from the sandy point and nearly as far to the
southward likewise; it is marked by a red buoy at its western ex-
treme.

Supplies.— At Paspebiac there is an excellent watering place at a
stream which will be seen falling from the cliff's just to the westward
of tlie outlet of the lagoon. Supplies of all kinds may be obtained here,
but to a limited extent.

The United States is represented by an agent.

Directions.— VVhen the vessel has passed Nouvelle River and is ap-
proacliing within 2 or 3 miles of the point, keep the summit of Daniel
Hill open to the southward of Nouvelle Point, bearing N. 49° B., until
the easternmost church is seen well open to the westward of tli<^ south
extremity of the sandy point, north. Then steer for Carlisle Point,
keeping the lead going till Le Boutellier'a store is on with the above-
mentioned church.

Steer in now for the anchorage, taking care not to open out the same
church to the westward of the store until Single Tree Point (the extreme
to the westward) is well shut in behind the sandy point, when the ves-
sel will be within the spit, and a berth may be chosen by the lead, or
by a bearing of the lighthouse, at or near the position already pointed
out.

ftC^^^^t^r^-^^SSjis-"' '

108

MIRAMICHI BAY TO OKEEN ISLAND.

Nouvelle River, 5 mik>s eastward uf Paspebiac Point, Iuih only 2
feet over itH bar at low water, and will be known by tbe ti8h Htorea and
stages on 1 he sandy bead' on the east ijide ot its entrance. Tbe west-
ern side is formed by Nouvelle Point, wbich is a higb cliff of red sand-
stone.

Port Daniel is a tine bay, o|)en to tbe eastward, and about H miles
wide and deep. In the nortberu corner of tbe bay, ^ mile witbin Wbite
Point, which is high and of wbite limestone, a small river enters. tbe
bay through a sandy beacb after descending a valley between wooded
bills. There are many liouses and stores near tbe entrance of tbe river,
wbich will oidy admit boats at higb water, being nearly dry when tbe
tide is out.

A shoal extends !^ mile from the shore all around tbe port south-
westward from White Point to West Point. West Point is of craggy
gray limestone, with a high and remarkable semi-isolated rock at its
SE. extremity ; on its north side there is a small cove and a good laud-
ing for boats. Daniel Hill, about one mile to the westward of West
Point, an<l rising 400 feet above the sea, is remarkable as the highest
land close to the shore on this part of the coast. It serves to point out
the situation of Port Daniel, as does also Reddish Point, which often
appears like an island close to the shore.

The points in order westward from Macquereau Point, and between
it and tbe river, are Reddish Point, Pillar Point, and Wbite Point,
which will all be easily recognized, tbe first and last by their color and
the other by a remarkable rock close off its extremity. The ground is
not good outside the line joining Pillar and West Points.

Supplies of wood and water may be obtained at Port Daniel, but
fresh provisions are not plentiful.

Anchorage. — Tbe best anchorage in Port Daniel is in 6 or 7 fathoms,
mud or clay bottom, in tbe line between Wbite and West Points, with
the entrance of tbe river N. 28° W., and Reddish Point and Macquereau
Point in one bearing N. 74° B. Strong SE. winds roll in a heavy
swell, but there is no ditflculty in getting out on their approach, for
the points are all bold, and in standing out or in vest^'els may safely
pass West Point at the distance of 400 yards.

Macquereau Point is of bold and dark-colored craggy rocks. It is
also wooded, and rises to about 200 feet above the sea.

Newport, situated S W. 3^ miles from Great Pabos, and 6 miles NE.
of Macquereau l^oiut, is another fishing place, where a small vessel or
two may be moored (under shelter of a shoal and at some risk) to take
in fish during tbe summer months.

Grand and Little Pabos are fishing places fit only for boats or very
small craft. There is but a foot of water over the bar of tbe latter at
low tide, and ordinary springs do not rise over 5 feet. Great Pabos,
which is a similar but much larger place, had 5 feet over its bar at low
water when it was surveyed, but the depth and situation of the very
narrow channel change with easterly gales.

UiL^_

lint, has only 2
I tish Htorea and
nee. The west-
lift' of red sand-

I abont U miles
le within White
iver enters the
etween wooded
lice of the river,
r dry when the

the port south-
int is of craggy
ted rock at its
ud a good laud-
tward of West
as the highest
res to point out
It, which often

t, and between

I White Point,

their color and

The ground is

rt Daniel, but

or 7 fathoms,
It Points, with
d Macquereau

1 in a heavy
approach, for
Is may safely

rocks. It iB

1 6 miles NE.

aall vessel or

risk) to take

boats or very

the latter at

[xreat Pabos,

ts bar ac low

of the very

CAPE DESPOIR — MAL HAY.

109

Grand River, 7 miles westward of Cape d'Esi)oir, is a consiiU'rablo
stream, but has only li foet at low water over its bar. There is a vil-
lage and a considerable fishing establishment there, and inimediati'Iy
to the westward of the river a shoal extends fully A mile out from the
Hliore.

Cape d'Espoir, the NE. point of Chalenrs Bay, consists of red sand-
stone (ilitts, without beach, and of a moderate height above the sea.

Leander 8hoal, lying SE. distant rather more than l.\ miles from
Cape d'Espoir, is about \ mile in diameter, and has 1(» feet least water
on one spot, which, however, it is very ditticult to find. It is a rocky
shoal, and there is a clear passage between it and the cape. White
Head, in line with the inner or NW. end of Perce Uock, leads. just out-
side of the shoal. From a half to the whole of the Perce Hock, shut in
behind the White Head, will lead clear between the shoal ami Cape
d'Espoir.

Bonaventure Islrnd has bold and perpendicular clitt's of red sand-
stone and conglomerate on all sides excepting the west. Iti the ledges
and fissures of those clifts are innumerable gannets. From the west
side .shoal waterextends to the distance of i mile, and there is anchor-
age in J 5 fathoms between it and White Head, but the riding is inse-
cure and heavy in bad weather. The channel between Bonaventure
Island and Perc6 Rock is free from danger.

Fercd Bay.— Perc6 Rock is precii)itous all round and bold to sea-
ward, and has two large holes w>nch have been perforated through it
by the waves and through one of which a boat can pass at high water.
Between this rock and White Head is the Bay of Perc6, having a reef
at the distance of ^ mile to the SW. of Perc6 Rock and extending out
nearly ^ mile from the shore. Small vessels engaged in the fisheries
anchor on either side of this reef, with winds off the land, but it is a
dangerous place and not to be recommended for large vessels.

Percd, principally inhabited by persons engaged in the fisheries,
occupies the shores of the bay, and Mont Perc4, or, as it is sometimes
calleil, the Table Roulante, rises immediately from it. A reef connects
the Perce Rock with Perc4 Point, and off the NB. side of the latter
small vessels anchor with westerly winds.

Tides — There is generally a regular tide of flood and ebb of about
a knot between Bonaventure Island and the mainland ; the flood tide
running to the SW. round Cape d'Espoir and up the Bay of Chaleurs;
and the ebb in the contrary direction . Two or 3 miles outside, or to
the eastward of Bonaventure Islaiul, the current will often be found
running to the southward out of the St. Lawrence.

Mai Bay is between 5 and 6 miles wide by 4 miles deep and entirely
open to the SE. On its SW. side, and under the Perc6 Mountains,
there are maguificent cliffs 6C« feet in perpendicular heiglit above tlie
sea. Its NE. side has low clifts of samlstoue, with occasional beaches.
A fine broad sandy beach extends across the head of the bay and

MIRAMICHI HAY TO GREEN ISLAND.

indoHes a Hhallow lagoon. A cousidorable river and Heveral Hinall
8tr(MraH (ILsKhurtj^e tlieir waters into tlie lajijoon, wliiuli lias an ontlet in
the NVV. corner of the bay, called the Tickle, admitting boats 't high
water and in line weather. Th<?re is anchorage all round the shores of
Mai Bay, but as a heavy sea and thick fog often precede a SK. gale
and render it ditlicnlt for a vessel to beat out it can not be rec^om-
mended. An open cove or small bay is formed on the NK. side, iu
which a vessel can be occasionally moored close to the shore and in 3
fathoms water, but this is of no use for the general purposes of navi-
gation.

Gasp6 Bay. — St. Peter I'oint, the south point of Gaspe Hay, is of
low sandstone and thickly covered with the white houses of the Hsher-
men. Flat Kock, lying about 8UU yards off the point, is small, low,
and of sandstone. There is a clear chauuel between tlie island and the
point, but no good anchorage; for although vessels occasionally anchor
to the northward of the island, yet the ground is so foul that there is
great danger of losing au anchor from its hooking the rocks.

Gaspd Bay contains an excellent outer roadstead off Douglastown,
a harbor at its head, capable of holding a numerous Heet in {terfect
safety, and a basin where large ships might be hove down and retltted.

American Bank is reported by the local fishermen to have a least
depth of 5 fathoms; this bank is situated with Cape Gasp6 lighthouse,
bearing N. 52° W., distant 11 miles.

Cape Gasp6 is a remarkable headland of limestone, having on its
NE. side a range of cliffs, which rise from the sea to the height of 692
feet. The Flower pot Rock lies close off the SB. extremity of the cape;
it is still visible, the sea washing over it only at high water. 16 is
sometimes called the "Ships Head," at others the "Old Woman," by
the fishermen, and is so bold that vessels may haul round it into Gasp^
Bay within the distance of J mile. Boats may pass between it and
the cape when there is no surf. The cliffs within the bay are very
much lower than those on the outside of the cape.

At Grande Gr6ve, 3^ miles within Cape Oasp^, the ridge of land
dips and narrows, so that there is a portage across it, leading to the
settlements at Cape Rosier. On the NW. side of the portage a range
of mountains commences, and they continue along the NE. side of Gasp^
Bay and the NW. Arm.

Anchorage. — The NE. side of Gasp^ Bay is thickly covered with the
houses of the fishermen, for a distance of 5 miles within Cape Gasp6;
the principal fishing establishments belonging, as at Perc6, to Jersey
merchants. There is an anchorage with good holding ground, but in
not less than 17 fathoms, except within ^ mile of the shore abreast of
St. George Cove, Grande Gr6ve, and Ijittle Gaspd. The word cove is,
however, inappropriately applied to any part of the shore between
Grande Greve and the cape, for though there are fishing establishments
there are no coves whatever.

(JAMPfc BAY AND BASIN.

Ill

I Revernl Hiiiall
liis nil outlet in
f boiits "t liigli
nl tli« shores of
cede A Shj. gale
1 not be reoom-
lie NR. aide, iu
shore and in 3
rposes of navi-

ispo Bay, is of
!S of the Hsher-
;, i» Hinall, low,
) island and the
sionally anchor
I that there is
ock8.

[' Douglastown,
tieet in perfect
vn and reiltted.
to have a least
.sp<^ lighthouse,

having on its
I height of 692
ty of the cape;
water. It is
1 Woman," by
d it into Gasp^
i)etween it and

bay are very

ridge of land
eadiug to the
3rtage a range
. side of Gaspd

vered with the
Cape Gaspfi ;
rc6, to Jersey
ground, but in
ore abreast of
word cove is,
jhore between
stablishinents

Seal Rock is the only detnchtMl danger on this sidr tli«' buy. The
length of this ie«'f, from the depth of ,i fatlioms to .i fathoms, and in a
diri'ction parallel to the shore, is ^ mile; and its bn-adtli \ mil*'. The
least water is 4 feet, and there are '.^ hithoms between it and the shore.
When on the outer edge of the rocks, Cape Itrnle is in line with the
next elitly point up the bay, bearing N. OOo W.

Coast— The 8W. shore of (hispc'' iJay from St. I'eter Point to Doug
lastown, a distance of lli miles, preseiits a succession of preciiiitous
headlands, rising to the height of 'JdO feet ai)ove the sea The shoals
extending out into the bay are too steep for the lead to give warning.

Douglastown is a village of tishermeii and farmers, standing lui the
rising ground at the south side of the entrance of the river St. .John.

Cape IJaldimand, 2 miles northward of Douglas, is a bliitf point of
cliff, and the southeastern termination of the range of hills which sep-
arates the harbor, basin, and SW. Arm, from the valley of the river
St. John.

Water may be obtained by ascending the river St. John to the isl-
ands, a distance of 2 miles. In the siding of the year there is often a
depth of feet in the entrance of this river, which is between two points
of sand ; and there are 12 feet in the narrow channel for some distance
within. At the islands the river becomes shallow and rapid.

Anchorage.— The roadstead off the town of Douglas is extensive ;
vessels may anchor in any part of it, and in any depth from (Mo 11
fathoms, over sand and clay bottom ; but the best berth is in 7 fathoms,
off" the entrance of the river St. John. The riding is much less heavy
in southeasterly winds than might be expected ; and, as the ground is
excellent for holding, a vessel may safely anchor here during the sum-
mer months.

Gaspe Harbor.— Sandy Beach Point makes out to the northward.
It is a low and narrow point of sand, convex to seaward, on which side
the water deepens gradually for a distance of nearly J mile ; on the
inside it is as bold as a wall. The water deepens immediately outside
of 3 fathoms, all along the outside of Sandy Beach Point, and also off
its north extremity ; so that it is both dangerous and difficult to beat
in or out of the harbor at night.

Peninsula — To the northward of Sandy Beach Point, at the dis-
tance of nearly a mile, is the Peninsula, which is a low sand, covered
with spruce trees. The narrowest part of the entrance to the harbor
is 850 yards wide from the depth of 3 fathoms to 3 fathoms, and has a
depth of upwards of 11 fathoms in the center.

Gaspd Basin. — The harbor is divided into the NW. and SW. Arms.
The NW. Arm has deep water for nearly 3 miles above the Peninsula,
and continues navigable for keeled boats about 3 miles farther, where
the Dartmouth River enters the arm between Marsh and Meadow
Islands.

SW. Arm.— The entrance of the SW. Arm is about 360 yards wide.

■I

112

MIUAMICIII KAY TO UKEKN IHLANU.

i ::

ami iM^twcicii two HiiiHly pointH, but tlie iiavipible channel, which is
buoyiMl, JH cdiitractiMl by hIiouIh on citliur Hide to about V2{) yanlH; and
'21 t'(>«>t of water ean be carried in niid-cliannel. The deep-water part of
the 8\V. Ann, which continucH for ^ mile within the entramtc, \h named
(iaspe Hasin ; it Iuih a depth of tVom '» tolM'atlioniH, over a mud bottom,
and is sntllcicntly capacious to hold a great nnud)er of veNsels. Boats
can ascenti HW. Arm by a narrow channel, between shoals, about S
miles, as in the NW. Arm, and tlie navigation, for all but canoes or tiat-
b«>ttom boats, is termimited by shallow channels. Above this part of
the river it becomes contracted and rapid, and the water fresh.

Supplies. — A small rivulet in the bay, on the inside of the south
point of the entramu* of <ras|)6 Hasin, \n the nu)Ht convenient watering
place in the harbor. Most «)f the families, as well as those of the NNV.
Arm and the harbor generally, are farmers, but several of them are
also (Migaged in the whale llshery, which they prosecute in sunill schoon-
ers. The cud tishery is carried on by the peoph^ of the bay outside,
for the most part in connection with the Jersey merchants.

'I'he United States is represented by a consul.

Tides. — There are regular but weak streams of Hood and ebb in th?
entrances of the harbor and basin. In the bay the streams of the Hum
are so irregular that nothing certain can be said res])ectiiig then).
They are, however, usually almost imperceptible, excepting near the
shores, and even there they are 80 weak as to be of little or no conse-
qiience to a vessel.

Caution. — The current down the St. Lawrence runs strongly past
Cape Gaspe over towards Flat Rock, especially during the ebb tide,
which often increases its rate to 2 knots, and this should he remembered
by vessels making GaHi)6 Hay with a northerly wind. This current,
when it meets the swell which so often prevails from the south and SK.,
causes a high, short, and breaking sea, all along the coast from above
Cape Hosier to Cape Gaspe, and extending across the entrance of
Gasi)(!' Bay. When the wind is light a vessel becomes quite unmanage-
able in this sea, and it is extremely dangerous to be caught in it, close
to the shore, by a light breeze on the land.

Winds. — In tine summer weather there is often a sea breeze blow-
ing right up Gaspe Bay from about 9 a. m. until sunset. At such times
there is generally a light land breeze at night down the arms, which
often extends for several niiles out into the bay. In the outer part
of the bay, however, it will generally befouud tobecalm, even at times
when a fresh breeze is blowing outside Cape Gaspe and Point St. Peter.
The wind at sea on such occasions is generally from the SW.

Aspect of Coast. — The bold and high coast between Cape Gasp6
and Cape Chatte, a distance of 117 miles, will require only a brief
notice, as it is free from danger — with the exception of Serpent Reef —
and destitute of harbors. The mountains everywhere approach the
shore, which is steej) and rocky, displaying cliffs, often of great height,

^Ja s-j*^u».jf4v-M<ww ( » BW> afe ' «» !i80! ia » Ma »B >5t^ ^

CAPE R08IKH — IRIOATK POINT.

11.-?

iniml, wliicli Ih
120 yanlH; and
i|»-wat»M' part of
raiMH*, '\H naiiKMi
a iiiiul bottom,

VUHMt'ls. HoatM

Hlioals, about 3
t caiioiis or Hat-
>vo tliiH part of
r fresh.

of tllM HOUtb

iniont watering
)He (»f the NW.
'al of tliein are
II Hiiiall Ncbooii-
he bay outHide,

lt8.

and ebb in th?
iiiiH of the tiuOK
spectinpf theiD.
ptiiig near the
e or no couHe-

Htrongly past

the ebb tide,

be remembered

This current,

8oath and SE.,

at from above

le entrance of

iiiteunmanage-

gbt in it, close

breeze blow-

At such times
e arms, which
he outer part

even at times
»oint St. Peter.
SW.

Cape Gasp^
e only a brief
erpent Reef —
approach the

great heigbt,

aiitl witlioiit iM'ach. After heavy rains, waterfalls, which are not to bti
MfiMi at other times, descend from great heiglits, and small bays, willi
sandy beach and rapid streams at their head, occur occasionally; yet
these features are not generally so strongly marked as to enable a
stranger to make out one part of this (;oast from another with facility.

Caution. — Along the coast between (Jape (tasp*\ and (Jape Oliatte
the water is everywhere too deep to afford snlllcieiit warning by the lca(t
for the safety of vessels. The shore along its whole extent, excepting
in some of the bays, is of highly inclined slate and graywacke rocks,
which wonhl cut through a vessel's l>otto!n in a very short time; and
HU(!li is the iiatiir" of the (Miuiitry that those who might es( ape to shore
would run a great risk of peiisliiiig from want before they could reach
a settlement.

Cape Rosier is low, and of graywacktt and slate rocks. The shoal
water does not extend oil' it above )^ mile, but in the bay to the south-
ward of it, at the distance of 1] miles, there is a reef which runs out
A mile from the shore. Vessels may Mud shelter under Cape {{osier
from NW. winds, but the ground is not very good, and the easterly
swell that frequently rolls in renders it a dangerous anchorage. There
are tlshing establishments on the cape and in its vicinity.

OrifBn Cove and River. — A small bay here atlbrds shelter to thu
boats of the fishermen, whose houses will be seen around it. There
are from 2 to .'5 fathoms water in this bay, over sandy bottom.

Supplies. — This bay is of no use to shijiping, e\(!ept to obtain sup-
plies of water, wood, and occasionally fresh provisions.

Pox River is u mere brook, which enters a small bay about J{ mile
wide and J mile deep. Oft" each point of the bay there are reefs,
which diminish the breadth of the entrance to less than i mile and
afford shelter to boats and to small schooners in from 2 to 2|V fathoms,
over a bottom of fine dark sanil. Round the head of the bay there is
a flue sandy beach.

Supplies. — In fine summer wesither a vessel might anchor off Fox
River and obtain water, wood, and supplies of fresh provisions, but it
is otherwise of no use to shipping.

Serpent Reef, the only danger on this coast, extends from Fox
Point to Cape Serpent, its outer edge being nowhere more than J mile
from the shore.

G-reat Pond is a small creek which affords shelter only to boats,
and will be known by the houses and stages of the fishermen. The
creek is 16 miles from Fox River, and here, as well aa in every other
cove along this coast to the westward, are seen the neat houses of the
Canadian fishermen, by wliich the bays are so distinctly marked that
a ship's position in clear weather may easily be determined by bear,
ingsof them, and of the beacons on the coast.

Prigate Point is marked by a white beacon 38 feet high. It may also
be recognized by a conspicuous waterfall west of the point.
5489 8

I)'

^^^^V«e^J^»:*di'^^i^

- :if4:'«^ ■iaiiiRlESio.rf.Vc ■ .M;5*>r.-- ■

114

MIHAMU'III HAY TO GRKKN INLAND.

Magdalen Rivor.— TItf moiitli ol' tliis rivor in on tliu NW. Hide
of II Hiiixly Way, liiul cIuhu uii«lor (7a|M> Msi^<liiliMi, wliicli Ih rocky, with
uliirs of iiioiloniu^ lu'l^iit, iukI jiits ttiit ii \(«ry HJiort (liMtiinctt t'roiii u
mmn^ of liilLs wiiicli tonus tiu^ v.oAHt lino. A ruel of lociis, wliicli in
dry ill piirt at low wutur, cxtoiidH t'roiii Oapi^ MiiK<laluii, alioiit 100
yarils to tlit^ 8H., paraliul to the. coast, and sludtcrs tlio viitraticu
of tiic rivi'r iVoin northerly winds. Tim river is M) yards wide at tlie
(•iitraii«M', witli a dcptli of 7 luut at low water. VVitliiii, for a sliort dis-
tance, tliere are 10 feet over u clean bottom of line sand. Fartlu-r up
the river heeoiiies shallow and rapid.

At HpriiiK tides 13 feet water can be carried into this river, wliiiili is
occasionally visited by sciiooners of 30 to 80 tons. Tliey warp in wiieii
the sea Ih smooth and the weather tine. The bay is not deep, bein^r
merely a gentle curve with a sandy beach for about a mile to the SH.
of the river. Vessels may anchor herein 7 fathoms, over a bottom
of 8nnd, tine gravel, and broken shells, at the distance of '^ mile
from the sandy Ixmch. It is only a tine- weather anchorage, which may
be of use to vessels wanting wood and water.

During two occasions a regular alternation of the stream of flood
and ebb was oliserved. The flood extended about; 1^ miles from the
shore, running one knot, and at the line of jiinutiou with the almost
constant downward current there was a strong ripple.

Pleureuae Point is marked by a white beacon, 38 feet high.

Mont Louis River is liO yards wide at the entrance, and capable
only of admitting a small boat at low water. There are 7 feet in the
entrance at high water, and for a sliort distance within.

The small bay, with sandy beaoh at its head, into which this river
falls, is a mile wide and nearly ]{ mile deep. Vessels may anchor in it
during fine weather, in from 8 to 10 fathoms, mud bottom, nearer the
west than the east side. The holding ground is excellent but since
a vessel ought not to be distant more than 000 yards from the west
side of the bay, there is not much room to work out, and therefore it
would be dangerous for a large vessel to be caught there by a wind on
the land. Small vessels, or ships having occasion to stop for a few
hours for wood or water, may safely anchor there in fine weather, and
will find shelter in southerly winds.

Mont Louis Uiver may be thus recognized : In a vessel off this part
of the coast, four well-marked openings will be seen in the high laud
in a space of 10 miles. The eastern opeuing is Grande Matte or Pleur-
euae River, the next westward is Mont Louis River, and the two others
Claude and Pierre Rivers. None of them att'ord good anchorage ex.
ceptiug Mont Louis.

St Anne Mountains.— Westward of Cape St. Auue the mountaius
begin to recede a little from the shore and to diminish in height. There
is, however, another range of mountaius in the rear of the coast, uamed
the St. Auue or Sbickshoc Mountains, which can be seen from a dis-

^•sS^RMil

.)g>lK,,a^JL-l^u^^3^l^aBa hwg l ^(a ^^a«i»^l>ww>i8tt^^MB^^ .

» the NW. Mitl«
li Im I'orkj, with
(liMtiiiKu^ t'roiii It
r«)cks, whirh Ih
lulcii, alioiit 100
US the iMitnuico
iViU wide lit tliu
I, for a Hhort *liH-
iiid. Fartlu'r ui»

is river, whiiiii is
ey wiirp in when
not deep, Itcint;
I mile to the Sli.
, over u bottom
itiince of H mile
:)rage, which may

) Htream of tlootl

.^ miles from the

with the almost

feet high,
jice, and capable
are 7 feet in the
u.

which this river

may anchor in it

)ttoni, nearer the

cellent but since

8 from the west,

and therefore it

ere by a wind ou

sto]) for a few

ne weather, and

Hsel off this part
lu the high laud
Matte or Pleur •
id the two others
)d anchorage ex.

e the mountains
in height. There
the coast, named
seen from a dis-

8T. ANNE MOUNTAINH — MAlANK UIVER.

tance of HO to 00 miles, under favorable (tircnmstances; and their high-
est peak, wiiieh is alMiiit 14 miieM iteiiind Cape Chatte, rises .'t,070 feet
abovt> sea.

St Anne River, which is <t miles to the westward of the high cape
of the same name, :u)d 10 miles to the eastward of Cape Chatte, can be
entered Ity snmll selin )ners at high water. The entrance is dilllenlt to
a stranger-. A large KXik above water divides it into two very narrow
channels, through which a rapid (turretit almost always runs. It flows
into the sea through the sandy beach of u bay which affords very indif-
ferent anchorage, the depth of water being too great, ex(!eptiiig at a
less distance Irom the shore than would be consideretl prudent for any
but small vessels.

Supplies of provisions can in general bo obtained, and also at Chatte
River.

Beacon. — A beacon, painted white, and 38 feet high, is placed a lit-
tle westward of Anne Point.

Chatte River, '2'1 miles eastward of Capo Chatte, enters between
large bowlders a small sandy bay, affording no anchorage for ships;
and admits small schooners with ditllculty at high water. The east
point of this bay, 2 miles eastward of the river, is a low spit with a reef
otf it ^ mile. 8mall coasting schooners occasionally anchor under it in
westerly winds.

Cape Chatte, when seen from the eastward or westward, so that it
appears as the extreme point, can easily be distinguished, being a round
bill separated from but of less height than the land l)ehind it.

Aspect of coast — The coast from Cape Chatte to Matane is straight,
bold, and of the same rocks as that which has been just described. Al-
though not a high coast, it is still of (tonsiderable elevation above the
sea, and Ht. Anne Mountains continue in the rear of it, at a distance of
about 15 miles to their southwestern termination, which is 15 miles south
of Cape Balance, the last being li5 miles westward of Cape Chatte.
Several detached hills will be seen farther to the westward, which are
also at a considerable distance from the coast. Two of these have been
named the Paps of Matane, though they can with difftculty be made
out when bearing S. 20° W. ; on any other bearing it is still less easy
to distinguish them, but they are of no use except to enable a vessel,
obtaining a sight of land, to Judge how far she is up the estuary.

Capuchin Cove, and another cove on the west side of Cape Michaux,
attbrd shelter to boats. There are settlements at Little Matane, a small
stream 3 miles eastward of the lliver Matane.

River Matane. — The depth over the bar is usually 4 feet at low
wat^r, and 15 at high-water springs. The depth of water seems to de-
pend so much upon the winds which prevail in the estuary that it is
impossible to calculate it at any time exactly. Easterly winds were
observed to cause high tides, aud westerly winds the contrary. The
channel is very narrow, and there are several large bowlder stones in iti

A
'•1.

■X

^:!aS^X--'

;'''*W.>iA-'fi»-J^«"-w.'-"''-*.t'ce«!«>-*v/-iS.--

116

MIRAMICHI BAY TO GREEN ISLAND.

lying ou the sand, which diminish the depth 2 feet, and are extremely
dangerous when there is any swell. The bar is continually shitting
from the etiVcts of gales of wind, so that no directions can be given for
sailing in. A can buoy, painted black, is moored in 7 fathoms, about f
of a mile oft' shore, northward of the entrance to Mataue liiver.

Pilots reside here and no vessel should attempt the entrance without
one.

Supplies of provisions can usually be obtained at Matano River, and
it will be easily made out from a vessel, since the entrance shows
plainly. The clifty mound on the west side of the entrance and the
buildings and large stone church will also serve to point it out.

Matane is the name of the seignory containing about oOU inhabitants,
most of whom live by the combined means of tishing, farming, and pi-
loting. The soil is good and gives good crops of wheat and other grain^
excepting in batl seasons.

Anchorage. — Outside the bar there is anchorage in 5 fathoms J mile
off" shore, and in JO fathoms a little further out, the bottom being of
sand and clay.

Littlft Metis Bay is small and divided into two rocky coves which
are open to the eastward, and dry at low water. The coast ^'rom Ma-
tane to Metis is low, rocky, wooded, unbroken, and nay be approached
with care by the le.ad, the bank of soundings becoming gradually wider
as we proceed to the westward.

Little Metis River, a small stream, is at the head of the southern
cove. There are several buildings and a fishing establishment on Metis
Point, the outer extreme of the bay. A reef, which is bold on the north
side, and has some of its rocks always above water, extends from this
point nearly ^ mile to the eastward, and enables small vessels to re-
main at anchor in 3 fathoms, over mud bottom, with the wind as far to
the northward as NW. In this berth vessels lie midway between the
eastern end of the reef and a large round rock near the shore on the
SE. side of the bay. Larger vessels may anchor further out in 5 or 6
fathoms water, but not in the stream of the reef, where the ground is
foul and rocky.

Grand Metis Bay is separated from Little Metis by Metis Point-
Grand Metis Uiver, a small stream is near the west end of the bay, and is
nearly dry outside of the very narrow entrance at low water. The bay is
rather more than Smiles wide, and f mile deep; but it is all shoal. Small
vessels may anchor in S^ or 4 fathoms, under its east point, close to the
edge of the shoal water, and in tolerable shelter from winds along the
coast, but there is no shelter for shipping. Nevertheless, vessels lie
here all the summer months for the purpose of taking in timber. They
are usually moored in G fathoms, at low water, over mud bottom, and
with the river bearing about south, distant li miles.

Cock Cove aftbrds good anchorage for schooners, in 3 fathoms at
ow water, well sheltered from the winds along the coast. The summit

.j-«w.MJMi'j i<g8F ; ' .w*t-iww. ' );yrmte. ' .i*^ -

ND.

b, and are extremely
continually Hhil'tiiig
ons can be given for
I 7 fatlioms, about ^
ataue liiver.
tUe entrance without

t Matano River, and
the »:!n trance shows
10 entrance and the
point it out.
out 500 inhabitants,
ig, farming, and pi-
leat and other grain

in 5 fathoms J mile
le bottom being of

rocky coves which
'he coast *"rom Ma-
nay be approached
mg gradually wider

ad of the southern
iblishraent on Metis
is bold on the north
, extends from this
mall vessels to re-
1 the wind as far to
id way between the
ir the shora on the
urther out in 5 or 6
here the ground is

bis by Metis Point*
id of the bay, and is
' water. The bay is
t is all shoal. Small
; point, close to the
m winds along the
thelesa, vessels lie
g in timber. They
• mud bottom, and

's, in 3 fathoms at
oast. The summit

MATANE — OLD HIC HARBOR.

IIT

of Mount Oamille bears from the west point of Oock Oove S. 48° E. 8
miles. A can buoy, painted black, is moored in 5 fathoms, northward
of Oock Point, to indicate the edge of the shoal ground ott" that point.

Anchorage — It may be remarked here that vessels of large draft
may anchor in flue weather all along the coast from Metis to Green
Island.

Father Point is low, aud covered with houses ; many of the St.
Lawrence pilots reside here.

Rimouski Road.— Between the eastern point of Bar naby Island
aud Fatlier Point is the anchorage or road of Rimouski, where vessels
ride throughout the summer to take in cargoes of lumber. The best
sheltered berth is with Rimouski Church S. 50 VV. in 4 fathoms over
mud bottom. Small vessels can anchor further to the westward in 3
fathoms at low water, with the east end of the rocks ott" the eastern
point of Barnaby Island bearing N. 80 W., and distant i mile. The
reef does not extend above ^ mile off the eastern point of Barnaby
Island, and may be passed by the lead in 4 fathoms. A landing pier
has been built at Rimouski 2,160 feet long, and having at its end a
depth of 8^ feet at low-water springs.

Rimouski.— The European mails are landed aud shipped at Rimouski,
special trains running with them to and from Quebec and Halifax by
the Intercolonial Railway. Both mails aud passengers are transhipped
by a steam tender, the mail steam vessels stopping about 2 miles from
the pier. The anchorage off Rimouski is not good.

Coal.— Ouly sufficient coal for the supply of the tender to the mail
steam vessels is kept at Rimouski.

Barnaby Island is low, wooded, aud uninhabited, and is composed
of slate and greywacke roeks, like all the coast aud islands on this
side of the estuary. In the interior of the island there is a long pond
of fresh, but not good, water, which last must be obtained from the Ri-
mouski River.

The channel between the island and Rimouski is dry at low water.
From 7 to 12 feet can be carried through it at high water, according as
it is neap or spring tide, but at no time should a vessel drawing more
than 8 feet attempt this passage, since there are rocks and large stones
here and there, and also fl^h stakes.

Shoal.— Off the outside of Barnaby Island there is a 3-fathom shoal,
extending out fully § mile, and the reef off its western end runs out in
the direction of the island more than ^ mile.

Barnaby Road.—Midway betweeu the western points of Barnaby
Island and Bare Kock there are 2 fathoms at low water, over muddy
bottom, in Barnaby Road, which affords good anchorage to small ves-
sels. Rimouski Caurch in line with the eastern end of the rock will
lead over the tail of the reef off the west eud of Barnaby, and into
this anchorage.

Old Bio Harbor dries at low water, and has many rocks in it. Two

'^MHi^siMhid^&^m ^^s^iAi ^ A-^^^S&^f, ~

118

MIRAMICHI BAY TO GREEN ISLAND.

round aiui liigh rocky islets, called the Bicoques, will be seen extend-
ing to the westward of its oast point. Midway between these rocky
islets atid the west point of the harbor small vessels may anchor in Old
Bic Road in 3 fathoms at low water, with a muddy bottom, and with the
point bearing S. 70° W. distant ^ mile. To run into this anchorage
from the NW., keep the westernmost of the two rocky islets its own
breadth open to the eastward of the west point of the harbor, antl this
will clear the eastern rock of the Arignole Reef, which is the only danger
in the way.

Water may be obtained in a river in the SB. corner of Old Bic Har-
bor.

Arignole Reef is composed of two rocks lying across the mouth of
the shallow Arignole Bay. The western rock is J mile long and very nar-
row ; its west end is always <ibove water, and it is distant o'dy ^ mile
from the rocks on the eastern side of the cape. The eastern rock is
small, covered in high tides, and distant ^ mile from the other.

Ha-Ha Bay, on the western side of Cape Arignole, affords excellent
anchorage, in easterly winds, off its entrance in 4 fathoms at low water,
and farther in for small vessels in 3 fathoms; but it is seldom used,
because the equally sai'f) and more roomy anchorage under Bic is justly
preferred.

Bic Island lies directly oft' Cape Arignole, at the distance of nearly
2| miles, and is about 3 miles long, without including the reefs, in a di-
rection parallel to the coast and a mile broad. Its shores are of slate
rocks ; it is thickly wooded and uninhabited.

Beacons. — On the west end of Bic Island are three wooden beacons,
two white and one red ; the red beacon in the form of a sugar loaf, and
the western white beacon in the form of a cross reverse, in line lead
west ward of N W. Reef.

Water. — Supplies of water can only be obtained from the bay be-
tween the east and SE. points of Bic Island, and not always there in dry
seasons, and from a stream on the west side of a small bay of the main-
land, 4 miles westward of Cape Arignole.

Bicquette Island, lying | mile to the northward of Bic, is ^ mile long,
^ mile broad, and about 100 feet high above the sea.

Reefs. — Several large rocks above water extend ^ mile to the east and
SE. of Bicquette Island, and diminish the breadth of the channel be-
tween it and Bic to little more than ^ mile. Off the west end of Bic-
quette in a S. 40° W. direction, there are two large rocks always above
water, and a third which covers at high water, and extend off a mile
from the island.

The NW. Reef is composed of two rocks about 300 yards long, and
which just cover at high water ; both it and Bicquette are bold to
the northward. There is deep water all along the line from the north
side of Bicquette to this reef, and also between the latter and the rocks
to the SE. of it, the west end of Bic in one with the NW. point of Ha-

BICQUETTE CHANNEL — ALCIDE ROCK.

119

te seen exteiid-
LMi fliesw rocky
ly anchor in Old
in, and witU the
this anchorage
r islets its own
arbor, and this
the only danger

)f Old Bic Har-

is the mouth of
ig and very nar-
ant o'dy ^ mile
eastern rock is
other.

Iford^ excellent
IS at low water,
I seldom used,
er Bic is justly

tance of nearly
le reefs, in a di-
res are of slate

ooden beacons,
sugar loaf, and
se, in line lead

im the bay be-
i.ys therein dry
ay of the main-
is ^ mile long,

to the east and

le channel be-

4t end of Bic-

always above

nd of}' a mile

irds long, and
are bold to
om the north
and the rocks
point of Ha-

Ela Bay, bearing S. 50° E., leads on the reef. In approaching the reef
from the westward, the north extremity of Cape Arignolc should not be
shut ill behind the west point of Bic. The beacons on ISic in line also
lead clear.

Bicquotte Channel.— There are no leading marks for running
througii, but it may easily be done with tl • assistance of the charts in
case of necessity. Tlie southwestern reel of Hicquette, and two small
round rocks on the liic side, 400 yards offshore, bearing S. 20° E. from
the west end of Bic(]uette are the only dangers.

To avoid the first of these dangers, do not bring the south extremity
of the rocks off the SB. side of Bicquette to bear to the eastward of N.
51° E. ; and if the north side of Bic, near its east end, is not brought
to bear to the northward of N. 03° E., the second will be cleared. The
best time to run through is at low water, when all the dangers show,
and a vessel, keeping in mid-channel between them, will have from i)^
to 5 fathoms, with irregular soundings and foul ground occasionally.

SE. Reef extends from the SE. point of Bic Island to the distance
of nearly V\ miles, in about an easterly direction. The outer part of
this reef is formed of three rocks lying in a straight line, and always
above water. Small schooners can pass on either side of the western
rock, keeping close to it, if they pass to the westward. The inner part
of the reef, extending under water from the Sl'3. point of Bic, reaches
farther to the southward than the direction of the rocks, and must be
avoided by not bringing the south side of Bic to bear to the southward
of S. 60° W.

NE. Reef.— The NE. Reef is a small patch of black rocks, which
'shows at low water, lying M . 3-1° E. 800 yards from the NE. point of Bic.
To pass to the eastward of this reef, keep both the rocky islets on the
east si<le of Old Bic Elarbor open to the eastward of the SE. Reef.

TVest Grounds of Bic are an extensive tiat of slate, which i)artly
dries at low water. The outer point of these grounds is distant nearly
^ mile from the west point of the island.

Alcide Rock, is small and has 4 feet on ij at low water. It ri jes
from a small rocky shoal which is so bold all round that there is no warn-
ing whatever by the lead. From the N\V. extremity of Cape Arigiiole
the rock bears S. 65° W., distant 5 miles; and it is rather more thin V\
miles distant from the shore to the southward. The two white beacoiis
on Bic — one in the form of across reversed and the otht^r in a diamond
form-— in line, lead directly on Alcide Rock; and the two white beacons
on the south shore of the river, about 5 miles westward of Cape Arig-
uole — one of which is of.a diamond shape and theother of a sugar loaf —
in line, also lead on th.^ rock. Vessels will be in no danger from it if
Mount Camille be not entirely shut in behind Cape Arignole. A black
and white can buoy is moored in 9 fathoms northward of the rocks on
the alignment of the two white beacons on the south shore.

Anchorage. — There is excellent anchorage under either end of Bic,

120

MIRAMICHl BAY TO GREEN ISLAND.

and also between it and the inainlaiul, according to the wind ; and ves-
sels whicli may be met by an easterly wind had better anchor than
»ttem|)t to beat down the estuary in the long and foggy nights of the
fall of the year.

Tides.— To the westward of Bic the first of the fioo<l comes from the
NE., but there is but little stream of flood in neap tides bt'tween Bic
and the mainland, excepting close to the latter. lu spring tides it runs
through the channel at the average rate of 1^ knots, being strongest
near the mainland. It also runs Itetween Bic and Bicquette, but the
stream extends oidy a very short distance outside the latter island.

The stream of Hood continues its course close along the mainland,
passing inside and also very close outside of the Razade, Basque, and
Apple Islands, but nowhere extending a sufficient distance offshore
to be of use to ships beating to the westward much below Green Island.
That part of the stream of Hood which passes farther out towards Bic,
and also that which passes between Bic and Bicquette, runs at its full
rate oidy until at half flood, after which it becomes gradually weaker
turning to the N W., around the west end of the island, and finally to the
north and NE., towads the end of the tide.

The stream of flood becomes weaker and of less duration as we pro-
ceed to the westward of the islands. Half way between Bic and the
Razade Islets there is slack water for about an hour at the end of tlio
ebb, after which a weak flood makes during the first quarter of that ride
at the rate of one fourth knot ; and this is succeeded by the eddy flood
at the rate of 1^ knots, or 2J at the edge of the bank of soundings, which
comes from the westward, running in the same direction as the ebb
during the remainder of the flood tide.

From these remarks it will be seen that vessels will make little way
to the windward against a westerly wind on the bank of soundings be-
tween Bic and the Razade Islets ; and indeed all the way to Green
Island.

The set of the latter part of the flood to the northward past the west
end of Bic shouhl be remembered by vessels weifc,hing from the western
anchorage, or approaching the island with light winds, especially in
the night or thick weather.

The first of the ebb .sets offshore, or from the southward, and this is
more particularly remarkable at the eastern anchorage, but it only lasts
for a very short time, after which the stream runs fairly betwe^. the
islands and along the coast to the eastward for the remainder of the tide.
Its rate, in westerly winds, varies from 2 to 2^ knots, according as it is
neap or spring tide, but it does not run so strongly in easterly winds.
Anchorage — There is anchorage on the bank in 10 or 12 fathoms,
with good holding ground, all along the south coast from Bic to Green
Island.

Coast— The coast of the mainland between Bic Island and Razade
Islets is high and rocky. With the exception of Alcide Rock it is free

■*!

RAZADE ISLKT8 — GREKN ISLAND KEEF.

121

) wind ; and ves-
ter anchor tlmn
gy iii<;lit.s of the

I conies from the
lo8 between Bic
ring tides it rnns
, being strongest
icquette, but the
hitter ishind.
^ the niainhmd,
ide, Basque, and
listance ofltahore
ow Green Island,
out towards Bic,
e, runs at its full
.•adually weaker,
and tinally to the

:atiou as we pro-
een Bic and the
,t the end of llio
irter of that tide
ly the eddy flood
loundings, which
ition as the ebb-

make little way
of soundings be-
way to Green

rd past the west

om the western

ds, especially in

ard, an<l this is
but it only lasts
ly betwei. , the

nder of the tide.

ccording as it is
easterly winds.

) or 12 fathoms,

>ni Bic to Green

md and Razade
3 liock it is free

from danger to small vessels, which may stand close in ; but vessels of
large draft should not stand in farther than 7 fathoms at low aiul
fathoms at high water, because of a long ridge of rocky ground, ex-
tending ri miles N. 45^ E. from the XIO. Razade Islet, with 17 feet least
water near its eastern eiul. To clear every part of this ridge keep
Basque Island its own breadth open to the northward of the NK.
Bazade.

Razade Islets are two large rocks about ^ roile long ; they are low,
bare of trees, and 1^ miles apart. There is no passage for vessels be-
tween them and the shore.

Basque Island, is rocky, wooded, and uninhabited, and there is no
passage for ships between it and the shore.

Shoals. — The shoal water extends ^ mile to the northward of Basque
Island, and there is a reef of rocks to the westward of its western point.
On the west«rn extremity of this reet, and about 1,201) yards distant
from the island, is a round rock, which shows at half tide.

Apple Island is formed by one principal and several smaller rocks;
the whole about one mile long by 300 yards wide. Ic is 30 or 40 feet
above the sea at high water, without any trees, and distant 2^ miles
from the nearest point of the mainland. There is no passage for ships
between it and the shore, but its north side is bold-to.

Green Island has a long and narrow point of rocks, always above
water, and running out more than ^ mile from the trees towards Apple
Island. Half this distance towards Apple Island is occupied by reefs
of slate, which dry at low water. The line of shoal water is continuous
from each of these islands to the other, and may be safely approached
with care to 7 fathoms at low or 10 fathoms at high water ; as may also
the islands.

Oreen Island Reef, which is extremely dangerous, extends from
the lighthouse northward 1^ miles to the 3-fathom line of soundings
Its shape is irregularly triangular, and the rocks on it dry at low water
nearly ^ mile out from the high-water mark. On the eastern side this
reef may be safely approached to the depth of 7 or eyen 6 fathoms at
low water, but on the north and west sides there is no bottom with the
hand lead until close to it. To avoid Green Island Beef in the daytime
and clear weather keep the summit of the high land to the southward of
Cape Arignole (or the high land of Bic) open to the northward of Basque
Island.

Anchorage. — There is excellent anchorage in westerly winds under
Green Island Reef, and it is the general rendezvous of vessels waiting
for the Hood to beat through between Green and Red Islands. Vessels
should not anchor with the light bearing to the westward of S. 29° W. or
in less than 7 fathoms at low water. If they wish still more room, they
may choose their berth in 9, 10, or 11 fathoms, and will find a bottom
of stiff mud in either depth.t

Tides.— Ft is higli witer, fall ati I change, at Green Island at 2h.

.ifsJ^iSffiifs-

'im^ms&maia&iijmmsr;,

»..-'i,i*

122

MIRAMICHI BAY TO ORKEN ISLAND.

45rii.; ami ordinary springs rise 16 feet, and neaps 9^ feet. At tlie an-
chorage northward of Green Island the first of the Hood was observed
to come from the northward; then tending gradually round to the SB.
at the end of the tide. Tlie vessel continued to go around witli the Hrst
of the ebb which came from the southward off the shoals to tlie NW.,
win(!h latter point she reached at about 4 hours' ebb ; and slie con-
tinued with her head in that direction, from which the tide came, until
near tiie end of the tide. The vessel then began to tend again, with
her head to the north and NB., as before, going completely around the
compass in 12 hours. It was never entirely slack water, the stream
continuing to run more or less during the whole time. The rate of the
ebb was 3 knots, and that of the flood 2 knots. This occurred in quite
a calm day.

feet. At tlie aii-
0(1 was observed
roiiud to tlie SB.
imd witli tlie first
oals to tlie NW.,
b ; and she con-
tide came, until
tend again,- with
\etii\y around the
ater, tlie stream
The rate of the
•ccurred in quite

CHAPTER V.

GULP OF ST. LAWRENCE, NORTH COAST, ORAND POINT TO CAPE

WHITTLE.

General Observations.— Greenly Island lies southward U miles
from Grand Point, which is on the northern or Labrador side" of the
entrance of the Gulf of St. Lawrence, throujjh the Strait of Belle Isle.
The coast, which will form the subject of this chapter, lies between that
island and South Makers Ledge, near Cape Whittle, a distance of 128
miles.

The mariner is reminded that in shaping a course along the coast the
variation of the compass alters half a point within the limits of this-
chapter, for which alteration due allowance should be made; attention
should also be given to the soundings. A vessel steering a direct course
for the east point of Anticosti would carry soundings out to 60 fathoms,
at the distance of 15 miles from Greenly Island. She would then find
a greater depth, or no soundings, until she had increased her distance
to 67 miles from the island, when she would again strike ground in
from 30 to 50 fathoms, and continue to And soundings from time to time
in various depths, and over mud, sand, and gravel bottom until she had
passed South makers Ledge. These soundings are on detached banks
lying parallel to the coast at the distance of se'-eral leagues. They are
very irregular, and there is in general much deeper water between
them and the shore and also to the southward for a great distance, or
until we approach the opposite coast of Newfoundland.

Currents and Icebergs — In navigating along this coast the current
iu through the Strait of Belle Isle (page 8) must be taken into consid-
eration, and it should also be remem bered that, in addition to the |»er-
nianent dangers of the coast, drifting icebergs are frequently to be met
with. There is a weak stream of flood from the eastward inshore and
among the islands, and an equally weak ebb stream in the contrary di-
rection; but both are much influenced by the winds.

Aspect of Coast.— The coast between Greenly Island and Cape
Whittle is exceedingly dangerous at night or iu togs; and even in day-
time and flne weather it requires the intimate knowledge of the position
of every ledge possessed by the fishermen, or a good chart on a large
scale, to navigate along it with safety. The mainland and islands are
of granitic rocks, bare of trees excepting iu the heads of bays, where
small 8i)ruce and birch trees are met with occasionally. When not en-

123

-#s6sssissB«i*asssi*ti<tajs*

' j'z;!^;V ' <4'8»*S!i"

a ill i

124

GRAND POINT TO CAPE WHITTLE.

tirely bare, tlio iiiaiiiliiiHl mid isliiiuk iiro covered with moss or scrubby
spruce bushes, and there are many ponds of dark bog water frequented
by water fowl and Hocks of the Laltrador curlew. The maiidand is
broken into inlets and bays and fringed with islands, ro(!ks, and ledger
whiciii frecjuently rise abruptly to within a few feet of the surface, from
dei)ths so great as to atlbrd no warning by the lead. In some pails the
islands and rocks are so numerous as to form a complete labyiinth, in
which nothing but small egging sciiooners or shallops can find their
way.

lu general tlie mainland does not exceed the height of 500 feet above
the level ot the sea and is often very much lower, as are all the islands
excepting Great and Little Mecattina. These two high islands, the
Iligh Land of Mecattina, 685 feet above the uea, and the Uradore Hills,
e. J all very remarkable, and serve to point out to a vessel her position
from great distances at sea. The Bradore Hills are three contiguous
round-backed mountains situated inland 4 or 5 miles northeastward
from the head of Bnulore Hay. TheNW. summit is the highest, being
1,'JU4 feet above the sea, and the highest land on this coast.

Climate. — The climate is very severe, and the dangers are increased
tenfold by the fogs which accompany the prevalent southerly winds.
It is probable that the mean temperature of the year does not exceed
the freezing point. The ice does not usually leave the coast before
June, and young ice begins to form again in the pools and slieltered
small bays in September, when frosts are very frequent at night. At
midsummer we found only a very few of the earliest plants in tlower,
the grass had not sprung up, and the moss still retained the brown
color of winter. Large masses of snow still occupied the ravines and
hollows and the shaded northern sides of steep hills.

In the sheltered bays the temperature is much higher and the fogs
less frequent than among the outer islands, whilst, at the distance of
5 or G leagues inland, the water is said to be quite warm in summer
and the country thickly wooded with spruce, juniper, birch, and poplar
trees, which grow in valleys where the soil is of sandy clay, ouly the
sammits of the hills being of bare granite like the coast.

Inhabitants and Productions.— There are a few Indians of the
Montanes tribe, and a family or two of half-civilized Esquimaux occa*
sionally visit the coast from the northward. There are deer (caribou),
bears, wolves, foxes, martens, otters, beavers, aud Canadian porcupines
in the interior, most of which are hunted for their skins by the few in-
habitants of the coast. The Canadian partridge and the ptarmigan, or
willow grouse, are also plentiful.

The oidy permanent inhabitants are a few widely scattered families,
residing at seal and salmon-tlshiugand fur-trading establishments, which
are visited periodically by small schooners from Quebec. Seals and
salmon are very plentiful. The establishments alluded to are at Bradore,
Esquimaux Bay, St. Augustin Harbor, Little Fish Harbor, aud Eta-

CLIMATE HRADOKK MAY.

125

;h moss or scrubby
g water fruqiieiitctl

The mainlaiid is
, ro(;k8, and letltfos
if tlie surface, from

lu 80IUU pHi'ls the
plete lubyiiutli, in
opa can find their

it of 500 feet above
are all the islands
> high islands, the
the Bradore Hills,
vessel her position
i three contiguous
lies northeastward
the highest, being
s coast.

gers are increased
b southerly winds,
r does not exceed
» the coast before
tola and .sheltered
ent at night. At
; plants in dower,
baiued the brown
d the ravines and

;her and the fogs
at the distance of
warm in summer

birch, and poplar
iidy clay, only the
ist.
w Indians of the

Esquimaux occa-
ire deer (caribou),

adiaa porcupines
ins by the few iu-
the ptarmigan, or

cattered families,
blishments, which
lebec. Seals and
to are at Bradore,
larbor, and Eta-

inamu. These are the otdy places which could be relied on for much
assistance by the crews of vessels which might be wrectked upon the
coast. There is a family residing on the island between Bonne Ksper-
iiuce and Salmon Bay in summer, and in Old Fort Bay in winter, wlii(;h
might be added to the list. The remaining two or three fiunilies are
very poor people, who seem just able to make out an inditl'erent livoli-
hooil by hunting and fishing.

Codflshery. — OodHsh are abundant on tli' coast, espeeiaily t«> the
eastward of Mistanoqne. The flsheiy for tliem is not carried on only
by resident inhabitants, but by schooners which visit the coast every
summer.

Bradore Bay, — In the NE. part of the bay is Ledges Island, of
granite, surrounded by small islets, rocks, and ledges, as its name
implies, and forming the harbor of Bradore. On the NW. side of
the bay, just within Belles Amours Point, is Belles Amours Harbor.
Between these harbors there are straggling rocks and no ai.(;horage,
which, together with the heavy sea sent in by the southerly winds,
makes this bay a very dangerous place. Grand I'oint, the SK.
point of the bay, has a reef of rocks off it 700 yards to the south and
west. The end of the point is low, but immediately in rear of it there
lises a ]>recipice having a round knoll upon it, and behind that a still
higher precipice, being the SVV. extremity of the extensive table lands
of sandstone extending eastward along the northern side of the strait
of Belle Isle, and northward to near the head of Bradore Bay.

Peroquet Island, which is high, of sandstone, and the abode of
myriads of pultins, is on the eastern side of Bradore Bay, 1 J miles to
the northward of Grand Point.

Bradore Bay. — There is no channel between the Pero(iuet and the
mainland, the entrance of the channel lejiding to the harbor being be-
tween the Peroquet and the rocks oft" the Island of Ledges.

On the eastern side are Gull Rock and Ledge, which bear S. 21° W.,
andaredistantflOOand l,000yard8 respectively from Jones Pointon which
the houses stand. The rock just covers at high water, and therefore can
always be seen, but the ledge has 2 fathoms least, water on it, and is,
therefore, extremely dangerous. On the western side of this ledge, the
western extremes of Peroquet and Greenly Islands appear in one. The
only other dangers on this side are several rocks above water, near the
shore, just within the houses, and the shoal water, which extends 400
yards oft' shore, and continues to the head of the bay.

The islets which lie in a straight line close along the eastern si<le of
the Island of Ledges, and form the western side of the channel, are
quite bold. They are distinguished by letters, and the southernmost or
outermost of them («), which has a small rock oft' it 200 yards to the
southward, although small and low, can always be seen.

Blubber Cove. — Between the third and fourth islets (c and d) is the
very narrow channel, carrying 2 fathoms, that leads into Blubber Cove

f. i.-i.-js^ie*.v » wJk^"--*-*'

!*»'*<*•",■>»— ..i.-1

GRAND POINT TO CAPK WHITTLE.

on tli(^ MiiHt 8i<l(> of the IhIuikI of Ledt^eH, and which in At only for Hmull
vhshoIh.

Bradore Harbor.— lietweuii the islots {d and e) is the untranue to
Bradoro Harbor, lUO yards wide, and carry in^; a depth of 7 fatlionis.
Tli»i;-i> are two more islets close together (/') at \ of a mile N. U4° VV.
of islet (e). The harbor, which is l)etween the north poiitt of Ledges
Island and the islets (d) and (0), is qnite land-locked, and has a depth
of from i to 17 futlioins water over muddy bottom; but it is capa-
ble of holding only a small number of vessels, the space in which
they can anchor being about | mile long by 3(M) yards wide. There is,
however, plenty of room and good anchorage for large vessels farther
up the bay to the northward of islets («) and (/), in from 10 to L'O fath-
oms over muddy bottom ; some sea rolls in there with SW. winds, but
not enough to endanger a vessel with good anchors.

There is no channel for vessels into Bradore Harbor to the northward
and westward of Ledges Island, on account of the innumerable rocks,
although it is possible for small craft to pass through a narrow and
very deep channel close along the NW. side of the island. The only
navigable channel therefore is that which wo have described, and which
is nearly r^ mile wide in the narrowest part, and 15 fathoms deep.

Water may be obtained at a small stream near the houses, and also
from small rivers in the head of the bay at high water.

Directions. — In coming from the eastward give Grand Point a berth
of ^ mile, or in hauling around it to the northward take care that the
west extreme of the Peroquet does not bear to the westward of N. 35^
W., for the reef is very dangerous, and there is no warning by the lead.
The west side of the Peroquet may be passed as near as ^ mile. Having
passed it, haul to the eastward till the mark for clearing the Gull Hock
and ledge, namely, the western point of Greenly Island, open half a
point to the westward of Peroquet Island, bearing S. 2P B., comes ou.
Then steer with that mark on, or N. 21° W. until Gull Rock is seen, or
until Jones's house bears N. 32° E. and the islet (e), which will appear
as the NE. extreme of Ledges Island, N. 2° W. Steer now for the
latter, leaving Gull Rock to the eastward, and looking out for the other
small rock on the opposite side, which has been mentioned as lying off
islet (a). As soon as this rock is i>a8sed, the channel will be clear
ahead by keeping nearer the islets than the mainland. When opposite
Jones's house, a run of about 1,400 yards farther along islets (c) and
(d), which are quite bold, will lead to the entrance ; and she must haul
sharp round to the westward between (d) and (e), into the harbor, unless
the more roomy and deep water anchorage is preferred farther up the
bay, in which case there is nothing in tiie way, excepting the shoal ex-
tending off the maiu shore already mentioned.

In approaching Bradore from the westward, beware of the reefs which
extend J mile to the SW. from Ledges Island. In order to give these
a wide berth, do not bring the Peroquet to beai tc the southward of east

HKADOKK AND liKLLES AMOURS irARROKB.

127

lit only for hiuuII

the Hiitraiice ti)
itli of 7 fatlioiiiH.
I mile N. li4o VV.
point of LedKe.H
and liaH a depth

but it is cai>a-
Hpace in whiuli
wide. There iH,
e veHHels fartlier
^ni 10 to 20 fath-
SW. windH, but

o the northward
iumerable rocks,
ti a narrow and
land. Tiie only
'ibed, aud which
loms deep,
louses, and also

id Point a berth

<e care that the

tward of N. 35<=

ing by the lead.

mile. Having

the Gull Hock

id, open half a

'^ E., comes ou.

iock is seen, or

ich will appear

ir now for the

ut for the other

led as lying off

will be clear

When opposite

islets (c) aud

she must haul

harbor, unless

farther up the

g the shoal ex-

the reefs which

to give these

thward of east

until .Ioiu^h'm house bears N. 2P B., then steer for the latter until the
marks come on fur eltuiring Gull Uouk and Ledge, when the veHsel must
pnKjeed as before directed.

Tides. — A weak stream of dood sets into Bradore Bay from the
soutiiwiird. Tlie ebb sets out in a contrary dinuitioii, and is at times
accelerated by 8VV. winds, but its rate never amounted to one knot.

Aspect of Coast — The country separating Belles Amours, Middle
Bay, and Five Leagues Harbor is of low granite, on wiiicli are ridges of
bowldei'H, with tioarse grass and moss, extending out to seaward sev-
eral miles from the range of steep granite hills, 401) or oUO feet high,
which trend westward from the head of Bradore Bay.

Belles Amours Point will be easily recogni/.e<l, being a mound of
bare granite, GO or 70 feet high, at tlie SI'), extremity of the low penin-
sula separating the harbor of the same name from Middle Bay.

Belles Amours Harbor. — Stony Point, which is low and green, aud
Flat Uocks, which lie off it 1^ miles southeastward, form the east side
of the channel between them aud Belles Amours Point, leading north-
ward to Belles Amours Harbor.

Shoal. — Nearly midway between Belles Amours Point and Flat
Uocks lies a rocky patch with 13 feet least water. Between this patch
and the point there are other patches with li^ fathoms, which is as
much water as can be counted on through the western pa^isage.

Niobe ShoaL — A dangerous shoal lies about 400 yards to the west-
ward of Flat Hocks, ou the eastern side of the east passage, into Belles
Amours Harbor. ()i; the edges of the shoal the rock inside Harbor
Point was touching the point.

The soundings are extremely irregular and the ground foul in the
East Passage.

Harbor Point is about 1^ miles within Belles Amours Point, and on
the west side is a bare granite hill, about loO feet high, with several
beacons of stones upon it, which are erected upon almost every hill,
and are said to be for the guidance of travelers in winter. Tlie shore
between these points incloses a large and shallow pond, the center of
which is within Pond Point. The shoal water extends off on this side
300 yards from the high-water mark. The NVV. side of Harbor Point
is of sand, extending (together with a Hat which dries at low water)
partly across the inner entrance of the harbor. Northward of Harbor
Point, and at a distance of about 160 yards, th^^re is a small rock always
above water ; 200 yards farther out in the same direction lies another
small rock, which dries only at low water. There is no passage for
vessels of auj* size between these rocks aud Harbor Point. On the
east side of the entrance the shoal water and large stones extend from
Stony Point northward to the point of the North Cove, which is only
fit for boats.

VSTater may be obtained in the NW. corner of Belles Amours Har.
bor aud also from a considerable stream at the head of the North Cove,

■V-.,,Ji4,.Wk'W*

ViS

(IRANI) roiNT TO caim: whittle.

vIhih' tlu'MMin* 11 («vv tn't'H ; Imt wooil for f'lHil Is v«m\v noiirco on tliis (ioiiit.

Directiona. — To t^itur lt«^ll«>H Aiiioiii'm llurbor by tlio (MiHfi'^rti pii'i-
Miin«', Mtt'or N.ACP W.,Ho »H to piiHH iJ iiiil(> to tim woMtwiii'd of tlio Kliit
HoitkH. (Jontiniio tliiM coiii-Hii until tliu oiiMt hIiIo of llnrlior Point Ih
)i|*|>roit(;li)Ml witliin liOO yiinls; tlitMi Ht«'«r X. .T*'' \V. till tli« niintly part
of tUii point is opiMiiMl out, or tiid vt^ssi'l is alu'iMiit of liiu rork al)ovi^
water otr it, wIkmi hIio must haul a little to the westwaid, ho an to brin^
the oitNt Hiilf of Harbor Point and Pond Point in one. Keep tlieni in line,
n order to nnirnl the north extrenu^ ol' the flat, until Mark Point (tlie
extreme on the north side within the harlxtr) (tomes on with Peak Point
(a riwMy point in .Middle itay), seen over the low land at the head of
the harbor, and bearing H. (14^ VV. As soon as this nnirk ecnne.". on,
haul sharp roiintl to tlit* w*>stward, keeping' at a less distance than 1200
yards from the hi^li north shore until the vessel is well within the
sainly spit, when she may haul to the southward and ant^hor anywhere,
the bottom bein;; of mud and thei de|itli from /> to 7 fathoms.

To enter by the western passajje, whittli is preferable with a westerly
wind, approaeh Belles Amours I'oint on a bearing; nothin;; to the east-
ward of N. 32'^ IC, ami taktunire not to shut in Stony I'oint Ixdiind it,
for tear of the middle ledges. Pass lielles Amours Point at a distance
of too yards, and (^o no nearer the shore on that side until past Pond
Point ; then proceed as before directed. As soon us the marks come
on for hauling into the harbor to the westward, put the helm down and
Hhoot the vessel in as far as she will go ; then let go the anchor, and
warp in the remainder of the way. It is only with easterly and south-
erly winds that a vessel can sail in. The bottom is good for anchoring
outside Harbor Point, but not outside Stony Point.

Middle Point, which has several rocjks oft' it 200 yards to the west
and south, lies rather more than 1^ miles from Belles Amours Point.

Middle Ledges lie to the southward of Middle Point. Several of
these ledges dry at low water, but the outermost, which is 1,200 yards
ot!" shore, has l.'i feet least water. There is no safe passage between
these and the shore.

Five Leagues Point is the SW. extreme of another low but smaller
peninsula, separating Five Leagues Harbor from Middle Bay. On this
peninsula, fj mile to the northward of the extremity of the point, there
is a precipitous hill nearly 200 feet high, which marks the position of
Five Leagues Harbor from the westward.

Leagues and Barrier Reefs. — Leagues Reef, ott' Five Leagues Point,
is partly above water, and extends ^ mile to the southward, and the two
Barrier Reets extend to the distance of 1'^ miles to the south westward
of the same point, but are not Joined to it. The south extremes of
Middle and Belles Amours Points in line, lead ff mile to the southward
of the Barrier Reefs.

Middle Bay is a tine open roadstead, free from all danger, more than
a mile wide, and extending inland 2 miles to the northward. lu the

I 11 ■

a: :<

MIDDLK HAY — KHCJjITIMArX IHLANDH.

121)

ii-il of Mii^ Flat
arhiM' I'oiiit iit
liK Miiiiily part
liu nxtk ahovo
, HO an to briii^

>|) tlllMII ill lilH>,

ink I'oiiit (tlio
itii IVak Point

lit tllM luMul of
lark (tonic.", on,
r.aii<'(> tlian L*(M)
n\\\ wiMiiii Mio
lior aii,vwlntr«,

IMlH.

ntli a westi'i'Iy
n^ to tlie cuMt-
'oiiit boliiiul it,
t at a (liHtancu
ilil past Pond
[i«^ niai'kH come
lelni down and
HI anchor, and
rly and south-
for anchoring

ds to the west
lourH Point,
t. Several of
in 1,200 yards
4sage between

■w but smaller
Bay. On this
point, there
he position of

leagues Point,
1, and the two
)uth westward
extremes of
le southward

er, more tlian
irard. In the

outer pari of the bay, for the llrst mile in, the shore, on either side,
should not be appi'oa<tlicd nearer than .'100 yards, but farther in it l»
4piite bold, excepting in the heads of the coves, The depth (»f water iu
this bay is IVoiii 4 to 13 fathoms over mindy bottom.

West Cove is a mile within the entranire on tlie west side of Mi(ldli>
Hay. Its tiead is separated by a low and swampy isthnnis trotn Kive
Leagues Harbor. In tin; month of this «;ov(t, in 4 fathoms, in the an-
clioragt^ with westerly winds.

Shallop Cove, on the east si<le of Middh^ Hay, is only lit for boats.

Peak Point is forked; its s«mth extremity is a ragged isolated
mound or peak ; ami otf its west side, at the distance of 100 yards, there
is a large rock above wat(*r.

lathmusCove is a small place, in which two or three llshing vessels
are occasionally moored, under a reef which extends from the south
side of the cove northward towards Peak Point. The reef atVords in-
ditVerent shelter with 8VV. winds, which blow right in with a heavy sea.
The entraiKM' between the reef and Peak Point is only 140 yards wide;
neither is there much more room between thu reef and the shore to the
eastward.

To enter Isthmus Uove, Peak Point must be kept close aboard; and
when the vessel is 100 yards past it to the eastward, haul her sharp
round to the southward between the reef and the shore. The part of
the cove which runs in to the northward of Peak Point is ipiite shoal

Water may be obtained in Isthmus Cove, as well as in the head of
Middle Hay, where there are a few small trees.

Five Leagues Harbor is altogether unfit for anything larger than a
schooner of 100 tons. A 8VV. wind rolls in a considerable swell, and
there would be no lying there if it were not for the indifferent shelter
afforded by the Barrier Reefs ott" its mouth. The channels leading in
are about 000 yards wide, and on either side of the Barrier Reefs.

There is also a channel \ mile wide between the two Barrier Keefs,
but they overlap in such a way as to make it diftlcult for a stranger
There are parts of each of them that dry at low water, and the sea
almost always breaks on them.

Salmon Bay. — Salmon islet lies close to the SE. extreme of Caribou
Island, off which the shoal water extends nearly J mile to the eastward.
Carril)ou Island can not be distinguished from the mainland from a
vessel off the coast. The eastern entrance to Salmon Bay has a depth
of only feet in It at low water. The other entrance to this deep bay
is from Bonne Esperance round to thenorthward of Caribou Island.

Esquimaux Islands are bare of trees, excepting some of those which
are far in near the mainland. Off these islands lie many small rocks
and ledges, the outermost of which are fully 4 miles from the mainland
To attempt to describe all these islands, or all the channels between
them, would be an endless task ; and a good chart, upon a large scale,
will in most cases be far more useful than any written description.
5489 9

.■flte'ot»#iof*.i5i*v«- -

j^33C^5cr^

" ^'

i Ml'

130

GRAND POINT TO CAPE WHITTLE.

Whale Island is about ^ mile loug, aiid about ^ mile broad. It
does not exceed 100 feet iu height, in the iii^he.st part, which is around
hill near the center of the ishmd, on whicli there is a beacon, or pile of
stones, supporting a pole of driftwood 30 f»'t't high.

All vessels bound to Bonne Bsperance endeavor to make this island.
There are rocits, botli above and under wiiter, extending G()() .yards ott'
the south point of Whale Island ; but off its NE. point the shoal water
readies only to the distance of loO yards. There is also a ledge, with 9
feet water, lying SW. 700 yanls from its SVV. point; and there are
several rocks, dry at low water, lying 200 yards ott shore, on tUe east
side of the same point.

Bonne Esperance Harbor. — The ishmds whicli form the harbor of
Bonne Esperance are steep, and of bare granite ; the largest of them
look much higher than they really are, an effect which is also owing to
the contrast of the much lower islands to the westward of them. There
are none of them higher than 200 feet above the sea, and there are bea-
cons or j)iles of stones upon almost every summit.

The Main Channel leading to this harbor is between (ioddard and
Beacon Islets, Goddurd Islet being the westernmost of two low islets
joined by a reef to tlie SW. extreme of Caribou Island.

Bold Rock, at the end of a reef extending 270 yards off" the south point
of Goddard Islet, is small, always above water, and quite bold. God-
dard Rock, which is also small, and dries only at low water, bears S.
35° E., atul is distant 700 yards from the same point. These are the
only dangers on the eastern side of the channel. On the western side
Beacon Islet, which is low, about 250 yards long, and with a pile of stones
on its summit, will be seen bearing S. 38° W., nearly a mile from God-
dard Islet. Tail Islet lies 800 yards to the south, and Lark and another
low islet to the northward of Beacon Islet, but they are out of the way.
To the southwestward of Beacon Islet, and distant ^ mile, is Red Head
Island, from which Whale Island bears S. 32° W., and is distant nearly
a mile. Fish Islet, a large low rock, lies between the two last-named
islands.

Within Red Head Island, and lying in a line to the northward, are
Chain and Bonne Esperance Islands, the former being two peninsulas,
joined together by a narrow stony isthmus, and the latter being 150 feet
high and ^ mile long. Lion Island is distant ^ mile to the eastward
from Bonne Esperance Island, and there is a low islet and a narrow
and difficult 3-fathoms channel between them. Off" the east side of
Lion Island, and at the distance of 100 yards, lies Whelp Rock, always
above water. Between this rock on the west and Goddard and Cari-
bou Islands on the east, may be termed the inner entrance from the
Main Channel ; it is 900 yards wide, and has from 10 to 13 fathoms
water, over rock, sand, and mud bottom.

Western Side.— Watch Rock, small, and always shows, lies i
mile to the northeastward of Beacon Islet, and at the same distance

'■'^'"-•■^""'^■•'■^ •fBTf tm ri mit'

LE,

lit J^ mile broad. It
•art, which is around
J a beacon, or pile of

to make this island.
3nding 000 yards off
»oint tlie shoal water
8 also a led {j^e, with 9
>irit; and there are
If shore, on the east

! form the harbor of
the largest of them
Inch is also owing to
ard of them. There
I, and there are bea-

woen (xoddiird and
St of two low islets
and.

Is off the south point
1 quite bold. God-
low water, bears 8.
»iut. These are the
)n the western side
with a pile of stones
\y a mile from God-
d Lark and another
are out of the way.
^ mile, is Red Head
nd is distant nearly
the two last-named

the northward, are
ing two peninsulas,
latter being 150 feet
le to the eastward
islet and a narrow
>tt" the east side of
t^help Rock, always
Goddard and Carl-
entrance from the
1 10 to 13 fathoms

s-ays shows, lies ^
the same distance

BONNE ESPERAXCE HARBOR.

-- 131

to he northward of ,t, and to the eastward of Link Islet lies Breakin^r
Ledge, Which .,ast covers at high water. The only other da .gerT '"d
they are only dangerous to a vessel of largo draft .ir." t vn i f^'n
patches, the easternmost of which (Middle' Pat'^l'' he rs S ^Tl
mile from Beacon Island; and the other (Whale Patch), N to " l
m, e from the beacon on Whale Island. Thie is foul and rooky Juua
with from 5 to 10 fi.thoms between these patches, which ma^ b avoi d
by a vessel approaching the harbor from the westward, by not c^n
in o a less depth than 10 fathoms until the leading maks l a X.:
into the harbor come on. ^-^^ uu naiiiiug

at ojf ?r~^^ ^' *"^'' ''.^*"'' ^"" ^"^^ ''l'''^"^'^. at Bonne Esperance Harbor
at Oh. ir^ra. ; springs rise 5 feet, neaps 2^ feet

Directions through Main ChanneL-Being off the coast to th'^ east-
ward, and with an easterly wind, stand in towards Caribou Island the
position ot- which with respect to Whale Island has bee, p " '^^^
When a the .listance of J nnle from the south side of Caribou he ves
.e will be in 10 fothoms water, and the south sides of Beacon and Red

^:i^^:fmo7V''' ^' ^'^" ''''''^ '''' '^ --' to come iu
line bearing S 00° W. Bear up upon this leading mark, or if not sure

of the island, steer S. 55o w. with the lead going and a good ookout
for Goddard Rock Island. The depth will bt about 9 fathoms at low
water until the vessel is past that rock, when it will deepen suck enl^
into 15 or 19 fathoms, and she will then be in the channel '"'^"'^

The vessel must now haul in immediately N. 20° W., and Whelp
Rock wil be seen right ahead, and iu line with the west s de of Hou e
Island, which IS low, has a house upon it, difficult to be seen and lies

nf .H «,w '" "^'/ '^'' '""^'^ ""' ^'''^"""' ^»*' ^I'^" past Bold Rock
off the SW pom of Goddard Island, haul a little f.> the eastward so

1 1 n-,T " r?"^^ ' '^^^' "' ''' >'^'-^«- ^« -«" as the vessel s
wi^hm Uns rock, bear up S. 77° W., and run along the inner sides of
Lion and Bonne Esperance Islands, passing between the latterand An
chor Islana into the harbor, between Bonne Esperance amf Grfni
Islands, and where the depth is from 12 to 16 fathoms over muddy bot

Whnt'fi'' ^^T rffT** ""''^ ^ ''^'^''^^ ^^•"^»' l^ass the south point of
oT N I^o'f t *^^,t*^r; «*• ^ ""•«' steering none to the northward
IT' f ;■ r^ ^''^''' "'^ ^■^'^''^'^'^ P'^t^'^^^' ""til Whelp Rock and the
wes side of House Island is brought in line bearing N. 20o W • then
haul in upon that bearing, and proceed as before, excepting in'dise of
the wind not being free enough to allow of passing between Bonne Es
Perance and Anchor Islands. In this case a vessel must go Znd to
the nortbward.of Anchor Island, and must not haul up higher than K
Oio W., nor close in the Whelp Rock with theSW. extreme of Goddard

■.-i:'->;*sfi^"\"-ViJ>4»?i*=T-. "

loJ GRAND POINT TO CAPE WHITTLE.

Island, iiutil she is past Anchor Reef, which covers at high water, ami
lies 400 yards to the northeastward of Anchor Island, and is the only
detached danger within the bay.

Esquimaux Channel leads direct to the eastern entrance of Esqui-
maux Bay ; ic should be approached through Whale Channel, between
Whale and Tent Islands, the latter island being the next westward of
the former. Whale Channel is J mile wide, and has a depth of from 10
to 18 fathoms water.

The course through the center of Whale Channel to the entrance of
Esquimaux Channel is N.4o E. Esquimaux Channel is between Grand
and Fair Islands on the east, and Spit and Stone Islands on the west ;
between the inner islands (Pair and Stone) is the narrowest part, only
150 yards wide, and with 5 fathoms water. In passing through this,
the equally narrow entrance to Esquimaux Bay will be seen and the
vessel must stand close over to it, before she hauls to the eastward
through the NW. channel into Bonne Esperance Bay. Then keeping
within 200 yards of the main shore, to avoid the shoal which extends
from Fair Island fully half way across the channel, she should '^teer
for the south side of the small and high Star Island, and passing close
to it continue her course towards Anchor Island till past the shoal,
which extends 400 yards off Grand Island, when she may haul to the
southward into the harbor. Esquimaux Channel is the only other be-
sides Main Channel which has water enough for large ships, but it is
too narrow for vessels of ordinary size excepting incases of emergency.

West Channel, lying between Spit and Stone Island on the east,
and Esquimaux Island proper on the west, has a bar with only 2 fathoms
water across from Stone Island to a point on the western side of the
east entrance to Esquimaux Bay.

Esquimaux Bay.— The eastern entrance to Esquimaux Bay is by a
very narrow channel between the island and mainland to the eastward,
which opens into a wide space with two islets in it. But if the mainland
to the eastward be followed, it will lead to the entrance of the Esquimaux
Eiver, where Mr. Chevalier's house and trading post will be seen ou a
sandy point, backed with spruce trees. The river is navigated by canoes
for many miles inland, and abounds with salmon.

Only small schooners can pass through the narrow channel between
Esquimaux Island and the main to the eastward, but there is water
enough for larger vessels to the westward of the island. We must,
however, refer to the chart for this route, for it would be quite impos-
sible to convey any intelligible idea of such an intricate navigation
through such a multitude of islands.

Old Fort Bay.— Fort Rocks are a number of low rocks extending §
mile to the SW. from the SW. point of Old Fort Island, which is of a
very moderate height, and about 1^ miles in diameter. From this island
a number of smaller islands extend northward into the mouth of Esqui-
maux Bay. There are also a number of steep and high islands ex-

'^•*^

OLD FORT BAY — PERIL ROCK.

133

igh water, atul
iiid is the only

ance of Esqui-
auuel, between
xt westward of
epth of from 10

he entrance of
between Grand
Is on tlie west ;
west part, only

through this,
) seen and the
) the eastward

Then keeping
[ which extends
he should steer
id passing close
past the shoal,
lay haul to the
J only other be-

ships, but it is
s of emergency,
^nd on the east,
1 only 2 fathoms
itern side of the

aux Bay is by a
to the eastward,
if the mainland
the Esquimaux
ill be seen on a
jated by canoes

lannel between

there is water

,nd. We must,

be quite impos-

ate navigation

eks extending %
d, which is of a
rom this island
nouth of Esqui-
ligh islands ex-

tending northwestward from Old Fort Island across the bay of tlie
same name. There are deep-water channels leading to Old Fort Hay
between the islands last mentioned, but too intricate for a written de-
scription to be useful.

Old Fort Channel leads in from sea between the Fort Rocks and
Mermot Islet, and fartiier in between Old Fort Island and Channel
Island; which last, together with Crumb Island to the northward, must
be kept close aboard until a vessel is in the wide and open space within
the islands and oti" the mouth of Old Fort Bay. This wide opening
through the outer islands is the only navigable one besides Whale
Channel. Through it vessels may run in between the islands in the way
just mentioned, or westward between the Dog Islands and the main ;
but this we must leave the chart to explain. In some places between
the islands there 's more than 50 fathoms water, and the nearer the
main the fewer the ledges.

Dog Islands. — To the northward of Mermot Islet is the Eider (rroup,
and westward of them the Dog Islands, surrounded by rocks and in-
numerable ledges. The outermost of these rocks lies 4 miles S. 73o
W. from the outermost Fort Rock. The southwesternmost of the Dog
Islands are very low, but tlie highest islands next the main, although
small, are of considerable elevation. There is good anchorage between
them and the main, but it can only be got at easily by running down
with a westerly wind from Shecatica, close along the mainland, and in
the channel between the latter and the scattered rocks and ledges
which lie off it, where there is very deep water the whole way.

Porpoise Rocks are two or three small black rocks above water,
lying S. 77° W., 3^ miles from the outer Dog Rocks.

Tlie Boulet, ah. 't, 259 yards in diameter, is a smooth, round-backed
islet, green at th ;'t<> •' •' "''"iit 70 feet in height. Together with the
opening to Lobster , , 'hich bears from it N. 32° E. IJ miles, it serves
to point out the p ,o..;»on of a vessel off the coast. Ciab Islai.ul is J
mile NW. from it, and the Four Rocks (within which is Inner IsU>t) 3
miles to the westward. These are the only islets between it and She-
catica ; but there are many rocks and ledges between them, and also off
the Bonlet, to seaward.

Peril Rock, which is very small, dries at half tide, and lies J^ miles
S. 13° E. from the Bonlet, is the outermost and greatest danger off" this
part of the coast; the sea, however, almost always breaks upon it, and
also upon the others which lie between it and the Four '.locks. There
is no warning by the hand lead in approaching any of these rocks.

Lobster and Rocky Bays are two narrow inlets extending to the
northward between steep, rocky shores. There is deep water at the
entrance to both of them, diminishing gradually towards the head. One
mile within the entrance of Rocky Bay, on the east side, there is a house
and a tish stage, off which there is anchorage in 5 fathoms, muddy bot-
tom, well sheltered from all winds.

184

GRAND POINT TO CAPE WHITTIE.

Napetepee Bay ia a straight aud uarrow iulet, very similar to Lob-
ster Bav. Its entrance is about li miles uortliwartl of tlie Four Rocks,
wiiicli, togetlier with the Inner Islet just within tiiem, must be left to
the eastward in approaching this bay. In ,3ntering Napetepee Bay a
vessel must ])ass 200 yards to the westward of some rocks above water,
b'iiiR jii^^ within the mouth of the bay. At the distance of 1^ miles*
within the entrance, ti'ere is a small islet ; pass to the westward of it,
when the east shore must be kept close aboard until through the Nar-
rows. Several small streams run into this bay ; but the principal
stream is on the east side, | mile from its head, and is the outlet of a
considerable lake, which can not easily be entered by boat excepting at
high water. A river abounding with salmon enters this lake.

Directions. — The three bays just described have no dangers in them,
but they are, nevertheless, by no means desirable places for vessels to
go into, being so narrow, and having such deep water. Besides, a sail-
ing vessel can not get out of them without a northerly wind, which in
the summer months seldom occurs. Lobster and Rocky Bays are pref-
erable to Napetepee; and the safe and proper way of approaching them
is from the westward, with a westerly wind, passing inshore between
Shecatica and the Four Rocks, aud then eastward close along the main-
land.

The Inner Channel, between the islets and the mainland, is not less
than 600 ya^ds wide, and the depth of water is from 33 to 4S fathoms,
over muddy bottom. This deep-water channel, close along the main-
land, free from all dangers, continues eastward all the way to the Dog
Islands. Vessels might pass between the latter and the Porpoise Rocks
in clear weather, when shoal water could be readily seen, and when
there is a sea running heavy enough to break upon the ledges, but the
other is the safer plan of proceeding.

Shecatica and Mistanoque He close to the mainland, and would be
difficult to distinguish from it if it were not for the Boulet and the
opening of Na|)etepee to the eastward aud the Shag Islet to the west-
ward. Shecatica is the eastern, the smaller, and the higher island of
the two, being ^ mile long and 150 feet high.

Mistanoque Island, separated from Shecatica by an unnavigable
channel 300 yards wide, is nearly 1^ miles long, parallel to the coast ;
broken into coves on the outside, and in the highest part 120 feet above
the sea. Mistanoque Bay, the mouth of which is about 300 yards wide
with a depth of 23 faihoms in the entrance, expands to the breadth of
550 yards within and runs inland rather more than 3 miles nortliward.
It is not until a vessel arrives within less than ^ mile of its head that
the depth decreases so as to be convenient for anchoring. The bottom
is everywhere of mud ; there are no dangers, and wood and water are
plentiful.

Mistanoque Harbor, though small aud with inconveniently deep
water, is a valuable harbor. It is situated directly opposite the mouth

MISTANOQUE AND CUMBERLAND HARBORS.

135

similar to Lob-
tlie Four Uocks,

must be left to
apetepee Bay a
ks above water,
,nce of 1^ miles )
westward of it,
lirougb tlie Nar-
it the principal
s the outlet of a
>at excepting at
s lake.

[angers in tbem,
es for vessels to

Besides, a sail-
' wind, which in
y Bays are pref-
tproaching them
inshore between
along the main-

iland, is not less
3 to 48 fathoms,
ilong the main-
way to the Dog
Porpoise Rocks
seen, and when
ledges, but the

d, and would be
Boulet and the
ilet to the west-
igher island of

iu unnavigable
to the coast ;
120 feet above
300 yards wide
the breadth of
les nortijward.

)f its bead that
. The bottom
and water are

veniently deep
osite the mouth

of the bay, and has a depth of from 15 to 20 fathoms ; farther to the
eastward the depth is 12 fathoms, but the channel is narrow ; vessels
must moor in any case.

Enter and Diver Islets are both low. To the west of them, at the
distance of 800 yards, lies a group of small islands.

Directions. — No other directions seem necessary than to run through
the center of either passage which may be preferred. The south pas-
sage between Enter Island and the west shore of Mistanoque is, how-
ever, the best channel, being 800 yards wide and bold to the rocks on
either side. On arriving at the west passage of Mistanoque Harbor,
■give the NVV. point of Mistanoque a berth of about 100 yards, or keep
well over to the mainland side of the entrance ; but as soon as the ves-
sel has entered this narrow channel, keep Mistanoque aboaru, because
there is shoal water off the west side of the entrance of the bay to the
distance of 60 yards.

The East Passage, off the northwest point of Shecatica, is only CO
yards wiile and has only 3 fatliomi) water in it.

Shag Islet, bearing S. 44° W. 7^ miles from Mistanoque, is the best
guide for making the latter from tije westward, as the Boulet is from
the eastward. Shag Islet is small and high, with a round peaked hill
looking green in the middle. There are many rocks off to the eastward
of this islet, the outermost of which, distant from the islet 2 miles, is
Shag Rock.

Aspect of Coast. — The coast between Mistanoque and Cape Mecat-
tina is broken into large bays and inlets, between large islands of mod-
erate height above the sea, and partially covered with moss. Many
smaller islands, islets, and rocks are interspersed, and outside all the
coast is lined with small islets, rocks, or ledges, in grou|.:\ or scattered
here and there. The greatest diflQculty is to pass safely throuj, i between
the last ; for within the islands, in most of the channels and wide spaces
between them, as well as in the bays of the utainland, there is a great
depth of water, amounting in one or two places to 50 or 60, and often
exceeding 30 fathoms. In these deep-water channels and bays, which
are so intricate as to defy any attempt at a written description, small
rocks are not nearly so numerous as they are outside, and are for the
most part above water.

From Shecatica Bay to Ba-Ha Bay the mainland does not appear, as
the i»»land8, great and small, and of different heights above the sea, are
so numerous and so near together, that the coast can not be distinguished
till a vessel is among them.

Cumberland Harbor, the entrance to which is between Dukes
Island on the west and the Cumberland Island on the east, is known
by a high hill on the mainland about lOJ es north from the entrance-
That hill is the highest in the neighborho^v., and resembles a castle at
the top, having steep cliff's like walls. The islands forming the harbor
are of moderate height, the easternmost making in two round hills.

-rii(U^i*»J^6l(W?i> ^*^'■

. rt^rt-nE«£4^S^M>ud?<^£^?^Z^^3^^!^WlA«

186

OKANU POINT TO CAPE WHITTLE.

rf'u

»■ r! •

This iH an exoellenf liarbor, tlio best and eaHiest otacuess on the coast.
Good water can be ha<l in plenty on the east .side of the harbor, but for
wood yon niust go up Shecatica Bay, which lies .'3 or 4 miles to the
northeastward of tlie harbor, and runs inland to the northward many
miles.

Directions. — Cumberland Harbor should be approached from be-
tween Siiufj Hock and Three Uocks. There is no danjjer in the way
but what appears above water, exceptins: a small rock lyinj^ S. 2',i° E.,
rather more than ^ mile from the west point of entrance, which is about
400 yards wide. As soon as the vessel is within its outer points, haul
over t«) the west side, and run alonjj it to the inner point on that side,
bearing N. 52° W., about ^ mile from the outer east |)oint of entrance.
As soon as she arrives there she may haul to the eastward and anchor
anywhere in I'rom 7 to 20 fathoms of water over {jood (ground.

Sandy Hprbor, on the southern shore of Bandy Island, is a safe har-
bor with good ground.

Water. — There is no wood to be had in Sandy Harbor, but plenty of
water.

Directions.— On approaching oamly Harbor there are two ledge»
under water to be avoided. The first of these bears S. 55^ VV. from
iShag Rock, and S. 35° E. from Shag Island, being distant from the lat-
ter one mile. The second bears S. 43^ E. nearly a mile from the east
side of Egg Kocks, and S. (56'^ W. from the summit of Shag Island. A
small reef with shoal water extends | mile from Shag Island towards
this ledge, leaving a deei> channel between more than ij mile wide.
The course through the (senter of this channel, direct for the west ex-
treme of Duke Island, is N. 40° W.

To enter this harbor pass to the eastward of Egg Rocks, and keep
the west extreme of Duke Island, which bears N. 10° E. more than J
mile from Egg Rocks, aboard ou going in. A small rock will then be
seen above water to the northwestward, lying over towards the east
side of the entrance of the harbor. Pass ou either side of that rock
aud then steer in for the harbor, there being nothing in the way but
■what appears.

Port Augustine has a very narrow and intricate entrance, aud is fit
for small craft only. The Augustine Chain, the outermost of which is
a round smooth rock, has a high black rock ^ mile to the westward of
it. Between these last-named rocks there is a ledge, which shows at
one-third ebb. The passage is on either side of this ledge, and then
northward along the west side of Augustine Chain.

Square Channel, the largest in between the islands, towards the
mainland, is too intricate for description ; but 14 or 15 miles up it ui a
•westerly direction is the entrance of St. Augustine River.

St. Augustine River is a stream of considerable length and empties
into a bay full of rocky islands. Its mouth is full of shifting sand
banks. Schooners anchor in St. Augustine Harbor outside the river 3

PORT AUGUSTINE — HA-HA BAY.

137

188 on the coast.

) harbor, but for

4 miles to the

ortliward many

liuihed from be-
ifjer in the way
lyinjj; S. '23° E.,
, whicli is about
Iter points, haul
nt on that side,
int of entrance,
ard and anchor
round,
id, is a safe har-

)r, but plouty of

are two ledger
S. nryc^ VV. from
[lut from the lat-
te from the east
Ihag Island. A
Island towards
in ^ mile wide,
or the west ex-

ocks, and keep
E. more than ^
jk will then be
wards the east
e of that rock
n the way but

ance, and is fit
lost of which is
le westward of
hich shows at
dge, and then

8, towards the
liles up it ui a

th and empties

shifting sand

ide the river 3

miles below the Hudson Bay Company's post. The river is formed of
two branches, the NVV. branch and the NB,, or main river, which
receives the tributary river, Aus Mouches. At the latter end of .June
salmon ascend the main river to a distance of 80 miles above the
first rapids. The Aus Mouches is also visited every fall by a large
number of fish resorting thereto for the i)urpose of spawning. IJoth
branches are easily ascended in flats or canoes, but the river sonietiMies
falls very low in summer. There is i)len(y of wood at this river.

Eagle Harbor, in Long Island, has room and depth enough for the
largest ships within, but the entrances are too narrow for auytiiing but
•small vessels. The east i)as8age, between the islets which form the
harbor and Long Island, bears about N. llio W. 2^ miles from the Fox
Islands, and is the best and deepest, but has only li fathoms water.
This part of the coast is dangerous, being lined with small low islets
and rocks, both above and under water, nnd nothing but a chart upon
a large scale would enable any one • fl igle Harbor. The ap"* '""h

to it, however, is on either side L. '""ox '■ ids, which bear N. b '^. i)
miles from Treble Hill Islet, and S. 05° W. about 14 miles from Augus-
tine Chain.

rieh Harbor, bearing X. 39° W. 4^ miles from Boule Islet, at the
north extreme of Great Mecattina Island, is a small cove of the main-
land running in to the westward, with an islet covered with wood*
and hence called Wood Island, lying olf its entrance. There is a pas-
sage on either side of Wood Island, but that to the northward is the
best, there being a ledge in the bay to the southward of the island,
part of which, however, always shows, and a rock with 2 feet least win-
ter, S. (W° E. nearly )f mile from the east point of Wood Island. In the
cove there are 7 or 8 fathoms, with good ground and room to moor.
It is, however, only fit for small vessels. Both wood and water may
be obtained. There Js no danger but what appears in approaching
this harbor from either side of Great Mecattina Island excei)ting the
ledges which have been mentioned.

Ha-Ha Bay. — Seal Point, about a mile to the northward of Wood
Island, is the west point of entrance into Ila-lIaBay. The islands 'o the
eastward contract the channel into this bay to the breadth of about ^
mile, but there is plenty of water, and no danger but what appears above
water. The best channel is close along the mainland, between Seal
Point aud Itound Islet, leaving all the islets and rocks to tlie eastward.
The bay runs in about 8 miles, and has many good anchoring i)laces.

Qreat Mecattina Island is distant rather more than 2 miles from
Red Point, the nearest part of the mainland to the westward. The
central part of the island is the highest, and rises about oOO feet above
the sea. The granitic hills of this island are fissured in a remarkable
manner, by empty basaltic dikes traversing the island, in a north and
south direction, from one side tt) the other. These features, together
with the position of the island, in relation to the high land inside of

-•«Bir3K-vS3*!»»?«!se^

' -'■ ..

f w^

ili

188

GRAND POINT TO CAPE WHITTLE.

Cape Mecattina, 4 or 5 mil»8 from it to the wustward, distiiiguiHb tluH
iHlaiid from any other land in tlie Gulf.

The Boule Ih a \\'\n\i and round islet, nearly joined to the north point
of Great iMecattina Inland. There is a small rock above water close oft'
it to the westward, and at the distance of about ^ mile in the same di-
rection, a |)atch of rocks with about 4 fathoms least water. Round
Head, on the 8\V. side, is a high peninsula, connected to the island by
a low isthmus. An islet and small rock, at a distance of ^ and one
mile respectively, lie oft' the south point of the island. About 3 miles
N. 07° E. from the center of the island, lies Treble Dill Island. S. 02°
E. 3 miles from the south point lies Flat Island, and S. 11° W. about
4 miles from the same point of the islaiui, lie the two I^Iiirr Islets,
about 4 "die apart, of considerable heigiit, Hat at the top, (.Jid pre-
cipitous all round. Treble Ilill and Flat Islands are quite bold all
round, and so also are the Murr Islets, which swarm with sea fowl. A
beacon, constructed of wood, pyramidal in shape, surmounted by a cone,
with a vane, the whole 34 feet high, and painted white, bu« been erected
on Flat Island, southeastward of the south point of Great Mecattina
Island. Murr Kocks are two small and low rocks above water, lying
about ^ mile to the SB. of the southernmost Murr Islet. To the north-
ward of, and more than ^ mile from the easternmost Murr Kock, there
lies a ledge on which the sea generally breaks.

Island Harbor is a cove one mile deep, and about 400 yards wide
between Blutt' Head, the high NE. point of Great Mecattina Island,
and the Boule. This harbor is sheltered from easterly winds by a cluster
qf small islets and rocks, lying oft' its mouth, and leaving a safe passage
on either side of them. If the south passage is used, keep Bluft' Head
aboard, and if the north passage, pass between the cluster just men-
tioned, and a small rock by itself, lying ^ mile to the west of it, and 200
yards from the shore of the Great Mecattina. The anchorage is near the
Lead of the cove in from 14 to 20 fathoms water over good ground, and
both wood and water may be had.

Mecattina Harbor is a small but safe harbor between Mecattina
Island and the mainland, being only about 56 yards wide in the western
entrance, and about 130 yards wide within. In a vessel of any size it
is therefore necessary to moor head and stern and with hawsers to the
shore. The depth within is 6 and 7 fathoms over good ground, but only
3 fathoms at low water can be carried in through either entrance.

Western Entrance. — In the small bay between Mutton and Mecat-
tina Islands, wherein is the western entrance, there is no anchorage in
consequence of the great depth of water; but there is no danger in the
way, and it is only necessary to keep in the middle to pass safely through
the narrow western entrance. The eastern entrance is rendered difficult
by a reef of rocks under water running across it to the northward from
the north part of the island, and should only be attempted in fine
weather, unless by those who are well acquainted with the place.

MECATTINA AND I'OKTAOE HAKHORS.

139

4li8tiiif;uiHh tliJH

tlie nortii point
) water close oft"

in the Hame <li-

water. Hound
to tile island by
ie of ^ and one

About 3 miles
I Island. S. 02°
3. 11° W. about
vo Wnrr Islets,
e top, t'jid pre-
) quite bold all
tb SBci fowl. A
iQted by a cone,
nm been erected
^^eat Mecattina
»ve water, lying
, To the north-
urr Kock, there

400 yards wide
icattina Island,
nds by a cluster
I a safe i)a8sage
eep Bluft' Head
ister just men-
st of it, and 200
'age is near the
od ground, and

^een Mecattina
I in the western

of any size it
lawsers to the
ound, but only
entrance,
on and Mecat-
3 anchorage in

danger in the
safely through
dered difficult
)rthward from
rapted in fine
th the place.

Strangers in tine weatlu'r may anclior outside, between the east »'m<1 of
tlie isliiud and tlie main, and send a boat in to exatniiie tlie cliaiiiiel.

Wood and Water maybe obtained in Meiuittinu Harbor, and there
is a Canadian residing there who carries on the si>a! tlsliery.

Directions. — Wlien sailing Into Mecattiiui Ihubor from the east
point of the island, steer N. t.j'^ W. over to the mainland, and keep it
close aboard until the NW. point of the island, at the western entrance,
is brought in one with the point of the nuiinland at the eastern en-
trance; the latter point l)eing the south point of Dead Cove, which is
small, open to the eastward, and immediately to the northward of the
•eastern entrance of the harbor. Sail in with this mark on till the luuth
extreme of the island and the north extreme of (Jull Islet come in one.
The vessel will then be within the reef, and must haul to the southward,
towards the island, to avoid a ledge which stretches oft' thu south point
of Dead Cove. Being close over to the island, she must haul to the
westward into the harbor.

O-ull Islet lies N. 67° K. nearly a mile from the east end of Mecat-
tina Island, and there is no danger between them; but if a vessel ap-
proaching Mecattina Harbor from the eastward wishes to pass between
Gull Islet and the main, she must keep either the one or the other
aboanl, in order to avoid the ledge, with 3 feet least water, which lies
nearly halfway between them.

Portage Bay, on the east side of Cape Mecattina, runs in about l\
miles to the northward, between steej) and high hills, fissured like Great
Mecattina Islatid, and there is a rapid river at its head. The deep water,
with space for a vessel to ancljor, extends only about 400 yards within
the entrance, and there is a snug cove on the east side for small ves-
sels.

Portage Harbor is formed by a small and moderately high islet in
the mouth of Portage Bay, lying over towards the east side. In this
harbor vessels of considerable size might find shelter in time of need,
although it is inconveniently small for general use, like most of the har-
bors on this coast.

Directions.— The passage into Portage Harbor, to the eastward of
the islet, is flt only for very small vessels. The western entrance is about
200 yards wide, and has from 6 to 8 fathoms in it. There is still more
water within, over muddy bottom. But approaching this harbor in a
vessel of large draft, there are two ledges with 15 feet least water to
be avoided. They lie in the line from the south extreme of Cape Me-
cattina to the western entrance of Mecattina Harbor. The northeast-
ernmost of these ledges bears S. 28° E. about 800 yards from the west
end of Mutton Island, and the other N. 22° E. ^ mile from the south-
ernmost Seal Rock, which lies near the shore on the east side of Cai)e
Mecattina, and about f mile north from its south extremity. Shoal
water extends .about 200 yards oft" the Seal Rocks to the eastward, but
Mutton Island is quite bold.

'^ MSiHtifsiii'aai.viii

1^.

140

OKANl) POINT TO CAPK WHlTTLK.

Cape Mecattina irt of inoiIiM-ato lici^Mit for Horiiu (ILstanou to Mio iiortli-
wanl of ilH oxtr«iiiit.v; but about 3 miles to tlio nortliwaril it riscH to tiio
lu'ijflit of «t85 fti't iil)ove tlic stuv. Tim lii^^lieMt purt of whiit in callcU
tlHt IliKli Lund of Mt'cattiiia, wiiicii Hhon direutly iu ruar of Mt'cuttiim
ilai-l>or, (;aii not l)o leH.s tliaii 7IH) feet above tlie him^ anil in tlie liiulx^^st
land upon tills coaKt tioin Itrailoro westward to tin; vicinity of Miiifran.
Tilt' i^ranilc of tliis promontory is travfised fr<»ni 8W. to NK. l»y tliose
enormous itasaiiii; dil\es wliicli liave lu'en nuMitionod as o(HMirrin|{ in
Great .Meenttina Island. In Dike Island several of tlieni are empty as
low down as tlie surface of the sea, dividing the island by ininiensu
open fissures in sueli a way as to distinguish it from all others in the
nei^'lihorhood. Then' is a small islet less than 200 yards from the end
of the point with no channel between. At the distanite of nearly 400
yards farther out is Kntrance Island, about 400 yards in diameter.
Dike Island is composed of two islands at high water, but there is no
piissafje even for a boat between. It is abttut 150 feet hijj''. At the
distance of a mile from the south point of Dike Island lie the two Outer
liocks. They are above water, and there are several rocks and ledges,
and no safe passages betweeu them and the island.

The Northern Murr Islet, which is the nearest of the two, is 'J<^ uiiles
from the Outer Rocks, and there is a clear and exceedingly deep chan-
nel between. For vessels bound to Mecattina Harbor the channel
between Entrance and Dike Islands is the best, and has 13 fathoms of
water in it. The shoal water extends about 100 yards off the east side
of the former of those islands, but the latter is quite bold.

The Coast from Cape Mecattina to Capo Whittle is as dangerous as
can well be imagino<l to a stranger falling in with it at night or in thick
weather ; and even to those who are <pute acquainted with it the navi-
gation is not without much difficulty. Formerly it was not often visited
except by fishermen, eggers, and a few Quebec trading schooners. The
depth of water immediately off, and even within, the outer islands and
rocks is in general very great, often exceeding 70 or SO fathoms, so that
there is no warning by the lead; but in the offing, at a distance of 4
or o leagues, there are occasional banks of sand and gravel with from
30 to '){) fathoms water. The outer islands are entirely bare of wood,
\m\ there are more trees on the maiidand than in parts farther to NE.,
indicating a slight improvement in the clinnite as we proceed to tlie SVV.

Little Mecattina Island is nearly 7h milos long and about 3 miles
wide. Salaberry Bay, on its west side, cuts it nearly in two parts. All
outside the narrow isthmus is high land, which can be seen from a great
distance out at sea long after che other islands have disappeared below
the hori/.on. The highest hill on the island is alMut .WO feet above the
sea. The jiart of the island within th'i isthmus is a lew and mossy
swamp, resting on sand, with isolated ridges .md mounds of granite
piercing through it here and there. Within the island, to the north and
west, are extensive flats of sand, with bowlder stones and small rocky
inlets.

'^^'Aiiu-

CAPK MKCCATINA — IIAKF. HARHOH.

141

nofito fh«nortl»-
rd it rlscH to tlio
)f what In calU'd
»iii' of Me(!Httiiin
i<l \h tlio lii;;li(>Ht<
iiiity ot Miiigaii.
to NK. I»,v tliose
iiH ociMirriiti; in
'in lire t'inpty »a
111(1 by iinnienHu
all othci'N in the
'(1h Ironi tliu end
vx' of nearly 400
(Im in (lianu'ter,
, but tliuro is no
t hig>>. At the
ie the two Outer
>ckH ami ledges,

two, is LM uiiles
ngl.\ deep chan-
lor the channel
18 13 fathoms of
ait' the east side
)ld.

us (hiDgeroHs as

ight or in thick

ith it the uavi-

lot often visited

lehooners. The

Iter islands and

athoins, so that

rt diatance of 4

ivel with from

bare of wood,

farther to NE.,

;eed totlieSVV.

1 about 3 miles

two parts. All

en from a great

ppeared below

feet above the

o\v and mossy

inds of granite

the north and

1(1 small rocky

Little Meuattina River diHchargeM its waters through these tiats
by several shallow channels, the largtvst of whicli Hows into Avlincr
Hound to the west ward, and the shallowest into the May of Uocks to the
eastward of the island. The latter chaniKU has only .'< feet in it at low
water, so that it is possible to wade across it and from the island to the
main when the tide is out. Little Mecu-attiiia Island, having thus no
chaiin(«l between it and the main for vessels, and scarcely even for boats
at low water, may be considered as forming the west side of a large
bay. The promontor.v of Mecattina forms the east side of this bay,
which is tilled with islands and rocks innumerable, among which no
vessel coul'l find her way and where it is possible to lose oncfielf for a
time ill a boat.

Fin Rocks lie mnirly 250 yards off Whale Head, the south extreme
of (lore Islands, and bearing N. o4° M, 0.3 miles froiuAiitrobus Point, a
Rmall peninsula at the HE. extreme of Little Mecattina Island. To the
westward of Fin Uocks, at thedistauc(^of2and 3 miles respectively, lie
Herriot Isles and Single Rock, with two or three sunken rocks close to
it. Hetween these and Little Me(;attlna Island there is a large open
bay, the head of which is called the Bay of Hocks. Antrobus I'oint is
the 8W. point of this bay, and has a ledge oif it, 200 yards to the south-
ward, which is the only danger otf the south side of Little Mecattina
Island.

Little Mecattina Cove, on the east side of Little Mecattin-i Island,
about '^ mile to the northward of Antrobus I'oint, is 1} mile long, and
from l-iO to 280 yards wide, between high, bold, and precipitous rocks.
It has iU fathoms water in the entrance, and there are 17 fathoms over
mud bottom within. It is open to the NE., but as the islands are only
distant 3 miles in that direction, there is uo doubt but that a vessel well
moored wouhl be quite safe in it. The SE. point of entrance is called
Cove Point, and is quite bold.

Water may be obtained at the head of the cove.

Hare Harbor, also on the east side of Little Mecattina Island, has
depth and room enough for the largest vessels, but has several rocks and
ledges ill it, which render it ditlicult for strangers. As it opens to the
southward, the prevailing westerly or easterly winds are favorable for
sailing in, and are generally accompanied with a smooth sea in the
entrance. It is only when the wind is well to the southward that there
is any swell, and even then it never rolls into the harbor so as to att'ect
a vessel.

Directions. — To enter Hare Harbor steer N. 3° E. so as to pass
Antrobus Point and Cove Point at the distance of ^ mile. When the
vessel has run '^ mile past Cove Point, she will be close to the eastern-
most of the two Cat Rocks, which are above water, about 400 yards
apart. At the distance of 300 yards to the northward of the eastern-
most rock lies Staff Islet, about 150 yards in diameter, off which there
is a rocky patch dry at low water, about 200 yards to the eastward ;

■ ^^it^iaiiiitisix >fii.aiaaa!3SSS*SES.":

:~^\^:^.'Z^::^rjrtssr^TyR^x^cr;^

:s ii Ji

11 '-^

142

OKANl) POINT TO CAI'K WIIITTLK

tliiH(!>iii ithviiyM Ik) .stn'ii t'roiii t\w r'xnniwa, hut tliuro M iiIho ti lod^t^ witli
2 fiithoins |»>iiHt wiit,«'r, .{'JO yivrds X. .'JP 10. from tho NIO. oxtrt'iiiHof tli«
JNlcf. On tliJM Ictlfjo tli(>SiO. (>.\rn>iiHMir I'Mt'ii IhIuihIm uimI the hiiiiiII tiiid
lii^li Nob Islet art' in liiu*; tlit' liiltt>i' liciirint; tioiii lln^ t'onniT N.lili' H.,
li^ iiiilfs, Tlicso artf tlii> nnl.v <lan^'«^r'M on tli«> port hand, or on tht> sido
ot Little Mccattiini Ishinil ; anil to th(M'aHt\var*l, tliiMican'Mt (hint;crH
will hi> more than a niih^ from th** cMtiirso.

NVIuMi on«< iniln past ('ovo Toint, StalV Isit^t will h« aboani on tlu* port-
hand, and ou^rht not to bit ncartM- than \ mile. From this position Ihu
jMitrant'c "if the harbor will bcsi'cn biMirin^ N. .'{l»o VV., on«' ndio. It can
not bi^ niisttiktMi, IxHtanst^ tluM'tns no oIIhm' (thannt'l tliroii^rh which a pcr-
Hon can stn^ clear into the harbor from that position. The entrance,
abont .'UO yards wide, and 20 tat bonis water in it, is between Daly and
Pri(re Islands, ami the only other (;hannel is between the latter and the
lOdcn Islands, which have been already mentioned.

When tlu! entrance bears N. otJ'^ W.. Iiani directly in Cor the entrancie,
leaving; the Kden Islands, and also l'ri(!e Island, to the eastward, and
yivinjj the SW. extreme of the latter a berth of not less than <K) yards.
Daly Island, on the port hand, or to the westward, is (piite bold.

Nearly midway between Bate Rock and Hold Islet lies Hag Led^re,
which just dries at low water. There is a clear channel on either side
of it, but the western is the best : and the course from the center of the
entrance to it, so uh to pass witliiu KM) yards of the Safe Uock, is N. 3(P
W., ^ mile. i

The Anchorage nuist be chosen by the lead, for there are several
|>atches of rock with from 4 to (5 fathoms, althouuh the bottom is iu
general of mud, with from i) to 14 fathoms water. Foul Rock, a 2-fathom
patch, bears N. .'{3° W., 1,200 yards from the SVV. point of Price Isl-
and ; and N. 40° F,, nearly 800 yards from the south side of the water-
iufl cove, which will be seen on the west side of the harbor. Until
within this rock, therefore, a vessel should keep more than halfway
over from the islands forming the east side of the uarbor, towards its
western shore. She may if requisite run in nearly ^ mile farther thau
this patch, and anchor to eastward of (Jlust'u- Point, which cousists of
some low small islets and rocks extending off the Little Mecattiua
shore; this position being the most secure in the harbor.

Rocks. — All the bay within or northeastward of Eden Islands, as
well as to the eastward of the line from them to Single Rock, is danger-
ous, being full of sunken rocks, and shoal rocky jiatches, springing up
through great depths of water.

Supplies. — There is a good watering place iu the small cove on the
west side of Hare Harbor, and wood may also be obtained iu various
places. There is usually a couple of men either in the entrance ot Lit-
tle Mecattiua River or near Little Mcoattina Cove, but they do not
remain during the winter. There are plenty of blue and cloud berries,
etc., on the hills of Little Mecattiua Island.

^^i.

HAHR AND I.OUI8A HAKHOR8.

148

)4o u I(><1k<« witii
oxtrcinnof tlio
I Mh> Hiiiiill and
niuT N.'JL'T K.,
<U' nil tlio HJtlo
eari'Mt <laii);(>rH

luii (Ml the port-
JH position Miu
I- iiiih>. It (Mill
fli which apcr-
Till' eiitruiiiHt,
ivtHMi Daly and
i iattor aud tho

r tim (Mitraiiue,
eastward, and
than GO yards,
ite bold.

oil either side
e center of tlio
iock, is N. 3(P

re are several
) Imttoin IS ill

k, a li-fathom

of Price Isl-
of the water-
arbor. Until
than halfway
towards its

farther tliau
ch consists of

e Mecattiua

Islands, as
ik, is danger-
iprinjjing up

cove on the
d in %-ariou8
ranee of Lit-
they do not
ond berries,

Aylmer Sound. — The south shore of Little Me(uittiiia Island is high
and liold, with remarkable beaches of white bowlder stones (xutasioii*
ally. There is a long cove (tlose to the eastwaiil of (Jape Mackinnon,
but it is of no use to vessels. Aylmer Hound is formed by Little Mecrat-
tina Island on tlii« east and narriiigton Islands, together with thi^ main-
land, on the west, and is navigable about i miles to the northward Idiii
Cape .NLu^kinnon.

Paynter Point is formed of small' islets close to the mainland, and
the course and distance to it, along the east side of tho Ihnriiigtoii
Islands, is X. 17° K., 1 miles.

■ Aid and Close Islets. — Tliere is no danger on the west side of Ayl-
mer Sound but what appears and is close to the shore; but on thei'ast
side there are two small islets, the outermost oi'wliit!!!, Aiil Islet, bears
N. 73° VV., and is distant a little less than a iniU' from Cape .Macki>)iioii,
and is S()() yards offshore. The other, (Jlose Islet, lies about hi /'way
between the (Mpe and Aid Islet, and about L'OO yard.-' off shore.

Spray Reef, small, awash at low water, and bold all round, lies H.
08° W., U miles from Cape iMackinnon ; and S. 40° W.. one mile fvoni
Aid Islet. This is the only danger in the eiitrani;e of the sound that
can not always be .seen; and vessels had better j)ass to the westward
of it, because the |)a.ssage between it and Aid Islet has not been sounded.

Doyle Islands are four in tiuini)er, but they appear from s(ni as two
only. The two western islands are very low, and close together, being
joined at low water; the two e.-isterii are of moderate height, and also
clo.se together. Their east point bears N. 10° VV,, 2 miles from Craig
Point, which is the west extreme of Little Mecattiua, distant one mile
from Cape Mackiiinon.

Lou Road.^-North of the Doyle Islands, between them and Louisa
Harbor, there is a line roomy roadstead called Lou Road, in which vessels
may anchor in from 12 to 4 fathoms, over muddy bottom, the soundings
decreasing gradually to the westward from the line Joining the eastern
Doyle Island and Boot Point, over to Crescent Point, a distance of about
a mile.

Louisa Harbor is about 400 yards wide at the entrance. Ti>e points
of entrance are quite bold, and the best anchorage is 300 ypr.'s . ithin
them, in 4 fathoms, and in the southern part of the harbor.

Directions. — The only directions for sailing into Louisa Harbor, or
into Lou Road between it and the Doyle Islands, are to ir.jcp the east-
ern side of the latter aboard, to avoid the ledges lying across the en-
trance of Salaberry Bay, as already mentioned. When once inside of
the island there is nothing in the way, so that a vessel may either anchor
in the road or run into the harbor as convenient. In the sound outside
of the Doyle Islands the only thing to be guarded against is Spray
Reef. There are irregular soundings with as little as 11 fathoms over
rocky bottom here and there, but in general the depth is from 19 to 23
fathoms, with rock, sand, and mud bottom. The ground can not be
trusted until within the Doyle Islands.

-■» ■il emt liSltmtmKiXtsSlSBSm'^tasSsl Mj i ii^ ^v:.

144

GRAND POINT TO CAPE WHITTLE.

Harrington Islands extend northward 4 miles, from Gape Airy to
the mainland, there being no channel within them. They are high
islands, the highest being estimated at 350 feet al>ove the sea. Between
the outer and largest islands there is indifferent anchorage and deep
water, but the channels leading to it are narrow, and too intricate for
any directions to avail. It is a very dangerous place, and useless, ex-
cepting to small vessels intimately acquainted with the coast.

Black Reef, bearing from Cape Airy S. 16° E., 2 miles, is composed
of low black rocks above water, about 300 yards in diameter, bold, but
with very irregular soundings around it, varying from 6 to 70 fathoms
over rocky bottom.

Major Reef, awash at low water and very small, bears S. 68° W.,
IJ miles from Cape Airy.

Netagamu Islands, bearing S. 68° W., 4^ miles from Cape Airy, are
small, with a remarkable mound on the largest of them. Between
them and the Harrington Islands there is a bay of the mainland with
clay clitfs and sandy beach at its head and innumerable small rocks
across its mouth.

Netagamu River. — The entrance to this river may be known by the
sandy beach, backed with a thick growth of spruce trees on either side
of its entrance. It is a large stream with deep water in the narrow en-
trance, and also close up to the falls, which are 1^ miles from the en-
trance, and can be partly seen from the sea, when they bear N. 23° B.
A semicircular bar of sand, dry at low water, with the exception of a
narrow channel with 3 feet water in it, extends a mile out from the
entrance, and is extremely dangerous to boats because of the heavy
surf. On the eastern side, a mile within the entrance, there are two
huts, the temporary residence of salmon fishermen during the season.

St. Mary Islands lie 7 miles off the mainland, and their east extreme
bears 8. 37° W., 10 miles from Cape Airy. There are two of those
islands so close together that they may be considered as one narrow
island about 3 miles long. They are of bare steep granite and bold all
round.

Cliff Islands lie '^ mile west of the south point of the St. Mary Is-
lands. There is a ledge which shows to the SVV. of them. The Cliff"
Islands are one round and steep island ^ mile in diameter, with several
small islets and rocks close to the westward of it, and deep water be-
tween them all. Between these and the Boat Islands there is a safe
channel ^ mile wide.

Boat Islands, a cluster of small islands close together, lie S. 65° W.,
2J miles from the SW. point of St. Mary Islands.

Middle Islands are a chain of islands, nearly joined at low water,
•with several small islets adjacent. The westernmost island is 2^ miles
long and 150 feet high. The whole group covers a space of 3J miles in
a SW. direction, by about a mile wide. There is a good anchorage in
10 or 12 fathoms between the westernmost island, and two smaller

from Cape Airy to
m. They are high
e the sea. Between
ucborage and deep
nd too intricate for
ce, aud useless, ex-

the coast.

\ miles, is composed
diameter, bold, but
om 6 to 70 fatboms

1, bears S. 68° W.,

rom Cape Airy, are
of them. Between
the mainland with
lerable small rocks

ly be known by the
trees on either side
jr in the narrow en-
miles from the eu-
hey bear N. 23° E.

the exception of a
mile out from the
3au8e of the heavy
mce, there are two
uring the season.

their east extreme

are two of those

red as one narrow

ranite and bold all

)f the St. Mary Is-
them. The Cliff
neter, with several
ad deep water be-
nds there is a safe

ither, lie S. 65° W.,

ined at low water,
: island is 2^ miles
pace of 3^ miles in
^ood anchorage in
, and two smaller

MIDDLE I8I,ANDS — WATA0HEI8TIC SOUND,

14.5

Islands to the northward of it; but it is too small for large vessels and
too intricate for description, andean only be approached from tije east-
ward.

Middle Islands lie IJ miles from the main, and there is no safe chan-
nel between, in consequence of the numerous islets and rooks. Between
these islands and Bout Islands there is a safe channel, more than a mile
wide. In all these channels the soundings are irregular, and the t^iound
foul. In some places there are only 15, whilst in others there are 40 or
50 fathoms water.

Tender Reef is small and awash at low water. It bears N. 50° W.
iwarly a mile from the northernmost of the St. Mary Keefs, 8. 40° VV., 1^
miles from the 8VV. extreme of the Boat Islands.

St. Mary Reefs, the most dangerous off the coast, are four ledges
just under water, on some of which the sea always breaks. From the
northern to the southern ledge tlie distance is a mile, and the latter
bears S. 40° W., 3:^ miles from the soutli extreme of tlie Boat Islands ; 8.
40° \V., G miles I'rom the SW. extreme of St. Mary Islands ; and 8. 72°
B., 3^ miles from the westernmost of SW. Islands, which are a group of
small islets, of which the westernmost is high and round. There is a
patclj of 12 fathoms lying 2 miles to the southward of St. Mary Reefs,
and another of 8 fathoms, nearly as far to the southwestward of them.

Channels — There are irregular soundings and deep water around
aud between all these rocks ;i:«d islets, but no warning by the hand-
lead. There is a clear channel between Tender Reef and SW. Islands,
and also between St. Mary Reefs and Boat Islands ; at least there is
nothing with so little water as 3 fathoms.

Watagheistic Island and Sound.— Watagheistic is a large and
hilly island 3 miles long by more than 1^ miles wide. It is much broken "
into coves, and lies in the mouth of a large bay of the mainland, from
which it is difficult to distinguish it from a vessel out at sea. Wata-
gheistic Souad is a secure harbor between the island and the mainland.
The eastern entrance is narrow and intricate ; but the western entrance
is J mile wide ; aud although there are several rocks and ledges in it,
yet it may be safely sailed through, with proper care, in the largest
vessels.

Cove Island is ^ mile in diameter, and surrounded with rocks and
ledges. It bears N. 55° W., 4 miles from the north point of St. Mary
Islands, and there are thickly scattered rocks, both above and under
water, all the way from it to the Netagamu Islands.

Caution. — The following brief directions are given, with the caution
that their use must be accompanied with a good lookout from the rig.
ging, for it is impossible to be certain that every ledge has been found
in such a place, although there is e rery reason to suppose that none have
escaped notice.

Directions for Eastern Entrance. — Being to the westward with a
westerly wind, a vessel may either pass between Tender Reef and SW.
5489 10

146

GRAND POINT TO CAPE WHITTLE.

^*i

:lr

illr

lalaiuls, ur she may riiu down outside St. Mary Keefs, and then haul
ill to the northward between Boat and Clitf IsUinds, which iH the safer
route, and tlie one for which the following directions are given. Being
then in luidchannel between Boat and Clitt' Islands, steer N. 22° W.,
which will lead close to Bold Kock, lying N. 57° B. J mile from the
east point of the Middle Islands. The Center Reef, which always shows,
bears N. 46° E. U miles from Bold Rock ; and there is a clear channel
between them, but not between Bold Rock and Middle Islands. '

Passing to the eastward of Bold Rock at the distance of ^ mile,
alter course to N. 44° W., and when she has run 2;^ miles farther
she will be midway between Black Ledge and Bare Rocks, the latter
bearing from the former N. 37° E. IJ miles. Do not go near this ledge,
which has not been sounded off. Alter course now to N. 5° W., passing
to the westward of all the islets to the northwestward of Cove Island,
and when the vessel has run IJ miles, Beacon Islet will be seen (close
to the SB. extreme of Watagheistic Island, a ad with a smaller islet ^
mile to the westward of it) ^ mile ahead. Run past this islet sufficiently
far to avoid a reef and S-fathoms patch, which together extend 800 yards
off it to the northward.

When the vessel has run ^ mile from the time Beacon Islet was abeam
a deep bay will be observed in the east side of Watagheistic Island.
Steer for the narrow channel between the north point of this bay and
two small islets which lie nearly 300 yards off it to the NE. As soon as
she arrives at these islets another deep cove will be seen in Watagheistic
Island, with an islet nearly filling up its mouth. Steer to pass close to
the <;i\8tward of this islet, and then westward for the channel between
Watagheistic Island and the islands to the eastward which extend across
to the mainland in that direction. The channel is at first only about
170 yards wide, but it soon expands to 320 yards, with a depth of 15
fathoms in the middle over mud bottom, where the vessel may anchor
in great security. After she has passed the reef off Beacon Island there
is nothing in the way by this route, the islands being quite bold.

Reef. — If wishing to run through into the Upper Sound beware of a
reef which lies across the mouth of the channel at the distance of 300
yards. As there is no safe channel to the eastward of Cove Island, a
vessel can not approach this anchorage with an easterly wind without
first beating up along the south side of Watagheistic Island, after she
has passed between the Bare Rocks and Black Ledge, so that in that
case the western entrance to Watagheistic Sound is to be preferred.

Directions for Western Entrance. — Being to the eastward, steer
for the NE. point of St. Mary Islands, which may be passed at the
distance of 400 yards, and then bringing it astern, steer from it S. 88°
W., and the Center Reef, which is bold all around, may be passed on
either side at the distance of 400 yards, but to the southward of it is to
be preferred.

Continue this course for a mil past the reef, then haul up N. 47° W.,

aad then haul
licli ia the safer
i giveu. Being
iteer N. 22° W.,

mile from the
h always shows,
a dear chanuel
Islauds. '
auce of )( mile,
^ miles farther
ocks, the latter
near this ledge,
. 5° W., passing
of Cove Island,
I be seen (close

smaller islet ^
slet sufQcieutly
xteud 800 yards

[slet was abeam

gheistic Island.

»f this bay and

fE. As soon as

in Watagheistic

to pass close to

hannel between

h extend across

st only about

depth of 15

iel may anchor

n\ Island there

lite bold.

nd beware of a

istance of 300

Uove Island, a

wind without

and, after she

80 that in that

)e preferred.

eastward, steer

passed at the

from it S. 88°

be passed on

ward of it is to

up N. 470 W.,

WATAGHEISTIC SOUND — CORMORANT ROCKS.

147

and when the vessel has run 3 miles the channel to the westward be-
tween Watagheistic Island and the mainland will be open, and two
small islets will be seen nearly in its center, in one, bearing S. 77° W.
They are 4 mile from each other, and quite bold, but bear in mind that
exactly in the line from the one islet to the other, and 700 yards from
the easternmost of them is Kettle Rock, very small, and just covered at
low water. This rock lies exactly in a line from Seal Islands to the
point of a shoal covo of Watagheistic Island, which is open to the east-
ward. There is a rock awash IGO yards off the point of this cove to the
southward. The channels on feither side of Kettle Rock, which is quite
bold, are each ^ mile wide, and have from 20 to 20 fathoms water in
them. Having brought the islets in one, the vessel has only to avoid
Kettle Rock, running in S. 77° W. on either side of it, and the two islets
to the westward of it, and then hauling up to the northward under the
west end of Watagheistic Island, where she may anchor in from 17 to
20 fathoms over mud bottom, well sheltered from all winds.

Upper Sound. — Wood and water may be had there in plenty, and
in Hamelle Harbor, at the eastern extremity of the sound, a hunter and
salmon fisher resides ; and there is another in Bouissier Bay, which has
been noticed as lying to the westward on the way to the western en-
trance into the sound.

Anchorage.— There is no good anchorage on the route to, or outside,
either entrance to Watagheistic, the soundings being irregular, with
deep water and generally foul ground. The breakers on every side, on
so many rocks and ledges, make the place look, as it really is, extremely
dangerous.

Btamamu River. — Between the Middle Islands and Wapitagun, the
mainland is broken into coves, and lined with islets and rocks innumer-
able, among which nothing but a very small vessel, well acquainted
with the coast, could find her way. There is nothing there worthy of
notice, excepting Etamamu River, which enters a bay open to the SW.
full of islets and rocks. The river, consisting of a succession of rapids,
is generally narrow ; it, however, widens in several places, forming
lakes with still, deep water.

Trading Post. — At the mouth of this river theie is a trading and
salmon fishery post, at which two men reside all the year.

South Makers Ledge is a small rock which is never entirely cov-
ered when the sea is smooth. Its whole extent, above and under water,
is 250 yards east and west by 100 yards north and south, and there is
no danger near it excepting a patch of 4 fathoms, bearing from it S. 66°
E., and distant 400 yards. The soundings are very irregular round
this ledge. It bears from Cape Whittle S. 78° E. 6^ miles.

Cormorant Rocks lie directly between Cape Whittle and South
Makers Ledge, leaving a channel between those rocks and the ledge
nearly 2^ miles wide. There is no danger excepting the claws of Cor-
morant Rocks, one of which, with 4 fathoms, stretches 750 yards S- 27°

'- ' v;. - . '!i ^;i-<ni'--

148

GRAND POINT TO CAPE WHITTLE.

M i

E. from the southeasternmoat Oorinoraut Rock ; another N. 34° E. from
Nest Kock, and 8, 78° B. from Slime Rock (the NE. Cormorant), .^ mile
from each, with only 2 fathoms; and a 2-fathom8 patch which bears N.
7° E. 4 mile distant from Slime Rock. There is no channel between
Cormorant Rocks, or between them and Lake Island.

Wapitagun Harbor.— Mistassini, or the Great Stone, is a remark-
able block of granite lying on the east extreme of the Outer Wapi-
tagun Islands. It resomblea a mortar, especially when seen from the
SW., and has been called The Gun by the tishermen. It serves as an
excellent guide to the east passage into Wapitagun Harbor, the entrance
to which is '^ mile to the eastward of it, and N. 22° W. 3^ miles from
South Makers Ledge. The Outer Wapitagun Islands, which are of bare
granite, about 70 or 80 feet high, are so close together and so overlap
that they appear like one island. They completely shelter the harbor,
which is a long and narrow channel running east and west between them
and Wapitagun Island, which in next to the northward of them. The
west passage of the harbor is 2 miles to the westwanl from the Mistas-
sini, N. 60O W. 4 miles from South Makers.

It is about 160 yards wide, and there are parts of the channel, be-
tween islets within the east passage, which are not more than 120 yards
wide. The harbor is nowhere more than 280 yards wide, excepting
where there are small bays; so that although the depth of water is
more than sufficient for the largest vessels, yet the navigation is so
intricate that this harbor is not fit for those of a greater burden than
160 or 200 tons.

Water.— There is water to be had on Lake and Wapitagun Islands ;
but for wood the boats must proceed through the islands to the main-
land, distant from the harbor about 3 miles to the northward.

Tides.— The flooc* from the eastward and ebb from the westward
usually run past the entrances of the harbor, at a rate varying from ^
to one mile; but both streams are much influenced by the winds.

•is'

li '

ier N. 34° B. from
ormoraiit), .| mile
)h wliicb bears N.
channel between

tone, is a reniark-
the Outer Wapi-
len seen from the
It serves as an
[•bor, the entrance
W. 3^ miles from
which are of bare
er and so overlap
lelter the harbor,
est between them
d of them. The
from the Mistas-

tbe channel, he-
re than 120 yards

wide, excepting
lepth of water is
navigation is so
iter burden than

pitagun Islands;
bnds to the main-
thward.

•m the westward
e varying from ^
the winds.

CHAPTER VI.

GULF AND RIVER ST. LAWRENCE, NORTH COAST— OAPB WHITTLE

TO SAGUENAT RIVER.

Aspect of Coast — From Cape Whittle to Natashquau Point, with
the exception of the first 13 miles eastward of Natashquan Point, where
the shore is of sand, this coast is of granite, which rises into steep hills
and ridges, with rounded summits, having between them morasses and
stagnant ponds. The mainland is seldom higher than 200 feet, even in
the heads of the bays, and it diminishes in height towards the sea, as
do also the innumerable small islands, islets, aid rocks, which fringe
the coast, and which in some parts extend fully 5 miles from the near-
est point of the mainland. The islands are bare of wood, and so also is
the main, excepting up the bays or where sandy tracts occur, which
are always covered with a thick growth of spruce, with occasional birch
and poplar.

Soundings. — The outer rocks, both above and under water, are so
bold that there is no warning from the use of the hand lead ; but there
are soundings with the deep sea lead which are sufficient to warn a
vessel of her approach towards danger at night or in fogs, since these
depths do not amount to 50 fathoms at any less distance than 5 miles
from the outer rocks.

The Tides are weak, irregular, and influenced, both in their strength
and direction, by the winds.

VIThittle Rocks are the outermost of the many small rocks above
and under water, lying off to the southward and westward of Cape
Whittle. They are two half-tide rocks, and are distant fronj the cape
2| miles.

All these rocks are steep, with from 20 to 40 fathoms of water be-
tween them, and small fishing and egging schooners find their way
among them, being guided by the eye.

Wolf Bay is 6 or 7 miles deep. There is plenty of water in its intri-
cate channels, and few dangers that do not show, but a number of rocks
and ledges extend across its mouth from Cape Whittle to Wolf Island,
and are so scattered about that no direction would be of the least use.

Wolf Island may be easily recognized, being higher and larger than
the outer islands usually are off this part of the coast. It is about J
mile long, and makes in two hills, which are about 150 feet high.

Outer Islet is small, low, and lies about a mile to the southward of

149

]

fi!

150

CAPE WHITTLE TO SAGUENAY RIVER.

Wolf iHland. Ah itH iitMiio implies, it is the outermost of a chain of
islands, wiiich extends -k or 5 miles from the point of the mainland
dividing; Wulf and Coacoacho Bays. It has on it a white conical beacon
30 feet high.

Coacoacho Bay is the only place aflbrding anchorai;e to lar^^e ves-
sels upon this part of the coast. It is not at all ditlicult of entrance,
although the number of islets and rocks in every direction makes it
ai)i)ear so. There is an excellent harbor in the head of the bay, called
the Basin, and another formed by an arm running into it, and named
Tertiary Shell Bay, which is equally safe. Farther out than these har-
bors the bay is more than ^ mile wide, and quite sufficiently sheltered
from the sea for the safety of any vessel with good anchors and cables.

Beacon. — On Outer Islet is a white conical beacon 30 feet high.

Orange Rock is the shallowest part of a narrow ridge of rocks about
5 mile long in a SW. direction, and which is shown by breakers only
when there is a heavy sea running. From the least water on it, 15 feet,
Outer Islet bears noith nearly 1| miles, and from its southwestern end,
in 3 fathoms, the same islet bears N. 7° B. H miles.

South Breaker, which also shows only in heavy weather, bears from
Outer Islet S. 75° W. 2 miles, and from Grange Rock N. 72° W. 2 miles.
It has less than !2 feet of water on it, and is near the northeastern end
of a ridge of rocks, which extends from it 5 mile to the southward, with
16 feet water near its outer extremity.

SW. Breaker, with only 3 feet water on it, bears K 66° W. 2J miles
from the Sonth Breaker, and S. 59° W. 2^ miles from Audubon Point.
There are clear channels between these ledges.

Directions. — Being not less than 3 miles from Outer Islet, bring it
to bear between N. 18° E., and N. 52° E., and steer for it until the ves-
sel is within Grange Rock and South Breaker, when the rocks which
lie about 4 mile to the northward of the islet will be plainly seen. Pass
to the westward of those rocks at the distance of J mile, and when
abreast of them, a chain of low rocks which project to the SW. from
Emery Island, will be seen right ahead. Bring the point of this chain
to bear N. 7° E., when it will appear on with the extreme point of the
mainland on the NW. side near the head of the bay.

Steer in upon this leading mark or bearing until the vessel is past some
rocks which lie about ^ mile from the east side of the Audubon Islets.
These rocks, which are dry at low water and can always be seen, must
be left on the port hand. When up to the Emery Rocks the bay will
be seen open right ahead and clear of danger, excepting Milne Reef,
which is partly dry in low tides, and extends nearly J mile out from the
low rocks ; its outer end lying nearly in a line from Tertiary Point to
Crocodile Islet on the west side of the bay. To pass to the westward
of it, keep Audubon Point shut in behind Milne Point and (Jrocodile
Islet. The best berth is on the western wide of the bay, ^ mile within
Crocodile Islet, in fathoms mud.

ER.

most of a chain of
t of the maiiilaiul
lite conical beacon

rape to large ves-
iciilt of entrance,
irection makes it
of tile bay, called
• to it, and named
It than these har-
iciently sheltered
chors and cables.
30 feet high,
gre of rocks about
jy breakers only
Iter on it, 15 feet,
)uthwe8tern end,

ather, bears from
r. 720 W. 2 miles,
lortheasteru end
southward, with

66° W. 2i miles
iudubon Point.

iT Islet, bring it
it until the ves-
he rocks which
ulyseen. Pass
mile, and when
) the SW. from
nt of this chain
ne point of the

isel is past some
LUdnbon Islets.
s be seen, must
ks the bay will
ig Milne Reef,
le out from the
rtiary Point to

the westward
and (Jrocodile

i mile within

COACOACHO BAY — OLOMANOSHEEBO RIVER.

151

Tertiary Shell Bay has nothing in the way excepting a small rock
above water ] mile within the entrance, which must be left on the star-
board hand. This bay is not more than 200 yards wide A mile from the
entrance, but it becomes wider within, with from 5 to 11 fathoms water
over mud bottom, and is there qnite landlocked.

Basin. — In running in for the nasir, keep the N\V. side of the bay
aboard until the vessel is within \ mile ot the island in the head of the
baj'. Then sheer over to the eastwanir towards that island, to avoid a
shoal of bowlder stones which extend nearly 400 yards oft' the west side of
the bay. The channel between this shoal and the island is only 200
yards wide, but deej) enough for the largest shi|)s. Give the island a
berth of 100 yards, leaving it to the eastward. As soon as she is past
the inner end of the island haul to the westward into the mouth of a
small bay, and the water will soon shoal to 8 fathoms, muddy bottom,
where she must anchor, and will be quite sheltered from every wind.

Coacoacho River flows through a wide and shallow channel full of
bowlders, and discharges the waters of a large lake, which boats can
ascend to with the tide. Its shores are wooded with spruce trees, and
water may be oV)tained near the western side of the entrance.

Trading Post. — The Hudson Bay Company have a post on the east
bank just above the basin.

Tides. — There is very little stream of tide in Coacoacho Bay, but a
weak and irregular stream of flood and ebb sets through and between
the islands.

Olomanosheebo River.— The coast, for the first 12 miles westward
of Coacoacho, is formed of innumerable islets and rocks to Olomano-
sheebo, or Paint River, which is called also by the Canadians "La Ro-
raaine." This is a considerable river, falling 20 feet overgranite into the
head of a bay 4 miles deep, but so shoal that boats can scarcely enter
it at low water. There is a trading post of the Hudson Bay Company on
the east side near the Falls, neither of which can be seen from the sea,
being hidden by the islands ; but the place may be known by the low
sandy cliffs, thickly wooded with spruce trees, on either side of the
entrance of the bay. The tide flows 2 miles up the river.

Treble Islet and Loon Rocks lie to the westward, the latter at the
distance of 6 miles from the above bay. The Loon Rocks, which can
always be seen, are distant 3 miles from the nearest point of the main-
land, and are the outermost danger oft" this part of the coast.

Washsheecootai Bay. — ^'loudberry Point is the west point of this
bay, and is formed by the mainland. Theeast point of the bay is formed
by small rocks and islets. At the distance of 3 miles within Cloudberry
Point the bay contracts to a very narrow inlet, having several rocks and
islets in it, and from 4 to 2.J fathoms water, over muddy bottom, for the
first 4 miles up ; after which it becomes shallow for 4 miles farther, to the
falls of a considerable river, where there is a trading post and salmon
fishery of the Hudson Bay Company.

152

CAPE WHITTLE TO 8A0UENAY HIVER.

TliJH inlet aifbrdH Hcarcoly any shelter for the first 5 uiileH within
Cloudberry Point, and it ia too intricate a place for the general pur-
])oHe8 of navigation, or for any written directions to be of avail.

ShoaL — A rock has been reported lying l.| miles IS. 6° W. of Cloud-
berry k'oint.

Musquarro River, where there is a Hudson Bay Conipany trading
and fishing post, is situated 3 miles within the west point of a bay full
of small islets and rocks. This river becomes rapid a short distance
within the entrance, and is useless excepting to boats or very small
schooners. It will be known by the houses which are on the east side
of the entrance, and also by a remarkable red and preci|)itous ridge of
granite, about 20U feet high, and about 2 miles to the westward of the
river.

Kegashka Bay, situated between Curlew and Kegashka Points, is
3 miles wide and 1^ miles deep. It is only in the NVV. corner of the
bay, within Kegashka Point, that a vessel can be secure from southerly
winds; there is room there for several small schooners, but for only
one large vessel, and she must be moored with au open hawse to the
eastward, with a third anchor on shore to the SW., so as to be able to
haul in close under the point when it blows hard from the southward.
The depth of water within the islets is from 4 to 6 fathoms, over fine
sandy bottom.

Kegashka Point is formed by an island separated from a rocky
peninsula by a very narrow channel, dry at low water. Both the island
and peninsula are distinguished by being partly covered with spruce
trees. Theie are also a few spruce trees on an islet, ij mile to the
westward of the point, and as no other islands on this part of the coast
are wooded, the bay may be recognized by that circumstance. There
is a line sandy beach and low sandy cliffs in the NW. corner of the bay,
and there are also similar cliffs for about a mile to the westward of the
isthmus above mentioned. This sandy tract is densely wooded with
dwarf spruce, another circumstance which serves to distinguish this
bay and is the origin of its name, which signifies impenetrable woods.
Green Island is of low granite, covered with grass, and is the outermost
and largest islet sheltering the bay, being about GOO yards in diameter,
and situated ^ mile to the eastward of Kegashka Point.

Wood and water may be obtained without difficulty in the western
part of Kegasiika Bay, where there were several Canadian families,
consisting in all of 50 persons, in the year 1868. Their houses are visible
from the sea. They have gardens and keep sheep and oattle, and they
also prosecute the fisheries and winter hunting.

Directions. — The safest channel into Kegashka Bay is between the
low, bhick islet and Kegashka Point, and is 3t0 yards wide ; it carries
8 fathoms water, and is quite clear. When coming from the westward
give the south extremity of Kegashka Point a berth of ^ mile, or go
no nearer than the depth of 8 fathoms; then run along the east side of

t 5 iiiiles within
the general pur-

1 of avail.
8o W. of Cloud.

'ouipany trading
►int of a bay full
1 8hort distance
ta or very small
on the east side
uipituus ridge of
westward of the

ashka Points, is
V. corner of the
» from southerly
rs, but for only
n hawse to the
as to be able to
the southward.
;homs, over fine

I from a rocky
Both the island
ed with spruce
^ mile to the
irt of the coast
stance. Tnere
ner of the bay,
est ward of the
y wooded with
stingnish this
etrable woods,
the outermost
Is in diameter,

in the western
idian families,
ses are visible
ittle, and they

I between the
lej it carries
the westward
i mile, or go
e east side of

KE0A8UKA UAY — NATA8H(iUAN POINT.

153

the point, which is quite bold, lenving all the islets on the starboard
hand. Haul around the inner end of Kegashka Point to the westward
at the tlistance of 100 yards, and when within it not more than the same
distance anchor in 5 fathoms.

When approaching Kegasiika from the eastward give the low and
small islets ofi Curlew Point a berth of ^ mile to avoid the ledges ottthem,
which dry at low water; then steer N. 70° W., or so as to pass outside
of Green Island, going no nearer than liOO yards. Continue on that
course till the inner or NE. extremity of Kegashka Point bears N.
31° W., which will be a distance of rather more than 3^ miles from the
■ledges ott" Curiew Point; then haul in and pass between the point and
the westernmost islet as before directed, giving the south side of that
islet a berth of at least 200 yards.

Kegashka River attbrds shelter only for boats. It has falls 40 feet
high, and a ttshing statiou of the Hudson Bay Company a mile within
its entrance; neither the falls nor the house can be seen from the sea.

Natashquan Point — At the distance of 2^ miles to the westward
of Kegashka River, flue sandy beaches, in front of sandy clitts, 70 or
80 feet high, and a country thickly wooded with spruce trees, commence
and continue to Natashquan Point. It is a sandy promontory, the most
southern point on the north coast of the gulf to the eastward of the
Seven Island.

Natashquan Cod Banks.—Parallel to the coast from Musquarro
Point to Natashquan Point, and at distances varying from 6 to 11 miles,
there are banks of sand, gravel, and broken shells, on which the depth
of water is between 24 and 40 fathoms. Codfish are often caught in
abundance upon these banks, principally by American schooners.

Ruisseau Rock, lies 8 miles S. 72° W. from Kegashka Point. It has
only 2 feet water on it, and lies exactly in the line between Natashquan
and Kegashka Points, and is distant 1^ miles S. 10° B. from the
entrance of a small stream named Long Kiver. A vessel will avoid it
by not going nearer to the shore than the depth of 17 fathoms.

Bank.— One and a half miles to the southward of Natashquan Point
lies a small cod bank, with 4^ fathoms at low water, over gravel
bottom.

Aspect of Coast— From the south extremity of Natashquan Point
to Collins Shoal, the outer danger off St. Genevieve, the coast is low
near the sea, rising a short distance back into mounds and ridges, but
nowhere exceeding 400 feet in height. It is composed of primary rocks,
with the exception of a sandy tract at Agwanusand Nabesippi Rivers.
The sandy tracts are always thickly wooded with spruce trees, and the
country generally is here less bare than it is farther to the eastward.

The coast is broken into numerous coves and small bays, affording
shelter everywhere to boats, and occasionally to very small schooners.
The small and bare islets and rocks are innumerable, along it, but
nowhere extend farther out from the points of the mainland than 2
miles.

■iiiiifiinfliimia^ftiMaa

154

CAPE WIIITTLK TO SAOITKNAY RIVER.

iVi

When tliure is (i heavy hoii niiiriiiiKt M thuMO datif^erH Hhow, or thuj'
ciiii \m Hitt'ii t'rotn tint iiiiiHthoad in (;l(>ar wi'athur; but iiii«l«>i- other cir-
cinnNtancoH, tho depth of '_'0 latlioins is as near to tlieni as a veMMel
on(;lit to approacli, tliat depth being in u\nuy plaeeH not more tlnin a
mile rn»ni the outer Ietl;;es.

Currents and Tides. — riie eurreni down aloiif^the coaHt in wenterly
winds lias also l)een mentioned in paues I'J and M; its rate seldoni ex-
ceeds luiif a knot, ami is usually much less, so that a vessel ean alw*ayn
imtke way to windward in moderate weather.

In shore there are weak tidal streams too irregular tc be depended
upon. It is, however, imjtortant to remark that tlie tiood draws
stronH;ly into NataAh(|(iau Uiver, and the bay at Little Natashquan ;
while the ebb sots stroiifjly otV Natashiiuan Point to the SK., and
causes a very heavy sea ipoii tlie ban'.cs otl' it in soutlierly winds.

On approaching St. Genevieve, a strong indraft of the flood
towards the cliannel, bet\>een that island and the main, will be experi-
enced ; and the ebb will be foun<l setting strongly out in the contrary
direction : that is, to the SE. The rate of those streams seldom exceeds
a utile ])('r hour.

Natashquan River. — The mouth of the river is occupied by a low
sandy island, having narrow channels on either side of it. The north-
ern channel is nearly dry at times, but the southern one has a <lepth
of 6 feet at low water, and from 9 to 11 feet at high water, according
to neap and spring tides.

Tlie bar of sand, on which there is usually a heavy surf, extends
out '^ mile and is exceedingly steep to seaward, where iiO fathoms will
be found within | mile.

Trading Post.— The houses of the rfudson Bay Company's trading
and tishing post are on the south bank, A mile within the entrance.
Above it the river is full of sand banks, dry at low water.

Little Natashquan River admits only boats at high water.

Little Natashquan Harbor, formed by a number of islets and rocks,
is only fit lor vessels lot exceeding 100 tons, although it has water
enough for large vi'.ssels. The entrances, of which there are two,
formed by a reef of rocks in the center , are not more than 180 yards
wide between reefs, tlio extent of which under water can not be seen,
because the water is discolored by the dark streams of the neighboring
rivers.

The depth that can be carried in at low water bv the west channel is
.3 ffi thorns, II nd 5 fathoms by that which is between the central reef and
the islets on the east side. The space within the reefs in which vessels
can ride in from 3 to ~y fathoms, over sand and mud bottom, is oidy J
mile in diameter. The anchorage is defended by the main and islets
from all winds excepting the SW., in which direction there are reefs ot
rocks, some parts of which are always above water. In a strong SW.
wind some sea comes over these reefs at high water, but never enough to

^-^;

NATA8HQUAN AND NABKHU'I'I RIVEKH.

IftS

mIiow, or tlioy
ii«l«'r other cir-
III us a veMsel
t inoro tliaii »

iiHt ill westerly
ute Heliloiii ox-
Nelciiii iilwayH

be ilepeiided
) Hood <lni\V8

Niitasliqiiaii ;

the SK., and
ly winds.

of the rtood
will be experi-
I tlie contrary
Dhloin exceeds

pied by a low
;. The north-
has a depth
ter, according

surf, extends
fathoms will

my's trading
the entrance.

ater.

ts and rocks,
has water
re ai»' two,

III 180 yards
not be seen,
neighboring

8t channel is
tral reef and

hich vessels
m, is only J
n and islets

are reefs ot
strong SW.
er enough to

endanger a vessel daring the siiniiiier months. Tliereaie several rocky
]>atches, with from 2A to ',i fatiionis ott'the harbor's month; these, with
the want i»f hpace to work in, and thedilllciiity oi getting out witli the
prevailing southerly winds of suiiiiiu>r, render this phuie of littU' use
for the purposes of navigation; but it is a valiialile hailiur for tlie tlsh-
ermeii, wliose schoonris of from ;{() to KKl tons are well suited to the
m?.e and nature of the place, which is <!oiitigiioiis to exiielleiit llshing
ground, and atlbnls every facility for drying tlsh. 'riitt harbor slioiild
not be entered by a stranger without a pilot.

Settlement. — In IstSH the population, mostly French Canadians,
■was 2iH). The majority of the people live on the eastern side of Little
Natashipian Htream, where there is also a Roman ('atholic; chnrcli.
There is a ilersey establishment on the north shore of the harbo

Washtawooka Bay, r> miles northwestward of Little NataHlii|iniii,
is full of small islets, rocks, and ledges, atfording shelter to shallops
and boats. It is an intriitate and dan(;eroiis place, and may be known
by Shag Islet, a large black rock lying ofT it, and farther out than the
rest, being 1^ miles 8. 55° E. from the projecting point of the main.

AgwanuB River, the entrance to which is narrow, has only (> feet in
it at low water. There is no bar, but many small rocks, both above
and underwater, lie ott" its mouth to the distance of 1^ miles, and ren-
der the approach extremely dangerous. There is a small islet, '^ mile
from the river's mouth, above which the river expands into a basin, ^
mile wide, and carrying 5 fathoms close up to the foot of the rapids.
There is sandy beach for l\ miles to the eastward of this river, and also
westward of it to Nabesippi.

Nabesippi River will only admit boats in fine weather. On the west
bank, a short distance within the entrance, stands a house and store,
being a trading post of the Hu Ison Bay (Jompany, which can be readily
seen from the sea.

Pashasheeboo, Mushkoniatawee, and Washatnagunashka, are
small bays, full of small islets and rocks, which render Micir entrances
so difUcult and dangerous that no directions would be of the least avail.

Watcheeshoo, 18 miles west of the Nabesippi River, is a hill of
granite, l'i7 feet high, and bare of trees. It is apeninsula, but appears
like an islet, higher than the rest, when seen in a vessel from a dis-
tance. There is a fishing post of the Hudson Bay Company in a (iove
among the rocks, to the westward of it. Watcheeshoo and Saddle Ilill,
which is 374 feet high above the sea, serve to point out to a vessel her
position oft" the coast. The latter is situated miles inland from the
former, in a northerly direction.

Quetachoo-Manicouagon aud Feashtebai are two contiguous
bays, 4 miles westward of Watcheeshoo. The first, which is the east-
ernmost, is 2i miles wide, and carries from 3 to 14 fathoms water, but
so full of rocks and ledges as to be useless, excepting to the smallest
schooners; it is open to the westward. The other is a much smaller

I5r>

CAPK WIHTTLK TO SAOIIENAY RIVKR.

b»y, uupitblu of attbnliiitf hIiuIUm' only to boiitH, and o|iuii to the Houtl
wnnl.

Appeetetat Bay Ih lull of nxtkH, of no nse to v«H«elH, bucanse of the
Ictl^rtm un(l<>r wator oft' its iMitranct^ an<l uIho within.

The Mlngan Island* at-u eHtinuit»il nowhurc to attain an eU>vati«)n
oxcctMliuK •'(00 ft*et abovu thti Hua, and are in ((unutal nuicli 1ow«m'. They
poHMfMH vury littlu Hoii, but UMVcrtheluHH aru tliiolvly woodt>d witli H|iru(]«;,
birch, and poplar on thu Midu towardn the mainland ; though towardn
the Hua barren tractH often ocuur, ()onipoH»<l either of bare liuieMtone,
or of ItankH and ridtceM of linieHtone gravel.

The Coaat of the uiainlan<l, from St. John Uiver to Mingan Uiver, is
of Hand and clay, low and thickly wooded, and with a line Handy beach.
Fartiier eastwanl the Hhore in sometimeH of (granite, and at otherH of
liuieHtone, the latter rock lyin^ immediately over the former.

There are '20 of these islandH, in none of which are there any inhabit-
antH ; Nome of them are very HUiall, and the largest does not exceed 11
or V2 mileH in circunilerence. They are arranged parallel to the coast,
aud extend along it 45 miles from St. Genevieve Island, at the eaotern
end, to the Perroquets at the western end of the chain.

Supplies of wood and water can readily be obtained from the prin-
cipal of the Mingan Islands ; wild berries are abundant in their season,
and so are dilferent kinds of wild fowl. Quadrupeds are scarce, but
there are plenty of seals upon the limestone reefs, and a few codflah off
the coast.

Tides — The tides are not strong among the Mingan Islands, never
exceeding a knot, excepting in very narrow channels. They are often
rendered irregular by the winds, but in tine settled weather there is a
const'iiit alternation of the streams of tlood and ebb between the island
and the main, aud also within the distance of 2 or 3 milea from the
outer or southern shores of the islands.

St. Qenevleve. — Us NK. point is a blutf headland, being the termi-
nation in tiiat direction of the highest part of the island, which is about
200 feet above the sea, and slopes irregularly down to the southward.

Mount St. Genevieve is an isolated table hill on the mainland, 332
feet above the sea at high water, about a mile inward, and bearing N.
26° W. from the NB. point of the island. This mountain and the high
NE. point of the island distinctly point out to a vessel at sea the posi-
tion of the channel between the island and the main.

The Saints are two low and bare rocks, lying rather more than ^
mile to the southward of St. Genevieve. There is a channel carrying 5
fathoms of water, but with foul ground, between them and the island ;
and reefs under water extend off from each of them fully 600 yards.

The NW. Bo'wen Rock, with 3 feet least water, lies one mile N.
76'3 K. from the Eastern Saint, and with the south side of the latter on
with the center of the Western Saint.

The SB. Bowen Rock, with 6 feet least water, lies S. 70° E. ^ mile

■Sjr

MtNOAN ISLANDS — IIUNTINO ISLAND.

157

11 to the Houti

I>ucaii8ti of the

II till eUn-iitluii
h lower. They
sd with Mpruot!,
loiiifh towanlH
are liineMtoue,

iij^aii Uiver, in
« sandy bench,
il at others jf
iiier.

e any inhabit-
not exceed 11
I to the coast,
\t the eaHtern

Toni the prin-
1 their 8ea8on,
re scarce, but
Bw codfish off

stands, never
iiey are often
er there is a
en the island
lies from the

ig the termi-
hich is about
B southward,
lainland, 332
i bearing N.
md the high
sea the posi-

more than ^
b1 carrying 5
1 the island :
DO yards,
one mile N.
he latter on

Oo E. § mile

from the NVV. Howen Rook, and N. 88^ E. l'i{ niiles from the ICiiHterii
Saint, which is jii«t open tu the iiortli ward of the Western Saint. ThtT©
is very deep water between and eJose to them, mid also for rather more
than a mile to the southward of them ami the SainlH. The souiHliiiKs
are extremely irregular, and the whole of this <liiiigerous piirt shoiihl be
avoideil by vesHels.

Hunting Island is low, thic^kly wooded, broken into many coves,
fringed with small islets and rocks on all sides, ex<;eptiiig toward ihe
inaiiilund. OtV its S\V. point, ami extending to the tlistan(;*M)f \\ miles,
lie Wood and (hiii Islands, leaving no passage between, and having
■ reefs running «I(M» yards to the southward. They are both low, and the
latter is bare of trees, but covered with grass and peat, in which iiinum>
erable purtlns burrow and n«ar their young.

Oarde Rock, always above water, lies rather more than a mile to
the southward, and is tin; termination of a long ridge of sunken rocks.
The southeastern eiul of the island is likewise beset with several ret^fs,
some of which extend 'f mile to the southward.

Collins Shoal, a small patch of rocks, with 15 feet least water, lieu
2^ miles from the HV). point of Hunting b.Iand, with the east point of
St. Genevieve just open to the eastward of the Western Haint, !)eariiig
N. t)"^ B., and the north iioiiit of W^ood Island in lino with the south
side of the Garde Uock, N. 73^ W.

Caution. — Between Collins Shoal and the reefs otl' the SE. point of
Hunting Island the soundings are irregular, from l to 17 fathoms, over
rocky bottom, and vessels should not pass between them.

St. Genevieve and Betchewun Harbors. — The first of these har-
bors is situated between St. Genevieve Island and the mainland, and
the second between Hunting Island and the main. Both are excellent
harbors, not difficult of access or egress with the assistance ot the chart
and fit for the largest ships. ^

Wood and water may be obtained ; the latter from small streams
either on the main or on the islands.

By East Channel. — To enter by the East Channel bring the NE..
point of St. Genevieve in line with Indian Point (a low wooded point
of the main, forming the east point of Pillage Bay), bearing N. 64^ W.
Run in with this mark on, and it will lead J mile to the eastward of the
Bowen Rocks.

When the SE. point of St. Genevieve and the West Saint co'ne in
line steer a little to the northward, so as not to go too near a fiat tihoal,
which extends nearly 600 yards from the east side of St. Genev ieve.
Give the NE. point of St. Genevieve a berth of 200 yards. Auclioi" in
10 fathoms, mud bottom, halfway between it and Anchor Isla.id,
close off the NV7. point of St. Genevieve.

Caution. — The distance across from the NE. point of St. Genevieve
to the main is about a mile, but the navigable breadth of the entrance
is reduced to ^ mile by the rocks and shoal water off Ledge Point.

158

CAPE WHITTLE TO 8AGUENAY RIVER.

» it mi

</|

The shoal water extends from Ledge Poiut, directly across Pillage Bay,
to Partridge Poiut, aud a vessel must not approach those shoals nearer
than 7 f'atiioms.

Betchewun Harbor. — If wishing to proceed to Betchewun Harbor,
pass to the northward of Anchor Island, which is quite bold on that
side. The north poiut of Hunting Island is a cliffy mound, with a
cove on its eastern side. It is quite bold, and a vessel must pass close
to it to avoid the shoal off Partridge Point, which extends J mile to
the southward, and diminishes the navigable breadth of the entrance
to 700 yards. VVhea in the entrance a low islet will be seen in the cen-
ter of the harbor ; steer for it and anchor with it, bearing S. G9° W.,
and distant J mile. The depth of water in the harbor is from 9 to 18
fathoms, over mud bottom.

Ey Saints Channel. — To »nter these harbors by the Saints Channel,
bring the west points of St. Genevieve and Anchor Islands in line,
bearing N. 3l<^ W., at a distance of not less than 5 miles from the
former, to be sure that the vessel is outside of Oollins Shoal Run in
upon this leading mark until the north sides of the two Saints come in
line, bearing ^. 73° E. The east sides of Mount Partridge aud of
Hunting Island (or rather of an island joined to it at low water) will
come in one at the same time, bearing N. 61° W. ; steer upon this last-
named leading mark (to avoid a reef which extends 760 yards from the
SW. point of St. Genevieve) until the east side of Mount St. Gene-
vieve, seen over the sandy SE. point of Anc'ior Island, comes in line
with NW. poiut of St. Genevieve Island, bearing north. Thence by
steering N. 31° W. it will lead in through the center of the channel
between St. Genevieve and Hunting Islands, aud the vessel may either
proceed to St. Genevieve or Betchewun Harbors.

Inner Harbor. — There is an inner harbor at Betchewun to the wjst-
ward of the low islet which has been mentioned, but from thence chere
is no chanuel, excepting for boats, to pass out to the westward between
Hunting Island aud the main.

. Tides.— The tides between St. Genevieve and Hunting Islands imd
the mainland iire much intlueuced by the winds, but their rates seldom
amount to a knot at any time, and are usually much less, excepting
through the shallow and narrow channel at the west end of Betchewun
Harbor, where there is at times a complete rapid.

Charles Island is about 'MO feet high, bold, and free from shoals ;
but at the distance of J mile southward of its east point there is a
patch of rocky ground on which no less than 5 fathoms have been found,
but whicii had better be avoided by vessels of large draft.

PufiBn Bay. — Between the east point of Charles Island and the west
point of Gun Island is the entrance to Puffin Bay, which is open to
southerly winds. Within the east point of Charles Island and half-
way towards Shoal Cove there is a good anchorage in 7 fathoms, mud
bottom, at the distance of 400 yards from the island ; but the SE.

across Pillage Bay,
those sboals nearer

3etchewuu Harbor,
[uite bold ou that
itty raouud, with a
3el must pass close
I extends J mile to
th of the entrance
be seen in the ceu-
bearing S. 09° W.,
or is from 9 to 18

le Saints Channel,
[• Islands in line,
5 miles from the
3 Shoal Run in
fro Saints come in
Partridge and of
t low water) will
er upon this last-
50 yards from the
Mount St. Gene-
id, comes in line
orth. Thence by
r of the channel
ressel may either

iwun to the wjst-
'om thence there
38tward between

ing Islands imd

leir rates seldom

less, excepting

id of Betchewun

ee from shoals ;
t)oint there is a

ave been found,
ift.

id and the west
hich is open to
Jland and half-
r fathoms, mud
; but the SE.

MINQAN ISLANDS — CHARLES HARBOR.

159

winds send in a considerable swell. In the NE. corner of this bay is
the narrow entrance (between shoals otiKagg Point and Ilunting Island)
to Ragg Bay, which has tolerable anchorage in its NW. part, but has
very dee|) water on the side towards Hunting Island, and is separated
from the western part of Betchewun Harbor by a shoal channel for boats
between the island and the main.

Charles Harbor, between Charles Island and the main, though very
narrow is (piite secure and deep enough for vessels of any size, but its
entrances are only 160 yards wide. Within, the harbor expands to J
mile wide by ^ mile in length, parallel to the shore. Both entrances
<5arry a depth of 7 fathoms, but a vessel must pass over 4 fathoms if
she enters from the eastward, through Puffin Bay. The depth within
the harbor is from 4 to 6^ fathoms, with mud bottom.

Tides.— Strong winds occasionally cause the tides to run at the rate
of 2 knots in the entrances of the harbor, but in general there is only a
weak stream with either tide.

Trilobite Bay.— Whale Island, lying ^ mile from the east side of
Ammonite Point, and with shoal water between them, is distant $ mile
to the westward of Charles Island. Both islands are bold and cliffy,
and Trilobite Bay is between them with excellent anchorage, well
sheltered from all but southerly winds. The only danger to be avoided
when working into this bay is a reef off Ammonite Point, which includes
a small islet, and extends J mile off" shore to the southward. The mark
to clear this reef when running along the coast is to keep Gun Island
open to the southward cf Charles Island, and when hauling in from the
westward into Trilobite Bay keep the north point of Charles well open
to the southward of Whale Island.

Directions.— To enter Charles Harbor from Puffin Bay bring the
NE. point of Charles Island, which is high and cliffy, to bear N. 76° W.,
then steer for it and give it a berth of about 300 yards as the vessel
hauls round it to the westward into the harbor.

To enter from Trilobite Bay give the NW. point of Charles Island a
berth of between 120 and 380 yards as the vessel hauls round it into the
harbor. All the way from the eastern narrow entrance into Charles
Harbor there is a broad zone of shoal water, which curves round parallel
to the mainland till it joins Whale Island, and nearly fills up all the
NVV. part of Trilobite Bay, rendering the entrance of the_ harbor too
narrow for convenient or general use.

Clearwater Point is low, and the shoal water does not extend more
than i mile oft" it to the southward.

The Coast between Clearwater and Esquimaux Points forms a large
bay, along which there are high and conspicuous cliffs of sand and
clay that distinguish this part of the coast to a vessel at sea. The
shoal water extends a considerable distance from the shore all round
this bay, and abreast Sea Cow Island the 3 fathoms line of soundings
is a mile out from the sandy beach.

^:,.^i'ii

160

CAPE WHITTLE TO 8AGUENAY RIVER,

Clearwater Shoals. — 1^ miles 8. 59° W. from Clearwater Point lies
a rouk)' 3 fathoms shoal, and there are three others with 2 fathoms
lyiug to the northward of the first, and in a line from the point, towards
Walrus Island ; the outer and westernmost of them being rather more
than 2 miles from the point. To pass outside these shoals, at the dis-
tance of i mile, keep the south points of Gull and Fright Islands in
one, bearing N. 83° W.

Sea Cow and Walrus Islands lie about 4 miles west from Clear-
water Puint. They are steep and precipitous, excepting to the south-
ward, in which direction the reef off Sea Cow Island extends J mile, and
that of Walrus Island 400 yards.

Sea" Cow Channel. — There is a clear channel na.ned Walrus to the
westward of Sea Cow and Walrus Island, and also between them and
the Clearwater Shoals. This latter channel, named Sea Cow, is 1^ miles
wide, and, although not as good as the Walrus, maj' be used in proceed-
ing to Esquimaux harbor from the eastward by running upon the leading
mark which has been given for clearing the shoals to the westward of
Clearwater Point, until the east side of Esquimaux and Walrus Islands
come in one. Then steer for the NE. side of Sea Cow Island, and haul
round it, at the distance of not less than 400 yards to the northwest--
ward for the east entrance of the harbor.

Green Island is low, covered with grass, with reefs stretching north
and south nearly 600 yards, but bold to the east and west; it lies nearly
a mile west of Walrus Island.

Gull Island is distant ^ mile to the southward from the SE. point of
Esciuimaux Island, but there is no passage for ships between them.
The south point of the island is bold, and may safely be passed at the
distance of 400 yards.

Esquimaux Island is high towards its north side, sloping to the
southward. From its SW. point a shoal extends towards Fright
Island, which also has a shoal stretching towards Esquimaux Island.
The channel between these is nearly 800 yards wide, with deep water,
but as there are no leading marks for it, and the reefs on either side are
extremely dangerous, it can not be recommended.

Fright Island is bold on the south and SW. sides, but reefs extend
off it to the eastward and northward to the distance of GOO yards.

Quin Island lies north from Fright Island, from which it is distant
a short ^ mile. Its shores are bold, with the exception of a broad reef
running out i mile to the westward from its north point.

Fright Channel is deep, but only 400 yards wide between Quin
Island and the reefs off" Fright Island. It can not be recommended, but
might be used in case of necessity by hauling up to the east of Niapisca
Island till the south end ot Quin Island conies in one with the south side
of the cove in Esquimaux Island, bearing N. 82° E., then steering so as
to i)ass close round the south point of Quin Island, which is quite bold.

Quin Channel is tlie best for vessels approaching Esquimaux Har-

MINUAN ISLANDS — KSQUIMAUX HARHOR.

h;i

ater Point lies
ith 2 fatlioms
poiut, towards
g ratlier more
als, at the (lis-
|[ht Islands in

est from Clear-
j to the south-
ids '^ mile, and

Walrus to the
reeu them and
low, is 1^ miles
ed in proceed-
on the leading
le westward of
\ralrus Islands
land, and haul
the northwest- •

retching north
; it lies nearly

e SE. point of

letween them.

passed at the

loping to the
wards Fright
imaux Island,
h deep water,
)ither side are

t reefs extend

DO yards,
it is distant
a broad reef

etween Quin
amended, but
It of Niapisca
le sotith side
jteering so as
is quite bold,
uimaux Har-

bor from the westward. The depth in this channel is from 5 to 7 fath-
oms, over rocky, gravelly, and sandy bottom. Tfie shoal water extends
only to the distance of 'JOO yards from the island, but oft" Pointe des
Morts, and the small islets to the westward of it, the reefs extend to the
distance of JOO yards to the southward.

Bsquimauz Harbor lies between Esquimaux Island and the main-
land. The Esquimaux Point, having the entrance of a small river on its
west side, consists of sand, and is quite bold to the soutiiward, al-
though shoals extend from it across the bays in either side. The north
Hud NPj. points of Escpiimaux Island are also bold, and may l)e passed
at the distance of IW yards by the largest ships. The depth within
this secure harbor is from 5 to 15 fathoms, over a sandy bottom. The
«pace in which vessels may anchor is nearly IJ miles long, and the
iiverage breadth is 800 yards.

Water. — Supplies of good water may be procured from the river at
Esquimaux Poiut, or from small streams on the island, and wood is
plentiful.

By Niapisca Channel. — Niapisca Channel is the best with westerly
winds. The dangers to be avoided, besides the reefs of Fright and Quin
Islands, are the reefs of tiat limestone extending ^ mile out from the
south and SE. points of Niapisca Island. Between those points, a re-
markablegroupof flowerpot rocks will be seen standing on the limestone
just above high-watermark. From thft east point of the island another
reef runs out ^ inUe to the NE., but there is ample space between these
reefs and Fright Island, the channel being over a mile wide in the !:ui-
rowest part, and carries between 30 and 40 fathoms water.

In running for this channel from the westward, the leading mark for
clearing the south reef of Niapisca Island by more than 400 yards is
the NW. point of Fright Island in line with the south end of Quin Is-
land. Do not, therefore, open those islands clear of each other until
Moniac Island (bearing N. 25'^ W. 2^ miles from the nearest point of
Niapisca) is brought in sight to the t.istwaid of Niapisca. Having
done so, haul in through the channel, steering N. 3° VV'., and when
Moutange Island (next westward of Moniac) opens to tue northward of
Niapisca, the vessel will be clear of the reef ofif the east point.

Haul up now, if necessary, tu clear the reef, which projects K mile
westward of the north point of Quin Island, until the north point of
Esquimaux Island is not only open to the northward of Quin Island,
but also the north point ot Sea Cow Island is open to the noiiliward
of Esquimaux Island. Run in between Quin Island and the main, with
the last-named marks just open, and they will lead past the north point
of Quin Island, at the distanc^j of about 400 yards.

The Mark for the shoals ofif Pointe des Morts, and the small it>let8
westward of it, is the north and NE. points of Esquimaux Isl.ind in
one; if a vessel opens them, b» ""ore she is as far to the eastward as Qiiin
Island, she will be ashore.
54S9 11

¥?!

1H2

CAPE WHITTLE TO SAQUENAY KIVER.

Tides. — The tides uaually run at the rate of about oue knot through
Esquiintuix Harbor, the flood coming round Clearwater Point from the
eastward, and passing to the westward between Quiu Island and the
main. The ebb flows iu the contrary direction.

The flood also draws in between Fright and Niapisca IslandH, and the
ebb sets out through the same (;hannel. But these streams are much
influenced, both in their rate and duration, by the winds, and the ebb
is mucii a(!celerated by westerly winds in Esquimaux Harbor, running
there at times fully 2 knots.

Niapisca Island is ratlier more than 2 miles long, north and south,
is only partially wooded, and has three principal hills, not exceeding
200 feet high.

Quarry Island, about the same height as Niapisca, is separated from
the latter by a channel nearly 800 yards wide, with a small islet in it,
but no safe passage for shipping, because of a shoal in the buy to the
southward, and of a reef which stretches beyond tlifi small islet. Other
reefs also run out ^ mile from the west side of Niapisca, and froiL the
south side of Quarry Island.

Quarry Cove, ua the north side of Quarry Island, has 2!i fathoms
water in th<> entrance, shoaling gradually to ."* fathoms with uhk^ bot-
tom close to its head. The island and shoals along the mainland are
distant only 3 miles to the northward of this cove, which thus becomes
a completely land-locked, though very small, liarbor. No other direc-
tions are re(piisire than keeping the west side nearest on board in enter-
ing, and to anchor near the center in 9 or 10 fathoms.

"Water. — Good water may be obtained from a small stream in the
SW. corner of Quarry (Jove,

Quarry Channel. — There is a clear channel between Quarry and
Large Island, which is the next westward. The only directions neces-
sary are to bring the channel to bear N. 8^ W., and then run in, keep-
ing in its center until g mile within the SW. point of Quarry Island,
after which that island may be kept close aboard, as the remainder of
the chaunel, IJ miles, is quite bold on that side, while the shoal water
extends to the distance of 300 yards from Large Island. The flood runs
slowly in through this channel, and the ebb as slowly out.

Large Island is thickly wooded, and its highest part about 200 feet
above the sea. Reefs of flat limestone extend off" its south and SW
points nearly '^ mile, and the mark for the south point of these reefs, in
2 fathoms, is the south points of Niapisca and Fright Islands in one.
On its west side, a mile to the northward of its SW. point, there are
many flowerpot and arched rocks, standing on the flat limestone above
the present high-water mark.

Middle Reef lies Just within the line joining the south points of
Large and Miugan Islands and 2 miles westward of the former. A part
of this reef is alwa.vs above water, but it is not GO yards in diameter,
though the shoal around it is ^ mile long and ^ mile wide. From the

knot througb
•oint from the
stand and the

lantlH, and the
ains are much
5, and the. ebb
irbor, running

rth and south,
not exceeding

separated from
iiall islet in it,
the bay to the
II islet. Other
i, and iron, the

las iiU fathoms
witii mini bot-
Q mainland are
1 thus Ijecomos
■To other direc-
board in euter-

streain in the

n Quarrj' and
rections necea-
i run in, keep-
Juarry Island,
remainder of
e shoal water
he tiood runs
t.

about 300 feet
uth and SVV
tliese reefs, in
slands in one.
)int. there are
uestoue above

)uth points of

rmer. A part

in diameter,

le. From the

MINGAN ISLANDS — LAHOE ISLAND.

106

east side of this reef, in 4 fathoms, the east sides of the two Birch Islands
are iu one.

Large Channel, between Middle Beef and Large Island, should
be used by a vessel proceeding to Mingan Harbor witii an easterly
wind, and in doing so the only thing necessary to be observed is that
the reefs extend to the westward off the shore of Large Island, from
400 to (iOO yards, as far in as the Flowerpot Columns, after which the
island becomes bold. There is little or no warning by the lead on the
Large Island side, but Middle Reef may be approached to the depth of
13 fathoms, which, on Uie east side,' is r.iore than ^ mile from it.

Outer and Inner Birch Islands. — The cliannel between the two
Birch Islands is (JOO yards wide, but the ground is all foul, and not more
tiian '3.\ fatiioms could be carried through by a stranger. The Outer
Birch Island is about a mile in diameter and about 300 feet in height,
and it has a remarkable Hower-pot rock on its S .. point. Tiie Inner
Birch Island is rather larger; its N\V. point is long and low, extending
i mile to the westward from the body of the island, with a curve to the
SW. ; oft tliis point there is a reef running out h mile to the westward,
ai;d having 12 fatiioms within tli'Mlistance of 200 yards of its edge.

'Sulk Rock. — Half a mile SVV. from the same point there is a small
low islet, (ilose to the south point of which stands a very remarkable
rock, called the Hulk Rock, from its resemblance to the hulk of a
wrecked vessel The reef, of Hat limestone, dry at low water, which
connects this islet and rock to the low west point of the Inner Birch
Island, extends OOO yards off the rock to the southward, and also 400
yards to the wi'stwaid.

Middle Reef Channel, between Outer liirch Islant! and the Middle
Reef, is almost a mile wide, and the shoal water extends only 300 yards
from the south point of the former ; but there i.s a dangerous reef ott'
the west side of the Outer Birch Island, extending jf mile from the
shore.

Tides — The flood tide sets out to the SW. between the Birch Is-
lands, and also between them and the Middle Reef.

Birch Channel, between the Birch Islands and Mingan Island, is the
best by which to proceed to Mingan Harbor with westerly winds. It
is 3 miles wide and all deep water.

Mingan Island, 3J miles to the westward of the Inner Birch Island,
is about 100 feet in height and bare of trees. The shoal water does not
extend above 000 yards oft" its south point ; but to the SW. and west
the reefs, including the islets, run out nearly 1,200 yards. The island
is bold on its north and east sides.

Mingan Patch lies S. 0° W. 3| miles from the south point of Min-
gan Island, and with the south point of the Outer Birch tou(!hing the
north point of Large Island ; it is a patch of rocky ground with fath-
oms wuter on it, yet there is a heavy swell upon it at times.

The Perroquets, the westernmost of the Mingan Ii*lan<ls, are four

164

CAPE WHITTLE TO 8A01JENAY RIVE II.

small islets, low and bare of trees. The northwesterninost is higher
than the others, surrounded with cliffs, and has a superstratum of peat
on its flat summit. The two easternmost of these islets have a reef of
flat limestone extending off them ^ mile to the southward. There is
also a shoal to the northward of them ^ miie, and a narrow channel
between them and the other two, but of no use to vessels. The north-
westernmost islet has shoal water off it to the distance of | mile, both
to the eastward and westward, but a vessel may pass to the northward
of it, at the distance of 400 yards, in 14 or 15 fathoms water.

Perroquet Channel, between the Perroquets and Miugan Islands, is
1^ miles wide, and with a depth varying from 30 to 40 fathoms in the
center. Both the flood and ebb set out through the channel, the for-
mer to the 8W. and the latter to the southward.

Mingan Channel. — All the islands just described, from Niapispa
Island, are bold and free from danger on their north sides, so that Min-
gan Chan nel, which lies between them and the main, is safe throughout.

Moniac Island, on the mainland side of this channel, is less than J
mile in diameter, and lies nearlj' abreast Niapisca Island, from which
it is distaf i tibout 2^ miles. Moutange Island,!^ miles farther west-
ward, is ii ' lut l^ miles in diameter, and situated oft' a bay full of p.mati
islets ant' ii wliioh there are several small rivers. It is directly abreast
Quarry Isii-f ^ at the distance of 2^ miles. These Islands, Moniac and
Mo'u;!ii;re, avi distant ^ mile from the nearest point of the main, but.
sh<>< ip .' itliiii and between them are nearly dry at low water.

The S; 5 '" do not project above the distance of GOO yards off to !,he
soutv''wa' ■«■' 'hese islands, but there is rocky ground, with irroijular
soundings c- uween 4 and 10 fathoms, out to the distance of a mjle to
the southward of them both; so that a vessel beating in the Mingan
Channel had better not stand over U> the northward beyond H miles
from the northern shores of the outer islands, or into less than 10
fathoms.

Long Point, on which is a fishing establishment, consists of sand,
and there Is a fine beach from thence to the eastward, .is far as Mingan
Harbor inclusive. There is a sandy shoal immediatelv to th«* westward
of it whicli extends J mile off shore and as far to the wentward as the
St. John River.

Sand Lark Reef, lying 2^ miles eastward of Harbor 'niand, and
rather more than a mile from the maitdand, is small and low, but always
above water. There is a clear channel with deep water on all sides of
it; but there is a rocky patch, with 5 fathoms water, U -..'Ip* from it,
on 1 line towards the south side of Moutange Island. Tlii.s shoal water
has not been particularly examined,.!,-; sh.d therefore be avoided.

Harbor Island is of limestone, abou^ iOO f e a in height, bold towards
Mingan Harbor, but shelving and 8b<^;! to the southward to the dis-
tance of I mile from the shore. The leii^th of the island is 2 mileii, its
greatest breadth does not amount to ^ mile, and It is thickly wooded.

iii:

i;;?rf

noat id higher
^ratum of peat
have a reef of
ird. There is
.rrow channel
I. The north-
f ^ mile, both
he northward
iter.

;an Islands, ia
'athoins in the
linnel, the for-

"rora Niapispa
s, 80 that Miu-
fe thronghout.
, is less than ^
d, from which

farther west-
y full of Kinall
irectly abreast
is, Moniac and
the main, but.
ater.
ards ofiF to 'he

ith irroijular

e of a mile to
the Mingan
»yoiid H miles

less than 10

isists of sand.

far as Mingau

the westward

*t:»ard as the

T Aland, and
<w, but always
)ii ail sides of

'l<^« from it,
is shoal water
e be avoided,
bold towards
■d to the dis-
is 2 mile^, its
ickly wooded.

MINGAN ISLANDS — MINOAN RIVKU.

ir{5

1 mile

The reefs ott" the east and west ends of the island extend nearly
out from the high-water mark.

Mingan River.— The mainland recedes from the island in theeast(M-n
part of the Uarl)()r, which would, inconstHjuence, be exposed to easterly
winds, if it were not for a sandy shoal, dry at low water, which (ixtonds
400 yards out from the entrance of the Mingau liiver. This river is
only capable of admitting boats at high water, and its mouth is opposite
the east end of the island.

Mingan Harbor. — The eastern entrance between the sandy shoal and
the island is 400 yards wide, the western entrance bntween the main-
land and the island is nearly as wide, the whole breadth in both entrances
being in deep water. The space within, in which vessels may anchor
in safety, is about a mile long by rather more than \ mile wide, w'ith
plenty of water for the largest ships, over a bottom of tine sand,

Directions. — In approaching Mingan Harbor from the eastward,
bring the north or inner side of Harbor Island to bear N. 72° W., and
the houses of the Hudson Bay Company's post ought then to appear
open fully their own breadth to the northward of the island. Steer for
those houses so open, leaving the east end of the island 300 yards to
the southward, and taking care to keep the south side of the sandy
point of the main, which forms the western entrance of the harbor, shut
in behind the north side of the islan<l, for when they are in one the ves-
sel will be on shore on the sandy shoal off Mingan River. After the east
end of the island is passed, run along its north side at the distance of
200 yards, and choose a berth anywhere near the center of the harbor,
in from 9 to 13 fathoms, sand bottom.

When running for the harbor from the westward, run in towards the
sandy beach of the mainland at the distance of ^ mile to the westward
of the island until the sandy point of the mainland, which forms the
west end of the harbor, comes in one with the face of the clay cliffs to
the eastward of the Hudson Bay Company's houses, bearing N. 7 1° E.,
or until the depth is 11 fathoms. Bun upon this mark along the beacli
and give the above sandy point of the mainland a berth of 100 yards
as the vessel passes into the harbor, and choose a berth as before
directed.

River St. John. — The course of the river for several miles up from
the entrance is between high cliffs of sjtratifled sand and gravel over
clay, with small sandy islands occasionally. The country on either
side is covered with a thick growth of small spruce trees. At the eu-
trance, between the clay cliffs on the west and a sandy point on the
east side, the river is 260 yards wide. The breadth increases to nearly
^ mile immediately within the entrance, and then decreases again grad-
ually.

Fishing Post. — There were two log houses on the \s - 'st bank, ^ mile
within the entrance, where a party of men oecaaionally resided to flsh
for salmon; and vessels may lie close to them in 2 fathoms at low
water.

166

CAPE WUITTLK TO SAGUENAY KIVEK.

Bar. — An extensive bar of siinil, A mile out from the entrance, Hhifts
Nvitii every gale of wind, ami has seldom more tiian 3 or 4 feet over it
«t low water; at high water there are 7 or 10 feet on the bar, according
us it may be neap or 8i)ring tide. Soutlierly and westerly winds cause
so heavy a surf as to render tiie bar impassable.

Anchorage. — Tliere is good anciiorage outside the bar which may
be safely upproaciied by the lead, the soundings decreasing gradually
from 20 to i< fathoms over sand and clay bottom ; the greater depth
being at 2^ miles and the lesser at !| mile from the river's mouth.

Tides. — It is high water, full and change, at the entrance of 8t. John
River at Ih. 20m. ; ordinary springs rise 7 feet and neaps 4 feet.

Aspect of Coast — From the river St. John to the river Moisic the
whole line of coast, with the exception of its two extremities, that is to
say, all between Magpie and Trout Rivers, is composed of primary rock,
rising immediately from the sea in steep, although often rounded hills,
which are either bare or partially wooded with small trees of the pine
species. The hills in front, or next to the sea, seldom exceed 200 or
300 feet in height ; but others, a short distance back from the shore,
fnrm a range of greater elevation, varying from 500 to 700 feet, and
nowhere exceeding 1,000 feet of height above the sea.

The appearance of thi^ coast from a vessel is slightly undulating,
bold, and unbroken, presenting features so little diversified that it is
very difficult to make out one part of it from another at a distance of
6 or 8 miles ; but upon a nearer approach the mouths of the rivers,
taken in connection with the features of the neighboring land, will in
general supply distinguishing characters by which the situation of a
vessel may be ascertained.

Local Attraction of the Shore. — The black oxide of iron, besides
being a constituent mineral in the granitic rocks of this coast, is found
abundantly in nests and veins, particularly in the vicinity of the Sawbill
River. Its magnetic action on the needles of com[)assos on shore is
such as to cause the variition obtained by them to vary from 14 to 29
degrees west. At the distance of 2 or 3 miles the error from this cause
never exceeded half a point, and at the distance of 3 or 6 miles it be-
came insensible.

Caution.— This coast is not by any means so bold as it appears from
a distance, for there are many rocks along it both above and under
water, several of which are very dangerous, and nearly a mile from the
shore. Strangers should not approach the shore between Magpie and
Bason Rivers nearer than the depth of 20 fathoms. Still greater can-
tion becomes necessary between the last '^araed river and St. Charles
Point, where 40 fathoms is as near as a large ship can approach with
prudence, for that depth in several places will be found within a mile
of the rocks.

Mount St. John, an isolated saddle-backed hill, 1,416 feet above
the sea, bears N. ^o B. 11 miles from the entrance of the river St.
John.

sr. JOHN AM) MANliOU KIVKUH.

1()7

itraiico, (thit'ts
• 4 foot over it
bar, acuordiiiiif
y winds cause

»ar which may
Aug gradually
greater <leptlt
i inoutli.
ice of St. John
i 4 feet,
'er Moisic the
ties, that i» to
primary rock,
rounded hills,
es of the pine
exceed 200 or
>ia the shore,
700 feet, and

f uudulatinj;,
led that it is
I a distance of
of the rivers,
land, will in
situation of a

iron, besides

oast, is found

of the Sawbill

on shore is

from 14 to 29

om this cause

6 miles it be-

appears from
e and under
mile from the
Magpie and
greater cau-
8t. Charles
pproach with
within a mile

.6 feet above
the river St.

Coast. — Between the St. .lolin and Magpie Rivers the coast consists
of white cliffs, with a superstratum of sand, which is fast (;onsolidating
into sandstone by means of the red oxide of iron furnished by numor<
ous small streaniM.

Magpie River has several rocks above and under water oil' its east
point of entrance and r^ mile ottshors. At 300 yards within the narrow
entrance the river falls about 30 feet over granitic rocks. There are
from 7 to 9 feet at low water over the bar outside, but as this river is
of no use either to vessels or boats, It is unnecessary to describe it fur-
ther.

Magpie Bay. — Rather more than ^ mile to the westward of Magpie
River, and nearly } mile ott'shore on the west side of Magpie Bay. there
is a rocky shoal, on which the sea almost always breaks at low water.

Anchorage. — There is good anchorage, with winds off the land, in
the baj' ; and vessels may stand in to 7 fathoms at low water in every
part of it, but the southerly and westerly winds roll in a very heavy
sea.

Four-Fathom Ridge. — Three and a half miles westward of Magpie
Point is liidge Point, from which a long and narrow ridge of rocky
ground, with from 4 to 6 fathoms at low water, extends 4^ miles to the
westward across a rocky bay, wherein there is one large and several
small rocks above water. The western side of this rocky ground is nearly
one mile southward of Thunder Point. There is a very heavy sea upon
this ridge at times, and it thet becomes dangerous to large ships.

Sawbill River, situated ir the bay between Sheldrake and Ore
Points, may be distinguished Ly the clay cliffs immediately within the
entrance, and by the peculiar hills on either side of it, which are bar-
ren and of gray feldspar, thickly studded with small round mounds.

This river can only be entered in very tine weather, in consequence
of the heavy surf. It has scarcely any bar, but the entrance, at the
western extremity of a long and narrow sriuot sand which extends
across the river's month, is very narrow, v ith a depth of from 4 to 11
feet in it, according to low or high water, in ordinary spring tides. At
high-water neaps there is seldom more than 9 feet. The same depth
continues only for a very short distance within the entrance.

Cod Bank. — Nine miles SE. of the entrance of the Sawbill there
is a bank of sand, gravel, and broken shells, on which cod&sh abound,
and the depth is upwards of 60 fathoms between it and the shore.

Shallop River affords shelter only to boats, and can only be entered
when there is no surf. There are several rocks, both above and under
water, off this river, and also off Sandy River, a sra?*.!' stream about 2J
miles farther westward.

Manitou River is the largest on this coast, excepting the rivers St.
John and Moisic. It may be readily distinguished from a vessel several
leagues off the coast by two remarkable patches of clay cliffs, one of
which is close to the eastward, the other about one mile to the west-
ward of its entrance. -

1C8

OAPK WHITTLE TO 8A0UKNAY RIVER.

!;.>■!»

Directions. —To enter this rlvor, ktep vAoho uhma the nw.ky went
si(U' of IVIiinitou !'i>inf, Icavi-if; on thu port si<lo tho Hiindy spi:. cIoho
within it, whirh Mtr<r<'-lu>s out from tii« siind.v west point of the entrance.
Ihe ehiinnel iu alwiiyH in this positiini, but it is more or less deep and
wide according to thu seanon and the winds wiiicli may have reeently
I)rev,:iled. In general the channel is abont (10 yards wide, witli a depth
of n feet in it at low wai r and I'i feet in sprinjj tides. Stronj; souta-
eriy and westerly winds ciinsoa heavy snrf and render the entrance i'li-
practicable. A. short distance within the entrance there are 9 feet at
low water, dee|)eninf; ^''''dually to 5 fathoms at the (irst ra|)id, one
mile up the river.

Water will be found at a small stieam nn the western shore a sliort
distance within the entrau(;o.

Anchorage. — I'liere is good anchorage off Manitou River. VesseU
may safely anchor in ttne weather with the wind offshore, having the
entrance of the river bearing N. 21^ K., U miles, where th'jy will have
15 fathd. < over mud bottom, and be more than one mile distant from
Manitou I oiut, the n< nest poin^ of tlie shore.

Small vessels may anchor farther inshore to the westward of the bar,
aud in the bay between Manitou and Buchan Points; for the .soundings
decrease regularly in towards the shore, with sand ani clay bottom,
and there is no other danger but a small rocky shoal which bears IS.
69° E. nearly a mile froui Buchan Point, and is about '^ mile offshore.

Buchau, Fall, and LIctteurs Rivers fall in cascades into the sea oi*^
close to it, and thus serve to point out to a vessel her position off the
coast ; and there is, moreover, a remarkable white patch close to the
westward of Buchan Kiviir.

Bason River has a spi.*: c' large stones extending about 300 yards
out from its i;a.if i- >int of b'lCi'atice. The entrance is very narrow, with
a varying depth, whicti is less or mor;) according to the prevalence or
infrequency of the 3VV. win' .s ; but there is in general enough water for
very small coasting craft or large boats. There are rapids 4 mile within
the entrance.

Cape Cormorant, at 1^ miles to the westward of Basoa River, is a
small peninsula, on the inuer side of which there are the log huts of a
trading post always occupied, aud which cau not easily be seen fromt
the sea.

Blaskowitz Point lies 5 J miles S. 80° W. from Oape Cormorant.
Betwenu them are Cormorant Islets, jvjined to the- shore at low water^
and not readily distinguishable from the mainland.

Cormorant Reef, which is small and dangerous, lies off Cormoraut
Islets, and about a mile from the shore. It lias 12 feet least water aud
bears S. 6S° VV. 3 miles from Oape Cormorant. When on the inner edge
of the reef Blaskowitz and St. Charles Points are iu line, bearing S.
84° VV., so that vessels a[)proaching this part of the coast should keep
the latter point well open. ,

I{.

i the r(M!k.v \v«»t
«iiii(l.y H|(L clo8e
tof tlietiiirraiico.
or loss (It'op and
i.V liavo recoil tli
kits with a tloptlj
. Stroiij; souta-
theoiitriuifte i'mj
•TO ar<! 9 JViot at
Hrsfc rapid, one

ru shore a short

River. Vessels
lore, having the
a t>vjy will have
ile distant from

ward of the bar,
)r the soundings
iJ clay bottom,
which bears S.
mile offshore,
into the sea or
position off the
ch close to the

bout 300 yards
py narrow, with
I prevalence or
lough water for
ds^ mile within

son River, is a
e log huts of a
y be seen from

pe Cormorant,
at low water,

off Cormorant
least water and

the inner edge
ine, bearing S.
St should keep

MOISIC BAY AM) lUVKR.

169

The C'ixnt bntwecMi (^ape Cormorant and Sf. (Miarh's Point is bioluMi
into ODves, two of whicii are nearly a mile diH'|», lull of nxrks. and alfcird
shelter i)nl,v to boats. Tlie shore is Ihmhi fiingeil wirli rock-i lioth iibove
and untler w.iWr, and siioiiM nor tlinn^l'ore be ntade too free with.

St Charleo Point will nMilily be knovvn by tiie cove on its tMstein
side, and by the frendingof the I uid on the woso side nurllnvard towards
Trout Itiver.

St Charles Reef, lyingoff at. Charles Point, is extremely dangnnms,
being so bolil that there is no warning by tho hand lead, and v«'ry little
with the decpsea lead. It is eomi»osHdof a great number of rocks near
to each other, but having a considerable depth of water between them.
Some of them always show, but tiie outermost patches are always cov-
ered. The last lie rather more than i mile to the southward fi^ • the
southern extreme of St. Charles Point; and the reef coiiriii k, Hie
tirstcove, l.l miles to the northwestward of the point, but do. >, tUero
extend so far olfshore as off the point itself.

Cautioa— Vessels beating to the westward should take car it to
be becalmed to the westward of the St. Charles Heef, lest tho heavy
swell from the S W., so frequent on this coast, should heave them towards
the reef, for the water is too deep to anchor until close to the breakers.

Moisic Bay intervenes between St. Charles Point and Moisic River.
Trout River, a small stream, is in the center of this bay and (i^ miles
NW. from St. Charles Point. Here the rocky shores terminate and
the bold sandy beaish, which extends 0^ miles 8W. to the river Moisic,
commences.

Seal House Cove, on the east side of Moisic Bay and 2J miles from
St. Charles Poi.it, affords shelter only to boats. There are two log
houses there, which are occasionally occupied as a fishing and trading
post.

The granitic hills, which leave the shore at Trout River, continue
inland until they join the ridges in rear of the Bay of Seven Islands.
Between the hills and the sea there is an extensive tract of low sandy
country, thickly wooded.

River Moisic enters the sea on the east side of Moisic Point, which
is the southern extremity of the sandy country just mentioned. It
brings down from the interior great quantities of sand, which so obstruct
its wide and shallow channel in the first 2J miles from the sea that boats
can not ascend at low water. The traders report that flat bottomed
boats can ascend to the first rapids, at the distance, following the
stream, of 6 or 7 leagues from the sea. The bar, which is of sand, dry
at half tide, runs out from the long, low, and nirrow east point of
entrance nearly J mile to the southwestward and nearly parallel to the
east side of the west point of entrance.

The entrance of the river, between this bar and the west point, is
from the SW., and continues for the distance of J mile witli a breadth
of } mile and a depth varying with the seasons and the winds which

u.;.,

170

CAI'K WHITTLK TO HAOI KNAY KIVKR.

pntviill, tliosn from tho soiiiliwiml iiml t'listwiinl Iniviii}; a UMidiMMty to
(ilofU ii|) tilt) cliitiiiiol. It i.H siiitpostiil tliiit tlioi'o is .tuldoiii a Iosh il(!|itli
Miaii !> ftMU. at low wator, tlio Mam» as IimjiIh, oIoho iiiidtir tlu! \v«st point
of ttntruncu, wliiuli is the only placu wlioru a .small vussnl can Iiml sliolror,
closo to two lo^ lioiistvs occasionally tMnploycil as a salmon tlslicry by
tho people (»r the Hntlsoii May (Jompaay. Tho Mheltcr horn is uxtiomuly
import'eut in (falos of wind from the sonthward and eastward, which
send ill 8o heavy a sea that, after breaking compkitely over the bar and
u(!roMM the entrance, it still retains power enoii),'h to Herio.isly att'ect a
Hinall vcHHel.

Tides. — At the entrance of the Moisiu it Itt hi^jfh water, fall and
ciian);e, at Ih. •iOm., and ordinary springs rise from 5 to H feet.

Moislc Shoal extends to the westward .'(|^ miles past Moisic Point
in such a manner as to form an extensive triangular Handy shoal, with
from 3 to U fathonis on it at low water.

Moisic Rock, near the south extremity of tho Moisic Shoal, and in
■3 fi'et least water, brars 8. 5(P \V. 1."^ miles from Moisic Point, and is
nearly 1.^ miles from the shore. This is an extremely dangerous shoal,
being as bold as a wall.

Mark. — The oidy direction that can be given to a vessel standing
towards it, is to tack when the northern side of the Manowiu Island
conies on with the southern point of Great Boule Island, bearing S. S'2^
W. ; she will then bo one milo from the edge of the shoal, and iu up-
wards of 30 fathoms water.

East Rocks, which are low, bare of trees, and always above water,
lie ill Boule Bay, between Moisic Sh^al ant^ Boule Islands. Vessels
ought not to stand into this embayed ; \ce, -i.ice there is generally a
heavy southerly swell rolling iu, whic!) would render it ditlicult to beat
out.

Seven Islands are high and ^teep, of primary rocks, very thinly
"n'ooded, and can be made out from a distance of about 20 miles, being
unlike anything else in the Gulf. The easternmost of these islands are
the Great and Little Boule, the former of which is the highest of all, its
auininit being 695 feet above the sea at high water. Next, westward,
and parallel to these two, are Little and Great Basque Islands. Great
Basque Island is 500 feet high. Manowiu and Carousel lie to the SW.
of Basque Islands ; Manowiu is 457 feet high ; Carousel, the southern-
most of the islands, is much lower. West Bocks lie between Manowiu
And the ])eninsula, which forms the west point of the bay of Seven Is-
lands. They arc too small > ud low to appear as the seventh island ;
but the peninsula has that nearance when seen at a distance from
fiea, being higher than any of io islands, and 737 feet above the sea at
high water.

Caution. — In the narrow passes between the islands the tide sets
strongly towards and through them ; the flood to the west, and the obb
to the eastward, a circumstance that should bo attended to when be-
calmed at night or when tacking in their entrances.

VKR.

iviiijf a tcMidoiKiy to
Ltuldoiii a loHH iloptli
iii(l<;r tlio \v«st |i(iiiit
isttluaii find Mliulror,
1 miliiioii llsliury by
«<r lior« is iixtromuly
id «astward, wliiciii
jlyovor tlio l»ar and

Herio.isiy attoct a

jfli watHP, full and

'i to 8 feot.

past Moisic Point
r sandy shoal, with

loisio Shoal, and In
loisio Point, and in
ly dangerous shoal,

• a vessel standing
le Manowiii Island
and, bearing S. 82"^
B shoal, and in up-

Iways above water,

1 Islands, Vessels
here is generally a
r it ilUllcult to beat

rocks, very thinly
tout 20 miles, being
of these islands are
le highest of all, its
Next, westward,
ue Islands. Great
usel lie to the SW.
•usel, the southern -

between Manowin
e bay of Seven Is-
he seventh island ;
at a distance from
et above the sea at

[inds the tide sets
> west, and the ebb
ended to when be-

SE55aSS^p-i'5^B;*S5?s«'-a5!B?-

.%,

\ '^

^V>.;^

IMAGE EVALUATION
TEST TARGET (MT-3)

Photographic

Sdsnces
Corporation

23 WEST MAIN STREET

WEBSTER, N.Y. 14580

(716)872-4503

#■

,.<*

V'^^

'^A'

CIHM/ICMH

Microfiche

Series.

CIHIVI/ICIVIH
Collection de
microfiches.

Canadian Institute for Historical IVIicroreproductions / Institut Canadian de microreproductions historiques

K^^i

T-'"

SKVEN ISLANDS.

171

Seven Islands Bay. — The Seven Islands are so placed as to com-
pletely shelter the bay within them, which is 2J railes wide at the en-
trance, between Ohasse Point, the east end of the Peninsula, and Sandy
Point, which is opposite the northern end of Great Basque Island.

Trading Post— A fine, broad, bold, sand beach extends for 3 miles
northward from the east point of the bay to the entrance of the prin-
cipal river, near which stands the Hudson Bay Company's trading post.
The houses at this post can not be seen from the outer parts of the
bay, but there is a wooden store on the beach oflf which vessels usually
jinchor. Water can be obtained from this river at high tide.

Anchorage.— The best berth for a vessel of large draft is with Sandy
Point and the north side of Little Boule Island in line, and Chass6
Point in line with the west side of the West Rocks. The NW. extrem-
ity of the sandy beach near the entrance of the river will then bear N.
11° W. ; the vessel will be in 9 fathoms at low water, over clay bottom,
nearly one mile from the sandy beach to the eastward, and nearly f
mile from the .^fathoms edge of the shoals, which occupy the northern
part of the bay. Smaller vessels may lie closer to the shore, in 6 fath-
<)ms at low water, which is as near as any vessel ought to anchor.

In this anchorage there is a considerable swell, with a strong south-
erly wind, but never enough to endanger a vessel, although sufficient
to prevent boats from landing. Those that may wish to lie quite
smooth may anchor in the SW. part of the bay in 13 fathoms, soft clay
bottom, where they will be quite landlocked.

The Bast Channel, between Great l^asque Island and Sandy Point,
may be approached from between Boale Islands and East Bocks or
from between Boule and Basque Islands, both routes being entirely
free from danger. It is seldom used, having a rock in its center, which
is covered only in high tides. A reef, with from 6 to 9 feet of water,
extends for J mile to the eastward of this rock. The passage on either
side of it is wide and has from 13 to 15 fathoms. Vessels should only
attempt it with a fair wind, and should keep within 200 yards of Basque
Island, or as near to the sandy point of the main land ; the latter is
recommended as preferable.

The Middle Channel (which is also the principal and best) is up-
wards of 1| miles wide, and so free from danger that a vessel of the
largest draft may approach the shore within 100 yards in every part,
excepting at Chass^ Point, where a reef runs out 250 yards from the
shore. This channel, between Basque Islands on the east and Carousel,
Manowin, West Books, and the Peninsula on the west, is preferable in
every wind, excepting the north and NW., with which, to save beat-
ing (since they blow out of the bay), it might be desirable to enter by
ifche West Channel.

The West Channel, between the West Bocks and Croix Point, at
the southern extremity of the peninsula, is f mile wide and quite free
£roia danger. There are two or three rocks lying 200 yards to the north-

172

CAPE WHITTLE TO 8AGUENAY RIVER.

ward of West Rocks, but they always show, excepting in very iiigh
tides and the smoothest sea.

Caution.— The ebb tide is turned ott by Oroix Point towards West
Bocks, a circumstance which must be attended to la taking this chan-
nel wiih a scant northerly wind.

Anchorage.— The water is too deep for anchoring in any of these
channels and the bottom generally rocky, excepting to the eastward
and northward of Boule Islands. The ground Is not fit for anchoring
until well into the bay. The water is extremely deep outside of those
islands, and they are so bold that a vessel may stand in close to their
rocky shores.

Tides.— The rate of the stream of the tides in the bay and in the
principal channels between the Seven Islands seldom amounts to »
knot; but in the narrow channel between Boule Islands, Basque Isl-
ands, and in the Bast and West Channels, it may amount to 2 knots in
spring tides, or even more in the narrowest of these channels when
accelerated by strong winds. The flood, coming along from the east-
ward, strikes Boule Islands and passes between them, and also between
the two Basque Islands. It is turned off by Great Boule towards
Carousel Island and the West Channel ; but the greater part of the
stream, which passes within the Boule Islands, enters the bay by the
Bast Channel, between Great Basque Island and the mainland. There
is very little flood in the Middle Channel, excepting an eddy outward
stream close along the shores of the peninsula and the narrow stream
from between Basque Islands, which sets across towards the West
Channel.

The ebb sets fairly out of the bay, part of it by the East Channel
and part of it by the Middle Channel, where it meets the stream through
the West Channel, which turns it to the eastward, past the southera
points of Basque and Boule Islands.

Winds. — In fine nights the winds are almost always light and baf-
fling between Seven Islands, particularly if the wind be from the west-
ward in the o£Sng. At such times there is generally a northerly land
wind in Seven Islands Bay, but it does not often reach far out among
the islands in the early partof the night, although it often does towards
the morning.

Aspect of Coast. — The coast between Carousel Point de Monts
is less bold in appearance, being less elevated th. . ^nat to the east-
ward of the Seven Islands. The hills are, for the most pari, far back
in the country, and the shores are of very moderate height above the
sea. The country near the sea is formed of small and low granitic hills,
partially wooded with spruce trees. Marshes and ponds are frequent
between the hills ; sandy beaches occur occasionally, and the sandy
tracts in rear of them are always the most densely wooded parts.

St Margaret River, although a large stream, affords shelter to
boats only. It has a bar of sand extendingf mile out from the entrance

in very high

toward a West
ioff this cban-

1 any of these
) the eastward
for anchoring
itside of those
close to their

ay and in the
amounts to a
Is, Basque Isl-
it to 2 knots in
shannels when
from the east-
d also between
Soule towards
er part of the
he bay by the
nland. There
eddy outward
larrow stream
,rds the West

East Obaunet
tream through
it the soutberD

light and baf-
from the west-
northerly land
far out among
a does towards

!*oint de Monts
at to the east-
parl, far back
ight above the
7 granitic hills.
Is are frequent
md the sandy
ed parts,
rds shelter to
1 the entrance

^:iJiiS^i^~"^.Vii^.iii^^^ \..

ST. MARGARET RIVER — CAWEE LEDGE.

173

and having several small channels through it, with only 3 feet at low
water. Immediately within the entrance, which is 350 yards wide,
there are 6 feet water, and only 3 feet can be carried up to the low falls,
which are over granitic roclis, 34 miles from the entrance. Below the
falls theriver flows between clitfs ot sand and clay, and is full of sand-
bars, dry at low water.

St. Margaret Point is rocky, of moderate height, and has a round
hill a short distance within its extremity. There are several rocks
which cover at high water, and which extend to the distance of nearly
^ mile oft' this point. They are extremely bold.

The Coast from St. Margaret Point to Great Oawee Island is low,
and fringed with small islets and rocks close to the shore, which may
be closely approached by the leatl, but the depth of 20 fathoms is near
enough to it for a stranger.

Cawee islands are two small and hilly islands of gray granite, and
nearly bare of trees. Great Oawee Island, which is the larger, the
higher, and the eastern of the two, is about f mile in diameter, and
about 250 feet high. Little Oawee Island, lying a mile farther to
the sonthwestward, is composed of two islets, which occupy a length of
^ mile parallel to the coast. It has several rocks above water close off
it to the SW., and a reef 250 yards to the northwestward of its west
point.

Water. — There is neither wood nor water in Oawee Islands, but both
may be obtained from the opposite mainland.

Cawee Rock, small, round, and high, and distant ^ mile to the
southward of the south point of Great Oawee, is so bold that a large
ship might lie alongside of it.

Great Cawee Cove, on the NE. sid. of great Oawee Island, is secure
for boats, with plenty of water, but too small and narrow in the entrance
for vessels.

Great Cawee Shoal lies off the mouth of Great Oawee Oove, 400
yards to the northward. The least water on it is 15 feet.

Cawee Ledge. — Half a mile north from this shoal is a small round
ledge, awash at low water, and J mile from the mainland. Prom it the
south side of the large rocks, between Great Oawee and the main, is in
line with the point of the main to the westward.

Large Rocks. — Between Groat Oawee and the main there are two
large rocks close together ; they lie 300 yards from the mainland and
have a reef extending 400 yards from their SW. point. Nearly J mile
N. 30° E. from these rooks, and at the same distance from the main,
there is a small rook which always shows.

Anchorage. — There is anchorage in the month of the bay on the

west side of Great Oawee Island, in 7 fathoms, muddy bottom, and at

the distance of 200 yards from the islands ; but the SW. winds blow

right in and send in a very heavy sea.

Tides.— The tides ran fair through between the islands and the main-

■;ii

if!

1 ',
1/

"'1^

174

CAPE WHITTLE TO SAGUENAY RIVKR.

land, at a rate which seldom exceeds IJ knots, and which is in general
much less.

Sproule Point, $ mile to the westward from Little Cawee Island, is
the eastern point of Lobster Bay. A reef extends oflF its south side, 200
yards towards Little Cawee, but the principal reef off it runs out ^ mile
to the southward.

Lobster Bay is between Sproule Point and Crooked Islands, which
are a group of small islets and rocks, running out from the shore 3 miles
to the westward of Sproule Point. All the northern part or head of
Lobster Bay is occupied by an extensive flat of sand and bowlders, dry
at low water, and on which lobsters abound ; but it is an excjellent
open roadstead with plenty of room for the largest ships.

Anchorage.— Vessels may anchor midway between the reef and the
islands, choosing their depth from 5 to 13 fathoms, according as they
may wish to lie, at the distance of J mile or of one mile from the 3-
fathom edge of the flats in the head of the bay. The bottom is of fine
sand over clay.

Fentacost River enters the sea on the SW. side of a rocky point,
IJ miles to the southward of Crooked Islands; the opposite point of
entrance is of sand. Two miles south of the mouth of the river there
is a remarkable round and wooded hill. The entrance of the river is
only 30 yards wide, with a depth of 7 feet at low water, and there are
9 feet within for a short distance.

A fine bold sandy beach extends from this river to English Point, a
distance of 7 miles to the southward.

English Point, at IJ miles to the northward and eastward from the
north rocks of Egg Island, has a shoal of large stones extending oflf it
to the distance of J mile. On the SW. side, or towards Egg Island,
this shoal may be approached to the depth of 6 fathoms at low water,
but on the SE. and east It is very bold.

Egg Island is low, narrow, and of granitic rocks, without trees, and
J mile long. The North Rocks, always above water, lie 800 yards dis-
tant from the island to the northward ; they form a low, narrow, black
reef, which is 600 yards long, in the same direction, bold towards the
mainland and also towards English Point. A reef under water runs
out from these rocks iu the direction of their length to the southward
and to the distance of J mile, leaving only a very narrow 3-fathom
channel between them and the island.

* The NE. Reef runs out more than ^ mile from the NE. point of
Egg Island, and is the greatest danger between the Seven Islands
and Point de Monts. Some of the rocks upon it show in low tides, and
the sea generally breaks on them at low water. This reef prevents the
swell from rolling in between the north rocks and Egg Island, and thus
assists in sheltering the anchorage.

Water. — There is no water on Egg Island, but it may readily be ob-
tained from small streams on either side of Roadstead Point, on the
mainland opposite.

is in geueral

ee Island, is
iiith side, 200
as oat ^ mile

lands, which
»hore3 miles
•t or head of
owlders, dry
bn excellent

reef and the
ling as they
from the 3-
;om is of flne

rocky point,
>site point of
> river there
the river is
ad there are

lish Point, a

ird from the
ending off it
Egg Island^
; low water^

it trees, and

yards dis-
irrow, black
towards the

water runs

1 soatUward
>w 3-fathom

E. point of
v^en Islands
w tides, and
prevents the
id, and thus

adily be ob-
[)int, on the

EGO ISLAND — POINT DE M0NT8.

175

Anchorage. — Egg Island and its reefs form a natural breakwater,
which is 1^ miles long and inclines slightly towards the shore at its
northern end in such a manner as, with the nssistance of the shoal off
English Point, to shelter the anchorage from NE. winds. The best
position is with the 8W. end of E?g Island bearing S. 59° E. and the
inner side of the North Bocks N. 20° E. ; English Point will then be
open half a point to the westward of the latter. It is too small to be a
favorite resort for large vessels, but in time of need, or as a place of
refuge in case of distress, it would be found of great value on a coast
so destitute of good harbors.

Directions are unnecessary for running into this anchorage from the
southward and westward, since the SW. end of Egg Island is quite
bold. But if it be intended to run through between the island and the
main, stand in to the northward to 8 or 9 fathoms, or until English
Point is open half a point to the northward of the North Rocks, then
steer for English Point, giving the inner side of the North Bocks a
berth of 200 yards until the vessel has passed the North Bocks a full
J mile. She will then be in about 7- fathoms at low water, and may
haul out to sea, taking care to avoid the NE. reef.

Tides.— The rate of the tides between Egg Island and the main is
from J to one knot, and part of the stream of ebb sets towards and out
through the narrow and dangerous 3-fathom channel between the
island and the North Bocks. Part of the stream of flood comes in
through the same channel.

Calumet River is a small stream 2^ miles to the southward of Egg
Island ; along the shore for a mile to the southward of its entrance
there are reefs of large stones extending out to the distance of 1,200
yards from high-water mark.

Caribou Point, 8^ miles southward from Egg Island, is a small rocky
peninsula, having sandy coves on either side of its isthmus, in which
pilot boats find shelter.

Trinity Bay, at 5 miles to the southward of Caribou Point, is 2 miles
wide and nearly one mile deep, with a flne sandy beach extending from
its south point to Trinity Biver, which is a small and rapid stream^
abonnding with trout and salmon, where water can be bad only at high
water, because of the large stones about its entrance* The south point
of the bay is rocky, and off the NE. point there are two low black rocks.

Anchorage. — ^This bay affords excellent anchorage, in a moderate
depth of water with good ground, and plenty of room to weigh in any
wind. It is a valuable stopping place, in westerly winds, for vessels
bound up the St. Lawrence, to wait their opportunity to proceed round
Point de Monts, and up the estuary.

Rocks. — The south extremity of Point de Monts is about 1} miles
8. W. of the lighthouse. To the SE. of the extremity of the point
and ^ mile off shore lie a ledge of rocks with 9 or 10 feet least water.
Southward ^ mile from the lighthouse is another rock with 2 fathoms

~''^W Wl

I-

msmm^'

li^

176

CAPE WHITTLE TO 8AGUENAY RIVER.

on it, and there is a third with a little more water and nearly as far off
from the lli^lithoiise to the eastward.

Aspect of Coast.— The laud, which on the eastern side of Point de
Monts is rather low, begins to rise immediately from that point to the
westward ; and granitic hills, very sparingly wooded and in no part
above 1,000 feet in height, form the north coast of the estuary as far
as St. Giles Point, distant 30^ miles west of Point de Monts. The sec-
tion of coast just indicated is as bold as any in the St. Lawrence, there
being little or no warning by the lead, neither is there any good anchorage
sufQciently roomy for the occasional use of shipping.

St. Augustine Cove, H miles westward of Point de Monts, aff^ords
shelter only to boats, and pilots are generally found waiting here with
easterly winds.

Godbout River, 8^ miles westward from Point de Monts, enters
the sea at the extremity of a sandy point. There is usually at low
water not more than 4 or 5 feet over the bar, on which a heavy surf very
frequently breaks. There is a trading and salmon fishing post of the
Hudson Bay Company at this river, and the houses can readily be
seen.

Anchorage. — It is possible to anchor on either side of the bar of
Godbout River, but the anchorages are too near to the shore to be of
general use. The anchorage to the westward of the bar may ocnasion-
ally be useful in easterly winds to small vessels. They should anchor
about midway between the bar and the first rooky point to the west-
ward of it.

At this anchorage, which is only safe in summer, the bottom is of
co'Tse s&nd. The tides are weak and irregular, rendering it difficult
to keep the anchoi clear in calm weather; they also frequently set
owards the shore, coming in with long ripplings parallel to the coast.

St Nicholas Harbor lies 3 miles to the northeastward from Cape
St. Nicholas, which is a high bare point of granite, bearing 8. 79° W.
17 miles from Point de Monts. This harbor is a narrow inlet between
granitic hills from 500 to 700 feet in height. On the SW. side a vessel
may lay alongside of the rocks as alongside a wharf.

The depth that can be carried in at high water is from 12 to 17 feet,
according as it may be neap or spring tides. The bottom in the en-
trance is of sand, with some few large stones upon it, which can be seen
and avoided if the tide be not high enough to pass over them. The
entrance is situated in the center of a small bay, J mile wide and rather
more than 4 mile deep to the rocky point on the west side of the en-
trance to the harbor, which will be readily seen projecting out into the
bay, and is named Cross Point, from a small wooden cross upon it. . An
extensive shoal of sand and boulders, which dry at half tide, extends
from the east point of the bay, nearly 700. yards to the SW., and con-
tinues northward at the entrance of the harbor. This shoal can always
be seen, is quite bold, and completely shuts out the sea from tho harbor

■mr^wmxMWiXAi

ii'i ;j Y . ^ "'T^^ ii S^

i' l r iif ^&' Mitei.^(i<iBM

P^lll^

irly ns far off

,e of Point de
: point to the
[I in no part
stuary as far
its. The see-
vrence, there
0(1 anchorage

[onts, affords
ng here with

E^outs, enters
lually at low
)avy surf very
g post of the
in readily be

of the bar of
hore to be of
nay ocnaHion-
tionld anchor
to the west-
bottom is of
ig it difficult
reqaently set
to the uoast.
rd from Cape
ng 9. 790 W.
inlet between
side a vessel

12 to 17 feet,
)m in the en-
>h can be seen
r them. The
de and rather
le of the en-
f out into the
upon it. . An
tide, extends
IW., and con*
tal can always
>m the harbor

ST. NICHOLAS HARBOR — ENGLISH BAY.

177

"» a £.', ia ):''r' y«ii t tffiS i t ..:.

in southerly and easterly winds. The shoals on the west side extend
aoro88 a small bay on the west side of Oross Point, and continue off-
shore to the distance of 200 yards.

The Anchorage between these shoals, in the bay off the harbor's
•mouth, is only G(H) yards wide, and consequently too small to be con-
sidered a roadstead for large vessels, but the ground is good and the
depth convenient for anchoring preparatory to warping into the harbor.

Water. — There are several smalk streams, on the eastern side of St.
Nicholas Harbor, where water can be obtained ; and it can also be had
at high water from the two small rivers at the head of the inlet.

Caution. — Southeast winds blow right into St. Nicholas Harbor, and
are consequently the most favorable for running in ; but with a strong
wind in that direction, and at high water, when the shoals are covered,
there is generally some sea outside the narrow entrance. A S W. wind is
the safest for running in, for the entrance and bay outside are then quite
smooth; but this wind will seldom take a vessel completely in; it will
usually only enable her to shoot so far within Cross Point that a line
may be sent ashore, or a kedge ahead, for the purpose of warping in the
remainder of the way, which may be quickly done if due preparation
has been made beforehand.

The entrance should be attempted in the last quarter flood ; then if
the vessel touches the ground she will receive no damage, and there
will be time for her to warp in before the tide begins to fall.

Directions. — A vessel wishing to enter St. Nicholas Harbor, and
being off the mouth of the bay, should bring the end of Cross Point to
bear N. 3° W., then steer so nearly for it as to leave it not more than
50 yards nor less than 30 yards distant on the port hand. If the wind
will allow, continue to run in at the same distance from the shore on
the west side until the water deepens.

The shoal water commences at Cross Point and continues for a dis-
tance of 400 yards, and the channel is rendered narrow by shoals off
the eastern side for an equal distance farther up the harbor. In order
to have as much room as possible, a vessel should anchor farther . .
than the three large rocks, which will be seen on the eastern side of
the harbor. To run out again, wait for a N W. wind, or take advantage
of the land wind in the early part of the morning, which often occurs
In fine weather when westerly winds prevail, or, lastly, warp out in a
light breeze or calm to the entrance of the bay outside, and to a posi-
tion from which sail can be made.

St. Pancrace Cove is only about 320 yards wide, between steep
rocks, and open to the southward, with very deep water, and is of no
use to vessels. The depth is 32 fathoms in its entrance, shoaling grad-
ually to 17 fathoms within ^ mile of its head.

English Bay, between St. Pancrace Point and St. Giles Point, affords
no good anchorage, in consequence of the great depth of water.; a heavy
sea rolls into it in easterly winds, and its shores are high and rocky.
5489 12

?~'5i,iiij(H

178

CAPE WHITTLE TO 8AGUENAY RIVER.

8t Giles Point, the iiortliera point of entrance to Manioou»Kan
River i» high and rooky, like the coast to the eastwartl ; while Mani-
couagan Point is low ami thickly wooded, with a broad sandy beach,
like the rest of the const westward to Outarde Bay. This complete
change in the character of the coast points out to a vessel her approach
towards the Manicouagan Shoal.

Anchorage.— The principal channel is on the north side of the en>
trance, and there is a deep place, or large hole, in itlij miles long, from
i to i mile wide, and with a depth from 3 to 5 fathoms at low water,
with muddy bottom. This large hole Is close to St. Giles Point, and
extends li miles within it. Although this place appears completely
open to easterly winds, no swell of consequence rolls Into it, and we
believe a vessel well moored on its north side within St. Giles Point
would be in safety. But to get in there it is necessary to pass over the
bar, which extends out 2 miles to the eastward from St. Giles Point; It
has 7 feet over It at low and from 14 to 19 feet at high water, acconl-
Ing as It may be neap or spring tides.

Tides.— The ebb runs out over the Manicouagan Bar to the eastward
at the rate of about 1^ knots, and the flood Is nearly as strong.

Manicouagan Shoal Is of sand, with many large bowlders scattered
about its eastern and southern parts, and probably deposited there by
the ice. The bearing of S. 9° W. from St. Pancrace Cove passes along
the eastern side of the shoal, which Is so bold that there are 60 fathoms
of water at the distance of little more than IJ miles and 40 fathoms at
half that distance from the breakers. On this side the shoal dries
nearly out to Its edge In low tides. The south point of the shoal ex-
tends 2* miles to the southward of Manicoufigan Point, and here only Is
there any sufficient warning by the deep-sea lead. It continues from
Its south point to the westward for a distance of 16 miles, the outline
of Its edge corresponding to the shape of the sandy shore as far as
Outarde Point, ofif which It extends to the* southward IJ miles, and,
filling up all the eastern part of Outarde Bay, stretches out its western
point fully 3^ miles 8W. of Outarde Point.

The tides are tolerably regular ; not very strong along the shore ; the
rate of either tide does not exceed 2 knots at any time, and Is usually
much less. But great ripplings are met with occasionally both near
the shoals and In the offlug, where they are caused, as mother parts of
the estuary, by the unequal velocities, or the opposing directions of the
streams, as will be readily Imagined when It is remembered that the
carrent Is always down on the south side, slack, in the middle, and up
during the flood on the north side of the estuary. These ripplings are
very common oft" the eastern and southern parts of Manicouagan Shoal,
where they were observed to move much faster than the streams of
the tides. They often give to the tides the appearance of a rapidity
which does not exist.

Outarde Point Is II miles to the westward of the south extremity

ManioouAK^i^
while Maiii-
saiuty beacli,
iii8 uoinplotie
tier approach

de of the eD^
08 loot;, ft'om
it low water,
en Point, and
:8 completely
to it, aud we
t. Giles Point
pass over the
^iles Point; it
mter, acconl-

tbe eastward
trong.

If rs scattered
lited there by
Q passes along
ire 60 fathoms
40 fathoms at
le shoal dries
the shoal ex-
id here only is
mtinaes from
s, the outline
ihore as far as
l^ miles, and,
)Ut its western

the shore; the
ind is usually
lly both near
other parts of -
rections of the
ered that the
liddle, and up
i rippliugs are
onagan Shoal,
;he streams of
) of a rapidity

ath extremity

MANICOUAOAN 81I0AL — BKR8IMI8 RIVER.

179

of Manioonagau Point, and the shore between them is of low sandy
cliffs, with a sandy beach.

Outarde River.— The entrance to Oiitarde River is by several intrl-
oate aud narrow channels through the western part of Manicouagan
Shoal, and as there are only 2 or 3 feet of water through these chan-
nels at low tide for the distance of 4 or 5 miles, the place is useless to
vessels, and therefore requires no further description.

The water of this river holds a white earth suspended, and frequently
covers the whole surface of Outarde Bay, floating on the heavier sea
water beneath, and giving the whole bay the appearance of being
shoal. A vessel sailing through this superstratum of fresh water dis-
places it and leaves a blue streak in her wake.

Outarde Bay, between Outarde and Bersimis Points, has three small
rocky islaruls in it, which appear as two from seaward, and serve to
distinguish the bay to strangers ; they are far within the edge of the
shoals, which extend quite around the bay, and occupy the greater part
of it, being a continuation of the Manicouagan Shoal.

Anohorage.— Good anchorage will be found on the west side of
Outarde Bay in 14 fathoms at low water, over muddy bottom, with Ber-
simis Point bearing 8. 9° W., 3i miles. Manicouagan Point will then
be open 3 or 4 degrees to the southward of Outarde Point, the south
side of which will bear N. 54° B., and the vessel will be nearly J mile
from the 3 fathom edge of the shoal on the west side of the hay ; small
vessels may lie closer, in 7 fathoms.

Directions.— In standing in for this anchorage with a westerly wind
beware of the bar of Bersimis River, which is extremely steep. If the
first rocky point can be made out to the northward of the river, and
which bears from its entrance north ^ miles, take care that it does not
bear to the eastward of N. 25° W., and* the vessel will clear the bar.
When it is passed she may haul in to the northward into soundings,
going no nearer than 10 fathoms. This anchorage, which is not gen-
erally known, is excellent in westerly gales, and may occasionally be
very useful to vessels bound up the St. Lawrence. The tides are not
so strong as has been supposed, the ebb seldom exceeding the rate of 2
knots, and the flootl being much weaker. The direction of these streams
is reversed by the effect of Outarde River.

Bersimis River enters the sea to the eastward and IJ miles north
of the south extremity of Bersimis Point. The wide mouth of the river
is closed by sands dry at lo\r water, with the exception of a very nar-
row channel. The river within, for the first 3 miles, is wide and full of
43and shoals.

The Bar is of sand, which dries in parts at low water, aud shifts fre-
quently, being completely exposed to southerly and easterly gales ; it
extends nearly IJ miles to the. eastward of the south point of entrance.
Directions for entering the river must therefore be useless ; but it may
be as well to remark, that within the bar the channel is always close to

■n

.1
If

■*m

180

CAPE WHITTLE TO SAOUENAY RIVER.

the 80Hth point of entrance, fuid keepB on that Hide through the wide
part within, with a depth of 9 feet at low water. The depth that could
be carriecl in over the bar, in the month of July, was 6 feet at low water,
and from 13 to 18 feet at high water, according as it might be neap or
spring tideH.

Beralmia Point Is low, of sand, wooded with spruce trees, and diffl-
cult to be seen at night. On its east side, the low south point of the river
extends to the distance of 2 miles from the trees, and the bar 1^ miles
farther ; and to the soutl ward, the sand shoal extends ^ mile from the
sandy beach, yet It is so b«.1d that the lead affords no warning, there
being 60 fathoms muddy bottom at a distance of a mile from the edge
of the shoal. On the east and west sides of the point the shoals are
equally steep, so that this point Is very dangerous, especially to vessels
beating at night or in foggy weather.

The Tides are regular, but the flood is rather stronger than the ebb
within « miles from the shore, where the rate of either seldom exceeds
1^ knots, and is often much less.

Jeremy Island.— From Bersimis Point, a low and sandy shore con-
tinues 6i miles to the westward to Jeremy Island, which is very small,
rocky, and close to the coast. There is a trading post of the Hudson
Bay Company on the main, the buildings of which can usually be seen;
but if not, its position will always be known by some patches of white
sand and clay cliffs, which are close to the eastward of the island.
Vessels may stand in by the lead, and anchor off this place; but it is
a bad anchorage, and the shoal water extends a mile out from the shore.
Cape Colombier—Prora Jeremy Island a rocky and broken shore
extends 6 miles to Cape Oolombier, which is a rooky peninsula, with a
small islet on its west side.

Gulnare Shoal is a narrow ridge of granite rock, nearly 2 miles long^
parallel to the shore, and having from 2 to 3 fathoms over it at low
water. The inner or north side of Laval Island nearly in line with
Orient Point, the east point of Laval Bay, bearing 8. 69° W. leads 40O
yards to the southward of this shoal in 20 fathoms water.

Wild Fowl Reef is a large bed of rocks extending ^ mile from the
shore between Plongeur Bay and Laval Bay. There are 9 fathoma
water ^ mile outside this reef.

Flongenr Bay, between Wild Fowl Reef and Cape Oolombier, may
may be known by a round and. rocky peninsula on its west side. The
inner part of this bay is full of rocks dry at low water, and the whole
bay is shoal out to the line jolniug Wild Fowl Beef and Oar)e Oolombier.
Laval Bay, situated 4 miles to the westward of Wild Fowl Reef, will
be known by the rocky island in its mouth, and by the clay cliffs which
commence IJ miles to the SW. of it and continue to within the same
distance of Port Neuf.

This bay within the island is all dry at low water. Vessels may
safely stand in towards it, the water shoaling gradually from 10 fath-

{h the wide
h that could
t low water,
b bo neap or

)M, and diffli-
i of the river
bar 14 uiiles
lile from the
rning, there
oiu the edge
3 slioala are
ly to vesselH

;han the ebb
lorn exceeds

y shore eon-

1 very small,
the Hudson
ally be seen ;
hes of white
f the island.
ice ; but it is
)ui the shore.
)roken shore
iisnla, with a

2 miles long^
)ver it at low

in line with
W. leads 400

nile from the
re fathoma

ilombier, may
St side. The
ad the whole
[)e Oolombier.
owl Reef, will
ly cliffs which
bin the same

Vessels may
from lOfath-

PORT NEirF — EHtiUAMINK I8LET8.

181

oms, whi(5h Ih at the diHtanoe of Hi mllOM fioui the Hhoro. There Ih good
anulior>ige iu ti or 7 fathoms, over uluy bottom, off the clay clitl'M above
mentioned.

Fort Neuf.— There is a fur-trading and salmonflnhing establiMhnient
belonging to the tludHon Bay Company, at this pottt, which standH upon
a steei>. Handy biink, and is 4 miles to the Nl*}. of Mille Vaohes Point;
there are several buildings. These can readily be seen by a vessel off
the coaHt.

SB. from the church, distant nearly ^ mile, is the south end of a low
and narrow sandy peninsula, with a clump of pine or spruce trees upon
it.

Port Nenf Rivor is entered from the SW., but is so shallow that a
boat can not enter it at low water.

Port Neuf Banda.— The eastern patch of these shoals, carrying .3}
fathoms least water, and which might be dangerous to a vessel of heavy
draft in a high sea, bears N. 5Q° E., and is dist>tnt l^ miles ftom the
eouth western end of the sand and clay cliffs at the entrance of Port
Neuf River. ,

BCille Vachea Point is low, sandy, and wooded with spruce trees.
From its souch extremity the K W. reef of Bicquette bears S. 44° E. 12^
miles, and the navigable breadth uf the channel is diminished by Mille
Yacbes Shoals to little more than 11^ miles. As the dangers on either
«ide are so bold, and as the course of a vessel running up the estuary
must ever be more or less uncertain in consequence of the set of the
tides and currents, this pass is justly considered dangerous to a vessel
running up in dark nights or foggy weather.

MiUe Vaohea Bay, on the west side of Mille Vacbes Point, is very
large, with several small rivers, which descend by falls or rapids down
the granitic shores. The principal of these rivers is the Saut de Mon-
ton, 44 miles west fi'om the poin^. and which has a fall of 80 feet visible
A:om a vessel when abreast of it. Ail the interior of this bay is occa-
pied by shoals of sand, mud, and large bowlders, which dry at low
water.

Anohorage. — There is anchorage in Mille Vaohes Bay in 15 fathoms,
aand and mud bottom, with the south extremity of Mille Vaches Point
in line with the inner or north side of the pine trees on the peninsula
of Port Neuf bearing N. 28° B., at the distance of 2 or 3 miles from the
point and | of a mile from the shoals. The ground is good and there
is not mnch tide.

SscoQinaiiui laleta are two large rocks, which have three small ones
nearly a mile to the southward of them. The coast to the southwest-
ward from these islets to Little Bergeron, a distance of 16 miles, con<
aibts of granite rook, steep and bold, and free from all danger, except-
ing a flat which occupies a bay on the west side of Gape Bondesir, bat
which does not extend above ^ mile outside of a line joining the points
of the bay, and is conseqnently very little in the way of vessels.

^-^^^^^mmmmmmmk

BHB

182

CAPE WHITTLE TO SAGUENAY RIVER.

Tides.— The tidal streams are regular, iucreasing in strength as we
approach the comparatively narrow pass on either side of Bed Islet.
The flood is the stronger tide of the two, the ebb being deflected over
towards the southern shore by the stream out of the great Saguenay
Biver. The flood does not extend above 5 or 6 miles off the north shore
below Bergeron, and the closer to that shore the stronger is the stream*
Its rate at Mille Vaches Point, where it does not extend far offshore,
is from IJ to 2 knots, and off Bergeron from 2 to 3 knots, in spring
tides.

Great and Little Bergeron are two coves separated by a point.
They are both full of large bowlders, which dry at low water, and hav©
small streams at their heads. Little Bergeron is of the two the most
totheSW.

1' I

: i!

strength as w&
e of £ed Islet.
r deflected over
rreat Saguenay
the north shore
)risthe stream*
nd far offshore,
knots, in spring

ted by a point,
vater, and have<
le two the most

CHAPTER VII.

BIVEB ST. LAWRENCE, GBBEN ISLAND TO MONTREAL— SAGUENAY

BIYEE.

Q«neral Remarks. — Chapter 7 commences at what may be consid-
ered the first difBcnlt pass ascending the St. Lawrence, the difficulty
arising not only from the dangerous reefs of Green Island, Red Islet,
and Saguenay River, but also from the great velocity and transverse
direction of the tidal streams.

Some remarks and directions have already been given respecting the
passage on either side of Red Islet and its reef, the Oreen Island light-
house and reef, and the anchorage under the latter.

Red Islet is small, low, and of shingle, partially covered with grass
and resting on slate rock.

Red Islet Bank.— Red Islet is quite bold at its SW. end, but a rocky
bank or reef, nearly dry in some parts at low water, extends 2^ miles
to the northward, and is 1| miles wide. There is good warning by the
lead in approaching this bank from the eastward, but vessels should be
cautious in approaching it from the northward, because the water is
deep, and the ebb tide sets strongly, upon it on thnt side. In flue sum-
mer weather vessels becalmed or bound up, and wishing to wait for
the tide, may safely anchor to the east and SE. of this bank in 10
fathoms at low water, where they will have good ground and find the
strength of the ebb much broken by the bank. In case of need, they
may also anchor in the same depth at the distance of 400 yards from
the south side ol the islet, but the ebb tide runs there at the rate of 6^
knots per hour.

Marks.— The lighthouse and beacon on Green Island are both white,
and when in line, bearing S. 43° E., lead to the eastward of Red Islet
Bank. (Page 23.) A red buoy is moored at its east end in 5^ fathoms,
from which the south side of Red Islet and the north side of Hare Island
appear in line, and the lighthouse on Green Island open a little lo the
eastward of the beacon. The lead should never be neglected, nor the
vessel taken nearer than the depth of 9 fathoms at low water in passing
to the southward. There are no marks for leading to the northward of
this bank, nor do the soundings there afford sufficient warning for the
safety of a vessel.

White Islet, bearing S. 27° W., nearly 10 miles from Red Islet, is
small, low, and wooded, presenting the appearance of a clump of trees
on the only part of Hare Island North Reef which does not cover at

183

iJi

.11

i r

184

GREEN ISLAND TO MONTREAL.

high water. This reef, which is commonly called White Island Reef, is
composed of a narrow ridge of highly inclined slate rocks, and extends
3 miles to the northward of the islet. On its NB. end, which is ex-
tremely dangerous, because the flood tide sets strongly upon and over
it into the North Channel, a light and bell buoy, painted red, and show-
ing a ^.ve(2 ichite gaslight, is moored in 8 fathoms. The beacon in Oaco-
una Pariah, open to the westward of the church, leads to the eastward
of the east end of the reef, which vessels should approach no nearer
than the depth of 10 fathoms at low water.

Hare Island is 7\ miles long in Ihe direction of the river, and less
than a mile wide. Its height does not exceed 250 or 300 feet ; and it is
of greywack6 and slate rocks, dipping at a high angle to the SB., and
thickly wooded. It has no inhabitants.

Brandy Pots are three round backed islets of steep gray wacke rocks,
lying ott' the east side of Hare Island, at the distance of J of a mile.
The channel between them and Hare Island is only tit for boats. There
is a good spring well on the 8W. point of the Northern Islet, but it fails
in very dry seasons.

Brandy Pot Bank.— The east point of Brandy Pots bears 8. 1(P B.
nearly 2 miles from the NB. end of Hare Island; it is extremely bold,
but a bank, with from 1^ to 2f fathoms at low water, extends both to
the northward and southward of it along the east side of Hare Island.
Anchorage.— Small vessels anchor on this bank ^ mile to the SW.
of Brandy Pots in 2J fathoms, hard clay and sand bottom, and well
sheltered from easterly winds. Vessels of large draft anchor farther
out in the stream in from 9 to 14 fathoms at low water, this being con-
sidered an excellent anchorage, although so much exposed in easterly
winds. Vessels may go as near as the depth of 6 fathoms at low tide
as far down as White Islet and have good ground and plenty of room
to get under weigh. Brandy Pots anchorage is the usual rendezvous
for vessels bound down the St. Lawrence and waiting for a wind.

Mark.— A good mark for clearing Brandy Pot Bank for the first IJ
miles to the SW. of those islets, as well as to guide vessels of large
draft in anchoring with easterly winds, is, not to shut the whole of
White Island in behind the SE. point of Brandy Pots. The bank, which
extends to the NB. of Brandy Pots, will be cleared by keeping the whole
of Pilgrim Islands open to the southward of Brandy Pots, or by going
no nearer than the depth of 6 fathoms in a large vessel.

Hare Island South Reef and Bank.— The part of this reef which
the tide does not cover lies 2J miles to the of SW. Hare Island, is small
and low, of shingle covered with grass and spruce bushes, and rests on
slate rocks, which dry at low water for a considerable distance from it,
both up and down the river. This reef is situated towards the northern
side of the Hare Island Bank, which is of great extent, with not more than
9 feet at low water over the greater part of it. About J mile to the
westward of the east end of the bank there is a small rocky knoll, with

Mi«^

and Reef, is
iind extends
?hich is ex-
on and over
1, and show-
Bon in Oaco-
he eastward
li no nearer

^er, and less
et; and it is
bhe SB., and

wacke rocks,

^ of a mile.

Dats. There

t, bat it fails

W8 8. lOo B.
remely bold,
ends both to
Hare Island.
» to the 8W.
>n], and well
ichor farther
is being con-
d in easterly
18 at low tide
anty of room
I rendezvous
A wind.
\r the first 1}
isels of large
the whole of
) bank, which
ing the whole
, or by going

8 reef which
land, is small
, and rests on
ance from it,
the northern
not more than
4 mile to the
:y knoll, with

HARE ISLAND REEF BARRETT LEDGES,

2J fathoms least water, from which White Islet is only just shut in be-
hind the south side of Hare Islauf' : and the SW.eud of Hiire Island
bears N. 66° W. IJ miles. A ru? vy is moored near it in 3 fathoms,
with the south side of Hare Islani. ;.d the middle of White Islet in line,
and the 8W. end of Hare Island bearing N. 71° W.

Middle G-round.— At the distance of % mile from the east end of
Hare Island Bank there is a small 2J fathoms patch, bearing from Hare
Island South Keef N. 52° E. and from the 8W. end of Hare Island 8.
87° E. 2 miles. It is marked by a buoy, painted red. There is no chan-
nel here for a ship of heavy draft at low water, for a ridge of sand and
rock, called Middle Bank, with not more than from 3 to 4 fathoms in low
tides, extends all the way from the Hare Island Bank to Middle Shoal
and nearly to Barrett Ledge.

Between Hare Island Bank and the SW. end of Hare Island there
is an unfrequented channel J mile wide and with from 2^ to 3 fathoms
water in it. To the SW., Hare Island Bank extends 6 miles from the
reef of the same name, and its SW. end will be cleared in 3J fathoms
by keeping Grand Island just open to the eastward of Kamourasca
church, bearing 8. 4° E. A red buoy, in 4 fathoms, is moored on its
southern edge.

Anchorage. — There is good anchorage all along the south side of
Hare Island Bank in 7 fathoms, which depth is near enough for a vessel
of large draft.

Barrett Ledges are two small patches of rocks, ^ mile apart, and
having 7 and 8 fathoms between them. The western ledge has 12 feet,
and the eastern 10 feet, at low water. From the eastern ledge, Brandy
Pots Lighthouse bears S. 76° W. 2J miles ; center of white Islet N. 40°
W. 3J miles. A light buoy, checkered black and white, and showing an
intermittent gas light, is moored in 2^ fathoms, on the eastern end of the
ledges.

The western ledge lies exactly in the line joining Loup Point with
the NE. point of Hare Island, and with the SW. side of the Bay of
Bocks, the two last bearing in line from the rock N. 63° W. and the
south point of Brandy Pots S. 77° W. 2 miles. A black and white
buoy is moored on the east side of this ledge in 6 fathoms.

Middle Shoal is a small patch of rocks at the NE. end of Middle
Bank ; it has 6 feet least water, and bears from the western Barrett
Ledge 8. 29° W. 1^ mUes.

Marmen Rock. — A black can buoy is moored northeastward of Mar-
men Rock, which is situated S. 74° E. a little more than 1^ miles from
Brandy Pots light-house, and carries 7 feet water.

Demers Rock. — A red can buoy is placed southwestward of Demers
Bock, which carries 11 feet of water, and lies 700 yards southwestward
of Middle Shoal, and 8. 57° E. 1^ miles nearly from Brandy Pots light-
house.

* i

i*
II

ill 'I

186

GREEN ISLAND TO MONTREAL.

SOUTH SHORE, BELOW THE TRAVERSE.

Green Island (see page 121) extends 5 miles SW. from the lighthouse,
with bold and rocky shores. Its SW. point is low and bare, and has a
dangerous reef extending from it a mile to the westward. The north
side of this reef is so bold that there is no warning by th< 'ead.

The flood tide sets strongly over the tail of this reef towauls Oacouna,
and the ebb the contrary. There is generally a great rippling oflf the
end of the reef, caused by the meeting of the flood tides from eitherside
of Green Island.

Anchorage.— Midway between the SW. end of Green Island Reef
and Cacouna Kock there is good anchorage and shelter from easterly
winds, in 6 fathoms, muddy bottom, but there might be delay and diffi-
culty in getting out when the wind changed to the westward, on which
account it is seldom nsed.

Caconna is a remarkable rocky peninsula, about 1^ miles long, 300
or 400 feet high, and joined to the main by a low and and marshy isthmus,
A reef of slate, dry at low water, extends from it northward to the
Cacouna Rock, which is small, bare, bold, and always above water.

Pero^e Rocks form a long reef which extends 2 miles parallel to the
shore. They can almost always be seen, since they are only covered in
high tides. There is a narrow channel, with 3J fathoms water in it,
between this reef and the mainland.

The west point of Cacouna peninsula just touching south side of
Green Isl&nd, and bearing N. 35° E., leads along the north side of the
rocks in 3 fathoms water.

Loop River has 3 feet at low water in its entrance. Vessels have
laid aground just within the entrance, and taken in their cargoes of
lumber; but they now load outside. A pier having 16 tfeet water at it»
end in the lowest tides extends in a westerly direction from Loup Point.
There are rapids, mills, and a bridge, rather more than a mile up the
river, where boats may be sent for water when the tide is in.

Anchorage.— The best berth is rather to the eastward of the line
joining the point of the river and Brandy Pots, in 4J fathoms, mud'bot-
tom, and from f to one mile off shore.

Zionp Bank consists of slate, thinly covered with sand and mud, and
extends 3 miles out from the shore to the Sfathoms line, reaching from
the river in a SW. direction as far as the Pilgrim Islands.

Pilgrim Shoal is a long and narrow ridge of red slate rocks, thinly
covered with sand, and extending 4 miles parallel to the northern edge
of the Loup Bank. The shoal is not above ^ mile wide, and has from
12 to 15 feet least water. The channel between it and the Loup Bank
is less than 400 yards wide, and with only 3^ fathoms water in it. On
the eastern end of this shoal, in 3 fathoms, the eastern side of Brandy
Pots and the NB. end of the trees of Hare Island are in line, bearing N.
10° W ; Cape Eat^le and the NE. side of Hare Island reef are just open
S. 650 W.

■' I'lmliW >ii T.

-■^

PILGRIM SHOAL — KAM0URA8CA BAY.

187

le ligbthouse^
ire, and has a
. The north
^ lead.

lids Gaconna^
)pling off the
om either side

1 Island Beef
From easterly
elay anddiiH-
ard, on which

liles long, 300
Tshy istbnins,
bward to the
Bve water.
[)arallel to the
ily covered in
3 water in it^

south side of
;h side of the

Vessels have
ir cargoes of
)t water at its
n Loop Point.
I mile up the
in.

rd of the line
>m8, mad'bot-

and mud, and
reaching from

rocks, thinly
aorthern edge
and has from
e Loup Bank
ter in it. On
de of Brandy
DC, bearing N.
' are just open

On the SW. end of the Pilgrim Shoal, Cape Salmon appears well
open to the westward of the Uare Island Reef, the SW. side of the latter
bearing N. 88° W. The black buoy moored on the uortii western side
of Pilgrim Shoal exhibits an intermittent gas light.

The Pilgrims — The two westernmost islands are nearly white, bare
of trees, and so nearly joined together as to appear like one; hence
they are called the Long Pilgrim, and form a narrow precipitous ridge
3 miles long, in a SW. direction. The two Middle Pilgrims and the
Great Pilgrim, which is the easternmost, are connected by reefs, dry at
low water; but between them and the Long Pilgrim there is a narrow
channel, with not more than 2 feet water iu one part.

Great Pilgrim is the highest, being about 30U feet high, partially
wooded with scrubby spruce trees. Shoal water, less than 5 fathoms^
extends from ^ to ^ of a mile off the northern side of the Long Pilgrim,
being widest at the SW. end. There is no channel between the Pd-
grims and the main, where it is so shallow that carts can cross in low
tides.

St. Andre Bank extends from the Pilgrims to the Eamourasca Is-
lands, ltd northern edge is very steep, but there is an excellent mark
for it, namely, the south side of Grande and Burnt Islands in line, bear-
ing S. 30° W., which leads along it at the distance of 300 yards from the
3fathom8 line of soundings.

Kamonrasca Islands.— Grande and Burnt Islands are loiig and
narrow ridges of greywack^ rock, and are extremely bold to the north-
ward. Grow Island is distant about $ mile from the shore at the church
and town of Kamonrasca. There is a wharf and good landing near the
church, and water may be obtained at any time of tide when there i»
depth enough for boats over the shoals, bnt there is no water on the
islands.

Beacons.— On the eastern end of Grande Island there are two bea-
cons, the one red and the other white. When in line, and bearing S.
230 E., they form a cross mark for the red bnoy on the SW. end of the
Hare Island Bank, in 4 fathoms.

SCamonrasoa Bay is well sheltered, and small vessels may safely
lie aground and winter there, on a mad bottom, which dries at low
water. Vessels in distress, when they have lost their anchors, may be
saved by running tliem iu at high water, between the reef of Cape
Diable and Crow Island, leaving the latter from i to ^ mile to the east-
ward in passing ; and when within the reef, hauling into the bay to the
SW^. In high spring tides 13 or 14 feet of water will be found over the
mud, bnt in neap tides there is seldom more thao 9 or 10 feet.

Anchorage. — ^The best berth is with the <>hnrch of Eamourasca just
open J» the westward of Crow Island, bearing S. 67° E., and Grande
Island just open to the northward of Burnt Island, N. 34° E., in 7 fath-
oms, over stiff' mud. Large vessels wishing for more room may anchor
farther ont anywhere to the westward.

'i?l

188

GREEN ISLAND TO MONTREAL.

Cape Diable. — Keefs of slate eJtend northward from it halfway to
Crow Island, and northwestward ^ mile.

St Denis Point is nearly 3 miles to the SW. from Cape Diable.

Oiigneauz Point (where there is a landing pier, 1,200 feet long, and
with 15 feet water at its end in the lowest tides) is an extreme of the
land running out to within ij mile of the edge of the bank, and the land
trends from it southward IJ miles to Iroquois Point.

River Quelle has its entrance to the westward on the south side of
Ouelle Point. In high spring tides, 15 feet water can be carried about
1^ miles from the entrance.

St Roch Point is 9 miles from Ouelle Point ; and from the line be-
typeen them to the shore, a distance of 2J miles, the bay of St. Anne
dries at low water, the bottom being mud, but with thousands of bowl-
ders or large stones.

Shoals of St. Anne extend 5 miles out from the high-water mark
and are very dangerous. They are of sand and mud thickly strewed
with large stones, many of which show at low water. The St. Anne
buoy is black and moored on the western edge of these shoals with St.
Anne church bearing S. 46° E., and St. Roch church 8. 11° W.

Anchorage.— All along the edge of the bank from Kamourasca up
to St. Anne buoy there is excellent anchorage in from 7 to 10 fathoms,
stiff mud bottom.

EngUsh Bank is a ridge of sand varying in breadth from ^ to 1^
miles, and extending NE. from the Middle Ground of the Traverse.
For the first 7 or 8 miles (that is, nearly abreast the river Ouelle) it runs
nearly parallel to the edge of St. Anne Shoals, at the average distance
of a mile; farther eastward it trends to the northward towards Muiray
Bay, which it approaches to within 2^ miles, and its northeastern ex-
tremity in 10 fathoms is more than ^ mile to the westward of a line
from the church at that place to the church at Kamourasca. On the
western and greater part of this bank the depth is between 6 and 8 fath-
oms, and on the eastern part from 9 to 11 fathoms.

SOUTH CHANNEL, BELOW THE TEAVEBSB.

Qeneral Observations.— The South Ohannel is Justly preferred for
the common purposes of navigation. In that part of it which is below
the Traverse the tides are not so strong nor the water so inconven-
iently deep as they are in the corresponding part of the North Channel
below Coudres Island. Moreover it possesses good anchorage almost
in every part, and water enough for vessels of the largest draft at aU
times of the tide. It is true that several large ships have touched the
ground in passing the southwest end of Hare Island, but that has arisen
from their following the usual route to the northward of the Barrett Ledges
And into the Brandy Pot Channel, a course which has been erroneously
represented in former directions as always to be preferred by vessels of
large draft. It is, on the contrary, only ships of heavy draft which

',|y _

it halfway to

pe Diable.
feet long, and
xtretne of the
, and the land

south side of
carried about

>m the line be-
y of St. Anne
sands of bowl-

h water mark
lickly strewed
The St. Anne
hoals with St.
HOW.

atnourasca up
;o 10 fathoms,

from ^ to li
the Traverse.
Quelle) it runs
erage distance
twards Mutray
rtheastern ex-
^ard of a line
■asca. On the
Bn6and8fath.

y preferred for
which is below
r so incooven-
N^orth Channel
Bhorage almost
St draft at all
ve touched the
that has arisen
Barrett Ledges
len erroneously
3d by vessels of
vy draft which

DIRECTIONS.

189

need to shun that course as entailing upon them the necessity of cross-
ing the Middle Bank in from 3^ to 4 fathoms at low water, or even in a
less depth if they cross it according to the old directions, with Whit©
Island open between Huro [sliiud ami tho Brivnily Pots.

There is deep water, from 14 to 20 fathoms, between the Middle Bank
and Hare Island, but it ends in a <' cul de sac; " there is no getting out of
it into the main chanatii without crossing the Middle Bank to the south-
ward, which should never be attempted in a vessel of deep draft before
half flood. It would, however, be far better for such vessels to pass to
the southward of Barrett Ledges, Middle Shoal, and Middle Bank,
where the channel is direct, and for a very large ship (that is, from 5
fathoms to 5 fathoms at low water) a mile wide in the narrowest part,
with from 6 to 11 fathoms water over clay and mud bottom.

The circumstance which has given a preference to Brandy Pot Chan-
iiel to the northward of Barrett Ledges, and which will continue to do
so for the common purposes of navigation, is the advantageous position
of the anchorage at the Brandy Pots, especially in northerly winds,
when it is absolutely necessary that vessels bound down the river should
be to windward on account of the rapid tide setting to the southward
from between White Islet Reef and Red Islet. Moreover vessels bound
to sea usually rendezvous at the Brandy Pots to wait for a wind or the
tide, one ebb being suflBcient, with a moderately good working breeze,
to take them down below Green Island, where they can always gain
ground to the eastward whilst the weather remains fine. The Brandy
Pots also are about the point that a fair sailing merchant vessel can
reach in one flood from the anchorage under Green Island Reef, where
they usually wait for the tide when beating up with westerly winds.

Directions from O-reen and Red Islands to the Brandy Pots.—
In a vessel coming up the river, and being under the north shore with
a northerly wind, proceed as follows: If wishing to. take the South
Channel, bring Green Island lighthouse and beacon in one and ran
down upon this leading mark (passing to the eastward of Bed Islet
Bank light vessel) till White Islet is opened fully twice its own breadth
to the northward of Hare Inland. Then haul up, and if the tide be
flood she has merely to take care not to close those marks for clearing
the south side of Red Islet Bank, which, with the flood, she need not
approach nearer than the depth of 10 fathoms. It is of consequence to
observe (more particularly with a southerly wind than in this case) that
the flood sets through between Bed Islet and White Islet Reef, and
strongly over the tail of the latter into the North Channel.

But with the ebb tide a vessel must luff up close under Red Islet
Bank, taking care, however, to keep White Islet fully twice its own
breadth open to the northward of Hare Island, and not to approach the
bank nearer than 7 fathoms water, till Rod Islet bears N. 05° W., when
she can keep her luff as close as it may be found necessary to prevent
her being set over to the lee shore by the strong ebb coming from the

'i
'I

iilf

-^-al^

fsm

t:.i

i I

190

ORKEN ISLAND TO MONTREAL.

North Channel between White and Red Islets, and setting over to-
wardH Green Island Keef. The same marks (White Islet open of Hare
Island) may be kept on until she approaches White Islet Reef (Hare
Island north reef) to 10 fathoms water, when she muHte<lge away along
the south side of that reef, where the tides set fairly up and down the
river and are of moderate strength.

It is scarcely necessary to mention that in the voyage down the river,
also, these tides must be attended to. For instance, with a northerly
wind and ebb tide, keep well to windward under White Islet Reef, and
so as not to be set down towards Green Isfand Reef. With a southerly
wind and flood tide, on the contrary, a vessel must keep well to the
Houthward, in order to avoid being carried by the tide into the North
Channel.

At Night, when the lights on Oreen and Red Islands can be seen,
their bearings and the soundings in the chart will prove sufficient guides,
even although the land should not be seen. ■ In a vessel under the north
shore, coming up with a northerly wind, bring Red Islet bank lightves-
sel in line with Green Island light bearing S. 42^ E. and pass eastward
of the lightvessel, allowing for the tide. Whilst crossing on that bear-
ing she will have 11 or 12 fathoms when in the stream of the bank, and
be 14 miles distant from its eastern end. Keep the lead quickly hove
and do not shoal less than 10 fathoms ; if the tide be flood, care must
be taken that it does not set her too near the end of the bank.

Continue the course towards the Green Island light until the sound-
ings deepen to 20 fathoms, or until the Red Islet light bears iS. 48° W.,
then haul to the 'south westward under Red Islet bank. Pass it in 20
fathoms water, which is near enough for a stranger at night, and when
Green Island light bears S. 79° E. the south point of the Brandy Pots
will bear S. 30° W., 13^ miles.

In a vessel coming up with an easterly wind, as directed in page 21,
and having made the Green Island light, run up in 20 fathoms until she
is within 3 miles of it, or till it begins to bear to the southward of
S. 250 W. Then haul out into more than 30 fathoms and run up in the
deep water till the light bears 8. 640B., when she will be well past the
reef, and may continue to run up, coming no'nearer to Green Island
than 25 fathoms water, in order to avoid its western reef.

Abreast the west end of Green Island Brandy Pots light will come
in sight, and, guided by the bearing of the light, a vessel may, if de-
sired, proceed to Brandy Pot« anchorage. In thick weather, haul over
to the northwestward, toward White l8let,into9 orlO fathoms, and run
up in that depth till Brandy Pots light is seen ; do not come to the
southward into deeper water for fear of Barrett Ledges.

A vessel bound up the river southward of Barrett Ledges should keep
Green Island light only just shut in behind the west end of Green Is-
land, bearing K 35° B., sheering to the northward occasionally to sight
it, or going no farther to the southward than 8 fathoms until sure that

VJiMRnSMEWtMiKaOWOMHttMM^feUlX^W

'' X" ^

mSF^

:rtiiig over to-
open of Hare
i Reef (Hare
i;e away along
ind down the

)wn the river,
li a northerly
slet Uoef, and
th a southerly
p well to the
I to the North

can be seen,
Bcient guides,
ider the north
}ank lightves-
paas eastward
on that bear-
the bank, and
quickly hove
tod, care must
jaiik.

til the sound-
ars S. 480 W.,

Pass it in 20

^ht, and when

Brandy Pots

ed in page 21,
loms until she
southward of
run up in the
well past the
Qreen Island

gbt will come
lel may, if de-
bar, haul over
horns, and run
t come to the

3S should keep
I of Green Is-
onally to sight
intil sure that

v>IRECTI0N8 — NOKTH CHANNEL.

191

Perc^e Rocks are passed. Green Island light only just shut in behind,
or kept only just in sight over the low west extreme of Green Island,
beiiring N. 37° K., will lead to the southward of Barrett Ledges, nearly
in mid-uhauuel between Middle Bank and Pilgrim IShoal. Abreast Bar-
rett Ledges Long Pilgrim light will come in sight.

DirectionB from the Brandy Pots to the Traverse.— Having
crossed the Middle Bunk, and deepened the water to the southward
into 8 fathoms, steer S. 35° VV. If the weather be clear, Burnt Island
will be distinguished from Grande Island when the vessel is abreast of
Great Pilgrim. Open the north side of Burnt Island, only just in sight
to the northward of Grande Island, and keep it so as a Uadiug mark,
should the buoy not be in its place, to clear the western part of Pilgrim
Shoal. When past that shoal, with a leading wind and clear weather,
nothing more seems requisite than to pay attention to the soundings in
the charts, and regulate the course accordingly.

In Thick Weather, or at Night, after crossing the Middle Bank to
the southward, as before directed, either one side of the channel or the
other should be taken as a guide for running up by the lead, say in 7
fathoms. Either side may be taken as high up as Long Pilgrim light-
house, or until Kamourasca light is in sight, after which the south side
of Hare Island Bank should in thick weather be followed in the same
depth ; for the western part of the Long Pilgrim, the St. Andrd Bank,
and Kamourasca Islands, have deep water close to them, affording no
guidance by the lead. After having passed th6 red buoy on the 8W.
end of Hare Island Bank, agd proceeded 5 or 6 miles beyond it, Kam-
ourasca Islands will have been passed, and the edge o/ the South Bank
may be easily followed in 7 fathoms, or in 10 fathoms, if the vessel be
of large draft, up to St. Anne black buoy.

With a good breeze and a fair sailing vessel, the anchorage off
Kamourasca will be gained from the Brandy Pots in one tide; if not,
there is goo<l anchorage and easy tides all along the southern side of
Hare Island Bank, as well as off its SW. end.' A vessel with a good
breeze will beat from Kamourasca to St. Anne buoy with one good tide ;
but not always in neap tides, when the flood is weak in that wide and
dear part of the river. English Bank will be an excellent guide to a
vessel beating at night, and she may anchor on any part of it in fine
weather, out will find the tides becoming strong upon it in proportion
as she approaches the Traverse. The anchorage all along the south
shore, up to within 2 or 3 miles of the light-vessel at the Traverse, is
far preferable. For directions continued through the Traverse, see
page 204.

NORTH SHORE, BELOW OOUDRES ISLAND.

Aspect. — ^The northern shore of the St. Lawrence from Saguenay
Biver to Coudres Island is bold and mountaintms. The granitic hills in
most parts rise Immediately from the river, forming steep or precipitous

t~t4H>4K!i«B.MiWHIClM

VJ2

GREEN ISLAND TO MONTREAL.

headlands. Near the entrance of the Saguenay theMe bills are not
above 1,U00 feet high, but tlioae of Eboulements attain an elevation of
2,547 feet.

At page 182, thecoast of the estuary was described up to Little Berge-
ron Oove. We shall now recommence from that point, and proceed with
the deNcription to the westward.

Vaches Point is the east point of (entrance of Saguenay River. The
high clay clitt's are easily recognized, and are known by the name of
SagniMiay Cliffs.

Moulin Baude Anchorage. — From this anchorage, in 7 fathoms,
mud, Saguenay Cliffs bear 8. 68° W., distant 3 miles, and Red Islet and
the 8VV. end of Green Island are in line ; the vessel will here be 800
yards distant from the 3fathom line of soundings and nearly a mile
offshore.

Vaches Patch.— Vaches Reef dries out ^ mile from Vaohes Point,
and shallow water continues nearly to Vaches Patch, which has a depth
of 24 fathoms, and bears 8. 77° B. IJ miles from Vaches Point. A
buoy colored red and black horizontal bands is moored to the south-
ward of the patch.

Prince Shoal Is a narrow ridge of stones and bowlders with 17 feet
least water. From Prince 8hoal, which is marked by a red and black
buoy on its southern edge, Lark Islet lighthouse bears N. 88° W.,
Lark Patch 8. 35o W., Red Islet lighthouse 8. 48° E.

Lark Point, the southwestern point of entrance of the Saguenay, is
also of clay cliffs, but much lower than those of Vaohes Point.

Lark lalet lies oft' this point and Is joined to It by sand and bowlders
dry at low water.

Lark Reef is of sand and bowlders, dry at low water nearly out to
the edge of the shoal water, which extends nearly 3^ miles in a SB.
direction from Lark Point. Lark Patch, near the southern end of this
reef, never covers, and outside of It, In 4^ fathoms water, lies a blaok
buoy. Between this extensive reef, including Bar Reef and Prince
Shoal and those which extend If miles to the SE. of Vaches Point, Is
the entrance of Saguenay River ; but, as the navigation of that river is
quite distinct from that of the St. Lawrence, we shall reserve it for the
latter part of the chapter, and have here only mentioned the extensive
reefs off its entrance in so far as they are dangers to be avoided by ves-
sels bound up the North Channel of the St. Lawrence.

The Mark for leading clear to the SB. of all these reefs is the Brandy
Pots just open east of White Islet, bearing 8. 15° W. The least water
found on the rocky patches was 7^ fathoms, but as they may be ex-
tending to the eastward, and the depth over them be decreasing (as has
been recently found to be the case with the Lark and Bar Reefs and the
outer patch, which Is now Prince Shoal), the Brandy Pots had better
be kept well open to the eastward of White Islet, by vessels desiring
to pass outside of them.

LARK RKEF — MURRAY BAY.

193

il'.s are not
elevatiou of

[jlttle Berge-
iroceed with

River. The
the name of

I 7 fathoms,

ied iHlet and

here be 800

learly a mile

aohes Point,
1 has a depth
es Point. A
to the south-

s with 17 feet
red and black

9 N. 880 W.,

Saguenay, i»
Point,
and bowlders

nearly out to
illes in a SE.
rn end of this
', lies a black
»f and Prince
ohes Point, is
)f that river is
srve it for the
the extensive
roided by ves-
ts the Brandy
le least water
ey may be ex-
easing (as has
ieefs and the
ts had better
ssels desiring

Oanard River Ih h Hiiiall Htrcam, celebrated for wild dncks, 2^ miles
SW. of Lark Point, and can only be approached in a boat near high
water.

Bohafaud Islet is a small, steep, and rocky islet, lying otf the month
of a cove full of rocks 5 miles SVV. of Lark Point.

Oape Basque, the first mountainous headland SW. of the Saguenay,
is 0^ miles from Lark Point. It is quite bold, having 20 fathoms close
to it.

Basque Road, between Cape Banqueand Lark Reef, is a good anchor-
age, and well sheltered by the reef. There is plenty of room for many
vessels, but the best bertli is with Echafaud Islet bearing N. 88 <3 VV.,
and distant rather less than a mile, where the vessel will be in 10 or 11
fathoms, with clay bottom, and at the distance of nearly ^ mile from
the 3-fathoms line. Vessels may anchor farther out in 13 fathoms; but
the farther out the stronger the tide. At the anchorage recommended
the tides are tiot strong, and the holding ground is everywhere good.
There is no anchorage on the north shore to the SW. of this before we
arrive at Murray Bay, a distance of 28 miles.

Cape Dogs, ii^ miles southward of Cape Basque, is quite bold, high,
precipitous, and bare granite. Halfway between these capes is the
Bay of Rocks, having an island and many large rooks in it, as its name
implies, and affording shelter only to boats.

Oape Salmon is high and bold, like Cape Dogs, from which it is
distant Oj miles. Between these capes are Shettle Port, Black River,
and Port Parsley. They are merely places for boatst

Cape d I'AigleisS:^ milesSW. from Cape Salmon, and of the same bold,
high, and precipitous character. The bay between these capes affords
no anchorage for shipping, in consequence of the great depth of water.
In it is Port 3almon, a small cove, which large boats can enter at high,
water, situated about 1^ miles to the westward of Cape Salmon. The
settlements on the north shore spread to the eastward of this place,
and they are continuous from it all along the coast to Quebec.

Murray Bay is all dry at low water, excepting the shallow channels
leading to the river at its head. The river, flowing down a valley from
two or three small lakes among the hills, Is rapid and unnavigable.
There is a church and village round the head of the bay, and the set-
tlements extend some miles back from the St. Lawrence. There are
grist and saw mills on the river. At the latter deals are made, and
are, for the most part, shipped to Quebec in small schooners, which lie
aground near or in the entrance of the river; occasionally, however,
vessels anchor oft', and take in cargoes of lumber. A pier has been con-
structed here, having 18 feet of water at its end in the lowest tides.

Anchorage. — The anchorage off Murray Bay is close under the high

rocky shore, a little to the eastward of the bay, with Pio Point, its east

point, bearin S. 83° W., distant about 800 yards. The bottom is of clay,

good for holding, and the depth 10 or 12 fathoms at the distance of

5489 13

li)4

ORKKN ISLAND TO MONTREAL.

alioiit 000 yanlN from tlio nhore, but not ubovu \ mile from the edffe of
tliu hIioiU w it«r. VenHi^lH livru will bt^ out of tliu Htr(Mi((tti of tlie tides,
welt Hheltored from tlio prevailing; windn, and in Hiifuty if well moor«Ml,
altliouKh inconveniently near tliu nhore, except in the cane of a veHHel
taking; in her ciirKo. It i>* poft^iblu to anchor a little farther out In 15
or 10 fathoniH, ttut the tideN there are very Htrong.

OooM Oape is bold and rocky, an<l about 11 mileM Houth of IMc
Point. At Mai Ray and in Little Mai Hay, between those two points
the shoals dry out 4 lulle from the shore, but there is no' good an-
chorage.

Oape Martin, the east point of Bboulemonts Kay, is 3 miles SW, of
Goose Cape. Nearly halfway between these, but rather nearer (loose
Ca|ie, a stream descends a ravine, and otf the mouth of the latter there
is' a very large bowlder stone called Orosse Rouk. A landing pier has
been constructed at Bboulements having 0^ feet water at its extreme
end in the lowest tides.

Anohorage. — The anchorage between Goose Oape and Cape Martin
is good and well sheltered flrom easterly winds. To avoid the strong
tides anchor in 7 fathoms,with Grosse Rook bearing N. 3P W., and Cape
Corbeau, the east point of St. Pauls Bay, only Just shut in behind Cape
Martin, bearing 8. 07° W. Here a vessel will have good holding
ground about 400 yards firom the Sfatboms edge of the shoals. Small
vessels anchor farther to the eastward, close in under Goose Cape.
Mount Ebouleraents is about 3 miles to the northward of that anchor-
age, and one of the highest sammits on the northern shore of the St.
Lawrence, being 2,547 feet high.

NORTH OHANNBL, BELOW OOUDBES ISLAND.

Direotloiui. — If with a strong NW. wind a vessel has kept the north
shore aboard until she has passed Bergeron Coves, and if night be ap-
proaching, and the flood tide nearly done, endeavor to reach the anchor-
age 2 or 3 miles to the eastward of Vaches Point (page 102), and re-
main there till daylight. Having sufficient daylight to take the vessel
through between Red Islet and the shoals off the Saguenay, proceed as
follows:

First, with the ebb tide, keep well to windward, running along under
the north laud at the distance of a mile until about the half of Cacouna
is open to the westward of Red Islet. Then steer so as to open out the
western extreme of the Brandy Pots to the eastward of White Islet,
bearing S. 15° W., and keep them so, and they will h-ad clear to the
southward of all the shoals off the Saguenay. But that leading mark
can seldom be made out ; a matter of less consequence than formerly,
since buoys have been placed on the shoals off the Sagaenay. When
the lighthouse on Bed Islet and Green Island come in one the vessel
will be off the SB. extreme of Lark Beef, and should not be in less than
fathoms at low water.

NOKTII CIIANNKL — TIDKM.

195

in tlie utltie of

(tt* the tiilt'M,

well mooiHMl,

HH of a veMHel

her out \n 15

»oiith of Tic
n8e two poiiitH
) DO good aii-

3 mllert 8W. of
r nearer GooHe
he latter there
tnding pier has
at its extreme

(I Cape Martin
(roid the Mtrong
P W., and Cape
in behind Cape
e good holding
shoaln. Small
er Goose Cape,
of that anchor-
shore of the ISt.

lMD.

« kept the north
a if night be ap-
eaoh the anchor-
age 192), and re-

take the vessel
leuay, proceed as

uing along under
e half of Cacouna
ts to open out the

1 of White Islet,
had clear to the
hat leading mark
36 than formerly,
iagaenay. When
I in one the vessel
lot be in less than

Tlio lead hIiouM Iw k(>pt Koiiig with r<'f«>ri>ii<!(« to the HoundingH in the
'liliurt; and wiiuii the Iioum«^m at TudtMicai; (i|H>n to the wostward iil' Laik
iHlut, the vuHHcl will bu otf l\\v I'lid of tin* r»«>f, in tVoui lA to L'O futlioiiiM
watiM', and may thither procut'd to tliti iMirli(>ni{;u m |SHHl|lu^ Kotid (|nige
1U;{), or may continue her courHe up thu rivt'i, l<i-eping woll iiutlcr the
north sliore with theebl), and more in the uiiiidlM > T the clianncl with
the Hood tide, tlieru being nothing in the n\ .ty uutil near (Joiidrt'H iHland.

Secondly: Coming up, and having paxNed licrgoron Cove with the
Hood tide, it is not nec(>MMary to keep thu nortlioru uliore quito ho close
aboard. Upun the half of Cacouna to thu wcHtward of Ued Ulct, as bit-
fore directed, and then steer ho as to open the iiiandj' Pots to the Houth-
ward of White Islet, about the breadth of the latter, and bearing S,
IQo W.

Having opened the Brandy Pots to the southward of White Islet,
kee|> them so as the vessel runs towardrt them until Green Island light-
house is well open to thesouthwardof Ued Islet, or until past the black
buoy on Lark Reef, when she may steer directly up thu middle of
the channel between Hare Island and the north shore. In the event of
the wind and tide failing, anchorage will be found on llaru Island Bank,
£!uglisli Bank, Murray Bay, and to thu westward of Goose Cape. For
directions for the North Channel fromCoudres to Quebec, «ee page 213.

Tides.— The principal stream of flood ascends along the northern side
of the estuary. One part of this stream sets from below Bergeron Cove
towards and over the tail of Bed LsletBank, which it curves round to the
southward, and then passes into the North Channel between Ued Islet
and White Islet tieef. At the same time an inferior stream of flood
ascends along the south shore close outside Bazades, Basque, Apple,
and Green Islands ; and inside of them also after the shoals are covered.
When these two streams of flood meet the last of the ebb, and after-
wards each other, between Green and Bed Islands, they cause high
breaking ripplings. Each of these two streams of flood is strongest
□ear its own side, and there is consequently little or no flood in mid-
ohannel, particularly in neap tides and westerly winds.

To the westward of Cacouua the flooil in thesouth channel sets fairly up
the river on either sideof Barrett Ledges,MiddleShoal,and Middle Bank;
but the strongest part of it passes up the deep water to the northward
of these shoals, between them and Brandy Pots and Hare Island, and
at the rate of 2^ or 3 knots in spring tides. On arriving at Hare Island
Bank, great part of this stream passes into the North Channel between
that bank and Hare Island ; the rest over the tail of the bank into
the South Channel. The flood sets fairly up the Sonth Channel, and
between the Pilgrims and Hare Island Bank, but becomes very weak
above them, especially in neap tides, until we arrive as high as Origneaux
Point, whence it gradually increases in strength, being aided by a
branch of the northern stream from between English and Hare Island
.Banks, antil it attains its full rate of 5 knots in the Sonth Traverse.

! i

.11

(

196

GREEN ISLAND TO MONTREAL.

To return again to tlie principal stream of flood ; another part of it
passes between Hed Islet Bank and the shoals off the Saguenay, whilst a
third part ascends that river 70 miles to the rapids. When the flood flrst
makes, it meets the ebb down the channel to the northward of Har&
Island, and causes a tremendous rippling, extendi;<g from the Lark Beef
to Ked Islet. Above that islet, the stream of flood, after sweeping round
to the westward past Liocky Bay, pursues a tolerably fair course up the
!North Channel as high as Cape h I'Aigle, off which it divides ; the
southern part proceeding to the southward of English Bank, on its way
to the South Traverse ; whilst the northern part passes between English
Bank and the north shore up to Goose Cape.

Off' Gooae Cape this northern part of the stream of the flood again
divides; one, the lesser and weaker part, passing to the southward of
Coudres, throws oft' at the flrst of the tide branches to the south, which
pass over the western part of English Bank, on either side of the Mid-
die ground, and between the latter and the shoals eastward of the Seal
Keefs into the South Channel. This seems to arise from the flood being
earlier in the Il^orth than in the South Channel, and hence the flrst of
the flood comes from the north at the Traverse and sets for about an
hour on the shoals of St. Anne and St. Boque. The other and princi-
pal part passes between Coudres Island and the north shore, where it
attains the same race of 5 knots in spring tides as in the South Traverse.
. Little need be added respecting the ebb tide beyond what has already
been said in the coiir^e of this chapter. We may, however, remark
generally that the direction of the ebb stream is always nearly the con-
trary to that of the flood, excepting between Red and Green Islands,
and to the eastward of the former. The principal part of the ebb
down the North Channel, being turned to the SE. by Lark Beef,
comes through between White Islet Beef and Bed Islet, setting over
towards the east end of Green Island at the rate of 5 or 6 knots in
spring tides. The ebb out of the Saguenay Biver is equally strong,
and sets over towards the east end of Bed Islet bank, whence, curving
to the eastward, it unites with the St. Lawrence ebb, from which it can
be readily distinguished by the dark color of its water, and both to-
gether set down the estuary, as has been explained in other parts of
these directions.

Although the duration both of the rise and fall of the tides will be
found in the table at page 218, yet it may be useful to remark here that
the flood and ebb are less unequal in duration in the North than in the
South Channel ; and that in both channels the streams of flood and ebb
upon an average continue three-quarters and one hour, respectively^ .
after it is high and low water by the shore.

At the Brandy Pots the flood rises 5h. 50m. and the ebb falls 6b. 34m.,
so that the ebb by the shore is about f hour longer than the flood. This
inequality of the tide increases hs we proceed up the river; thus at St^
Boque Point, opposite the South Traverse, the flood is only 5b. 35m..

*"^*"'"ii'' '

another parfc of it
Sagaeuay, whilst a
i^heu the flood flrst
orthward of Har&
roin the Lark Eeef
er sweeping round
fair course up the
(h it divides; the
I Bank, ou its way
s between English

of the flood again
I the southward of
) the south, which
r side of the Mid-
itward of the Seal
Dm the flood being
hence the flrst of
sets for about an
other and princi-
th shore, where it
le South Traverse.
1 what has already
however, remark
ys nearly the con-
id Green Islands,
part of the ebb
S. by Lark Reef,
Islet, setting over
f 5 or 6 knots in
is equally strong,
, whence, curving
from which it can
Iter, and both to-
I in other parts of

the tides will be
remark here that
N^orth than in the
i of flood and ebb
our, respectively,

3bb falls 6b. 34m.,

n the flood. This

river ; thus at St.

is only 6h. 35m^

80UTH AND NOKTH CHANNELS.

197

and the ebb 6h. 50ui. The times of the high and low water by the shore
<io not seem to be much affected by winds; but the amount of the
rise and fall of the tides and the duration of the streams are consider-
ably affected by strong winds; nevertheless, as an approximation near
enough for practical purposes, we may state that when the stream of
flood makes in mid-channel the tide has risen by the shore at the
Brandy Pots IJ feet and at the Traverse 2^ feet; and also that when
the stream of ebb makes, the tide has fallen about 2 feet by the shore.
But as it is of importance to know the proportional amount of the rise
and fall of the tides for any part of their whole duration, when a large
ship is to be taken over certain shallow parts of the river above the
Traverse, we shall have occasion to notice this subject again.

The vessel has now arrived at the most diflacult part of the naviga-
tion of the St. Lawrence, where the river becomes divided into three
channels by shoals and islands. The eastern entrances of all three of
these channels are rendered more or less difficult, either by their nar-
rowness, the want of good anchorage in them, or by the strength of the
tides.

The South Channel lies along the southern shore, and between it
and the shoals and islands occupying the central part of the rivur from
the South Traverse to Quebec. This channel is the one generally used ;
it is buoyed, and is preferable to the others for the general purposes of
navigation, having excellent anchorage and moderate tides in every
part, excepting for a few miles in the Traverse. The channel between
Beaujeu Bank and Crane Island has also been buoyed for the use of
large vessels, for not more than 17 feet at low water can be carried
.through to the southward of that bank, where nearly all vessels used
formerly to pass.

The Middle Channel lies between the shoals and islands which
form the northern side of the South Channel and the long line of shoals
and reefs which extend from Coudres Island to Beaux Island. In one
part of it, near the eastern entrance of the Middle Traverse, there are
not more than 3 fathoms at low water. Having passed this shallow
part, there is both room and water enough for the vessels of the largest
draft, until they arrive at the group of islands between Crane Island and
the Isle of Orleans, where the Middle Channel communicates with the
^outh Channel by various narrow passages between the islands. There
is plenty of water in most of these passages at all times, but the tides
set strongly through them and they are too intricate and difficult for
general navigation. The other and better channels will always be pre-
ferred for general use; nevertheless, the Middle Channel ought to be
known to the pilots in common with every other channel in the river.

North Channel was formerly in general use, but it is now little
known to the majority of the pilots. It is broader than South Channel»
but the tides are much stronger, and the narrovvs at its western end
have a depth of only 24 feet at low water; while, with the exception of

■.is

mam

198

OREEN ISLAND TO MONTREAL.

I '. !

il!

- J *

ill

i i

if' !

in the contracted paHsage westward of Beaujeu Bank, there are not Ie8»
than 28 feft in South Channel.

Starting with the beginning of a fair tide, a steam-vessel may, how-
ever, gain an hour in the passage from Green Island to Quebec by
taking Nurtli rather than South Channel.

The anchorage generally in North Channel is not good, the bottom
being foul from St. Paul Bay westward to Cape Maillard ; also because
of the strength of the tidal streams. Vessels may, however, anchor on
the northern edge of the bank, southward of the channel, in a depth of
about 10 fathoms.

Between Condres Island and the northern shore of the river there ia
anchorage only in Prairie and St. Paul Bays, both of which afford
security under all conditions of wind and weather, but with northerly
winds heavy squalls sweep down from the north shore hills.

Orleans Channel has a good passage for small vessels, but is not
available for those of large draft. It is marke<l by red buoys on the
northern side, and by black buoys on the southern side.

SOUTH CHANNEL, THROUGH THE SOUTH TBAYBBSE TO OBANE ISLAND^

Sonth Channel — ^The southern shore of the river St. Lawrence, Arom
St Koch I*oint tu St. Thomas is low and composed of slate ; inland it>
rises gradually in a series of lidges to a long wooded range, which i»
4^ miles distant from the river, and attains an elevation of 1,220 feet.
The houses are almost continuous on this shore, with villages near the
churches. Supplies in small quantities may generally be obtained at
the villages, with the exception of coal.

Chnrches. — ^The churches at St Jean, St. Eugene, St. Ignace, St.
Thomas, and Berthier havt each one spire ; those at St Boch and
I/Islet have each two spires.

Piers.— The pier at St J?an has a depth of 3 feet at low water at
its outer end; at L'Islet the pier is 1,200 feet long, with a depth of
7 feet at low water close xo its outer end ; a wooden firame beacon^
painted black, stands on the extremity of this pier. A small pier haa
been erected at Anse k Giles, 3 j miles south westward from L'Islet, and
another 1} miles soutliwestward of Cape St Ignace, but both dry at
about half tide. TLere is also a wharf on the eastern side of Cape St.
Ignace, but it oiii only be approached at or near high water.

Lifeboats are stationed at L'Islet and St Ignace to rescue the crewa
of vrc^tsels caught in the ice during the autumn.

Railway and Telegraph. — St. Jean, Port Joli, I/Islet, St. Ignace, and
St Thomas are connected with Quebec and Halifax by the Intercolonial
linilway, which runs along the right bank of the St Lawrence about
one mile inland from these villages. The railway stations are also con-
nected with all parts of Canada and the United States by telegraph.

Trois Sanmons River, nearly 4 miles southward of St. Jean,,
has a large saw mill near its mouth. This river, also the stream at

■Hiili

e are not les»

el may, bow-
5 Quebec by

the bottom
also because
er, anchor on
in a depth of

river there i*
which afford
rith northerly
lis.

els, but is not
buoys on th»

IBANB ISLAND.

iawrence, fcom
ilate ; inland it
*ange, which i»
1 of 1,220 feet,
llages near the
be obtained at

•

St. Ignace, St.
St. Eoch and

at low water at
Nith a depth of
frame beacon^
small pier ha»
■om Ulslet, and
>at both dry at
}ide of Cape St.
rater,
'oscue the crews-

, St. Ignace, and
he Intercolonial
Lawrence about
ms are also con-
by telegraph,
rd of St. JeaUy
so the stream at

.4k.

L'lSLET — ST. ROCII SHOALS.

199

Port Joli, one mile northeastward, will admit small craft at about half
tide.

L'Islet — A conspicuous cross is erected on a cliff 59 feet high, situ-
ated one mile northeastward of L'Islet church.

The telegraph and signal station at L'Islut is distant 300 yards north-
eastward of the church, and close westward of the convent, which is a
square stone building surmounted by a turret.

St Ignace.-^The church is 6^ miles south westward from L'Islet, and
nearly f mile southeastward of Cape St. Ignacp, which is a conical
rocky mound, 52 feet high, covered with small bushes.

St. Thomas. — Two rivers unite and' discharge their waters here,
Bras St. Nicholas flowing from the eastward, and Bivi^re du Sud from
the westward. The combined streams fall in a cascade about 30 feet
high to a small bight, ^ mile eastward of the church. A sawmill is in
operation on the eastern side of the falls. St. Thomas church is situ-
ated on the left bank of Bivi^re dn Sud, 5^ miles southwestward from
St. Ignace.

The channel from St. Thomas to the Biver St. Lawrence trends north-
easterly In one bend, and is generally marked by cask buoys. It nearly
dries at low water.

The high-water bank near St. Thomas has receded considerably since
the survey of 1827, about 600 feet apparently having been washed
away, and each year more is broken away by ice and sea. The low-
water line, however, is nearly the same as at that date, except that
bowlders are now visible, at low water, beyond the northeastern extreme
of St. Thomas Bank.

Shoals of St. Roch are extremely dangerous, being composed of a
thin covering of sand, mud, and stones over a slate rock. The depth
of water in many parts of these shoals does not exceed 9 or 10 feet.

Tho Narrows are less than ^ mile wide, and the depth of water
through is from 5 to 14 fathoms. The ebb tide runs at the springs at
the rate of 7 knots, and the flood 5 or 6 knots ; and, as the ground is
hard, there is no anchorage in the stream. The want of good leading
marks, and the prevalence of strong tides, render the lightvessels and
buoys indispensable for the safety of large vessels.

St. Roch Shoals. — A black can buoy lies in 28 feet water westward
of a shoal with 16 feet water over it, N. 46° E., 2^ miles from the Lower
Traverse lightship. The first black buoy southward of the Upper
Traverse lightship now lies outside a newly discovered rock with 24
feet of water over it. with St. Boch Church bearing N. 78° E., and St.
Jean Church S. 7° E.

There is no mark for leading through the Narrows ; and that which
leads up to them from the eastward, viz, Gape Origneaux and the high-
land of Kamourasca, can only be made out in clear weather. The west-
em leading mark given in the old directions, that is, the Wood Pillar
just touching the south point of Goose Island, must never be trusted.

200

GREEN ISLAND TO MONTREAL.

This mark will not lead through 5 nud, moreover, Goose Island is so
distant that more or less of it becomes invisible according to the state
of tlie weather or the atmosphere. On the weather-tide, however, the
•channel is pretty well marked out by the rougher or breaking sea in
the deep water, as compared with the smoother surface over the shoals
on either side.

The edge of the South Bank above the Narrows is not quite so steep
or shoal, but it has many outlying patches of from 2^ to 3 fathoms off
it, which render it difficult to run a vessel of large draft safely along it
by the lead, excepting within 2 hours on either side of the time of high
water by the shore.

Channel Patch, marked by a bell and light buoy checkered black and
white, and showing an intermittent gas light, lies directly in the way of
vessels ; from the patch, Stone Pillar bears S. 35° W., distant 2^ miles,
with its north extreme just shutting in the highest part of Goone Island
Reef; and a sugarloafshaped beacon near St. Jean Port Joli Church
is just open eastward of the church, bearing S. 60° E. This buoy alters
its position about 200 yards with the tides, and is frequently adrift.
The least depth that could be found on Channel Patch in 1886 was 21
feet, although three examinations were made of the locality at slack
water; probably a bowlder has been carried away from the summit, as
the depth recorded in 1827 was only 18 feet.

Several shoals with depths of 15 to 18 feet over them lie between
Stone Pillar and Channel Patch ; they may all be avoided by keeping
the highest part of Goose Island Beef just open southward of Stone
Pillar, bearing 8. 38° W. This mark must only be kept on while a
vessel is southward and westward of Channel Patch. The NB. end of
Middle Ground is marked by a red buoy, from which the steeple of
Notre Dame Church, bearing N. 39° W., is open to the westward of
Cape Martin. On the shoals to the westward of the Middle Ground
there is as little as 1| fathoms water, and the slate rock dries in patches
more than 3 miles out to the NE. of Seal Islands. The outline of these
shoals is extremely irregular, and there are several detached shoals to the
southward of them, with 2 to 3 fathoms. There are no marks for leading
clear of them, and the soundings are too irregular to be a sufficient guide »
hence the northern side of the Traverse is rendered dangerous, and
shonld not be made too free with, especially in a vessel of large draft.

Seal Islands consist of a long reef of slate, which is covered at high
water, with the exception of three islets, each of which is elevated 6
feet above high water. There are three houses on the eastern islet,
with a cross and two high bushes near them ; on the western islet a
conspicuous spruce tree is surrounded by low bushes.

Wood Pillar, which is 81 feet above high-water mark, has trees upon
it, and is the higher and steeper of the two ; it is marked by a beacon
in the form of a sugarloaf, with a cross in the center, but being par-
tially obscured by trees, can only be seen from a short distance.

fj...

HKlWMnMHI

rimmWMWKB' !

fsluiHl is so
to the state
owever, the
iking sea in
r the shoals

lite so steep
fathoms off
eiy along it
iine of high

d black and
I the way of
nt 2\ miles,
ooHe Island
Foli Church
buoy alters
intly adrift.
886 was 21
ity at slack
summit, as

ie between
by keeping
rd of Stone
on while a
NE. end of
I steeple of
estward of
die Ground
in patches
ine of these
hoals to the
for leading
tient guide ;
jerons, and
large draft,
red at high
elevated 6
stern islet,
kern islet a

I trees upon
y a beacon
being par-
noe.

CHANNEL PATCH — GOOSE ISLAND.

201

Stone Pillar lies 1\ miles to the eastwanl of Wood Pillar, and is
quite bare of trees. Slioal water extends from it a mile to the NE.
There is a half-tide rock, named Middle Rock, marked by a beacon, be-
tween the Pillars, and a passage too intricate for any but small ves-
sels.

Algernon or South Rock, lying S. 5'\° E., \ mile from the SE. point
of tlie Stone Pillar, is of slate rock, about 100 yards in diameter, dry
soou after half-ebb, and bold all round except to the NE. The highest
part of Goose Island Reef just open southward of South Rock light-
house, bearing S. 43° W., leads southward of these shoals; and the
whole of Crane Island well open southward of Goose Island Reef, bear-
ing S. 47P W., leads southward of South Rock, and of the shoals be-
tween it and Goose Island Reef.

Qoose Island Reef, 2 miles southwestward of Stone Pillar, consists
of a ledge of rock, 1§ miles in length, trending with the direction of the
river. Several small heads are visible at all times of tide;, the high-
est part, a rugged conical mound, 29 feet high, is situated near the
western extreme of the reef, and is occasionally surmounted by a bea-
con. An isolated rock, which dries 2 feet at low water, lies nearly J
mile N. 38° E. from the NE. extreme of Goose Island Reef. There
are five shoal spots between Stone Pillar and Goose Island Reef, with
depths of 16, 11, 12, 13, and 18 feet on them, and bearing S. 49° W.,
distant one mile; 8. 52° W., IJ miles; S. 40° W., 1^ miles; S. 38o
W., 1^ miles ; and S. 32° W. distant IJ miles, respectively, from Stone
Pillar lighthouse. Several small detached rocks lie off the southeast-
ern side of Goose Island Reef, bnt they do not extend more than 200
yards from it; a rock with a depth of 8 feet is situated midway be-
tween the southwestern extreme of Goose Island Reef and Goose Is-
land.

A long spit, with shoals on it varying in depth from 9 to 11 feet, ex-
tends for a distance of nearly 1^ miles, from the southwestern extreme
of Goose Island Reef. Stone Pillar lighthouse open southward of the
highest part of that reef, bearing N. 38° E., leads southward of this
spit ; and the deepest water in the channel will be foand by passing
about 800 yards southeastward of Goose Island Reef, and the above
spit.

Ooose Island is composed of wooded hilly ground, divided by a val-
ley into north and sonth ranges ; near the south-western extreme are
two round summits, elevated 203 feet above high water. A chain of
hillocks, that from a distance appear like islands, and on which are
several oonspiouons houses, with barns near, extends southwestward
from the northern range. From an elevation of 168 feet, the northern
range falls in cliffy banks, and at its northeastern extreme is a large
white barn, which is very conspicuous from all northerly directions. A
targe sugarloaf beacon, painted red, stands on a small detached islet
«lo8e southward of the northeastern extreme of Goose Island.

202

OREKK ISLAND TO MONTREAL.

The meadows of Goose Island, extending 4J miles south westward
from its SW. extreme, connect it with Oraue Ishind; the meadows are
only JHst above high water of ordinary spring tides, and are intersected
by numerous streams, that have cut deep channels in the mud, and
are impassable between half flood and half ebb. After the harvest the
meadows are covered with haystacks, which, from a distance, resemble
small houses and are erected on framework to prevent the loss that
would otherwise be occasioned by exceptionally high tides.

Several rocks lie oflf the southern shore of Goose Island, all of which
cover at high water, except Rocher aux Grfilons (formerly miscalled
Cbapel Rock), which is 4 feet above high water, and situated on the
outer edge of the shore that dries at low water; and Hospital Rock^
which is 10 feet high. Ohapel Rock is on the meadows, and is named
from a church which formerly stood there, the foundations of which
are still to be seen. A wooden pyramidal beacon, painted white, aud
about 30 feet high, stands on the southern shore of Goose Island mea-
dows at a little more than 2 miles westward of Hospital Rock.

Dtmscombe Rook has 14 feet least water, with 5 fathoms close to.
From the rock Mount Tourmente appears in line over summit of Union
Island, bearing S. 83° W., aud the north side of Wood Pillar touching
the south side of Goose Island.

Crane Island rises to an elevation of 132 feet, and is generally flat
in outline. The lower part of the land is cultivated, but the summit
and southwestern slope are wooded. Macpherson House and the barns
near are conspicuous objects at the northeastern extreme of the island^
and numerous beacons are erected on the southern shore ; on the north-
ern side there is an almost continuous line of houses, with a church
built of bricks and surmounted by a spire in the middle of them This
church can rarely be seen from South Ohannel.

Prohibited Anchorage.— On Crane Island, about ^ mile SW. of
Macphersor s house, two white sugar-loaf beacons, bearing NB. and
SW. of each other, and two white sugar-loaf beacons oa a similar bear-
ing, situated about J mile NE. of the same house, mark a space within
which no ships are allowed to anchor, as the entrances to the channels
north and south of Beauieu bank are here much contracted. Between
these beacons, two diamond-shaped beacons have been erected, which in
line led to the white buoy previously moored at the southwestern end
of the Beaujen Bank.

Beaiqeu Bank is a narrow shoal of sand and gravel over slate, and
has not more than 10 feet at low water over some parts of it. Its west
end ap|>roaches to within J mile of Crane Island.

Light Bnoys.— The northeastern extreme of Beaujeu Bank is marked
by a light buoy painted red and black in horizontal stripes, and show-
ing a pink light, moored with LTslet Church, bearing N. 70° E., dis-
tant 4 miles, and St. Ignace Church S. 4° E ; and the southwestern ex-
treme by a light-buoy painted white, and showing an intermittent gas

iSM

.iW

ith westward
ueailowei are
e intersected
le mud, and
harvest tlie
ice, resemble
he loss that

•

all of which

ly miscalled

nated on the

9si)ital liock^

nd is named

[>n8 of which

d white, and

Island m(>a-

ock.

oms close to.
mit of Union
liar touching

generally flat
t the summit
ind the barns
>f the island^
on the uorth-
irith a church
>f them This

milt SW. of
ing NE. and
similar bear-
space within
the channels
id. Between
ted, which in
ti western end

er slate, and
it. Its west

nk is marked
3s, and show-
70° E., dis.
h western ex-
irmittent gas

BEAUJEU BANK CHANNELS.

203

light, moored with Crane Island light-house, bearing S. 41° W., dis*
tant 2 miles, and St. Ignace Church S. 49° E., B'ly.

Buoys. — A buoy paiuted red is moored in 24 feet on the northern
side of Beaujeu Channel, nearly a mile westward of the light buoy at
the uortheastera extreme of Beaujeu Bank, and another buoy painted
red is moored in the same depth 200 yards westward of the light buoy
at the southwestern extreme of that bank, and on the western side of
the narrow channel westward of Beaujeu Bank.

Channel South of Beai^en Bank. — The depth in this channel is
irregular, varying from 5 to 3 fathoms, and there is one rocky patch of
17 feet in the way, and difficult to avoid,' so that the latter depth is all
that could be carried through there without buoys at low spring tides,
unless the vessel were conducted by an unusually skillful pilo|;, in which
case 34 fathoms might be reckoned upon. The channel is ^ to } niil&
wide.

The marks for passing the southern edge of Beaujeu Bank, along the
eastern half of its length, are Stone Pillar, its own breadth open to tb&
southward of Goose Island Beef, and for the western part of the bank,.
St. Vallier Point, a quarter of a point open south of Crane Island. But
these marks, from their grea., distance, can seldom be seen.

Channel North of Beaujeu Bank. — ^This channel, which is | to ^
mile wide, has from 4^ to fathoms water, the sboalest and narrowest
part being near the western end of the bank. The marks for leading
north are Stone Pillar lighthouse, in line with the summit of Goose Is-
land Beef, N. 3S° E., which leads 200 yards southward of Dnnscombe
Bock ; the best water to dear the patches off the SW. end of the bank
is on a line N. 4° E. and S. 4° W., passing close west of the gas buoy..

Farther westward the south side of Crane Island is so bold that it
may b^ approached to the distance of 400 yards, bat the channel be-
tween it and the western part of Soaih Bank is narrowed to 600 yards
by a patch of 2$ fatbouis lying S. 7° E., 1,200 yards from Crane Island
lighthonse. This patch is marked on its eastern side by a black buoy.
Two white sugar-loaf beacons, situated at the west end of Crane Island,,
are used as cross marks to lay this buoy.

Bank of St. Thomas extends rather more than 2 miles offshore at
the village of St Thomas. It consists of sand, mud, and stones, and is
dry at low water nearly to its northern edge, which is very steep, and
the marks for leading to the northward of it are Belle Chasse Island
and St. Vallier Point touching. This mark can seldom be seen, bat
the apparent northern extreme of the range of hills <m the southern
shore, just open southward of Crane Island lighthouse, bearing N. 52^
E., will lead northward of St. Thomas Bank in the deepest water. A
baoy painted black marks a shoal with a depth of 16 feet on the south-
em side of the channel abreast Crane Island lighthouse.

The northern -edge of the shoal ground off* St. Jean is distant only ^
mile southeastward of Channel Patch; two shoals, with depths of Id

■I I

f- :

f\ ;■

if jt

■ u

' i- ' !

■M W

204

GREEN ISLAND TO MONTREAL.

foot, and 8 fatiiums, 300 yiirds NW. from them, liaving been found tn
that imsition.

Directions for Sonth Traverse. — A vessel coming np the river
with a fair wind, and having arrived off 8t. Anne Buoy, in from 7 to 10
fatiioms, shouhl proceed as follows : Traverse lightvessel will bear 8.
38° W. nearly 5 miles, but the course to be steered will vary on either
side of that bearing according to the tide. The first of the flood will
«et to the southward towards the shoals ot St. Koch, and the ebb in
the contrary direction ; the mariner must therefore be guided by the
bearing of the lightvessel, but more especially by the soundings in the
■chart

Keep the southern side of the chauuel aboard, but do not go into
less than from 7 to 10 fathoms water, according to the time of tide, until
up to Traverse lightvessel, lest the ship get into the shallow inlet in
the shoals of St. Roch, which runs in to the southward of the light-
vessel. In passing the lightvessel, steer 8. 41° W., leaving her to the
southward, at a short distance. Run past her about J mile, and then
steer so as to pass about 300 yards northward of Upper Traverse light-
vessel, whence the course to Stone Pillar is S. 24° W. But here, too,
the course alone must not be trusted, for there is no calculating exactly
the set of the tides. Generally, a vessel will have to steer a little to the
southward of 8. 24° W. with the flood-tide to keep along the edge of the
South Bank, and with the ebb a little to the westward, but the lead,
buoys, and lightvessels are the only sure guides.

Having passed Upper Traverse lightvessel, take now 6 fathoms at
low water, or a depth corresponding to it at other times of the tide, as
a guide along the edge of the Sonth Bank, keeping the lightvessels in
line, bearing N. 27° E. until past the black buoy on the S W. point of the
49hoals of St. Boch, and taking care not to cross to the northward of the
line of deep water (9 to 13 fathoms), which extends southwestward from
the Narrows all through the Traverse. The patches oflf St. Jean Church
will be avoided by passing 500 yards to the northward of the black
buoy on them, or by not going to the southward into less water than has
been directed, if the buoy can not be seen. If the cheokertsd black and
white buoy on the Ohannel Patch can be seen, pass 200 yards to the
southward of it; if not seen, run along the edge of the Sonth Bank, in
the depth before directed, nntil St. Jean Ohurch bears S. 40^ B. ; then
open the sonth side of Goose Island Reef only jnst 8n£Bcit>ntly to be
4seen nearly in line with the sonth side of Stone Pillar and run npon that
leading mark until St. Jean Ohurch bears S. 56° E., when the vessel will
be about 300 yards to -the southward of Channel Patch, and should
sheer again to the southward and follow the edge of the Sonth Bank
in the same depth as before, remembering that the mark tbr clearing
Algernon Rock is the whole of Crane Island, well open southward of
Goose Island Eeaf, 8. 46° W. When the lighthouse on the Stone Pillar
bears N. 41° W. Algernon rock will have been passed.

)en found fa

ip the river
from 7 to 10
will bear 8.
iry on either
he flood will
1 the ebb in
aided by the
idings ia the

oot go ioto
of tide, until
dlow inlet in
9f the light-
g her to the
le, and then
averse light-
nt here, too,
iting exactly
a little to the
e edge of the
at the lead,

( fathoms at
F the tide, as
j^htvessels in
point of the
iward of the
tstward from
Jean Church
}fthe black
bt«r than has
3d black and
yards to the
nth Bank, iu
bOo E.; then
cit>ntly to be
ua upon that
le vessel will
, and should

South Bank
tor clearing
louthward of

Stone Pillar

SOUTH TRAVERSE — DIRECTIONS — ANCHORAGE.

205

Vessels should not proceed northward of Channel Patch, several
shoals having been found between it and Stunt; Pilliir Lighthouse.

To pass south of Beat^eu Bank iiroceed an follows, remembering
that there is not more than 17 feet at low water. Ah hoou an the ves-
sel is 1^ or 2 miles past Goose Island Ueef, steer so as to bring Stone
Pillar (distinguished by its lighthousef its own breadth open to the
•southward of (loose Island Keef, bearing N. 32° K, Kun from those
marks, steering about S. 32° W., or so as to keep them open as just de-
scribed, and they will lead 400 yards to the southward of the NE. (red
and black horizontal stripes) buoy of Beaujeu Bank ; continue the same
course, and when St. Vallier Point opens to the southward of Crane
Island about a quarter of a point, bearing S. 52° W., haul up for St.
Vallier Point, which will lead about 800 yards to the soutliward of the
buoy (white) of Beaujeu Bank. Then keep away to the southward, and
run along the southern shore of Crane Island, so as to pasH northward
of the black buoy on the patch lying 1,200 yards from Crane Island
Lighthouse, or in from 7 to 10 fathoms water, according to the time of
tide.

To pass Northward of Beaiqeu Bank. — When Hospital Bock bears
N. 52° VV., bring Stone Pillap Lighthouse just open southward of the
southern extreme of the highest part of Goose Island lieef, bearing N
38° E.; leading between the light buoy at the northeastern end of
Beaujeu Bank and the red buoy otf Goose Island, also close to the
white light buoy marking the southwestern end of Beaujeu Bank.
Leave the white light buoy on the port hand, steer through S. 4° E.,
between that buoy and the red buoy to the westward, which will lead
in the best water 27 feet. When Channel Bock is visible the beacon
should be its own height open eastward of the rock, when tifis leading
mark is on.

Anchorite in South Traverse. — Vessels may anchor off the shoals
of St. Anne in 6 fathoms low water up to within a mile or two of the
light vessel. The ground is better, aad there is less tide thao on the
tail of the Middle Ground ; but the latter is the better position for
weighing with the first of the flood in aortherly winds. Vessels do
occasionally anchor for a tide, in fine weather, on the edge of the bank
of St. Boch, between the two lightvessels ; bat this can not be recom-
mended, for the ebb tide runs there at the rate of 6^ knots, and the
ground is not to be depended on ; hence, if the anchor once started, it
would be diificnlt to bring up again, and there would be great danger
of losing the anchor. Should the wind begin to fail, or the flood be
done, it would be better to run down below Traverse lightvessel, if an
anchorage 2 or 3 miles above Upper Traverae lightvessel can not be
gained.

Vessels often anchor off the black buoy on the SW. point of St. Boch
Shoal in 6 or 7 fathoms in good groand, but the anchorage is not reck-
oned very good until arriving above St. Jean Ghurch. All along the

206

OREEN ISLAND TO MONTREAL.

oil^e of the Houth bftiik, from oppoMite the Pillars to Crane ImIhikI, tiie
lioldiiiR Kroniul is n Htitf clay, and ho good that it Ih soinetimes difHoalt
to weigh an anchor. Oft' Crane Island, a mile above Beai^jeu Bank in
(* or 7 fathoms of low water, there Ih excellent anchorage in westerly
winds ; and under the west end of the island, in 5 fathoms, there is
equally good anchorage with t^o winds from eastwanl. Vessels bound
4I0W11, and meeting a strong easterly wind anywhere above the light-
vessel, had better run back to the anchorage.

Tides.— The flood begins much earlier in the North Channel than in
the South, and the first of the stream therefore comes from the north-
ward, setting at first about south upon the shoals of St. Anno and St.
Roch, but inclining gradually more to the westward, until at a quarter-
flood it sets fair to the SW. between the buoys of the South Traverse.
After half-flood it sets SW., and towvrds the end of the tide still more
to the westward ; perhaps because, the time of high water being some-
what earlier in the North Channel, the water has begun to fall before
the flood has quite ceased in the south.

The ebb stream sets nearly in the contrary direction to the flood, as
just stated ; the first of the ebb setting off from the shoals of St. Anne
and St. Roch, through the channels to the westward of the Middle
Ground and over the tail of the latter to the northward.

Above the Pillars both tides set fairly up and down the river.

In the Narrows of the South Traverse the rat« of the ebb is from 6
to 7 knots, and that of the flood from 5 to 6 knots. The rates of the
flood and ebb tides decrease gradually as we proceed to the westward
until off the Pillars ; the ebb stream, southward of the Pillnrn, attains
a velocity of ri| knots per hour at spring tides; and of 4^ \ tot» past
Channel Patch.

SOUTH OHAJYNBL, ABOVE OBANK ISLAND.

SOUTH 8B0RB, FROM ST. THOMAS TO LBVIS POINT.

I I

St Thomas Point is low and lies 3 miles west of the entrance of the
Riviere du Sud, and the church and village of St. Thomas on its west
bank.

Wye Rook, with a depth of one foot over it at low water, is about
400 yards long in the direction of the river, and 100 yards broad ; it is
separated from St. Thomas Bank by a channel fiearly ^ mile wide, but,
with dopths greater than 3 fathotns, only 2U0 yards wide.

A buoy, painted black, is moored in 6} fathoms northwestward of
Wye Book ; from this buoy St. Thomas Point bears S. 18^ E. distant f
mile.

The mark for leading northward of St. Thomas Bank also leads in the
deepest water in South Channel, northward of Wye Rook ; the chapel
near the summit of Cape Tonrmento in line with the flagstaff on Grosse
Island, bearing N. 3^ W., leads eastward of Wye I»ook in 16 feet water ;

•' •-.■swamMiiin

»-T'

UKLLE CHASSE ISLAND — BEAUMONT SHOALS.

207

ne IhIaikI, the
times (littlcalt
Mtjeu Utink in
{e iu westerly
liom8, there is
V^ easels boand
ove the light-

lannel than in
am the north-
Anne and St.
1 at a quarter-
rath Traverse,
tide still more
)r being some-
t to fall before

;o the flood, as
klsof St. Anne
of the Middle

B river.

i ebb is Arom 6
tie rates of the
> the westward
Pillf^rDl, attains
: 4^ k /ots past

entrance of the
las on its west

ivater, is about
ds broad ; it is
mile wide, bnt,

irthwestward of
[SO E. distant f

il'so leads in the
>ck; the chapel
[Staff on Oiosse
n 16 feet water;

and the same cliapel, iii line with the weHtern wharf on Orosse Isle,
bearing N. S-lo W., Iea4l8 westward of tiiat rock. The Seminuire In now
rarely visible ft-om South Channel, except wlieii the sun is MliiniiiK on it.
Belle ChMse Island, of higli, steep, and btire graywuckd rocks, it*
600 yards long, parallel to the shore, from which it is distant more than
i mile. The west point of the Island bears S. 83° w. one mile from
Berthier Church, and not more than 2^ fathoms water can be carried
through between the island and the niaui.

Northward of the center of the Island and 200 yards distant lies a
small rock nearly dry at liw water and with from 4 to fathoms be-
tween it and the island. Within the island to the 8W. is a shallow
bay and the river Belle Chasse.

Trou de Berthier.— The church at Berthier has a single spire, and
is situated about i mile southward of Tron de Berthier; which latter
has a wharf at its eastern entrance point, with a depth of 14 feet close
to Its end at low water. The former site of the church at this place is
now occupied by a large house with a flagstaff near it.

Rooke.— Two rocks, with depths of one foot and 6 feet over them,
are situated 800 yards oflfshore between Berthier East point and Ber-
thier wharf. These rocks are heads of a narrow ledge with depths of
9 to 17 feet over it, running parallel to the shore, and with its north-
eastern extreme bearing N. 49° B., distant i mile from the above one
foot rock. Belle Chasse light, kept bearing southward of S. 56o W.,
leads northward of all the above shoal water.

St. ITallier Point is higher than any other point below it on the
south shore, above the Traverse. The church and village of St. Val-
uer are on the shore of the shoal bay, between St. Michel and St. Val-
uer Points ; and 2 miles SW. from the extremity of the latter. A stone
mill will be seen on the ridge in rear of the church, and the small river
Boyer enters the bay IJ miles to the westward of St. Vallier.

St Michel Point is very low. Beefs of slate, dry at low water, ex-
tend a considerable distance to the northward from this point.

Bank of St. Vallier fills the whole bay between St. Vallier and St.
Michel Points, and extends nearly f of a mile to the NE. from St.
Michel Point. The eastern leading marks for clearing this bank are,
Berthier East Point, just open to the southward of Belle Chasse Island,
and the lead also gives sufficient warning. The western leading marks
are, Beaumont Church, just open to the northward of Durantaye Point.
The village and church of St. Michel stand on the shore of the bay
nearly 2 miles SW. of the point of the same name. At Durantaye
Point, a mile to the westward of the church, the shoal water extends 200
yards oft shore.

Beaumont Shoals are rocky, and dry in part at low water; and
their northern edge is steep, with deep water close to it. The warning
by the lead is ipsuffident in a vessel going fast, and therefore these
shoals should be approached with great caution. A black buoy is

i :'l

! lig

mmm'"^

-. i B. i Lt.. i iuaLij.u

208

OKEKN ISLAND TO MONTRKAL.

iiio<u-e<l tictir the NB. extremity of thette hUouIh in ( ftithoniH of wnter,
witli 8U Lttureut Oliuroli, bourliiK N. 24° W., and tlieeburuli on Levl»
Point juHt oi»en to tli« nortliwanl of iMartinit>ro I'oiiit.

Iteauiiiout Cliuruli and Iteaumont Mill are Hitiiated /> milex 8VV. of
St. Micliel. Tlj« cliurul! staiulH on tlie liigli and Mteep lianks of the
river, whieh extend several niileu on either Hide of it, and the millH low
down at the foot of the liank. lioyn Mill, wh«^re there Ih a waterfall,
also stands low down, near the water's edge, and a mile to the westward
of Hoauinont Mill.

Levis Point.— St. Joseph Church, on Levis Point, bears H. 80° VV.^
and is disumt 0^ miles from Ueauiuout (Jhurch, and the sh«ial water
nowhere extends above \ mile from the shore between Levis Point and
Koys Mill.

Levis Reef extends 360 yards offshore to the northward, and should
not be api>roauhed nearer than W fathoms water from between the north
and west, or 7 fathoms from between the north and east. Oi» the NW.
extreme of this reef, St. Joseph Ohuruh is in lino with the eastern side
of a small rocky mound near the water's edge, bearing about .50° B.,
and Pavilion and St. Pierre Points, on the NW. side of Orleans Isle,
are in one.

I8LANU8 AND 8HOAt,8 VORMINa 1T8 NOKTUKKN 81DE8.

The Islands in order westward of Crane Inland are, Haystaek, Mill^
Race, Margaret, Cliff, and Grosse Islands. All these islands are of
grey wack^ rock, more or less st ei>, partially wooded. The highest
is Orosse Isle, which is elevated 214 feet above high water.

To the westward of Grosse Isle are Keaux and Madame Islands, of
slate rock, low, wooded, and connected by reefs of slate nearly dry at low-
water. The 8W. point of Madame Island is nearly 1 1 miles from Crane
Island, and opposite Belle Chasse Island, from which it is distant 24
miles. Extending from almost all these islands there are reefs of slate
rook, thinly covered with sand and mud, and bounding the South
Channel on its northern side for nearly 14 miles to the westward of
Crane Island.

Crane Island Spit has 5 feet water over the shallowest part, and
extends S. 58° W., with less depths than 18 feet, to a distance of 1|
miles from Pointe aux Pins. The western extreme of this spit is marked
by a red buoy, moored with two beacons on the southern shore of
Orane Island in line, bearing N. 65° B. The eastern of these beacons,
painted red, is situated 250 yards westward of Crane Island Wharf ;
and the western, painted white, 200 yards further westward. These
beacons, in line, lead, in not less than 24 feet water, southward of
Crane Island Spit, but with that depth only as far westward as the
above red buoy. The southern extreme of Crow Island, in line with
the northern extreme of Middle Island, bearing N. 20° E., leads north-
westward of the buoy and the spit.

TiMiHWaWll

oiiiH of wiiter,
urcli oil LtiviH

inile>« SVV. of
liuiikH of the
tbe luillH low
iti a waterfall,
the wuHtWiird

its 8. 80O VV.,
u Mh«)iil water
ivi8 Point and

'd, and Hhoiild
^een the north
Oi» theNW.
e eaHtorn Hide
(out .SOofi.,
f Orleans Isle,

aystack, Mill^
viands are of
The highest
er.

me Islands, of
trly dry at low
es from Crane
t is distant 2^
i reefs of slate
ng the South
e westward of

est part, and
listance of IJ
spit is marked
heru shore of
these beacons,
sland Wharf;
tward. These
southward of
»tward as the
1, in line with
3., leads north-

CRANE ISLAND SPIT — OROSSE ISLE PATCH.

209

A bank, having several sIiou'h with 20 to 23 feot water on them, now
Joins Crane Island Spit t^t the bank extending sonthwestward from
Margarets Tail. The ebb tide sets strongly to the NK. through this
channel and between the iNhuids into the Middle Traverse, thus caus-
ing a powerful indraft, widcli should be guarded against in lieating
down the river, especially i \ light winds, and with a heavy or slow
working vessel.

Murgarotii Tail, extending a mile to the SW. from Margaret and
Cliff Islands, which are nearly Joined at low water, is a dangerous shoal,
tbe slate being awash in soaie parts of it in low tides. A lightbuoy,
painted yellow, and showing a Jixed white gaslight, is nioore<l in 4|
fathoms, 4(M) yards sonthwestward of a 20foot patch, at its southwest-
ern extreme; from this buoy the southwestern* extreme of Margaret
Island bears N. 24<> B., distant 1 ^ miles, and the western extreme of
small islet southwestwani of Grosso Isle N. (lOo w. Vessels entering
the quarantine ground should leave this lightbuoy on the starboard
band. If from any cause this buoy is removed it will be replaced by a
red can buoy. The church on Crane Island in line with the southern
extreme of Haystack Island, bearing N. 02° B., leads southward of
Margarets Tail and the above buoy, but in a least depth of 22 feet only.
The northwestern extreme of Two Heads Island in line with the west-
ern extreme of Cliff Island, bearing N. 21° B., leads westward of Mar*
garets Tail, and between it and Grosse Isle Patch.

Gkrosse Isle Patch is a narrow rooky shoal, t,200 yards long in a
SW. direction, and with 7 feet least water; it lies to the west of Mar-
garets Tail, and the channel between them is i mile wide and carries a
depth of 5 fathoms. A buoy, painted black and white, in vertical
stripes, marks the northeastern end of the Patch.

Tbe rook southward of Grosse Isle, and lying NW., distant nearly
600 yards f)rom the above buoy, is marked by a buoy, painted black and
white in vertical stripes.

A Rock with 15 feet water over it lies) westward of Grosse Isle
Patch, and with the outer end of Grosse Isle West Wharf bearing N.
16° B., distant 1,200 yards. The new Bpiscopal church at Grosse Tsle
in line with tbe inner end of the West Wharf, bearing north, leads in
3} fathoms between this rock and the western extreme of Grosse Isle
Patch ; and the summit of Margarat Island in line with the northern
extreme of Cliff Island, bearing S. 54° B., leads northward of Grosse
Island Patch to the Quarantine Anchorage. A good cross mark for
that anchorage is to have the Bpiscopal church Just open eastvirard of
West Wharf. The whole cf Race Island a little open southward of
Margaret Island, bearing N. 52° E., leads in 23 feet southward of
Grosse Isle Patch.

Quarantine Anchorage. — Vessels generally lie between the Grosse
Patch and Island, to be near the establishment ; but the anchorage far-
ther eastward in tbe Quarantine Passage to the northward of Margaret
5489 14

■II

.ynwa

iiiMminn

*'«l5r*««i

210

OBEEN ISLAND TO MONTRKAL.

IslHud is by far preforablo. All merchant vessels, as the law now
stands, are obliged to anchor off Orosse Island, from whence, after
examination, they are allowed to proceed to Quebec, if not detained at
the Quarantine Anchorage. These vessels in the first instance gener-
ally anchor outside Grosse Patch, and to the westward of Margarets
Tail, choosing their berth in 5 fathoms, where there is one of the best
roadsteads for riding out an easterly gale in the river.

Grosse Isle may be readily recognized by the number of buildings
forming the Quarantine establishment. Two piers are built on the
soutliern shore, one near the western extreme, the other near the mid-
dle ot the island. The hospital, a conspicuous brick building, stands
near the eastern extreme, and the superintendent's house is immedi-
ately behind the dagstaff. The churches visible from the ?>outh Guan-
nel are the Episcopal church, a brown wooden building, with a low
tower, standing on an eminence immediately northeastward of West
Wharf; and the Roman Catholic church, with a small spire, situated
near the middle of the southern shore, and visible only from the east-
ward and westward; being hidden from the southward by a rocky
mound in front of it.

Grosse Isle Tail is row joined by a bar, having no more than 16
feet over it at low water, to the banks of Madame Island. Two shoals
with 11 feet of water on them lie on this bar about midway between
Grosse Isle Tail and the Banks of Madame Island. For crossing the
bar the best mark is the western fall of the hill over Cape Tourmente
in line with the small rock near the eastern extreme of Beaux Island,
bearing N. 26° W.

Banks of Madame, in their eastern part, extend 1$ miles to the
southward of Reaux Island ; and from their SE. extreme, in 2^ fathoms,
the south side of Two Heads Island is just open to the southward of
Grosse Island. The mark for clearing the southern side of these banks
as well as Grosse Island Tail and Grosse Patch, is, Race Island kept
open to the southward of Margaret Island. A lightbuoy painted
red, moored in 6 fathoms, and showing a yu-ed! white gas light, marks
the southwestern edge of the banks. From this buoy Belle Chasse
Lighthouse bears about N. 86° E. distant 3^ miles; and southwestern
extreme of Madame Island N. ^2° E. A beacon painted white is erected)
on the beach at high-water mark near St. Vallier Church, and when in
line with the steeple of the said church forms a mark for the lightbuoy
on the SW. end of Madame Shoal.

Isle of Orleans is Of grey wack^ and slate rocks, dipping generally
at a high angle to the SE. It is 18 miles long, with an extreme breadth
of 4§ miles. The church of St. Jean stands low and close to the .water,
on Orleans Point, 2 miles west from the Madame Reef, and 1^ miles
firom St. Michel Point, on the opposite south shore.

At the distance pf 2 and 3 miles respectively, above St. Jean, are the
small rivers Lafleur and Macheux, off which there is good anchorage

loati

, as the law now
•ora whence, after

if not detained at
ret instance gener-
ward of Margarets

is one of the best
ir.

imber of buildings
) are built on the
)ther near the mid-
jk building, stands
a house is imniedi-
m the South Cnan-
ilding, with a low
tieastward of West
nail spire, situated
only from the east-
;hward by a rocky

g no more than 16
sland. Two shoals
at midway between
For crossing the
er Cape Tourmente
le of Beaux Island,

Bud 1§ miles to the
reme, in 2^ fathoms,

the southward of
sideoi these banks
s, llace Island kept

lightbuoy painted
ite gas light, marks

buoy Belle Chasse
I ; and southwestern
ited white is erected
Jhurch, and when in
,rk for the lightbuoy

8, dipping generally

1 an extreme breadth
id close to the water,
i Keef, and Ig miles

ove St. Jean, are the
*e is good anchorage

ORLEANS ISLE — QUEBEC HARBOR.

211

in 7 or 8 fathoms ; and in their mouths small schooners and boats find
shelter, but lie aground at low water.

St. Laurent Church also 8ta;ids low, and close to the water, near St.
Laurent Point, and miles SW. of St. Jean. Around both these
churches there are villages ; and along the shore between them, as well
as on the bank above, the bouses are numerous.

Patrick Hole is a small shallow bay 1^ miles to the westward of
St. Laurent Church. A small brook enters the head of the bay ; and
off it, in from 6 to U fathoms, there is good anchorage, well sheltered
from easterly winds. Here vessels bound down the liver frequently
anchor for a short time previous to their final departure for sea.

Marand Rocks. — The west end of Orleans Isle is quite bold. In
the bay, a mile to the eastward of it, lie Maraud Bocks, always covered ;
but they are out of the fairway, and within the 3 fathoms line, which
there extends ^ mile from the shore at high water.

Anchorage. — Under the west endofOrIean8,iu from 8 to 15 fathoms,
there is a good place for a vessel arriving with an easterly wind to an-
chor, which she ought to do, and wait for daylight rather than risk
rnnniug among the crowd of shipping off Quebec in a dark night and
rapid tide-way.

Basin and Harbor of Quebec. — The port of Quebec extends from
Barnaby Island to the first rapid above Montreal; and a book con-
taining the by-laws and harbor regulations of the Trinity Board is
delivered to each vessel on her arrival by the harbor- master. The pi-
lots are obliged to give all due information respecting quarantine to the
commanders of vessels when they first come on board.

Quebec Basin. — Off the Beauport shore a bank of slate, thinly
covered with mud, and great part of which is dry at low water, extends
more than a mile from the shore. A can buoy, painted red, moored in
5 fathoms, indicates the southern edge of the bank. The observation
bastion in line with the Martello tower in the suburb of St. John marks
the southern edge of this bank from abreast the west end of Orleans to
within ^ mile of the India wharf; but a stranger would not easily make
out the bnstion, which ought to be distinguished by a white mark. The
breadth of the channel between this bank and the shoal off Levis Point
is 1,200 yards, and the depth of water nearly 3(1 fathoms. The water
is so deep in the basin that there is no good anchorage, excepting under
Orleans and off the mouth of the river St. Charles.

Quebec Harbor may be considered as extending from off the river
St. Charles up to the Cbaudi^re Biver, a distance of 5 or 6 miles, which
all through the navigable season is thickly occupied by vessels em-
ployed in the timber trade, for the most part lying alongside the numer-
ous wharves and blocks for embarking lumber, and consequently out
of the stream.

But sometimes the spring or fall fleet arrives, to the amount of several
hundred sail together, and then before they have had time to take their

fmmmmimm

'■■mm^ws^

^jmntmmmiMi'

m^.

i|. '■:

212

OREEN ISLAND TO MONTREAL.

places for loading the river is so crowded with sbipping that it is diffl-
cult to flud a clear berth. A gale of wind occurring under such cir-
cumstances is sure to do damage, siuce the water is deep, the ground
(sand and gravel) not good, the tide strong, and th<) vessels often care-
lessly anchored.

Anchorage. — The breadth of the St. Lawrence at Quebec is very
little more than a mile, but it expands immediately above the city to 1^
miles. The depth is 28 fathoms at low water abreast the city, and 20
fathoms in the wide part above, the deepest water being over towards
the Levi Point shore. The best anchorage is on the Quebec side, in
from 11 to 17 fathoms, there being nothing in the way excepting an old
wreck with 9 fathoms water over it. The position of this wreck is shown
by a rippling during the ebb tide. Above the city, from off Diamond
Harbor, all along the Lamouche Bank nearly to Pizeau Point, the an-
chorage is much better than off it, the depth of water being much less
and the ground good.

The Mark for clearing the outer or southern side of the Lamouche
Bank along its whole extent is the N W. sides of Levis and Orleans Points
in line.

Ice. — Sometimes, although rarely, the navigation closes by the mid.
die of November, and remains closed to the 8th or 10th of May ; at
others it would be possible to navigate it till near Christmas, and shipg
have arrived in the middle of April ; but these are extraordinary seasons,
and the period first named is that during which the navigation usually
remains closed. The river seldom or never freezes acrosii below Quebec,
and only occasionally opposite the city ; but it is full of heavy ice, mov-
ing up and down with the tides with irresistible force. There is gener-
ally, but not always, a bridge of packed ioe formed 5 or 6 miles above
Quebec ; and higher up, as far as Lake Ontario, the St. Lawrence is
everywhere ffozeu across, excepting in places where the current is
very strong.

The Town of Quebec occupies the extremity of a range, the highest
part of which is surmounted by the citadel, 320 feet high ; the town
thence extends o'liefly lu a northeasterly direction to the water's edge.
Its population is about 65,000. Though not a manufacturing town,
Quebec has distilleries, breweries, and tobacco, soap, and candle wcrks :
and numbers of fine wooden ships have been launched fh)m its yards.

Supplies of all kinds may be obtained by shipping. There are
several machine shops for repairs at Qnebec ; also, at Point Levi there
are large works.

The Louise Basin is in course of construction on the north side of
the custom-house, at the entrarce to St. Oharles Rh'er. From end to
end the basin is 4,000 feet long, 900 feet wide, and will inclose a water
area of 60 acres — 40 acres of which are to be wet dock, and 20 acres
tidal basin, with a minimum depth of 27 feet and 42 feet, respectively,
below high water.

xmUMMHl

mi^

lat it is diffl-
ier such cir-
, the ground
is often oare-

Bbeo is very
the city to IJ
city, and 20
jver towards
ebeo side, in
eptiug an old
*eck is shown
off Diamond
»oint, the an-
ng much less

le Lamoncbe
rleans Points

I by the mid.
I of May ; at
las, and ships
inary seasons,
;ation usually
»eIow Quebec,
javy ice, mov-
here is gener-
6 miles above
. Lawrence is
be current is

;e, the highest
igh; the town
water's edge.
Bturing town,
candle wcrks:
rom its yards.
5. There are
tint Levi there

north side of

From end to

Qclose a water

, and 20 acres

b, respectively^,

QUEBEC — NORTH CHANNEL.

213

Time Signal.— A time signal is- established at the citadel. The
signal is made once daily, except on Sundays, and is a ball, which is
hoisted close up as preparatory at 5 minutes before signal, and dropped
at Ih. Om. Os. p. m. mean time of the 75th meridian, equivalent fo Oh.
Om. Os. p. m. Greenwich mean time.

The United States is represented by a consul and vice-consul.

Anchorage. — Besides the best places for riding with easterly winds,
there is anchorage almost everywhere between Crane Island and Que-
bec. The best ground for holding is generally on the northern side of
the channel 5 and one of the best places in strung westerly winds is
under St. John Point, Orleans Isle.

Tides. — The tides are regular and not strong below Beaumont Keefs,
seldom exceeding the rate of 2^ knots ; but in the narrow channel and
deep water (nearly 20 fathoms) between these shoals and Orleans the
rate of the ebb sometimes amounts to 4 knots ; above the shoals the
rate of the tide is from 2^ to 3 knots, increasing again as we enter the
basin of Quebec.

Between Quebec and Levis Point, in strong spring tides, assisted by
a strong wind, the flood will run at the rate of nearly 4J knots per
hour; and the ebb, in the spring, just after the melting of the winter
snow, 5 knots; but, under common circumstances, 3^ and 4 knots, re-
spectively, are the usual rates of the tides. A good range of cable
should always be ready, for it is not easy at times to bring a vessel up
off Quebec, especially in the deep water and loose ground in the center
of the channel.

NORTH OHANNEL, NORTH TRAVERSE, AND ORLEANS CHANNEL.

North Channel — The northern shore of the river, westward of St.
Paul Bay, falls steeply from the summits of high wooded hills that at-
tain an elevation of 2,650 feet, dose westward of Petite Riviere. At
1^ miles southwestward from Cape Labaie, a small strip of low flat
land, lying between the tbot of the hills and high- water mark, com--
mences, and extends westward to Grande Point, a distance of 5 miles.
Numerous houses, forming a parish of Petite Riviere, are built on this
flat; and among them is a church, with a single spire, dedicated to St.
Fran90i8 Xavier. Several valleys indent the hills, the most marked
being about 2 miles eastward of Petite Riviere Church.

The entrance to the North Channel, between the reef, which extends
a mile to the northward from the NE. end of Goudres Island, and the
shoals, which stretch across Ebouletneuts Bay, is 1^ miles wide. The
narrowest part of phe c^'aunel between Coudres and the main is be-
tween Prairie Shoal, off the west point of Prairie Bay, and the opposite
side, near Cape Corbean. The leading mark for this part of the pas-
sage, as well as for clearing the shoal on the west side of Cape St.
Joseph, on the mainland side, is Cape Martin and Goose Cape in line.

-^elOitiik

iaiil5inniilM>i<ii<«ii»M<a>W

214

GRr.SN ISLAND TO MONTREAL.

St. Paul Bay is nearly abreast the west end of Ooadres, and is shoal
and dry at low water, excepting a very narrow, shallow channel into
the Bi ver du Gonfre, the entrance of which forms a secure tide harbor for
small schooners. There is a church, bridge, and village a mile up the
river. Off Gape Corbean, at half ebb, the spring tides run at the rate
of 7 knots, causiug a great and whirling ripple, dangerous to boats in
bad weather.

Petite Riviere.— The church and settlement of Petite Bivifere is sit-
uated on a narrow strip of low alluvial land at the foot of the granitic
hills. Landing may be effected iu boats after half flood, at L' Abatis,
Petit Abatis, and Orande Pointe, and, generally speaking, along the
coast of Petite Bivi^re ; but care must be taken in approaching the
shore to avoid the bowlders that stand above the general level of the flat
ground between high and low water marks.

Labaie Bank.— Shoals of mud and large bowlders extend J mile off
Gape Labaie, the eastern extreme marked by a red buoy. Their edge will
be cleared by keeping the extreme western capes, llouge and Gribanue,
open to the southward of Gape Maillard. The anchorage in good along
the edge of the shoals of Petite Bivi^re, where, in 5 fathoms, clay bot-
tom, vessels will be out of the strength of the tides.

La Petite Bntte Ronde, a conical wooded hill, 774 feet high, rises
above Gape Maillard, and is conspicuous from the eastward or west-
ward. Two small shingle beaches, named Petit Abatis and L'Abatis,
are situated westward of Gape Maillard ; and on UAbatis, which is 1}
miles distant from that cape, there are several couspicnous houses. At
Sant au Gochon there is another group of houses, a small church, a dis-
used mill, and a wharf which marks the limit of the low-water line.
From Gape Labaie westward to Saut au Gochon, the "^at, which dries
at low water, extends about $ mile from high- water mark, and the water
deepens to 5 fathoms about 400 yards beyond the edge. Westward of
Saut*aa Gochon the low-water line extends only a short distance from
high-water mark. The first notch in the hills northward of Mount
Eboulements, in Hue with the northern extreme of Goudres Island,
bearing N. 35° E., leads in upwards of 5 fathoms, southward of the shoal
water off the northern shore.

Condres Island, the largest island below Quebec, excepting Orleans,
is nowhere above 260 feet above the sea. It is composed of grey wack6
and slate rocks, is tolerably fertile, forms a parish by itself, and
has a church standing low down near its SW. extreme which has two
small spires at its western end. The southern side of the island is
lined with rocky shoals, which extend fully a mile out from the shore,
but the north side is bold for about 2 miles to the eastward of Prairie
Bay.

Prairie Bay, on the north side of Goudres Island is 1^ miles wide
ttom Gape k I'Aigle to Prairie Point, is not deep, only slightly curved,
and shows a sandy beach at high water. Off Prairie Point, its west

UMiiiMMMHailWIMiWII

mmmn

aanr'

PRAIRIE BAY — COUDRE8 BANK.

215

and is shdal
haunel into
harbor for
mile up tlie
at tbe rate
to boats in

vi^re is sit-
the granitic
at L' Abatis,
along the
oaching the
el of the flat

id J niile off
eir edge will
d Gribanue,
( good along
us, clay bot-

)t high, rises
ard or west-
id L'Abatis,
, which is 1}
hoases. At
burch, a dis-
r-water line,
wbiuh dries
id the water
iVestward of
istance from
i of Mount
ilres Island,
of the shoal

iug Orleans,
f greywaok^
' itself, and
lioh has two
he island is
n the shore,
rd of Prairie

\ miles wide
titly curved,
nt, its west

extreme, Prairie Shoal, the greater part of which is of mud ami grass
resting on slate, and only covered at high-water, extends % mile to
the NW. from high water marls, sheltering tbe bay from SVV. winds.
The line of Notre Dame Church, in one with the NE. end of the low
day cliff of St. Joseph Point, passes 200 yards within the 3 fathoms
north extreme of this shoal ; but if the church be kept on with the NW,
end of the same cliff it will lead clear of the shoal in deep water.
From the north point of the shoal— near which a black buoy is ]ilaced —
St. Pierre Church is in line with the cast side of St. Paul Bay ; the
buoy lies in 3 fathoms with tbe church its own breadth open to the
westward of the :>ast point of the bay.

Anchorage. — Goose Cape shelters Prairie Bay from easterly gal(>s,
and prevents any sea of consequence from rolling in, so that this an-
chorage is quite safe in all winds; the ground, of clay, being good for
holding, and the tides easy if the vessel be not anchored too far out.
There is room for many vessels, the space to anchor in being almost a
mile long, and about if mile wide, reckoning from 3 fathoms mark to 10
fathoms, beyond which the water deepens rapidly, and the tides are
of great strength. The best berths is in 6 fathoms, near the center of
the bay. Ships meeting with an easterly wind below the Traverse will
find this a good anchorage to run for, and should proceed as follows :

DirectionB. — Being below the Middle Ground, stand over towards
Eboolements, going no nearer to the reef off the NE. end of Coudres
Island than the depth of 10 fathoms. Having passed the reef and
opened out the channel, bear up along the shore of Coudres, passing
dose to Cape ik I'Aigle into the anchorage. A pproaching this anchorage
from the westward, bring the leading marks on for clearing the reef off
Prairie Point, namely, Notre Dame Church on with or open to the
northward of the NW. extreme of the clay cliff off St. Joseph Point.
Bun upon these marks uutd St. Pierre Church is shut in behind the east
side of St. Paul Bay, when the vessel may haul to the southward into
tbe anchorage. The anchorage under Coudres in easterly winds is very
good, the best riding being in 7 fathoms, with the south point of Cou-
dres bearing about N. 65^ E.

Tides. — In Prairie Bay tbe flood-tide by the shore is longer than the
ebb, the water flowing for 6h. 20m., and ebbing only 6b. Om., which is
ooutrary to the observations taken in every other part of tbe river.
The stream of flood at tbe anchorage in 6 fathoms is stronger than that
of the ebb, and about 4 knots in spring tides. The stream of the ebb
for the first '^ honrs of tbe tide is about 2 knots. Vessels should moor
at Prairie, or at least have a kedge oat to insure keeping a clear an*
ohor.

Condree Bank. — The southern side of tbe north channel ft*oni Cou*
dres Island to Burnt Cape Ledge is formed by Coudres Bank, tbe
northern edge of which is of sand, and so nearly straight that it may
easily be followed by the lead. Tbe soundings approaching it are such

^^i^iiiMm^mmgsmmmtt'

'fMXMUin..

.imM\M < ^

21G

OREEN ISLAND TO MONTREAL.

i^'

as to give good warning, and vessels may anchor in line weatlier all
along tliat side in 6 or 7 fathoms, clay bottom, and out of the strength
of the tides.

Neptune Rook lies about ^ mile to the southward of the edge of the
shoals. It has two heads, both of which are one foot above high-water
spring tides.

La Longue Pointe.— A red can buoy is moored in 30 feet south of
La Longue Point, a shual extending out from Cape Gribanne, having
deptiis on it from 8 to 21 feet.

From the buoy, Cape Brul6 lighthouse bears 8. 43° W., and the
houses at L'Abatis are first open south of 8aut au Cochon Wharf.

Bnmt Cape Ledge is an extensive chain of greywack^ and slate
rocks, the southwestern part of which is always above water. The
western extreme is an islet 12 feet above high water, and on the reef
southeastward of this islet a hut has been built, the roof of which is S
feet above high water.

Brul^ Banks are sands which dry in part soon after half-ebb, and
lie to the westward of Burnt Cape Ledge. The ohdnnel between these
banks and the north shore is 1,200 yards wide, and has from 7 to 10
fathoms water in it. This is the only channel, but between the north-
eastern part of the Brul6 Banks and Burnt Capo Ledge there is a cul
de sac in the banks, which must be avoided by keeping the north shore
aboard, after arriving off the eastern part of the ledge. The black
buoy marking the northeastern extreme of the bank is moored in 4
fathoms, with Cape Brul6 principal lighthouse bearing 8. 60^ W., dis-
tant 1-1% miles.

The depth of 18 feet at the northeastern end of Brnl^ Bank is on the
line of the western end of Two Heads Island in one with the western
end of Burnt Cape Ledge, bearing 8. 28° E.

Eastern Narrows.— The passage now is only 300 yards wide, with
depths greater than 3 fathoms, and Traverse Spit is apparently ex.
tending northeastward. A black baoy marks the eastern side of the
Narrows, at the southwestern extreme of Brul^ Banks, in 18 feet water;
and a red buoy is moored near the northeastern end of Traverse 8plt
and on the western side of the Narrows, to mark the same depth.

Western Narrows are only 300 yards wide, with depths over 18 feet,
and are comprised between West Sand and Traverse Spit. West Sand
has extended eastward a considerable distance, and has on its north-
eastern extreme a depth of 12 feei, marked by a checkered black and
white buo3'. The southern extremes of Orleans Island just open of each
other, bearing S. 36° W., leads northward of West Sand ; and the islet
at the west extreme of Grosse Isle in line with the eastern extreme of
Beaux l8land, bearing S. 71° E., leads close eastward of that sand.

St Fran9ois.— The southwestern lighthouse, 30 feet high and 110
feet above high water, stands in a field, } mile sonthwestward of St.
Francois Church ; and the northeastern lighthouse, 28 feet high, is sit-

weather all
the strength

I edge of the
I high-water

eet south of
inne, having

W., and the
Wharf.
i6 aud slate
water. The
oa the reef
f which is ft

alf-ebb, and
tween these
from 7 to 10
n the uorth-
tiere is a cul
north shore
The black
moored in 4
60O W., dia-

nk is on the
the western

s wide, wiih
parently ez>

side of the

feet water;
raverse Spit
depth,
over 18 feet,

West Sand
1 its north-
1 black and
>pen of each
ind the islet

extreme of
t sand,
gh and 110
ward of St.
high, is sit-

'ifiaiSiimtiii^meammtmittP'-

ST. FRAN9OIS — ORLEANS CHANNEL.

217

nated at high-water mark, ^ mile eastward of that church. Beacons
have been erected near both these lighthouseH, which in Hue, bearing
S. 41° W., lead close southward of Traverse Spit, but over a shoal with
12 feet water on it, lyiug ^ mile northeastward of the checkered buoy
on West Sand.

Directions for North Channel — After passing Saut au Cochon the
houses at L/ Abatis must be kept well open of the wharf at Saut aa
Oochon, bearing N. 24° E., to clear the ledgo eastward of Cape Qri*
banne, after which the northern shore should be kept well on board
until abreast Cape Bruld. The leading lighthouses on that cape (the
northern aud the eastern of the three) must then be brought in line,
bearing fT. 14° E., aud kept so through Eastern Narrows, between the
buoys there, and until St. Fran9ois beaconn or lighthouses are in line,
bearing S. 41° W. Then steer for those lighthouses, with the upper
one slightly open southward of the lower one, and before the islet at
the western extreme of Orosse Isle is in line with the eastern eztrome
of Beaux Island, bearing S. 71° E., the southern extremes of Orleans
Island must be brought nearly in line, bearing S. 35° W. to pass be-
tween West Sand and Traverse Spit. When St. Vallier Church opens
westward of Madame Island, or St. Joachim Church is shut in with
Orleans Island, haul a little to the southward, and keep ^ mile distant
from Orleans Island, further on.

Tides.— The tides set fairly through the North Traverse, seldom ex-
ceeding the rate of 3^ or at the utmost 4 knots at the springs. The
accession of the stream from the northward of Orleans and the com-
parative narrowness of the channel increase the rate to flrom 4 to 5
knots off Cape Brnl6, below which it decreases until below Cape Mail-
lard. Below Petite Riviere, the ebb, receiving a great accession from
the Middle Channel, especially during the first quarter of the tide, runs
with great rapidity, the usual rate being 6 knots in the springs.

Orleans Channel, between the isle of Orleans and the north shore,
being in several places not above 200 yards wide, is too narrow and
intricate tor directions to be of any use, especially as there are no lead-
ing marks. With a fair wind and the assistance of buoys 4 fathoms
water could be carried through this channel, which lies between shoals
of mud and slate extending to a great distance from the shore on either
side, and nearly all dry at low water.

The Etominaire is a large building with a tinned cupola and cross,
standing on a rising ground not far from the water, and 3 miles west-
ward of Cape Tonrmeute. The church and village of Si. Joachim, one
of the leading marks for the West Sand, is If miles to the westward of
the Seminaire. The other churches and villages on the north shore, in
order westward, and from 4 to 5 miles apart, are St. Anne, Chateau
Bicher, and Ange Oardien, the last being 2| miles from the falls of
Montmorency.

Tides. — The following table has been formed from the mean of the
observations of several spring tides. The neap tides rise and fall

'MJkk'm I., .

^Ir-

218

TIDES — SAOUKNAT BIVEB.

nearly at the same rateae in ordinary spring tides ; so nearly tliat any
difference that there may be is far exceeded by the action of strong
winds. Bat, as iu neap tides, the whole rise and fall is not so great as
in the ordinary spring, shown in the following table; therefore the pro.
portionate part of the rise and fall for every hour after low and high
water will also be less, and an allowance mast be made accordingly.

Table $howing tht height of the tide at every hour after low and high uiater in ordinary

epring tides.

Hoora

Flood tide,

Hours

Ebb tide,

P!f '

after

heiKbt In

after

W.1S

low

feet and

high
water.

Remarks.

water.

iDofaee.

inohea.

h. m.

ft. in.

h. m.

ft. in.

<)aebM

1. w.

h.w. 17 6
IB

The tides of Qroase laland
were obserred to rise and

8 6

11 4

fall nearly In the same

14 9

manner, ezoeptluK that

U 8

8 10

the rise after low water

4 46

h.w. 17 «

8
«
7

8 4
1 6
2

was not quite so rapid.

StBooh

I w

78ft

l.w.

h.w. 17

14 t>

ft 3

i: »

8 6

18 6

ft 6

16 8

S88

h.w. 17

1 6

The Brandy Foto

2 w

680

l.W.

h.w. 17

1 8

4 7

■v

8 «

a 6

8 6

18 8

ft 6

S60

h.w. 17

Tadonaao enti'UMM of Sagne-

l.w.

684

I.W.
b.w. 17

nay BiTcr.

1 1 18

S 1 4 6

8 8

4 IS

ft IS

6 8 i h.w. 17

6 16

1.w. 10

THE BIVEB SAOUBNAT.

For the first 50 miles up from its conflaence with the St. Lawrence
the Sagaenay is from § mile to 2 miles wide, filling op a deep transverse
valley through monntains of syenitic granite and gneiss. These moon-
tains rise everywhere more or less abruptly from the water, forming, in
«ome parts, precipitons headlands more than 1,000 feet ill height. The
irranitic hills are in general quite barren, but the valleys througli whfoh
the rapid tributary streams descend are filled with a deep deposit of
«and and day, and are thickly wooded. At Ahah Bay and at Ohi-
ooutimi there are considerable tracts of good land, as there are also
around Lake f^t. John ; so that it seems probable that this country will
be settled at no very distant day, especially as the lumberers have
turned their attention in that direction.

Within the same part of the Saguenay the water is almost as deep as

' i*

AWMB*"^

-«ii

Ij that any
n of BtroDg

80 great as
bre the pro.
w and high
ordlnglj.

er in ordinary

iinarkt.

of OroMe Itlud
trred to riM and
\y In the mie
exocptlDK that
after low water
inlte Ml rapid.

. Lawrence
transverse
hese moan*
forming, in
igbt. The
ingli wbfoh
> deposit of
nd at Ohi-
"e are also
>antry will
Brer8 have

as deep as

TIDES AND CURRENTS.

the nioontains are high. Between the shoals at the entrance of the
river there is a bar across, on which, however, there are from 18 to 20
fathoms water, bat immediately within that the depth increases to up*
ward of 100 fathoms; and fartlier up, for a distance of many miles^ it
is folly 145 fathoms deep in the center of the oh^ anel, decreasing to 100
fathoms oti either side, often within less than as many feet of the pre-
cipitous shores.

It is navigable for the largest ships to Roches Point, 07 miles from
the St. Lawrence ; and schooners, with the assistance of the flood tide,
can ascend to Ohicoutimi, 8 miles farther. Just above Roches Point
the river becomes suddenly very shoal, there being only 1| fathoms
water in its narrow and intricate channels, and among its shoals, com-
posed of large bowlders. Above this shallowest part, where at low
water there is a complete rapid, the depth varies from 2 to 8 fathoms,
but between shoals of large stones, and the river contracts to little more
than ^ mile, retaining that breadth nearly to the rapids, 6 miles above
Ohicoutimi, where the tide ends.

Tides and Currents. — It is high water, full and change, at Tadous-
sac, at the entrance of the Saguenay, at 2h. 45m., and the rise in ordi-
nary springs is 17 feet, and in neaps 10 feet. At Ohicoutimi it is high
water at 4h. 11m., and the rise in ordinary spring and neap tides is 12
and 8 feet.

The flood tide is extremely weak and of short duration ; above Si.
Marguerite River it is almost imperceptible, excepting a weak stream
which may be found running up close to the shores. The water, how*
ever, has often been observed to be flowing up at the depth of several
fathoms, whilst it was stationary or descending on the surface. The
tide flows to the foot of the Terres Rompnes Rapid, about 6 miles above
Ohicoutimi, and about 71 miles from the St. Lawrence. The stream of
the ebb tide is very strong, varying from 3 to 5 knots, according to the
breadth of the river. It is strongest in the mouth of the river, wherO'
it sometimes runs at the rate of 7 knots, and sets strongly ovef Lark
Islet Spit and the SW. extremity of Vaches Point.

The meeting of the spring ebb tides down the Saguenay and the St.
Lawrence causes breaking and whirling eddies and ripplings, so strong
as to interfere with the steerage of a vt* ssel unless she has a command*
ing breeze. These streams, opposed to a heavy easterly gale, cause an
exceedingly high, cross, and breaking sea. On the flood tide at such
times there is not more sea there than in other parts of the river.

Oapt. O. Tramblay, in a report to theOovemmentof the Dominion of
Oanada, 1875, made the following remarks on the currents in Saguenay
River :

From the entrance of Ohicoutimi River to Roches Point the current
is steady and even, in some parts setting on the shoals, but without
any undercurrent.

From Roches Point to St. Jean Bay, situated 36 miles to the eastward.

220

SAOUENAY RIVEH.

tbo surfaoe current is not stroog at any timo. In many partH there is
a strong and variable nndercurrent, e8|)eoially daring springa, strong
with the liuod, bnt scarcely perceptible during the ebb. Thiti under-
current, acting on vessels drawing ft-oin 19 to 25 feet, sometimes renders
them unmanageable even when assisted by a steam tug.

At spring tides a large body of water passes over the Chiooutimi
Shoals (at a very rapid rate during ebb tides), and falling suddenly
into deep water, seems to strike downward at once, leaving but a slight
current on the surface.

The strong flood tides over the bar at the entrance of Sagueuay
River falling suddenly into deep water may also ooutributeto a certain
extent to check the strength of the surface current of the river.

Entrance of the Saguenay.— The river Saguenay enters the St.
Lawrence opposite Ked and Oreen Islands, as see page 102, wherein haa
been described its points of entrance. It will be seen that the entrance
channel between Princes Shoal, Bar Reef, and Lark Islet Spit on the
one side, and Vaches Patch and Reef on the other, is f mile wide, with
deep water and very irregular soundings. The shallowest part is be-
tween Bar Reef and Vaches Patch, where there is as little as 11 fathoms.
Immediately within it the depth increases, and off Tadoussac exceeds
80 fathoms. And it is $ mile wide from Hot Point, the NW. point of
Tadousao Harbor, across to Noire Point

8t Catherine Bay.— Between Lark Islet and Noire Point is St.
Catherine Bay, in which vessels may anchor in 20 or 30 fathoms water
oot of the strength of the tides, bnt exposed to a considerable swell in
easterly winds. On the NW. side of this bay there are several large
iron rings in the steep granitic shore, which were probably used for
mooring or heaving down vessels.

Tadonaaao Harbor is a bay between Rouge and Hot Points, with a
sandy l)eaoh at its head, and rather more than ^ mile wide and j^ mile
deep. The anchorage is in flrom 7 to 18 fathoms, clay bottom. Vessels
onght always to moor, and have a heavy anchor close in shore, for
the gusts from the NW. are at times exceedingly powerful, and should
the anchor start there would be little chance of bringing up again be-
fore the vessel had dragged her anchor down hill into deep water.
Besides, eddies often set into the bay, so that it would be almost im-
possible to keep a clear auchor.

The shelter is rendered complete in every direction by either land or
reefs, excepting SB., and there Red Islet, with the south coast beyond
it at no great distance, prevents any sea, of consequence eveU to a boat^
from ever entering the harbor.

Trading Post. — ^The Hudson Bay Oompany's trading post, consisting
of a good dwelling house, stores, and a small chapel for the Indians, is
sitnated at the head of the bay, and backed by ste«p, high, and rugged
hills of granite. It is the principal of those posts for trading with the
Indians which are known by the name of the ** Kings Posts," and were,
in 1829, leased to the Hudson Bay Oompany.

'wasmsmms^ms^^mism

TADOIT88AC HARBOR — ANCH0RA0E8.

221

)Hrt8 there is

■inK8, ptroiig

This undtir-

imes renders

e Chiooutiini
ng Budtienly
Cbnta slight

Df Sagueuay
) to a certain

river.
Iters the St.

wherein has
the eutranca
b Spit OD the
le wide, with
it part is be-
1 11 fathoms,
ssao exceeds
f W. point of

Point is St.
thorns water
able swell in
several large
My used for

oints, with a
) and j[ mile
•m. Vessels
n shore, for
, and should
up agaiu be-
deep water.
I almost i ra-
ther laud or
oast beyoud
en to a boat,

It, consisting
e lodiHus, is
and rugged
ling with the
I," and were,

Dirttoticos.— The buoys placed at the entrance of the Sagueuay will
be found of great assistance to a vessel beating into the river, there
being no clearing mark for the reefs on the SW. side of the entrance;
and if buoys were added to Bar Keef and the Lark Islet Spit, vessels
might beat in and out at all times with safety. On the NE. or Vaches
Point side observe, that Hot and Laboule Points in line, bearing N. 81°
W., pass over the SW. side of Vaclies Point Keef, and must be kept
open to clear it; Hot Point being the low NW. point of the harbor of
Tadoussac and Laboule a high and round-backed bill, forming a steep
headland, 4 miles above Tadoussao.

Winds from SW., round south, to NE. will enable a vessel to enter
the Sagueuay on the flood-tide. The first, which is the prevailing sum-
mer wind, will not carry her far up, since she will be becalmed under
the mountainous shores ; but the NE. wind, or wind up the St. Law-
rence, tlraws also up the Sagueuay, and is the only wind which can be
depended on for running a vessel up to the anchorages above Tadoussao.
The NW. wind often blows down the river in furious squalls, especially
in the fall of the year.

Caution.— The ebb sets rapidly over Lark Island Spit and Vaches
Point Keef, and it is dangerous to be becalmed just within eifher of
them, because the water is so deep that it is difficult to anchor. If
night be coming on, or the tide or the wind be unfavorable, anchor off
Moulin Baude or in Brnque Road, according to circumstances, and wait
for an opportunity for i unning in, unless a vessel has a pilot sufficiently
skillful to beat her in with safety.

AMCHOBAGES IN THE BA-GUENAY.

Barqua Oova, rather more than a mile above Tadoussac, and on the
same side of the river, is 400 yards deep. A vessel or two might be
moored in it.

8t Btlanna Bay and Rivar are 10^ miles up the Saguenay, and on
its SW. shore. The bay is a mile wide, and forms a harbor where a
number of vessels may ride in from 10 to 30 fathoms clay bottom,along
the edge of the bank which dries out ^ mile ft'om the shore.

8t Louia lala, 17 miles up the river, forms an excellent anchorage,
either under its east end or between it and the south shore ; the depth
of water being flrom 10 to 30 fathoms, sand and mud bottom.

8t Barthalami lala, a mile higher up, and on the opposite side of the
river, lies close to the month of the river Oaoard. A vessel or two
might be secured there ; the place being small, and the depth of water
from 6 to 20 fathoms.

8t Jaan, on the southern shore, and 24 miles up the Saguenay, is a
large bay with a small islet off its NW. point. It is If miles wide
and li miles deep. The river St. Jean and several small streams enter
at its head. Off these streams, and along the edge of the bank which
dries out J mile from the shore, there is good anchorage for many ves-
sels, in from 8 to 40 fathoms mud bottom.

u-^^^i.^^

■ji^Sgf

Ju-^

222

BAOIJENAY HIVER.

BtamlM, ou the Hame side ait 8t. Jean, and miles higher op the
river, is a large cove, ^ mile wide and l^ miles deep, with a river of the
same name at its head. At the head of this cove vessels may lie se-
curely, in from 8 to 30 fiithoms, mud bottom, and securely land-locked.

Deaoento d«a rammaa is a cove 700 yards long, witn a depth of
30 fatlioms at its entrance, decreasing to S fathoms near its head.
Boversi vcHsels might lie moored in it in great security. It is 42 miles
up tlie river, and on its northern shore.

Ahah Bay is U miles deep and from 1^ to 2} miles wide, the widest
part being at its liead where four considerable streams tiow into it. The
best anchorage is on either side of a small islet joined to the shore at
low water in the 8W. corner of the bay, and from 7 out to 30 fathomt,
clay bottom. it;

Patitaa naa, on the northern shore of the river, 52 miles from its
entrance and ^ above Cape Bast, are three small rocky islets Joined to-
the shore at low water. The bay on the east side of them forms a small
but secure anchorage. The depth of water is from to 17 fathoms,
mud bottom. The 8aguenay, which is here nearly 2 miles wide and
with a depth of 65 fathoms, is contracted to | mile by a higli rocky
point projecting from its northern shore. On the north side of the
river, from the high point to within a mile of Uoohes Point, there is
good anchorage in any depth out to 20 fathoms.

Roohea Point is 57 miles from the entrance of the river, and here the
navigation ends for shipping, but continues for schooners to Chicoatimi,
8 miles farther. The river is still 1^ miles wide at Roches Point, but
contracts rapidly above it, assuming at the same time the usual char-
acter of a river, such as mud banks ou eitiier side dry at low water, shoals
of large bowlder stones, drift trees, &c. The water also becomes fresh
when the tide is out.

CUooatimi River and Trading Post are on the south side i" ae
Baguenay, and 65 miles from its entrance. This river is the ngest
tributary to the Baguenay. It Hows 40 or 50 feet, through a narrow,
rocky, and rugged channel, oidy a short distance within its entrance.

The trading post of Cbicoutimi is one of the Kings Posts, and leased
to the Hudson Bay Company. It stands on the west side of the River
Chicoatimi at its continence with the Baguenay, and consists of a good
dwelling-house, store, barp, and inferior buildings. Potatoes and gar-
den vegetables are raised for the use of the people of the establishment.

Direotiona.— No directions are necessary for ascending the Baguenay
to the anchorages just mentioned, since there is not a single rock or
ahoal in the way from Tadoussac to the anchorage below Roches Point.

!V';

BIYBB ST. LAWRENCE. QUEBEC TO MONTREAL.

Sant Paaa. — Just above the entrance of the Chaudiere River the
St. Lawrence is rather less than 800 yards wide, between steep, high,
and partially-wooded banks, composed of grey wack6 and slate rooks.

RIVER ST. LAWRENCE — RICIILIEU RAPID.

tt»

ligberap the
Ik river of the
* may lie se*
land-looked,
til a depth of
)Ar its head.
It is 42 inilee

e, the widest

iutoit. The

the shore at

30 t'atboine,

liles from its
lots joined to-
forms a small

17 fathoms,
lies wide and
a high rooky

1 side of the
9int, there is

and here the
) Chioontimi,
38 Point, bat
> usual char-
water, shoals
ecomes fresh

I side if ne
!i the it.'gest
;h a narrow,
its entrance.
8, and leased
of the Eiver
sts of a good
toes and gar-
itablishmeut.
;he Saguenay
ingle rock or
tocbes Point.

re River the

steep, high,

. slate rooks.

The channel of the river it still farther reduced at low water by rocky
thoaU, which dry out from the shore on either side. The breadth of
the stream is then only 550 yards, bnt the depth is nearly .'iO fathoms,
and the rate of the stream at ebb about U knots. This narrow pass i»
called the Bault.

Anohorag*. — At Oarouge Point, on the northern shore, and abontft
miles above Quebec, there is an excellent anchorage ; and the river here
begins to expand into a magnificent reach, from '2 to 2^ miles wide, wtiich
extends to the westward as far as the eye can reach.

Tremble Shoal*.— The navigation of the river is devoid of all ditfl.
oulty as fur as the dangerous shoals of **ointe aux Trembles, on the
northern shore, and 18or 10 miles above '^.ebec. These shoals extend
westward for many miles up the rlvor, leaving a channel between them
and the soutliern shore, in some places only 800 yards wide. Still there
• are no ditUculties in the navigation that may not be easily overcome,
even in the largest ships, as high as Port Neuf, which is on the northern
shore, and 32 miles above Quebec.

Riohlieu Rapid. — The tirst great difllculty in the navigation is llioh-
lieu Rapid, which commences just ai>ove Port Neuf, and extends nearly
to Orondine, 41 miles above Quebec. In the narrowest part of the Rich-
lieu the channel at low water is between extensive shoals of immense
bowlder stones, and only 460 yards wide. There is water enough for
any vessel, but there is only about an hoar of very weak stream of flood,
while the ebb runs in spring tides at the rate of fully 7 knots. The
steamers regulate the time of their departure from Queb'jc so as to ar-
rive at the foot of the Richlieu with the flood tide.

Tides. — At Port Neuf the spring tides rise 14 feet, while at Orondine
they only rise 9 feet ; there is, therefore, a great diflference in the rise of
the tides at the foot and head of the Richlieu, namely, 5 feet in 9 miles,
BO that it seems that the descent in the bed of the St. Lawrence is there
very considerable.

The villages of Ohamplain and Qentilly are opposite to each other, and
68 miles from Quebec, the former being on the northern and the latter
on the southern shore. They may be said to mark the extent of the
stream of flood tide, which was not observed above the Shoals of Gentilly,
where the ordinary springs, unless assisted by an easterly gale, do not rise
above 2 or 3 feet. Here also a considerable change takes place in the
character of the coui/try, for the high banks, which had continued to
form the southern shore of the river all the way from opposite Quebec,
turn back into the country, and the shores on both sides become low and
of an alluvial appearance.

At the town of Three Rivers. 68 miles above Quebec, the ordinary
spring tides rise one foot, and it is high water, full and change, at 11^
hours. In the spring and fall easterly gales often occur with the spring
tides, and cause them to rise, it is said, a foot or two higher.

At Point du Lac, at the lower entrance of Lake St. Peter, and 7&

•MMHI

QUEBEC TO MONTREAL.

miles from Quebec, the ueap tides are almost imperceptible, and the
spring tides, unless assisted by an easterly gale, do not rise above 3 or
4 inches. The eflTect of the tides may be said to be lost in Lake St.
Pet3r, since no alternate rise and fall of tbe water, tbat could be at*
triliuted to their influence, was observed among the islands at its
heiul.

Lake St Peter. — The distance up this lake from Point du Lac to the
islands is about 18 miles, of which about 4 miles are over a flat of sand
end clay through which a ship channel 300 feet wide and with 27^ feet
water in it has been completed.

Tbe channel above Lake St. Peter is often narrow and difficult for
sailing vessels, and the current, tbe average rate of which does not ex-
ceed 2 or 3 knots, is in some narrow places of considerably greater
strength. -At th« rapid o^ St. Afary, just below the city of Montreal,
the rate of the current amounts to 7 knots, and used formerly to detain •
vessels many days waiting for a fair and strong wind to ascend ; but
the whole river, as well as Lake St. Peter, is now so well buoyed and
lighted that sailing vessels are towed night and day, without stopping,
except in fogs, through tbe narrowest parts of the channel, and tbe
whole distance from Quebec to Montreal is often accomplished in 24
hours, by leaving Quebec so as to arrive at Richlieu Rapid with the flood
tide.

Montreal Harbor. — Tbe dredges, which have so greatly improved
the navigation of the river, have also been successfully employed during
many years, as the necessity demanded, in deepening tbe harbor of
Montreal. The depth is now sufficient for vessels as large as can pass
through Lake St. Peter. Immediately above Montreal the navigation
for shipping is closed by the commencement of the rapid of Lachine or
St. Louis.

Directions. — In tbe channel between Quebec and Montreal improve*
ments have recently been made by which the channel has been dredged
to a depth of 27 feet. These improvements will necessitate numerous
alterations in the system of lights, which will be altered to show the
newly dredged channel. In the long line of river navigation which has
been briefly described, written directions would be, in most parts, to-
tally unavailing; and, in all cases, could only give, very imperfectly,
the same information which is given on the charts. These plans will be
of great use in pointing out possible improvements in the navigation,
in the selection of the best route to be pursued by vessels, and in buoy-
ing and lighting the channels to the best advantage.

Some of the lighthouses are small and portable, so that they may be
removed on the approach of winter, and thus escape being carried
away by tbe ice ; for in spring those low islets are overflowed, and the
ice, moreover, in moving down the river, often packs, forming a *' digue "
or dam, behind which the waters rise many feet, until their pressure
overcomes and bursts through the impediment with such force tbat

-mm

septible, and the
t rise above 3 or
lost in Laife St.
bat could be at-
e islands at its

)int da Lac to the
rer a flat of sand
lud with 27i feet

and difflcalt for
hich does notex-
liderably greater
iity of Montreal,
brmerly to detain •
I to ascend; bat
fvell buoyed and
vithout stopping,
channel, and the
somplished in 24
pid with the flood

greatly improved
employed daring
ng the harbor of
large as can pass
al the navigation
pid of Lachine or

lontreal improve-
has been dredged
issitate nnmeroas
tered to show the
'igatioQ which has
n most parts, to-
very imperfectly,
hese plans will be
n the navigation,
ssel8,andin buoy-

) that they may be
ipe being carried
rerflowed, and the
brmiaga"digae"
til their pressure
ih such force that

MONTREAL.

225

not only buildings would give way before it, but even many trees are
often prostrated in the low grounds, and great banks of rolled stones
are forced up by the ice on the upper ends of islands which are exposed
to the current.

Besides the lights the navigation is assisted by rough buoys, formed
of logs and attached spruce bushes, placed in the most difficult parts
of the channel. The numerous leading marks used by the pilots are
seldom permanent, or of a nature to admit of such a description as
would enable a stranger to distinguish them from many other similar
objects in their vicinity.

Time Signal. — From the tower of the harbor commissioners' build-
ing a time ball is dropped daily at noon, Montreal meau time, corre-
sponding to 5h. Greenwich mean time. The ball is dropped by elec-
tricity from the Montreal Observatory. The signal is made during the
season of navigation, but not on Sundays.

City of MontreaL — ^The position of Montreal at the head of the ship
navigation of the St. Lawrence, and near the confluence of that river
with the Ottawa, as well as its situation with respect to the United
States, make It the most important manufacturing city in the Dominion,
and there is, consequently, much activity observable in trade. In ad-
dition to Its numerous and handsome public buildings are cast-iron
foundries, distilleries, soap, candle, and tobacco manufactories, several
ship-building establishments, and machinery for steam engines. Sup-
plies of all kinds may be procured by shipping.

In the year 1886 the population was estimated to be 180,000, of whom
the greater number are of French descent.

Along the bank of the river is an extensive line of quays and ware-
houses. For vessels of 24 feet draft there is a length of 1^ miles of
wharfage; for 20 feet draft, 2 miles; and for 10 to 20 feet draft, one
mile. And, in addition, the basins of Lachine Canal in the city afford
to vessels of 18 feet draft of water a wharfage of % mile, and for vessels -
of 12 feet draft, 2g miles. All the wharves in the harbor are in the
tbrm of shore wharves and piers which are entirely submerged in the
winter. The wharfiAge in the Lachine Oanal is afforded by basins or
inclosed docks to which access is supplied by locks of 270 feet long, 45 ■
feet wide, and 18 feet deep.

Railways.— The Grand Trunk ana Oanadian Paoiflo Railways have
their headquarters in thiscity. The (/entral Vermont and Southeastern
Bailwajs connect these two systems with the railwayed' of the United
States. Besides the'-.e there are several minor roads centering here.

The United States is represented by a consul-general and vice-consul-
general.

5489 15

226

LIST OF LIGHTS.

« 5 M J) — ► ^ a

§*1

niftm

S S 3 S

S S

8 S

..M

I'"

-In

i^'F

^ j3 a I
I -rf 2

• « k

S 2

! -ll ?i I

a d

I 5 ^

1^ i

H 1^ M

fti h

fi A ii

^^4

e
•9 -e

Sis I

1 I

S S !^

e a

• I
I ^

mtm

2 S

s s

•e s

a .a

: red a
stripes.

ood; w

11 :-

t s

&i §

£s 3

S^ S

LI 5

Hi ^

1 ^M I »

I Is *"& 1
"I IS ^
5 » E ^

E S

g
'S
Ph

LIST OF LIQHTS.

227

•g

;3 s 8 s

s s s s;

S3 r:

3*3

I s 1

•8

I ^ I « it

83f

I
I

■s ^

111 ill i I

»>< h

h' h Pti (ti »{ h

•8

•s-

il 1 1
r 1 1

1 1

5
B

1 1

■li

!■-■

%»■ ■'*

.^ ^

228

LIST OF LIGHTS.

lllHIi

e S
■^ 3

•Is

§1

N'^

\ - ,. ,

e S
.s I

5ji *

■

•S
I

I
1

^1
IS

LIST OF LIGHTS.

229

i
§

s
s

I I

IMII||| I

1 «

" ^ ■^

ill

S3 a

e §f S$ 898

UK 8

■i

»5 5>

H 5

»4 ^

a5-9

a 9

1^ _

8 8 So §8 8 88 88 8

30 t^ ...

li il I

(M «N

i :
I.

'^OMIMI

280

LIST OF LIGHTS.

; ,1!!.;

S 88 tiM » S »a 8

-«li

i s a

LIST OF LIGHTS.

231

■S-g

a a

■f at

1^1

* S m

8 »

•4

j S

.a 6c

' 1

5 ^,

I I

^ ^ l» W W OB bB

3 9h

3 «i

a
1

P« h Dm

W4 M p4 M v^

iatw

.^v

232

LIST OP LIGHTS.

i;':

ii!f .

B
I

a
o

> 3

III'

llll

gfl

ml 8b 8 n

ra"? So

Mil-

4^i

K S S3

S 8

« 3 «

« 5

S
t

laj

I I

i * i

I- 111

I I

i 1

1 ^1

s & ^

il ^1 !

^ 1

S. !3

<3 i

! H i

I a

■.^.>

;* VS,'#^*^«'''> >v»(t«'-;!;*-vn>i5S *--.5:^^''i^Ti-«SS^- '

1 1

3 U

I
I

1 ^1

1^ 1^ I

LIST OF LIGHTS.

238

^Wt

184

LIST OP LIGHTS.

i ■' I.

: :i

i ';

I :3

M
M

fl^

BB-g-l

i 1

I i

i! i

I n «

« •^ p^

ill 1 1

* tS «•

1 1

I I

nil

a
■

. M 1

h I h

1 1

4 r s,

8 •= «

lip

1 •! 1

h I h

■ ^ I

^ III

LIST 01 LIGHTS.

285

im S

alp

I1 ^'p 111 I i U I

III

» s

i^a

«»

"I HP

- i^

In 'A

!i III iii

^1 III? i^ii i^L Ft :i

.a
a

i \

• %

[^11 pll P |!

i I

if
s
a
-J

-I

II I

1^^

I
§

•8

".,atifi^iail'<MiliMUSfr^<<i*ai.W.^-:^-ai<- >.

>'. ^

986

LIST OF LIOIITB.

p iiiiiiirii:

^A*

\ ..

S
r

LIST OF LIGHTS.

237

i
I

i
i

s a a 3 a a

sf]

« B S S » »

««

ill I

i I H i'

^ 3 (5 .y

^ 1

• -I ■*

I 11^ F

ill

»N »k tM

»H »M

I I

•s

Itlll

i I

^ i

I 3 I

^ S &

M s 3

•9

SfiJ

ill

2^§^ I

Sal

1!^

ill I

■)

•' >!.

■:=f

• m

ifi^i'

238

LIST OF LIGHTS.

.•:?■■

' 'Vii

•was

§w8

e
B a

S 3

^ jB S ^

r-4 vH ^H ^aCQ

S S; ;!$ S

s
a

o =

•-I

■s

E
1

is -
•-I I

2 g

a ?

111

I I

i a

■8

I I

■I M

1*8

h ^

«« k< bt h N

«5

»q

•s

i £

.2 sr'

^ I

II |6 ?l ;»

; ^r

3 a * a

g S; ?$ S

•

•a

1 1

► f

1 1 1 1

* s > ^

White
White
White,

fc« bt ^ N

T3
O

1^ 4^

I ■

ill

' I

I
I

iSil^

LIST OF LIGHTS.

239

515

ll|

ill

»-J

h
II

fa M

S^ '^

& ^

\ '

240

5.S

COALING AND BEPAIBINO FACU^ITIES.

fill

f
I

9 fi 1>

I I I

a ■ S

-i I

in I

^ I
I S

9 -o

I
I

1^1

8 5.^

III

■ ■'II

'.1

a- :3

e
i

I IP 1

8 8 8

tit

WA INN

UOMi^

^ 1^

oon Hf
33 ^

!zi

»q

lis

I I I

.a .

IP-

E a
S S

S;3

8
t

,;s,KaiKwa«aw»i^**wwi'^' ■ iWMwwguMw a

OOALINO AND BEPAIEISO FA0IUTIE9.

AVERAGE TIME OF OPENING AN

PiSM.

Harbor froMS orrr.

DlMppMraore of harbor ice.

Arrivilofttelil ice.

Dluppetininoo ol field ice.

Dopartareuflut t
fero lea mmo

Port U«wkMbnrj, Cape Broton P«b.t,IIM Apr.».lH6 Feb.3,18M

Loalabarg Harbor (KK.ariBK Cap* BrotoD Jmi.U Braakt up wtib aontberly ^bout Mtr. 17 ...

wind.

Dow B«7, Capo Breton lUral; firaooo*; three timta None, except In docks Feb.iStuSH

ialaatnTeara.

Sydney, Capo Breton Jna.l«,lMr Apr.M,18M OcBenlly in Jan

Port Hood, Capo Hretoa i Jan. 15 to Fok. 1 Apr. IS to If ay 1 Jan. 19 to Peb.l .

BaMeek, Cape^Ktoa I Jaa.B Apr.M None

I
Qeorntowa,Prin«oBdwardIalaad | Deo.M.

Feb.23,lfi|M Dec.22,1885.

About Apr. 30 Feb. 20

Apr.21 Jan..

Dee.n None

_ or«oL

Chariott* Town. PHnc* Idwatd lalaad

BaaiBMraldo, Priaee Edward lalaad I Dae. 11 ^ .

Oaacuaipeqna, Prtaoo Bdward lalaDd i JaB.a,IH7 i AprtilBSS Jao.4,i887

RlchaM&IBay. Priaee Edward lalaad ▲bvatDoe.15 About Apr. 1; bay iee often - - •■

Vaiieii; about May I About Feb. I.

With weatrrly wiDiU Jan.S.l^M...

Apr. 15 to Hay 1 Jan. I

None ■•' Jan.O

EadofApr

Mono Deo.20

Apr. M ,

MalpequcPrinee Edward laUad Not mntil eioaed by flold ice

Boaria, Priaca Edward lalaad.
Plrtoa,iroTa8e*tla

Bhadlaa^NawBniaawiak

If liaakkl Bay, Now Bnaawtok
MMppaiaa. How Bmaawtek

Caraaaattak Haw Bmawlek
OalhoMiarKaw Btnaawiek ..

OaapAHaw Bmaawtek

Cape H agda l aB, Qaa b aa

Vatkar Palat, Qaebee .

■iPtom

SkFaalaUand.

Apr. 1 i drlrea back harbor
thick and hard on May 1. ic*.
Mayl Jan. 16

...do Dee. II

May 10 Dec. 20 to IS .

Apr. 1 to May I End of Deo.,

Jaa.4tal0 Apr. 1 to 10 About Feb. I

Doo-M Apr.U But little Held Ice.

May 15 MlddleofDec.; eel

leetoproTontTea
Ing natll Jan.

Apr. 1 to Mayl Jaa.2:

...: D«o.ai

D*a.t..
Dao.1.
Dae.S.

NOM.

do.

Daa.f

Oae.M

Oae.UtaJaa.1.

Blvar taialy fraa a ai; aaly
••Ttaila*.

Apr.M

Apr. 11

MaT4 ! Hob* alnce aprioc of 1870,

I then May li.

lt«y« I H«wt

Apr.l5 ....d*

MayW ....do

Apr. 10 to 19 do

None DocS

.. do HoT.25

Jnne4,1870 Not. II

None ' HoT.SS

... do -. NoT.ie

...do Deo.4t*0

....do HoT.SStoD**.5.

Doe. 0^ mean of 4 year* Apr. 1 mean of 4 year* Not. Mi mean of • ;

OMataMyoan fbb. t* Mar., fleatiag ioa Vab.l9; dapond* upon wind. Baroly reaains aaylaagtk Opaaatall

* " * oftime.

ikaai a^Jacaat eoTc*.

▲iik*nL8.1fu|dal*a lalaa
AaMeai u . SMlSwaal Patat
Cap* Hataa

WktUBt^i'

Cap* Hir"Mai.H*wfcaadlaad
~ 'kBt^awtoudkMd

JV H*wroBadlaad ..*...

(BaMaOara), Nawfbaadknd .

Jaa.ll May 31 Deo.li..

Jaa.1 I M^IO Jaa.» May 13 Dae. IT..

Daa,li Mar.Sl Jaa.llol5 Mar. SI to A or. SO Dae.5...

D*a.»t*JaaM May8«,Mli 0*cS4,iaBT ! Junall.Uar Nor. 16'.

May 10 to June 26.

■xpMtaBantUaMt

.HawtMikUaai.

Ha>k*r.3r*w«MM«lHd .
r,H*wllMndkHid..

iHaikar.HawtNwdlaai.
TMattj Harbor, HawCMwttaad ...

Baata Harkar, Nawtkaadlaad . .
Heart* CoatHit, XawfcaadhMd.

Haiber Otaeo, Howfbaadlaad ..

M^JakM Haibar,HawCMBdkBd.

FMtylaad,Hawfbaadlaad

Guf Baa% HowllwiadUad

TNpaiay Hatbav, H*wa
Placaatia, Howlbaadkurf .

ImmUb Harkar.HowfiNadlaad.

Onadl
Harbor

HowtMndfaMd.

U Haa* Bay, Hawlbaadlaad .
Banro, Nawlbaadlaad

La Paila Harbor, Hawlbiiadlaad.
Ckaaaal, KawfoMBdlaad

Bay of lalaad* {Haaibar RItw), N*wfoaadlaad.

BeaaoB^iMawfeaadlaBd

BtohPoiat^Newlboadlaad

Oiaaaly lalaad

Balte Ua

Battle Harbar. '.«1iimIm

Jaa.tt

JaM.lt*M.

Jaa.!...;

Jaa.lt*nk.M,aTi

Jaa-tSalf.

Jaa.!

JBB.U

Jaa.M.
JaB.91.

abairtVMk.1.

Jaa.UtaVak.ia

Baialjr

Many kiwkad If

▲kaatVakl.

•aU iaaltdvaat a ttoa,
aatftma rrg il IbI»
Tator aiylt fkaa ■ t* M
yaafa.
HafW

Qatar aa*k**aa* aaldam
ftaaMtar BMMlkaB S«r
S4aya. l a — r aa a k arag*
fk«ailaB.ltaApr. IS.

AkoBt Daa. I, k«t aaalljr

VavavnaaMii __^

Ua^udkiy drill laa ftaai
aMaaaat «*Taa.

w^^wZ.

Baraly fkaaaa.

MayM.

Mays

Mayl to 10.

Doe. as. to Jaa. 10.

May 10 to June IS.

NaT. SO.

Apr. 15 to Jaa* 4. aTcragiaK

about May 10.
▲pr.tt

^y::::::r:;..:::::""

Mar.M.
Mar. IS.

Mar. 4 1* May a, aT*iaglBg

Apr. It.
Mar.ltoApr.l

Mar.M.

Apr.l.

▼ ■Mi l * eaa aaarly alway*

*at«rbyAprU.
Mot** oir witk aorthcrly

wiad, aad diaappaar* la

Mar^.

vhB* *v ■••■ > >■•■•■ <■>•>■ •••

A^Na AVo ••>•«■■■■••••■• ••■■•

D*e.Ut*Jaa.tl

Da&U. Ha<
4 waak*

Apr M

Apr. 15

May 10

Mar. 1 to 10

• ••••• •■••■••••■•■

May II

Iieb.lOtell Apr.M

Jaa. 10 Mayl to 10.

Jaa. IS to 80 1 May lte20

Jaa. 11 j M^IS

JaB.14 MayltoJnaol.

Mar. 11 May 11

VakM.,
Apr. 10 .

M«ylS.

Apr. 31 .

Apr.l ; Uneertaia ..

Apr.lS I May 15

Jaa. 10 to Feb. 20 ' MayltelO.

Dae.T

Jaa.lt* 10.

About Job. 1.

Jaa.M..
Jaa.'?"!

Dae. IS
Jaa.n.<

OacM..

Jaa.toF*kU i Apr.orMay

Fab. 10 to Apr. 10, iBMn of ' F*b.3S to Apr. SO,
IS yoai*. IS yaara.

Jaa.10 to Mar.lT,Bi«an of Mar.U ta Jnn* 7.
M y*ar*. 1 28 y

of
•f

Raraly aay. aaly witk aantk-
arly wlaa alrar to* haa
louded C^e Baee.

AbaatMar.l | AbantApr. I.

VaklS i Marts

Feb. (rare oocnrraBC*)

Barely

For a fbw day* fai Feb. i
aad Mar.

JaB.l

JaB. IS.... .......■...■>.

V H^h A0... .....*..■......

JaB.ltolO

Jaa.StoFob.lS

Jaa. to Apr.lS

Apr. 1 .

Apr.lS ,

Apr.lS

May IS

Jane 10 to SO.

JnaaM......

MayU

V aaaa l i aoaiB aad gt
ranadiaaoM
byMdiea.

Daa-M..
De«.lS.,

OpaaataUaaaaoa*
ArrlT* and d*part I

NaTlgatbm aaariy

opaafaibay.
* a *rally opoa all

Jaa.1

NaT. 10

KaT.Stall.

6489^fiM)e p. 242

IME OF OPENING AND CLOSING OF PORTS.

iDM ol fleld Ice.

Departara of ImI retmel b«-
hra Ic* MMOU.

ArriTnl of ttrat tmmI allrr
tea I

Completely or partially
cloicti.

Inlf rTal. If complctaly i-loned.

Tbicknaas of Iva.

Keniarka, anil rrcorda of previiiui
yeara.

I Dac.22,lM5.

30 Feb.20

Apr.I>.iaM AttotarraU

Maris At InterraU by Heltl lee

lilt May 1

Jaa. I to Apr. tS .
Soulbweat arm
wluler.

open

all

... About Feb.l... Qenerally In Uar At Inlerrata by fleld lee,

never by- harbor lee.

riy wloila Jan.S.l^M Apr.M,lM0 AveraReS month* eaoh year Jan.toApr

oloaed.

lav 1 Jan.l Ifayl Completely at llmea

Jan.S Apr.M liome yeara at Interrala,

other yeara oompletely.

Completely

Da«.20 Apr.ta do

Jan. IK to Apr. IS
Jan. W to Apr. IS

Jan. to Apr ....
L»«e. lOto Apr

AboiitJfeet

Northeakt arm 6 to IS Incbea.

Harbor Ice a'uuat t Incbea . . Keeord 23 yeara, open generally all

the year rouLd.
• to 10 Inches

18 Incbea

— do Mean of 30 yeara.

ajl.

Deo.ll Apr.24

DecWtoSS Apr.M

BndofDeo Mayltol*.

do.
do.
do .

Dec. 10 to Apr. 10 .

Middle of Dec.; aeldom any M«y IS At latorrala natil Feb. I .

leetopreTentTeaeelaleaT- '

ing natll Jan.

ay 1 Jaa.2'. I Apr.M Completely

Deo.31 Apr.M d«

Jan. 1 to Apr. 10
Deo. 10 to May 1 ,
plaea open later

rn^ffi!"'

l2Mltlochea Mean of 13 yeant' cloaing; remainder

mean of 31 yeara.

13ineuaa. Mean of • yeara.

Stol2 Incbea

Abuatlfect Mean of 12 yeara.

Dee.8 Apr.tO

NoT.tS I May 7...

NoT.lt I May2l..

do.
.do.

Completely (rmn Feb. 1 to
May 1.

^JalLUtoApr.S.
i Jan. • to Apr. 8 . .

NoT.M I May 12 i.

-. Mot. 18 May 8 I....00

Dee.4to8 1 Mayll i .. do

NoT.SStoDae.B I Apr.l4toMayl Oenorally la motion all wto-

I I tar.
Bof4yaM'a Nor. M^ mean of f yeara.... 1 Apr.Sl.maaaofTyaara ....1 Completely at laterTala i

Dro.8to Apr.M

Karly la Dee. to Apr. 18.
■Mly la Dee. to May 10

Oee.l8toMay8

Ooe.l8toMaT8

Dee.MtoMaTlO

Jaa.ltoApr.M

1 to 2 feet Mean of 18 yeara.

10to20inohea Mean of S yeara; ferry-boat raa in

I track eicept fhtni Feb, 8 to 18.

MtoSSlBohca i Mean of S yeara.

I to 8 feet I Mean of S8 yeara.

MtoMiachae '

ito8feet:

4feet

8feet

10 to M iachoe .

any length Opaa at all itaaona .
Dee. 18

17..
Ipr.M Dee.8...

m. NoT.ir.

28.

Funei

rune 18 MoT.M.

Dee.7

Jan. lie 10.

Apr. 18

A^.lSleliUr^'

AbontJiB.!.

May I

MajM

Miurltoio.

0«3j*«^.h.»r..tadhx

HaTigalton eloaad between
Doe. 10 and Apr. 10 1
patba aro open aboot half
MthotiMC

Ordiaary field lee.

Dae. IT to Maj 10.
OomplMaly

Jan.1 toApr.l.
Doe.toMay ....

MayltaM.

Jan. 18 1 Apr.T

Jan.? Apr.M

Dae.M
ttm.n..

Oae.M.,

kpr.N,

Jane 7,

Y eaaa l a eeme and go all year
T— ad I ionietlmea deliared
byflridleo.

......do

Doa.M..
Deals..

OpanataUaaaaoMi

AriiTo and depart at an I

NaTigatfcm nearif ahraja

opon In bay.
Gonerally open all the year

ronnd.

Jaa.l

Jaa.1 :

Not. 10

KoT.8toU

MiVKatintorralai

tar).
Mar.8

Apr.U.

Mar.8..

Apr.M.

May IS

May I

May 18

Jane 18 to M .

Coapletely 1 Doo.toMay .

.do.
do.

Oo«pMaly Jan.l8toApr.n

Jan. a to Apr.M.
Jan.8toMayU..

rob. 1 toApr.l,

OiwplHily.

At brtwata turn Jan. M
taMivU.

Attatatralai allar twenty*
Umr kona of aentkwvat
wind ^
harbor.

At IntorTalaftoBi Jan. M to
Mar.SS.

At iatorrala by toM lea . . . .

Completely oloaed twtee in

Myeaia.
At Interrala by Md loo ....

Only at IntorTala ,

At IntarTaU turn Mar. 1 to
At interrala by field ioe .. .

Coapletely.
do

At interrala.

OoMplotely flroM Fob. • lo
Mar. 9, atlntarralafkMi
Jan.UtoFA&

ItoOfcet
ISInebca.

StoSfeot.

...do

Sfoot

...do

SfM.

FebMtoMar.M.

Dee. 28 to Apr.M

Jan.toApr

Ooe.lStoMayM

Oompleteiy at Umea by field

fitolSinehea.

8tol8iaehaa.

Harbor too 1 or 2 iaebeo .

• iaehea .
4 inchca.

18 iaehea..

SIbet

8feet

StoSfeot.

Mean of 8 yeare.
Mean of IS yeara.

There ia rarely any beOTy ieo nntU
end of Dee. There ia alwaya a eban.
nel of open wator on north or aoath
aide or tbo rlTer, depending open
wlad. Wind Teloeity of 7 ■Deo per
boor aaflleient to diiTo too to aild.
ehannoL gome ti atoa o
laato amonth at a daM.

Mean of 8 yeara 1 heoTy leofkoniaboat
Feb. 18 to Apr. SO.

Mean of M yeare

Mean of M yeaia.

FloU loo baa remained antfl Joly 1
and baa diaappearod by Apr. 18.

Meaaof 10 yeara 1 acoliagatoaaaoraen-
tor all montba; other atooaMn ean
fni^iaalnaally entor.
Open at IntorTala batwoaa Apr. 1 abd

Oeen-yjllyop..

Datea Tariable
Mean of IS yeara.

Mean of 10 yeaiai noTor
■ore than 8 weeka at a "

eloaad for

Mail Bteamer nnaMa to
8 ttanea In M yeara.

enlat «n^

NaTigation cloaod only 8 or 8
M yeara.

tlmoain

NoTor froien until arriral of field loo.

INDEX.

Pue.
A.

L'Abatis 814

Abatis, Petit 814

Aooni Point CA

AgwaniisKiver 155

Abab Bay 2«

Aid Islet 143

Al'AigleCape 193,814

Airy Cape 144

AloideRook 119

Alemek Bay 96

Aleinek, Little, Bay 96

Alexander Polut 97

Algernon or South Rook 801

AlrightCape 33

Alright Island and Reef 33

Alston Point 100

American Bank 110

Amherst Harbor 34

Amherst Island 34,35

Ammonite Point 159

Anchor Ijland and Reef. 131, 138, 167

Andre, St., Bank 187

Andre, St., Church and Point. .. 188

Andromache Rocks 35

Ange Oardien Church 317

Anne Point, beacon 115

Anne, St., Bay 188

Anne, St., buoy 188

Anne,* St., Cape 114

Anne, St., Church 188,817

Anne, St., Mountains 114

Anne, St., River 115

Anne, St., supplies 4.. 115

Anne, St., shoals 188

Anticosti Island 38

Antioosti Island, aspect of coast. 38
Anticosti Island, banks off K.

coast 14

Anticostj Island, caution 41

Anticosti Island, climate 39

Antioosti Island, currents 45

Anticosti Island, direction boards 40

Anticosti Island, exportR,fl8heriea 39

AnticoHti Island, N. point, beacon 43

AntiouHti Island, passage N. of. . 14

Anticosti Island, passage S. of. . . 16

Antioosti Island, productions ... 39

Anticosti Island, provision posts. 39

Antioosti Island, S. point, beacon 40

Anticosti Island, SW. point 41

Anticosti Island, tides ... 45

Anticosti Island, W. cliff, beacon 43

Antioosti Island, W. point 43

Anticosti Island to Point deMonts 16

Antrobus Point 141

Appeetetat Bay 156

Apple Island 181

L'Archevequo Cove 64

Archibald Point 68

Arignole Bay 118

Arignole Cape and Reef 118

AspeeBay 68

Aspee Bay, anchorage 69

Aspee Bay, supplies 69

Aspee Bay, telegraph... :.< 69

Atlantic Cove 88

Audubon Isle and Point 150

AudnbonRocks 150

Augustine, Chain 136

Augustine, St., Cove 176

Augustine, St., Harbor 184, 136

Augustine, St., fishing establish-
ment V 134

Augustine, St., Port 136

Augustine, St., River 136

Ana Monohes River... 137

AylmerSonnd 143

Baddeok 73

Baddeck, supplies 78

Baddeck Bay 78

Baddeck Harbor 72

Baddeok Harbor, directions 73

Baddeck River 73

348

244

INDEX.

I'»gr

HftdNeiKhlior M

Balance Capn 1 1&

Baleiiie Harbor M

Ballaiii Head HO

Ballam Shoal HO

Baraohiii^ Harbor 77

Bar Point :.8,6«

Bar B«ef 68, IIW

Bar Stone fiS

Bit re Rook 117

Bare Rockn 14(i

Ilarnaby Inland 91,117

Biiriiaby Road, xlioal 117

Barometer, marine ft

Bar<|iie CovM 'iSl

Barra Shoal 74

Barra Strait 74

Barra Stntit, tlintctions 75

Uarra Htrait, titlea 75

Barreaii Point 112

Barrett LeAgeB 185

Barrier Reefs '..... I'ii

Burthelenii, 8t., Iiile 'HI

Bartilmqne Island 87

Bartihn(ine River 88

Ba.si 1 1 ( Coaooaclio Bay ) 15 1

Basin (Magdalen Islands) :I5

Bason River 168

Basque Cape 193

Basque Harbor( Magdalen Island) 34

Basqne Island 121

Basque Ronfs 121

BaH(|iio Islands 54,170

Basque Roa<l ■ 193

Basque Shoal 64

Basse Bay 97

Bathurst Harbor 100

Bathnrst Harbor, anchorage 101

Bathurst Harbor, bar 101

Bathurst or Indian Islet 101

Bathurst, pilots lUl

Bathurst River 101

Bathurst, tldet. 101

Batti ry Point 57

Battery Shoal 67

Bay of Rooks 143,185,19:1

Beach Point 66

Beacon Islet 130,146

Beacon Islet, recf off 130

Bear Bay, anchorage 44

Buar Head, beacon 44

BearHiU 53

Bear R er.: 44

Beanb^.-e Island 90

Psf*.

Heat^eu Hank Wi

Beanjen Mitnk, buoys 202,203

Beaujeu Bank, cbannoU 203

Beaujeu lUiik, to pass N.ol' 203,205

Beaujeu Bank, to pass S. of 203, 206

BeuHiuout churuli and mill 207,208

Beaumont Shoals 807

Beanport Bank 911

Beaver Point 102

Becket River 60

Becscie River 49

Belle ChMMse Island 203. 207

Belle Cliasse RIvMr 207

Belledune Point 101

Belle Isle Strait 123

Belle Isle Strait, ice 123

Belle Isle Strait, not recnm-

tnendeil 25

Belle Isle Strait, tides and cur-
rents 8,123

Belles Anionrs Harbor 125, 127

Belles Amours, directions. ..... 128

Belles Amours, water 127

Belles Amours Point 125,127

Belles Amonra Shoal.. 127

Bell Point 54

Bell Rock 73

Bentinok Point 67

Bergeron Coves -181

Bernache Point 97

Bersimis Point 180 .

Bersi mis Pol nt, shoal off 1 80

Borsimls River 179

Bersimii River, bar 179

Bertbier, church 198,207

Berthier, east point 207

Bertbier, east point rocks 207

Betchewun Harbor 158

Betohewnn Harbor, dir<.olionB .. 158

Betchewnn, inner harbor 158

BovisPort 71

Bevis Port, anchorage 71

BicChannel ISO

BioChannel, anchorages 119

Uio Island 118

Bic Island, anchorage 119

Bio Island, northeast reef 119

Bio Island, northwest reef 118

Bio Island, southeast reef 119

Bic Island, tides 120

Bio Island, beacons, water 118

Bio Island, west grounds * 1 19

Bic, Old, baibor 117

Bic, Old, harbor, water 118

L |:t

1 SC??

p*gf>.

■Mi, 406
a07,'i08

ao7
iill

lOD

803.807

807

101

183

nu-

ll r-

....*

8, 183
185, 187
188
187
185, 187
187
64
73
67
181
97
IHO
180
179
179
198,807
807
207
158
158
158
71
71
ISO
119
118
119
119
118
119
120
118
119
117
118

INDEX.

245

Bio, Old, road 118

Bioo(]iieti Inlet* IIH

Bloquette Channel 119

BioqiiHtto Channel, dirtntioni .. 119

Bioqiietto Island lio

BioquHtte Inland, to pass IH

Bicquette Island, reefs Ug

Big Loran Harbor 58

Big Shoal 74

Birch Channel ltt:<

Birch Islnnds 163

Birch Point, 93

Bird Island flO

Bird Rock 64

Bird Rooks 89

Bird Rooks, bank of aonndings.. 89

Bird Rocks, oantion 89

Bird Rocks, tides 37

Bird RookH to Antiooati . .... 14

Black Breaker 'i4

filaokbrook Cove M

Blackbrook Mill 86

Blaokland Point 88,91

Black Ledge 146

Black Point 53, 74, lOi, 106

Black Reef 144

Black River 80,87,193

Black Rook 53,59

Blaokrock Point 64

Blackrock Shoal 65

Blanchard Point 1^9

Blaakowitz Point 168

BlnbberCove 135

Bluff Head 138

Boatlslands 114

Bold Islet 142

Bold Rock 130,146

Bonaui Point 103

Bonanii Rocks 1U3

Bonar Head 64

Bonar Rocks 64

Bouaventnre laland » 109

Bonaventure Point 106

Bonaventnre Point, anchorage.. 106

Bonaventure River 106

BondesirCape 181

Bonue Esperanoe Harbor 185, 1'W

Bonne Esperanoe, directions 131

Bonne Esperanoe, supplies 131

Bonne Esperanoe, tides 131

Bonne Esperanoe Island 130

Boot Point 143

Boulaoeet Harbor 73

Boulardrie Island 65,70

I'h||«.

BouleHay 170

Itoule Islands 170

Uoule Islet 138

Bonlet Islet 133

BouMier Itay 147

Uowen Rooks 156

Uoyor llivor 807

BradoniBay 185

Bradore Harbor 184,186

Mrador** Harbor, aspect of uoaHt. 127

Hradore Harbor, dirootions 186

Uradore Harbor, flNhing estab-

iinhnient 184

Brudoro Harbor, tides 187

Hradore Harbor, water 186

Bradore Hills 184

Brandy Pots 184

Brandy Pots Bank 184

Brandy Pots Bank, anchorage.. 184

Brandy Pots Channel 184

Brandy Pots to the Traverse . . 191

Bros D'orOreat 64,70

Bras D'or Great, Channel 70

Bran D'or Great, directions 65

Bras D'or, Great, supplies 65

Bras D'or, Little, Channel 64

Bras D'or Lakes 73,75

Bras D'or Lake, Little 64, 73

Bras D'or Lake, Little, tides 66

Breakiug Ledge 131

BruedingCove 67

Breton Cape 58

Breton Island 47

Breton, NE. noast 69

Breton, NE. coast currents 69

Breton, NW. coast 47

Breton, SB. coast 53

Brideau Point 100

Bridgeport Harbor 62

Broad Shoal 57

Brul6 Banks 816

Brul<S Cape Ill

Brul(< Point 9«

Biyoii Island 21*

Bryon Island, fishing grounds.. 30

Brj'ou Island Reefs 39

Bryon Island, tides 37

Bryon Island, water 89

BuohanPoint 168

Buohan River 168

Bnpyage, system of 85

Burnt Cape Ledge 816

Burnt Church 88

Burnt Church Village 88

INDEX.

Burnt ItUnil .•

Bnnit point

Burnt Sbokl

Botte Ronde Hill

Butte Rumle, La Petite

Cabane Hay

Cabot Strait

Caoard River

Caooiina Beacon and Cbnroh ....

Caoonna Peninsula

Caoouna Rook

Calumet River

Cameron Island

Camille Mount

Caiupbelltown

Canard River

Cape Breton Island

Cape Breton Island, ourrents...
Cape Breton Island, NE. coast,

description of

Cape Breton Island, NW. coast,

description of

Cape Breton Island, population .
Cape Breton Island, resources ..
Cape Breton Island, S£. coast ..
Cape Breton Island, W. coast . .

Capelin Cove

Caplin River

Capuchin Cove

Oaraqnette, anohoraKe

Caraqnette Bay

Caraqnette Buy, ice

Caraquette Channel

Caraqnette, directions

Caraqnette Harbor

Caraquette Island

Caraquette, Lower and Upper..

Caraquette Shoal

Caraquette Steeple

Careening Point

Carey Po'nt

Caribou Island

Caribou Point

Carleton

Carleton Mountains

Carleton Road

Carleton Road, anchorage

Carleton Road, directions

Carleton Road, tides

Carlisle »■•.

Carlisle Point <

Caronge Point and Anchorage..

Carousel Island

Carron Point

Gary Rock

Casonp«diac Bay

Cascapediao Bay, anchorage ....
Casuapediao Bay, direotlons —
Casoapedlao Bay, settlements ..

Cascapediao River

Catalogue Lake

Catherine, St., Bay

Catherine Pond

Cat Rocks

I Caveau Point

Caveau Shoals

Ca wer, Oreat, Island

Cawee, Oreat, Island, large rocks

Cawee, Oreat, anchorage

Cawee, Oreat, Cove

Cawee, Oreat, Shoal

Cawee, Little Islands

Cawee Ledge.

Cawee Rock

Cawee, tides

Cent«n' Reef

Chain Islands

Chaleurs Bay

Chaleurs Bay, climate

Chaleurs Bay, direotlons

Chaleurs Bay, features

Chaleurs Bay, fogs

Chaleurs Bay, navigation

Chaleurs Bay, settlemenU

Chaleurs Bay, soundings

ChalenrsBay, tides

Chamean Rock ...

Champlain Village

Channel Island

Channel Patch

Channel Patch Buoy

Channel Patch Shoals

Chapel Islet

Chapel Point

CbapelRock

Charles Harbor

Charles Harbor, directions

Charles Harbor, tides

Charles Island

Charles, St., Point

Charles, St., Reef

Charles, St., River

Charles, St. Rlvor, Docks

Charleton Point ■

Charlo River

\.Vifr7yrL

INDKX.

247

3113
170
100

59
106
106
106
106
106

141

173

178

173

17;l

173

146

130

i»3

133

SiOO

300

802

159

169

168

109

1G9

311

312

102

Pacv.

OhM«4 Point 171

Gta«th»ni 0U

ChAthfttii, »<>h1 MO

Obathsm, ion 89

Oh»(h»in, poptiUtloii 89

OhAthum, rkllroMl f»

Ohatham, repkira >^

Ob»th»ni, MiippllM 89

Olutliam, t«lMKr»pli Ht*

Obftteau RlohetC'hiiroh 317

ObattoCApe 115

Ob«tt« Cape t<> Mataa River, aa-

paotofouaat 115

Cbatte River 115

Obaudiftre River 311,333

Obatiean Inland 51

Ohetican I«la:ul, anohoraKe 53

Obetioan Harlior 53

Ohetican Harbor, eiipplleii 53

Obetioan 1 (arbor, tidea 53

Obetioan Point v 53

Cbeval Point h7

Obioontimi River 333

Cbioontimi River, tidee 319

Gbiooutimi, tradioKpuHt 333

Obriatmai Island 74, 77

Ohriatuiaa Island, anoborage .... 74

Cbri stmae Island, bnoy age 74

Cbristmaa Pond 77

Oiboux Island 6U

ClbouxRook m

OlarkeCove 80

Clande River 114

Olear water Point 159

Clearwater Shoals 16*i

Cliff Islands 144, 308

Oliniate 134

Close Islet 113

Cloudberry Point 151

Cloudberry Shoal 153

Cluster Point 143

CoaooaoboBay 150

Coaooacho Bay, Basin 151

Coacoacbo Bay, directions 150

Coacoaobo Bay, tidea 151

Coaooaoho River 151

Coacoaobo River, trading post.. 151

Cook Cove, anchorage 116, 117

Cook Point 117

GodSboal 7«

Coffin Island 33,71

CofflnPoint 71

Collins' Shoal ( Mingan Island ) . . 157

Collins' Shoal (N. ooaat) 153

Coiomltier Cape IHO

Colnnibino Shoals 33

CorbeanCape 194,313

C'orlllalldi^re Rooks 60

Cormorant Cap«^ 168

Cormorant Iwlets 168

Cormorant I'oliit (Antloosti) .... 40

Cormorant Reef 168

Comiornnt Rocks 55, 147

Coaaot I'oint 77

Comlres Manic 315

Condres Island 314

Cove Island 145

Cove Point 141

CowBay 61, 78

Cow Bay, coal 61

Cow Bay, ice 61

CowPolnt 73

Cow Reef 01

Crab Island 133

Craiguish Churob 47

Craig Point 143

Crammond Island 81

Cranberry Head 64

Cranberry Point 73

Crane Island 801, 303. 308

Crane Island, Beacons 303, 308

Crane Ibland, prohibited anchor-
age 302

Crane Island Spit 808

Crane Island to Quebec 806

Crane Island to Qnebec, aucbor-

ages 813

Crescent Point 143

Crocodile Islet 150

Croix Point 171

Crooked Islands 174

CroHS Point 176

Crow Island 187,308

Crumb Island 133

Cumberland Harbor 135

Cumberland Harbor, directions . 136

Cumberland Island 135

Cnrlew Point 73, 152

Currents and tides 8

Dalbousie 104

Dalhousie, anoborage 1 04

Dalbousie, directions 104

Daihousie, supplies 104

Dalhousie, tides 105

Dalbousie Harbor 103

Dalbousie Island 103

i-K-i,-/.' ^'^'--rV «■"*.■■ Mi^'^-i^-pi"

':.fmi^iiii'fia^e!as^^jft^»admhA.%. V"^^^^^ "

248

INDEX.

Dalhouuio Mountain

Dalhousie Point

Daly Island

Daily Point

Daniel Hill

Daniel, Port

Daniel, Port, anchorage —

Daniel, Port, supplies

Dartmouth F.i ver

Dauphin, Cape

Dauphin, Port

Dead Cove

Deaduian Islet

Dean Shoal

Demers Rock ■

Demoiselle Hill

Denis, St., Point

Denny River

Derby Point

d'Espoir, Cape

Descente des Femmes Cove
Deviation of the compass.

Page.
103
103
142
63
107
108
108 I
108 I

139

48
185

33
188

74
109

1
D.able, Cape 187,188

Page.

60
31
31

Diamond Harbor

Dick Rook

Dike Island

Diver Islet

DockPoinf

Doctor Island

Dog Rooks

Dog Islands

Dogs, Cape

212

140

134

133

193

Dona Point 98,100

Double Island 73

Douglas Roadstead, town Ill

Douglastovrn 89

Doyle Islands 143

Doyle Reef 32

Duck Rock 59

Duflfus Point 64,71

Dukes Island 135,136

Dumpling Island 81

Duncan Head 65,71

Dunscombe Rook 202

Durantaye Point 207

Duthie Point 106

Dyson Pond 62

East Cupe (Saguenay River) ....

East Harbor

East Island

East Point

East Rooks 68,170

Eastern Narrows 216

Ebonlements Bay 194

Ebonlements, Mount 194,214

Ebonlements Settlement 194

Echafaud Islet 193

Eden Islands 142

Eddy Rock 64

Egg Island 86,174

Egg Island, anchorage 175

Egg Island, directions 175

Egg Island, tides 175

Egg Island, water 174

Egg Rocks 136

Egiuont, Cape 68

Eider group 133

Ellis Bay 42

Ellis Bay, anchorage 42

Ellis Bay, directions 42

Ell Is Bay, provision depot 40

Ellis Bay, reefs i2

Emersion Point 47

Emery Island 150

EnglishBank 188

English Bay 177

English Point 174

Enter Islet 135

Entrance Island I'^O

Entry ."Grand, Harbor 32

Entry Island 35

En try Island, anchorage 35

Entry Island, directions 37

Entry Island, supplies 35

Esouminao 82

Escuminao Point 82

Escnmipac Point, reef

Escuminac Point, tides

Eskiscogumic

Esqnimine Isiets

Esquimaux Bay 124,132

Esquimaux Bay, fishing estab-
lishment 124

Esquimaux Bay, channel 132

Esquimaux Bay, harbor 132, 161

Esquimaux Bay, directions 161

Esquimaux Bay, supplies tCl

Esquimaux Bay, tides 162

Esquimaux Bay, harbor islands.. 129, 160

Esquimaux Island 129, 132, 161

Esquimaux Point 159

82
77
lUl

Page.
)r).... S»2
60
31
.... 31
.... 68,170
216
194
.... 194, '214
194
193
142
64

86,174

175
175
175
174
136
68
133

42
42

150

188

177

174

135

I'O

, 35

181

1)24,132

; cstab-

124

132

132,161

as 161

lei

162

ilauds.. 129,160
....129,132,161
159

INDEX.

249

Page.

Esqnimanx River 132

Etaiuamu River 124, 147

Etamarau River, trading post

Etang du Nord Islet

Eternity Cove

Etienne, St., Bay aud River. .
Eug&ne, St., Churcli

Fader Point.

Fair Island

Fall River

FalHe Bay beach

Fatlier Point

Father Point, bank of soundings

Father Point, pilots

Fin Rooks

Fish Harbor

Fish Islet

Fish, Little, Harbor, fishing es*

tablishuient

Fisherman Channel

Fisherman Ledge

Fishery Cove

Fishery Point

Five- Leagues Harbor

Five-Leagnes Point

Flat Island

Flat Islands

Flat Point

Flat Rock

Flat Rocks

Flfnrant Point

Flint Island

Flodalsland —

Flowerpot Colnnius

Flowerpot Rock

Fogs

Forks Lake

Fort Island

Fort Rocks

Fort, Old, Bay

Fort, Ol'i, Channul

Fort, Old, Island

Foul Rock

Fourcli^ Bay

Fonrch^ Head

Fourchfe Inlet

Four- Fathoms Ridge

Fonr Rocks

Fowler Point...'.

Fox Bay

Fox Bay, anchorage

Fox Gully

147

222
221
198

67
13iJ
168

61
177

19
141
137
130

1S4

98
9rt
64
49
128, 129
1,»8
138
138 ;
47!
110 i
127 I

ir- !

62 !

81 I

16:) I

110 ]

4 '

81 I

- 57 I

132 i
125, 13 i I

133 i
132 I
142

167

133

102

Page.

Fox Island 83

Fox Islands 137

Fox Point 44

Fox River 113

Fox River, supplies 113

Frambois Cove 55

Frambois Rock 55

Frambois Shoal 55

Francois, St., Church 216

Frazer Point 71

French River 67,86

French River Point 83, 86

French Village 83,86

Frigate Point Beacon 113

Fright Channel and Island 160

Gabarus Bay 55

Gabarns Cape — 53,56

Gabarus Cove 56

Gabarus Cove, anchorage 56

Gabarus Cove, directions 56

Gabarus Cove, supplies 56

Gabarus Cove, tides .56

Gauiache River 42

GardeRock 157

Gasp6 Basin Ill

Gaap6 Basin, cautiou 112

Gusp^ Basin, consul 112

Ga.'p^ Basin, supplies 112

Gti8p<5B»,r 110

^asp6 Bay, anchorage 1 10

Gasp^ Bay, caution 112

Gaspi$ Bay, winds 112

Ga«p^Cape 110

Gasp^ Cape to Cape Chatte, as-
pect of coast 112

Ga8p6 Harbor Ill

Gesp6, Little 110

General remarks 1

Genevieve, St. , Harbor 153, 157

Genevieve, St., Harbor, directions 157

Gteaevieve, St., Harimr, Hiipplies. 157

Genevieve, St. , Island 156

Ghjnevieve, St , Island, tides 158

Genevieve St., Mount 156

Gentilly Shoals 223

Gentilly Village 823

George, Cape 76

George Island 78,80

George, St., Cove 110

Giles, St., Anne & 198

Giles, St., Point 176,178

Gi!lis Point 73,78

,-.■. \j&rt-;.^-'>»;iy:^«fe\sv.:«K.fi«!^'a^^attj^*'1^»MaCi>i»*,;':V-%:T^^

.^■^■■^?? tU^iMi'j^'^^avi.'M

'^ -^

250

INDEX.

Page.

130

176

17«

176

«0

Goose Cape 194,213

Gillis Shoal , ....

Gillivray Point

Glaoe Bay

Goddard Islet and Rook

Godbcut River

God bout River, anchorage

Godbout River, trading post.. ..
Gooseberry Pond.

Goose Cape, anohorage

Goose Island

Goose Island Meadows

Goose Island Reef

.-Gore Islands

Goufre River

Grand Ause

Grand Entry Harbor

Grand Island

Grand Metis Bay and River.
Grand Pabos

194
201
302
201
141
214
52
32
131
116
108

Grand River 54,109

Grand Point ( Belle Isle Strait) . . 125

Grand Point Reef 125

Grande Gr6ve 110

Grande Islands 11:^7

Grande Matte River 114

Grande Point 213

Grandoon Island 88

Grange Rook 150

Great Anse 98,101

Great Anse Bay 101

Great Bird Rook 29

Great Bras D'or 64,70

Great Bras D'or, anchorage 64

Great Bras D'or, cantion 66

Great Br.is D'or, channel "0

Great Bra.i D'or, directions 6.5

Great Bras D'or, Lake 75

Great Bras D'or, supplies 65

Great Bras D'or, tides 65

Great Pabou 108

Great PiMKl 113

Great Shag Rock 59

Great Stone 148

Green Island 57, 80, 121, 159, 160, 186

Green Island, anchorage 121, 186

Green Island Beacon 183

Green Island Reef 1^1,186

Green Island, tides 121

Green Island to Brandy Pota 189

Qreenlj Island 123

Greenly Island to Cape Whittle,

coast ,... 123

Greenly Island to Cape Whittle,

climate 124

Page.
Greenly Island to Cape Whittle,

inhabitants 124

Greenly Island to Cape Whittle,

fisheries 18*

GreenPoint 73,98

GreenRock 55

Grdlons, Rocher aux 202

Gr6ve, Grande 110

GribanneCape 214,216

Gritfln Cove and River 113

Griffin Cove, supplies 1 13

Grindstone Island 34

Grondine, tides 223

Oros Cap 36,62

Orosse Island 206,208,210

Grosse Island, quarantine anchor-
age 208

Grosse Island, tail 210

Grosse Isle (Magdalen Islands) . . 32

Grosse Patch 208

Grosse Rock 194

Guarde Point 105

Gnll Island 160

Gull Islet (Labrador) 139

Gull Islet (Magdalen Islands) .. 36

Gull Ledge and Rock 125

GulnareShoal 180

Gun Island 148,157

Guyon Island 56

Haddock Bank 65

Ha-ha Bay (Bic Channel) 118

Ha-ha Bay (Labrador) 137

HaUliinand Cape HI

Hamelle Harbor 147

Harbor Inland 164

Harbor Point 66,71,127

Harbor Rock 5&

HarborShoal 57

Hare Harbor 141

Hare Harbor, anchorage 142

Hare Harbor, directions 141

Hare Harbor, supplies 14!*

Hare Island 184

Hare Island, anchorage 185

Hare Island Bank 184

Hare Island Reefs 183

Harrington Islands 143,144

Harry, Old, head 32

Haulover 76

Hay Island 60.88

Haystack Island 208

Head bay Cove 81

Heath Point 40

fMi

*!t.

Page.
Iii4

135

73,98

20it

110

214,216

113

223

36,52

5,208,210

20»

210

308

194

105

160

139

125

180

148, 157

65
llc>
137
111
147
164
,56,71,127
55
57
141
142
.. • 141
14ii
184
185
184
183
.. 143,144
32
76
.. 60,88
208
81
40

INDEX.

Heath Point, anohorafce

Heath Point, provision depot .. .

Heath Point, reef

Hector Hill

Hector Point

He£fernan Point

Henry, Cape, Reef

Henry Island -•-

Heron Island '.

Heron Island , anchorage

Heron Channel

Heron Rcrok

Herring Cove.....

Herriot Isles

Hertford Island

Hertford Ledge

High CliflF Point

High Rook

Horseshoe Shoal

Horse, White. Reef

Hospital, Cape

Hospital Rock (Magdalen Isl-
ands)

Hospital Rock (Gk)0Be Islpnd).. .

Hottears River...

Honse Harbor

House Island

Hnckleberry Gaily

Huckleberry Island

Hulk Rock

Hume Islet

Hunting Island

Page.

42,43

101

102

141

36
202
16")

33
131

8-i
163

73
157

Island Harbor

Island Point

L'Islet C'mrch

L'lslet Cross

L'Islet, life-boat

L'Islet Pier

L'Islet, signals

Isthmus Cove

Isthmus Cove, witor.
iHthrans Point

Ice 1-4

Icebergs 3

Ice bridge. 2

Ice signals 27

Ignace, St., Cape 198, 199

Ignace, St., Church 198,199

Iijnace, St., pier 19»^

Ignace, St., Railroad 198

Hot Voiub 220

Indian Bay 62,72

Indian Bay, anchorage 62

Indian Bay! coal ^ 62

Indian Bay, tides 62

Indian Brook 68

Indian Island 101

ladian Point 76,105,106,157

Ingouish Bay 68

Ingonish Island 68

Inner Islet 133

Iroquois Poiut 188

Jane Point

.Jean, St., Bay

Jean, St., Church

Jean, St., Pier

Jean, St., Railroad

Jean, St., River

Jean, St., Shoal

Jeremy Island .;

Jeremy Island, trading post

Jerome Ledge

Joachim, St., Church

John, St., Mount

John, St., River (Labrador coast)
John, St., River (Labrador), as-
pect of coast

John, St., River (Labrador), cau-
tion.

^obn, St., River (Labrador), lo-
cal <tttractiou of shore

Johnson Cove

Johnson Harbor

Joli Port

JoU Port Railway

Joli River

Jones House and Point

Joseph, St., Cape and Shoal

Joseph, St., Church

Joseph, St., Point

Judique Bank •.

I Judique Church

Judique Pond

Judique Shoal

Just au Corps Island

Kamourasoa Bay

Kamouraf .** Bay, anchorage..

Kamourasi... ChurcL

Kbmourasca Islands

Kamourasca Islands Beacons . .
Kate Point

251

Page.
13»
67
198
199
198
198
199
12»
129
48

65
221

198.210'
198
198
321
203-
180
180
5»
217
166
165

186-

166>

166
78
77
198
19»
199-
125^

■!=-<*

'15
48
48
49
47
49'

187
187

ler

187

187
49'

252

INDEX.

Page.

Katon Pond.. 64

Kegasbka Bay and Point 7 ^>

Kegashka Bay, directioua 152

Kegoshka Bay, supplies 152

Kegasbka River 153

Kelly Cove 64

Kelly Cove, anchorage 64

Kelly Point 74

Kelly Shoal 70

Kemp Head 71,73

Kenuington Head 55

Kettle Rock 147

Kidstou Island 72

£..

Labaie Bank 214

Labaie,Cape 213

Laboulo Point 221

Labrador, coast, climate 124

Labrador, coast, fisheries 124

Labrador, coast, inhabitants,

trade 124

Lac, Point da 223

Lachine Canal 225

Lafleur River 210

liake Island 14«

Lalime Point 104

Lamoucbe Bank and Channel . . . 21'^

Lansecoiu Island 58

Large Island 162

Large Channel 163

Large Rooko 173

Lark Islet 130,192

Lark Islet Spit 192

Lark Patch 192

Lark Point 1*12

Lark Reef 192

Laurent, St., Church 208,211

Laurent. St., Point.... 211

Laval Bay 180

Laval Bay, anchorage 181

Laval Island ...'. ,,. 180

Lawler Point 04

Lawreno-, St. , Cape 49, 53

Lawrence, St., Bay 53

Lawrence, St., Gulf 2,212

Lawrence, St., Gulf, directions

across and up the Estuary . . 12, 18, 21, 24

Lawrence, St., River, caation... 25
Lawrence, St., River, currents

and tides 9-12,24

Lawrcncf, St., light and buoy

regulations 18

Lawrence, St., pilots 19

Page.
Lawrence, St., River, Quebec to

Montreal 289

Lead-in Point 69

Leagues Roef 128

Leander SLoal 109

Ledge Point, 157

Ledges Island Rock, &o 125

Leggat Shoals 88

Levis Point i 208

Levis Point, docks 242

Levis Point Reef 208

Levis Point Shoal 211

Lieutenant Pond 74

Lighthouse Point 57

Lights, period of exhibition .... 12

I Lights, Aconi Point 287

' Lights, Algernon or South Ruck. 238

'■ Lights, Amherst Island 234

I Lights, Ange Gardieu 239

I Lights, Anne, St 227

I Lights, Anne d^ Beaupr6, St 239

Lights, Anticosti Island 2.35

{ Lights, Auticosti Island, Bagjt

BiufiF 235

Lights, AnticoBti Island, Heath

Point 235

Lights, Anticosti Island, SW.

Point 235

[ Lights, Anticosti Island, W. Point 235

I Lights, Bartiboque 229

; Lights, Basque Port 233

: Lights, Bathurst Harbor 231

j Lights, Belle Chasse 238

I ]jigh(i>, Bellonis Point 231

I Lights, Bersi mis River 236

I Lights, Bicquette Island 237

I Lights, Big Shippegan Qnlly .. . 230

I Lights, Bird Islaud 227

Lights, Bird Rock 234

Lights, Black Rock Point 227

Lights, Blanc, Cape 233

Lights, Boar Island i>33

Lights, Bonami Point 231

Lights, Breton Harbor 233

Lights, Brandy Pots 23/

Lights, BrnU, Cape 2:{8

Lights, Burin Island 232

Lights, Caraquette Island 231

Lights, Campbelltown , 231

Liphts, Carey Point 227

Lights, Cheticamp Island 228

Lights, Carleton Point 231

Lights, Carousel Island 235

Lights, Chatte, Cape 235

INDEX.

25a

Page

222

128

109

157

125

208

242

208

211

227

238

234

239

227

239

235

235
235
229
233
231
238
231
236
237
230
227
234
227
233
«33
231
233
23/
238
232
231
231
227
228
231
235
235

P«K»t

LiKhts, Cibonx Itilaud 227

Lights, flifton 230

Lights, Cow Bay 226

Lights, Crane Island 238

Lights, Oalbonsie til

Lights, Dalhonsie Island 231

Lights, Eastern Harbor 228

Lights, Egg Island 235

Lights, EDtr> Island 23 1

Lights, d'Espoir, Cape 231

Lights, Escuminao Point 229

Lights, Fame Point 23ri

Lixhts, t'amille, Ste 238

Lights, Father Point 236

Lights, Flint Island 226

Lights Fox Island 229

Lights, Fo. .une Bay 233

Lights, Francis, 8t 238

Lights, Giibarus 226

Lights, GH8p6 Bay 234

Lights, Goosv. Oape 2;17

Lights, Grand Narrows 227

Lights, Grand Kiver 231

Lights, Green Island 237

Lights, Grindstone Island 2:<t

Lights, Guion 226

Lights, Harbor Point 233

Lights, HarpersPoint 230

Lights, Hay Island 229

Lights, Heath Point 235

Lights, Hermitage Bay 233

Lights, Heron Island 23 1

Lights, Hood Port 228

Lights, Horseshoe Bar ¥29

Lights, Ingonish Harbor 227, 228

Lights, Ireland Island 233

Lights, Jean, 8t 238

Lights, Kainoarasoa 237

Lights, Kidstc^n Island 227

Lights, Lamalin Harbor 232

Lights, Larlc Islet (8agnenay).. 237

Lights, Lanrent St., Point 23b

Lights, Lawrence Cape, S* 228

Lights, Lingan Head 226

Lights, Little Narrows 227

Lights, Little Bellednne Point .. 231

Lights, Louisburg 226

Lights, Lew Point 226

Lights, Mabou 228

Lights, Macqnerean Point 231

Lights, McKen/.ie Point 227

Lights, McKinnon Harbor ieti

Lights, McNeill Beach 227

Lights, Magdalen Cape 235

I. I Page.

Lights, Manicouagan Shoal 2.36

Lights, Margaree Harbor 228

Lights, Martin River f. 235

Lights, Mary's Bay, St 232

LighU, Matane River 236

Lights, Menadon 226

LighU, Mi).is Point 236

Lights, Middle Island 229

Lights, Miscon Island 230

Lights, MorienBay 226

Lights, Neguac Gnlly 221>

Lights, Nenf, Port 237

Lights, New Jlle. 239

Lights, North Cape 228

Lights, Oak Point 229

Lights, Origneanx Point 237

Lights, Paspebiac Point 231

Lights, Panl.St., island 234

Lights, Panl,8t.,Bay 237

Lights, Perc^ Hay 231

Liglita, Perroquet Island 235

Lights, Peters Inlet, St 227

Lights, Petit Rocher 231

Lights, Pierre, St 239

Lights, Pierre Island, St 232

Lights, Pilgrim, Long 237

Lights, Pine Cape — 232

Lights, Piper Cova 227

Lights, Placentia Harbor 232

Lights, Plate Point 93C

Lights, Point de Monts 236

Lights, Pokemoiiohe 230

Lights, Pnkesiiedie Island 230

Lights, Portage Island 229

Lights, Preston Beach 229

Lights, Race Cape 232

Light*, Ruy Cape 233

Lights, Red Island Bank 237

Lights, Ri vi^re da Lonp 237

L'.guts, Rose Blanohe Point 233

Ligbt<<, Rongfl Cape 238

Lights, Rosier Cape 234

Lights, Sagnenay River 237

Lights, Sant^sprlt Island 22C

Lights, Scatari Island 226

Lights, Sheldrake Island 229

Lights, 8hippegan Harbor 230

Lights, Stone Pillar Island 238

Lights, Sud River 2.38

Lights, Sydney Bar 226

Lights, Tabnsinta« Gully 230

Lights, Tracadie Gully 230

Lighta, Traverse 237

Lights. Yin Island 229

HMHawnua.'

■i,^'^Af^^:i^^^^it^lAiili^^t^/'^^^^^'•^JM'0^i^'^^^^

X iiiHU?' '

•4^

254

INDEX.

Lighta, Why oooamagh

Link Islet...

LinzeeCnpe

Lion Island .'

Lion's Head

Little Fish Harbor

Little Gasp^

Little Harlmr

Little Loran Harbor

Little Pabos

Little Rivor

Little Shag Kock

Lobster Bay

Lobster Bay, anchorage

Lobster Bay, d irections

Loohinore Harbor

Long Beach..

Louglsland

Long Point .

Iiong River ..

Long Spit

Lougr. cl'ite, Ic

Loon Jr.--ik:. — ,

Loran iUnv^ ....

Lonifc, St., Ik';'

Louisa .^larboi

Lonisa Barbor, cu jotiona

Lonisburg

Lonisbarg, coal ....

iiouisburg, description of

Louisbnrg, ice

Lonisburg, pilots

Louisbnrg, supplioa

Lonisburg Harbor

Louisbnrg Harbor, anchorage ..
Lonisburg Harlrar, directions ..
Lonisburg Harbor, northoast

cove -.

Louisbnrg Harbor, tides

LonRoad

Loup Bank

Loup Point

Loup SLvei'

Loup River, anchorage

P«g«!.

287

i:u

130

:U5

1-24

110

lOrf

106

133, 174

174

134

137

47, ie4

153

216

151

221

143

57
58
143
18C
185
105,186
186

71
216
80
80
80
80
80
73
73
73
73
75
64
143
76
75
71
81
MacleodPoiut 67, rj

McKarlnnd Point

Mtiuheux River

Mulnnis Point

Mclunis Shoal •

Mi'Iiitosh Cove

MoIntuHli Islet

Mcintosh Islet, anchorage

Muciver Bank

Maciver Island. ....

.Maciver Point

McKay Point

Mackeane Point

Mackenzie Point

McKiunon Cape

McKinnon Point

MoKinnon Sboal

McLean Point

^Macteod Creek

Macnab Creek

Maophee Island . . .

Macphee shoal

Maopherson House
Macpherson Point .
Maoquereau Point.
McRae Islet

, 76

202

108

Macrae Point 71,76,80

Madame Banks 210

Madame Island 208

M,<dameReef 208

MadDickRock 59

Magdalen Cape

Magdalen Islands

Magdalen Islands, anchorage , .

Magdalen Islands, ban

Magdalen Islands, climate .....

Magdalen Islands, Aeaeiiptien. .

Magdalen Islands, directi«as...

Magdalen lalMids, population .

Magdalen Islands, seals

Magdalen Islands, ^^plias — .

Magdalen Islands, tides

Magdalen Ei^er

Magdalen River, current

Ma.!' tc Mo a< . -jtion of shore.

MaRir.. Islet

MiMtl^ <) Bay and Point .

Mai;;- > Bay, anchorage

Magpie River

Magnacha Point

Magnacha Spit

Maillard, Cap* 198,814

Maitland flat

M^jorReef... 144

114
31
37
31
31
30
37

31
31
37
114
114
1
81
167
167
167
103
103

71
316
80
80
rtO
80
80
73
73
73
73
75
64
143
75
75
71
81

... 67,r.i
76
77
74
202
74
lOB
80

..71.76,80

210

208

114

167

103

108

.... 198,814

144

INDEX.

255

MalaK<iwatchkt Basin

Malagawatr^kt, direotions

Malagawatohkt Harbor

Malagawatohkt Point

Mai Bay

MaluolinCove

Malcolm Point

Mai Little Bay

Manioouagan Bar

Manicoungnn Bar, tides

Manioouagan Bay

Manicouagan Peninsula

Manioouagan Point

Mauicouagan Point, current —

Manicouagan River

Manicouagan River, anchorage..

Manicouagan Shoal

Manicouagan Shoal, tidal streams

Mauiton Point

Manitou River

Maniton River, anchorage

Manitou River, directions

Manitou River, wator

Manowin Island

Marand Rocks

Marble Point

Marcelle Point

Margaree River

Margaret Island

Margaret, St., bay

Margaret, St., Bay, anchorage..

Margaret, St., Point

Margaret, St., River

Margaret, St., tail

Marguerite, St., River

Mark Point

Marmen Rock ,...

Marsh Island

Martin Cape...<

Martin Cape, anchorage

Martiniere Point

Mary, St., Clifife

Muy, St., Cliffs, beacon ....

Mary, St., Islands end Ree& —

Matane

Matane, Little, settlement

Matane, Paps of

Matane River

Matane River, anchorage

Matane River, pilots ~

Matane River, supplies

Matte, Grand, River

Meadow Island

Meat Cove

Page.

109,194

194

178

vtn

178

17H

178

17fi

178

168

167

168

108

170

211

208

173

172

209

219

128

185

111

194,213

194

308

. 144,145

116

115

116

114

111

Meat Cove, telegraph 53

Mecattina, Cape 138,140

Mecattinn Cove, Little

Mecattina Harbor

Mecattina Harbor, directions
Mecattina Harbor, supplies..

Mecattina, High Laud

Mecattina Island, Qreat

141
138
139
139
140
137

Mecattina Island, Little 140,143

Mecattina River, Little 141

Menadou Bay 58

Menadou Harbor 58

Menadou harbor, tides 59

Mfniuloii Passage 59

Menadou Passage, directions for, 59

Menadou Passage, tides 60

Mermot Islet and Ledge 133

Metis to Qreei) Txlaud, anchorage, 117

Metis, Grand, Hay tl6

Metis, Grand, River 1 16

Metis, Little, Bay and River — 116

Metis, Little, Point 116

MeuIeCape 33

Men le Rocks 33

Michaux Cape 53,115

Michaux Cove 54

Michaux Cove, anchorage 54

Michaux Cove, directions 54

Michel, St., Bay and Church .... 207

Michel, St., Point 207

Mid Shoal 81

Middle Bank (Hare Island) 185

Middle Bay (Labrador) 128

Middle Channel (Traverse) 197

Middle Ground 87,104,185

MiddleHead 68

Middle Island 89,208

Middle Islands (Labrador) 144, 146

Middle Ledges and Point 128

Middle Patch 131

Middle Reef (Mingan Island ) . . . . 162

Middle Reef, channel lo3

Middle River. ..».= „,,, 72

Middle Rock and Beacon 201

Middle Shoal 65,185

Middle Traverse

Militia Point

Mill Cape ••

Mill Creek

Mille Yaches Bay

MilleVaches Point

Mille Vaches Shoals

Mill Island

Milne Reef

197

78
76
48
181
181
181
208
150

ifiiiaifr I., iy-!Wf^'«^^^"-

256

INDEX.

Minen Point

Mingan Channel

Miogan ^(arbor

Minitan Harbor, Uireotions .

15«
156
16:)

Mingan Harbor, trading post . . . 165

Mingan Islands 156,163

Mingan Jslands, banknof sound-
ings

Mingan Islands, supplies — ...

Mingan Islands, tides

Mingan Patch

Mingan River 156,165

MiraBay 60

MiraLake 61

Mira River 60

Mirainibhi Bar 83

Miraniichi Bar, buoys 83,84

Mirainiohi, direotions '*5

Mirainichi, pilots 83

Mlramiohi, tides 84,90,91

Mirainichi, Inner Bar Ki

Miraniiobi, Inner Bar,auchorage. HA
Mirainichi Inner Bar, buoys.... 84
Miraniiobi, Inner Bar, ship chan-
nel 83,87

Miramichi Bay 82

Mirainichi Bay, tugs 83

Miramichi, Inner Bay 86

Miramichi River 88,90

Miramichi River, description
Miramichi River directions —
Miramichi River, NW. arm . .,
Miramichi River, SW. arm —

Miscou Anchorage

Miscou Banks

Misoon Channel

Miscou, directions.

88
88
90
90
93
93
95
95

Miscou Flats 93,95

Miscou Onlly ., 95

Miscou Harbor 95

Miscou Island 93

Misoon Shoal 96

Miscou, tides 96

Mistanoque Bay 134

Mistanoque Harbor 134

Mistanoque Harbor, directions.. 135

Mistanoqne Island..... 134

Mistassini, or Great Stone 148

Mizzenette Ledge 98

Mizzenette Point 98,100

Mizzenette Sands 98

MoiM« Bay 169

Moisic Point 169

Moiaic River 169

Page. Pag*.

64 i Moisic River Bar 16»

164 Mnisio River, tides 170

163,165 .Moisio River, trading post 170

165 Moisic Rock 170

Moisic Rock, mark 170

Moisic Shoal 1 170

MoneyPoint 53

Moiiiao Island 161,164

Monr. Loins River 114

Montreal 284

Montreal consul 225

Montreal, directions 224

I Montreal Harbor 224

! Montreal, population 225

Montreal, railroads 9i^

I Montreal, time signal 225

[ Monts, Point de 175

Monts, Point de, aspect of coast. 176

Monts, Point de, caution 17, 175'

Monts, Point de, current 11, IH

Monts, Point de, light-house.... 17
Monts, Point de, to Bioquette Is-
land 17,19,21

Monts, Point de, to Qreen Island . 21

Moody Point 87

Moque Head 58

Morien Bay 61

Morien Cape 61

Morrison Head 80

Moss Creek 81

Moulin Baude Anchorage 192

Montauge Island 161,164

Murdoch Point 87

Murdoch Spit 87

Murr Islets 138, 140

Murr Rocks 138

Murray Bay . 193

Murray Bay Anchorage 193

Murray Bay, settlement 193

Murray Bay, tides 194

MuBbkoniatawee Bay 155

Mnsquano Point 153

Mnsquarro River.... 152

Mussel Hank 105

Mutton Island 138

Nabesippi River 156

Nabesippi trading post 155

Nag Rock -57 .

Napan Bay 87

Napan River 87

Napetepee Bay 134

Narrows, the 19&

ast.

16»

170

1({I,164

114

224

825

224

225

175

176

... 17,175

... 11, W

Is-

...17,19,21

knd. 21

... 58

192

... 161,164

... 138,140

138

... . 193

193

194

156

153

152

105

13»

155
155

134

19»

INDnX.

Narrows, Church

Narrowa, Point

Naab River

Natashqnnn Banks

Nataahquan, Little, Harbor

Nataabquan, Little, Stream

Natasbqiian, Littif, Stream, aet-

tlemeut

Natasbqiian Point

Nataahquan River

Nataabquan River, trading post.

Nnal Cove

Neering Rock

Neguac Oiilly

Neguao, Lower

Neguac, Upper

Neguao villages

NeilbanCove

Nelsontowu

Neptnne Kook

Nest Rook

Netagamu Islands and River....

Neuf, Port

Nenf, Port, River

Nenf, Port, River, sanda. .......

Nenf, Port, trading post

Newcastle

Newport

Niapiaoa Channel

Niapisca Island

Nicholas, St., Cape

Nicholas, St., Harbor

Nicholas, St., Harbor, anchorage.
Nicholas, St., Harbor, caution ..
Nicholaa, St., Harbor, direotiona.
Nicholaa, St., Harbor, water....

Nicholas, St., River

Niobe Shoal

Nipiaighit Bay

Nipiaighit River

Nob lalet

Noire Point

Noir Point

North Baain

North Cape

North Cape, anchorage, water ..

North Cape, Fooka

North Channel

North Channel, anchorage

North Channel, directions. ......

North Channel, tldea

North Channel, ^elow Coudrea. .

North Channel, direotiona

North Channel, directions, tidea.
6489 17

1(»8
15l<
164
164

155

149, 153

154

88, iH

88,91

216

148

144

181,223

181

108

161

162

176

177

119

127

101

100

142

220

32,37

197,213

198

. 217

206,217

194

195

Paje.

North Chanofll to Quebec ....... 213

North coaat of Gulf 123

North coast of Oulf, aspect of.. . 123, 153

North coast of Onlf, oliiiiate of . . 124

North coast of Gulf, cod fishery . 125

North coast of Gulf, inhabitants. 124

North coast of Onlf, tides 154

North Cove 81.127

Northeast Cape 31

Northeast Reef 174

NorthPoint 43,53,93

North Point, beacon 43

NorthPond 69

North Rooks 174

North shore, below Coudres Is-
land 191

North Traverse 216

North Traverse, tides 217

Northwest Bird Rock 29

NorlhwestCove 60

Northwest Bo wen Rook 166

Norton Point lOO

Norton Shoal lOO

Notre Dame Church (Eboule-

iiients) 200'214

Nouvelle Point 107

Nouvelle River 108

Oak Channel 85

Oak Point 85,88,105

Oak Point, beacons 88

Observation Cape 43

Ob/^er/atiou River 39,42

Oh i aic Harbor 117

Old Bic trading post 151

OldFort Point 67

Old Port. Bay 125

OldHarryHead 32

Old Woman Rook 110

Olomanoaheebo River 151

Ore Point 167

OnentPoint 180

Origneanx Foint 188

Orleans Channel 198,217

Orleanalsle 210

Orleanalalc, anchorage 211

Orleans Point 210

Otter Harbor 71

Otter Harbor, directions 71

Otter Island 71

Otter Point 71

Ouelle Point 188

Ouelle River 188

258

INDEX.

■Si

Outarde Buy 17rt, 171)

Ontarile Way, anchorage 17U

Ontartlu Day, ilirectloiis 171)

Ontanln I'oiiit I'H

Oiitarde River 171)

Onte - Hreakor 55

Outer iHlet 149

Outer Itilet, beaoou ir>0

Outer Rocks 140

OuterShoal 71)

Ojster Pond 32

Paddle Shoal 79

PalntRiver 161

Panorace, St., Cove 177

Panorace, St. , ' 'olnt 177

Pandora Point 90

Parliament Poiiu 73

Parsky Port 193

Partridge Mount and Point 1.58

Pashasli eeboo Bay If).*)

Paspebiao 107

Paspebiac, anchorage 107

Poupebiao, consul 107

pAspebiao, Bupplies 107

Paspebiao Bay 107

Paspebiao Bay, directions 107

Paspebiao Point 108

Patrick Hole Bay J?li

Patrick Hole Bay, anchorage ... 211

Paul, St., iBiand . Sf>

Paul, St., Island, anchorit|;e '28

Paul, St., Island, boat , 28

Paul, St., Island, oantion 13

Panl, St., Island, supplies ^

Paul, St. , Island, tides '-to

Paul, St., Island, to Bird Rooks

and Magdalen Islands 13

Paul, St., Bay 214

Pavilion Point ' 208

Pavilion River, bemton 41

Paynter Point 143

Peak Point 128,129

Pearl Reef 33

Peashtebai Bay 155

Pecten Point 96

Pellier Harbor 79

Pellier Harbor, directions. ...... 79

Pellier Point 1.. 78

Pellier Reef 78

Peninsala Point Ill

Pentacost River 174

Pero6 109

PS|..

Pt!rc<f,Uay 109

Perc/Bay, Hil^-s 109

Porc«5Cttpe 109

l'vTv6 Moni, or Table Roulante.. 109

Perc<^Kock 109

P«rc:<Se Rocks 186

Percy Cape 61

Percy Rook 63

Peril Rook 133

Pttroqnet Island 185

Ferroqiiut Cliannel 164

Perroquet Inlots 163

Peter, St., Point . . 110

Peter, St., Lake S!i3

Petite Rivifere 214

Petitfislles 2S3

Petre Point 63

PetroReel" 88

Pic Point I J

Pierre de Gros Cap Reef 36

PierreRiver 114

Pierre, St., Church 216

Pierre, St., Point 208

Pilgrim Islands 187

Pilgrim, Great, Island 187

Pilgrim, Long 187

Pilgrim Shoal 18fl

Pillage Bay 167

Pilinr, Stone, and Wood, Islets.. 201

Pillar Point 108

Pilots, stations 19

Pizuau Point S13

PlaiorCove 75

Planter Cove, anchorage 75

Plaster Point 73

PleasantBay 34

Pleasant Bay, anchorage 34

Pleureu£8 Point, beacon 114

Fleurense River 114

PlongeurBay 180

Pointe aux Pins 208

Pointe des Morts 161

PoJDtn aux Trembles 228

Pokciaouche Church 92

Fokemouohe Lagtion 92

Fokemouche River 92

Pokesbaw 101

Pond, Great 113

PondPoint 127

Poquesnedie Island .96

Poqnesnedie Point 96

Poquesuodie Shoal ...., 96

Porcupine Cape 47

Porpoise Bocks 133

INDEX.

259

109
109
100
100
100
186

6'2
133
136
164
163
110
3!{3
214
232

68
» J

36
114
215
208
187
187
187

isn

167

201

108

813

114

180

208

161

233

101

lis

127
.96
96
96
47
133

Porta^re Day and Harbor . .
Pur li^u Bay, dtreotlona —

Porcatco Ixlaiid

Port Ho.h1, anchorage

Port Hooii, <i!4|ieot of uoaitt.

Port Hooii, vllreotions

Port Homl, impi>li*)«

Port Hood, tideH

Portnora Itland

Port Shoal

Portaiuonth Point

Pot Rock

lao
l:W
pO
48
4tf
49
48
49
68
67
48
66

Prairie Bay 19D,214

Prairie Bay, auoliorage

Prairie Bay, dlreotioiiit

Prairie Uav, tides

Prairie Point

Prairie Shoal

Preequ'iie

Preston Beaoh

Preston Beach, beacons

Price Island

Price Point

Prince Shoal

Puffin Bay

Quarantine, auohorage

Quarry Channel

Quarry Cove and Island

Quarry Cove, water

Quart Point

Quebec

Quebec, auchorage

Quebec, basin

Queber, consul

Quebec, docks and harbor works

Quebec, harbor

Quebec, ice

Quebec, observation bastion

Quebec, port, limits of

Quebec, quarantine anchorage..

Quebec, repairs

Quebec, supplies

Quebec, tides

Quebec, time signal

Qaetachoo-Manicouagon Bay . ..
Qnin Channel and Island. .. ...

Race Island

Raft Gully

Bagg Bay and Point

Bagged Point

Bagged Bock

216

314

2i:«

142

192

158

209

162

211,212

212,213

211

213

212

211

212

211

2i;

209
212
212
213
213
155
160

208
92

169
49
59

Rag Ledge 143

Ranald Islet 80

Raza<le Islets 191

R.aiix Island 208

Red Cape 33,55

Red Head 54

Red Head Island i:<0

Red Island 54

Red Islands 76.77

Red Islands, from, to Brandy Pots 1H9

Red Islet 183

Red Islet, bank 183

Red Inlet, bank, mark 183

Red Point 72,106

Reddish Point 108

Reef Point •- 44

ReMtigouche River lOfi

Rustigouohe River, am 106

Restigouche River, dir< i 106

Richlieu Rapid 283

Richmond 106

Richmond Church 106

Ridge Point, rocky ground 167

Rimonski 117

Rimonski, coal 117

Rimonski, mail 117

Rimonski River, water 117,

Rimonski Road and Pier 117

Roadstead Point, water 174

Robert Cape 44

Roches Point 229

Rochette 101

Roch, St., church 188,198

Roch, St., Point 188,198

Roch, St,,8hoal8 199

Roch, St., Shoald, anchorage 205

Roch , St. , Shoals, buoys 199

Rochfort Point 57

Rocks. Bay of 141,186,193

Rooky Bay 68,133

Rocky Bay, directions 134

Rocky Island 67

Romaiue, la, river l&l

Rouge Cape... 214

Rouge Point 220

Roulante, Table, or Mont Perc6 . . 109

RoundHead 138

Bound Islet 137

Round Rook HO

Rouse Point 66

RoysMills 208

Rosier Cape 113

RnisSeauRock 163

Russell Point 57

.. 2sS3Sa3sStt^SKS^»^'ffil2Sa«KS3iiW»fis£afac!aj«jaavifais^^

ml
m

';« I

^m I

960

INDEX.

l'nu>:

SMidloHill Ifiri

Salt) Rook 14'i

8ftKU»n»y Cllrt* VJi

8»K«o""»y HI VHf IIW, !<IH, 'iH)

8aK<i«'iH.v KivHF, Hii(;horat(0)i 'i'H

8aKiiHiiay Kiver, biioyit til

8agiiHiiAy Klver, ouution. tOt

SttKiiniiay River, uiirrent« and

tIdwH ail>

SaKiioiiity Rivur, directloDs 2il

8t. Auilrew Cliaiinel 70

8t. AiidrHvr Channel, anuhoraj(o. 70

St. Andrew Point 8(l,rt7

8t. Anne Harbor (XI

8t. Anne Harltnr, anuhoraKO •••• H7

St. Anne Harbor, liar M

St. Anne Harbor, directions tf7

St. Anne Harbor, nnpplieN ' 67

St. Anne Harbor, tidoH ti"

St. Anne Capo. U4

St. Aiinx Mnnntaina 114

St. Anne River 115

St. Anne SlioalH 1

St. AuKHHtine Cove 170

St. Catherine Bay aao

St. Charles Point 169

St. Charles Reef 109

St. Denis Point 188

St. Oenevieve Harbor, directions . 157

St. Oenevieve Harbor, supplies.. 157

St. GeoFKe Cove 110

St. Giles Point 176

8t. John Mount 166

St. John River 111,165

St. John River, anchorage 166

St. John River, bar 166

St. John River, fishing post 165

St. John River, tides 166

St. John River, water ...; Ill

St. Margaret Point 17:1

St. Margaret River 172

St. Mary Islands 144

St. Mary Reefs 145

St. Nicholas Cape 176

St. Nicholas Harbor 176

St. Nicholas Harbor, anchorage. 177

St. Nicholas Harbor, caution 177

St. Nicholas Harbor, directions . 177

St. Nicholas Harbor, water 177

St. Pancraoe Cove 177

St. Pancrace Point 177

St. Patrick Channel 72

St. Patrick Channel, anchorage . 72

St. Patrick Channel, directions.. 7;<

St. Patrick Channel, pilots 78

St. Paul Bay 814

8t. I'eler Inlet 76

St. Petrr Inlet, anchorage 76

8r. Peter Point 110

St. Hooh Point IIW

Saints Channel 158

•Saints Rocks 150

8alab.<rry Bay 140,143

Salmon Bay 186,189

Salmon Cape 1M7, 193

Salmon Islet 189

Salni'inPort 193

Salmon River 61

Salt Lake B.vy 41

Salt Lake Bay, beacon near 41

Sand Lark Reef 1«4

Hand Top Cape 45

.Sandy Bay 32

Sandy Beach Point Ill

Sandy Harbor 136

Sandy Harbor, directions 136

Sandy Harbor, water 136

Sandy H<K)k 33

Sandy Hook Channel 34

Sandy Hook Flat 34

Sandy Island 136

Shndy "oint 171

Sandy '^ or.. . , 167

Sant^sp' i . Island 5.*), 55

Sent ,, Cochon 814

S « fie Mouton 181

Sa.it Pass 822

Sawblll River 1«7

Sawbill Hiver Cod Bank 167

Scallop Patch 100

Scatari Island 60

Soatari Island, caution 60

Soaumenac Mountains 103

Schooner Rock 61

Scott River 80

Sea Cow Channel and Islands.. 160

Seal House dove 169

Seal Islands .' 70,147,200

SealPoint 71,137

Seal Reefs ^O

Seal Rock 111,139

Seal Rocks 55,139

Sea Wolf Island 51

Seminairo, The 207,217

Serpent Point and reef 113

Seven Islands 170

Seven Islands Bay 171,172

Vikgf>.
ri».. TA

«14
76

168

.... 140, ua

.... 186,189

1M7,193

129

193
61

164

Ill

136

171

167

53,55

814

181

828

167

100

103

ands.. 160

169

70,147,200

71,137

111,139

55,139

207,217

113

170

171,172

iiWalMltiiBSMJii

-^gggtmmm^Hm

:-^ 'MM!iMiW l lMiWW^

iilUBUm mtein m w

,.^..

^.^

IMAGE EVALUATION
TEST TARGET (MT-3)

1.0

I.I

IAS 121 |2.5

■so *^^ R^H

2.0

lis

14.0

1.8

l^ll'-M'-^

►

FhotDsraphic

Sciences
Corporation

23 WEST MAIN STREET

WEBSTER, N.Y. 14580

(716)872-4503

CIHM/ICMH

Microfiche

Series.

CIHIVI/ICIVIH
Collection de
microfiches.

Canadian Instituta for Historical IVIicroreproductions / Institut Canadian de microreproductions historiques

INDEX.

Seven Islanda Bay, anchorage. ..
Seven Islands Bay, aspect of coast

Seven Islands, caution

Seven Islands, channels

Seven Islands, tides

Seven Islands, trading post

Seven Islands, winds

Shag Island (Magdalen Island) .

Shag Island (Sanuy Harbor)

Shag Islet (Mistanoque)

Shag Islet (Washtawooka)

Shag Ledge

Pago.
171
172
170
171
172
171
172

33
136
135
155

261

Pag*.

108

Shag Rock 55,59,136

Shallop Cove

Shallop Creek

Shallop River

Shecatioa Bay

Shecatica Bay, supplies .

Shecatica Island

Sheep Island.

12!)
40
167
135
136
135
78

Sheldrake Island 86,87

Sheldrake Point 167

Shettle Port 193

Shickshoc Mountains 114

Shilelah Cove 91

Ships Head Rock 110

Shippegan Channel 97

Shippegan Bar 93

Shippegan, directions 95

Shippegan Flat 96

Shippegan Gull y 93,97

Shippegan Harbor 97

Shippegan Island 95

Shippegan Sound 96,97

97
97
158
26
27
96
55

Shippegan Sound, ice

Shippegan, tides

Shoal Cove

Signal stations for passing ships

Signals respecting ice

Simon Inlet

Simon Point

Single Rock .141,14;;;

Single Tree Point ji<«fl''~

Slime Rock 148

Smith Island 48,49

Smith Point 48

Smith Shoal 81

Smoke Cape 65,68

Soldier Cove 76

Sontb Basin --.- 73

South Breaker 150

South Cape 35

South Channel 188, 197, 198

Soulh Channel, above Crane Is-
lan d 206

South Channel, below Traverse..
South Channel, below Traverse,

directions 189

South Channel, through S. Trav-
erse to Crane Island 19H, 204

South Channel, tides 195,218

South Makers Ledge 123,147

South Point 40,68

South Point, biiacou 40

South Point, caution 41

South Pond 69

South Rock or Algernon Rock. . . 201

Sonth Shore below Traverse.... 186
South Shore, from St. Thomas to

Levis Point 206

South Traverse -- 205

Sonth Traverse, anchorage 205

South Traverse, directions 204

South Traverse, narrows 199

South Traverse, tides 206, 217

Southeast Bo wen Rock 156

Southwest Breaker 150

Southwest Cape (Amherst Island) 35

Southwest Islands 145

Sou t h west Point ( Antioosti ) 41

Southwest Point, anchorage ... . 41

Southwest Point, caution 41

Spit Head 48

Spit Island 132

Spray Reef 143

Sproule Point and Reef 174

Spruce Point 81

Square Channel 136

Squirrel Pond 51

Squirrel Mount 51

Staff Islet 141

Star Island 132

Steering Hummock 59

Stoue Island 132

Stone Pillar Island 201

S.ony Point liW

Sud, Rivifere du 199,206

Sugar Loaf Mountain

Susan, Cape

Susan Creek

Swashway Channel

Sydney

Sydney, ^northwe8t) bar

Sydney, (southeast) bar

Sydney Harbor

Sydney Harbor, anchorage

Sydney Harbor Bridge

Sydney Harbor, charges

Sydney Harbor, coaling ground.
Sydney Harbor, coaling wharves

105
47

48
83
62
62
64
62
64
62
63
63
63

262

INDEX.

Page.

Sydney Harbor, consul . ,

Sydney Harbor, direotiona

Sydney Harbor, South Arm

Sydney Harbor, population

6'2

Sydney Harbor, railroad

Sydney Harbor, steam ferry ....

Sydney Harbor, tides

Sydney Harbor, supplies

Sydney Harbor, telegraph

Sydney Harbor, water

Sydney Harbor, West Arm

Sydney, North

Table Head

44.65

Table Island

Table Roulante, or Pe; c6 Mont..

109

Tabusintac, gaily

Tabnsintao Lagoon

Tabusintac River

Tabusintac, Kcttleuient

Tadoussac

220

Tadoussac, anchorage

220

Tadoussac, trading post

220

Tail Islet •.

130

Tailor Island

Telegraph and signal stations. ..

Tender Reef

145

Tent Island

132

Terres Roiupues Rapid

222

Tertiary Point

150

Tertiary SbfU Bav

1>>1

Thomas, 8t 198,199,203

Thomas, St., Biiuk 199,203, 20«

Thomas, St., Church

198, 199

Thomas. St., Point

20H

Thomas, St., Railroad

19(9

Three Rivers, town

223

Three Rocks

136

Thunder Point

167

Tickle Creek

Tide table from Pi v.. cu^Ay

to Quebec .

218

Tilbury Rocks '.'.

TourraenteCape

206

Tourmente Mount —

202

Tower Point

'Tower Rock

Tracadie Bar

Tracadie Lagoons . ..........

Tracadie North Oullv

Tracadie Old Gully

Tracidie River

Tracadie Soiith Gnlly

Pkge.

Tracadigash PoMit 101,102

Tracadigash Spit 103

Trap Point 76

Traverses 183,218

Traverse, Middle 197

Traverse, North 194,197,213

Traverse, North, narrows £, and

W 216

Traverse, North, tides 217

Traverse, South 205

Traverse, South, anchorage 205

Traverse, South, directions 204

Traverse, South, narrows 199

Traverse, South, tides 206,217

Traverse, South, to Crane Island . 198, 204

Traverse Spit 216

Treble Hill Island 138

Treble Islet 137,151

Tremble Shoals 223

Trembles, Pointe aux, shoals .. . 223

Trilobite Bay 159

Trinity Bay and River 175

Trinity Bay, anchorage 175

Trinity Cove 28

Trois Saumous River 198

Trou de Borthier 207

Trou, le. Cape 36

Trout River 169

Two Heads Island 209,216

Uniacke Point 74

Union Island 202

Vaches Patch 192

Vaches Point 192

Vaches Point Reef 192

Vallier, St., Bank 207

Vallier, St., Point 203,207

Vallier, St., Village 207

Variation of compass 1

Vin Bay 87

Vin Harbor 86

Vin Harbor, anchorage 86

Viu Harbor, directions 86

Vin Harbor, tides 86

Vin Island 86

Vin River 87

Vin Spit 86

Walrus Channel 160

Walrus Island 160

INDEX.

263

Page.

101,102

103

183,218

197

.. 194,197,213

B. aud

...... 216

217

205

re 205

8..... 204
199

206,217

[Bland. 198,204

216

....... 138

137,151

223

>als... 223

159

175

, 28

198

207

\\ 36

' 169

209,216

202

192

207

, 203,207

207

, 86

160

Pagp.

Wapitagnu Harbor 148

Wapitagun Harbor, tides 148

Wapitagnn Harbor, water 148

Wapitagun Island 148

Wapitagun Islands, Outer 148

Washaback River 72

Washatnagunashka Bay ;.. 155 !

Washshecootai Bay 151 [

Washshecootai Bay, trading post ' 161 |

Washta wooka Bay 155 :

Wataglieistic Island 145 !

Watagheistio Sonnd 145 j

Watagheistic Sound, anchorage. 147

Watagheistio Sound, caution .... 145 j

Watagheistio Sound, east en- \

trance 145

Watagheistio Sound, reef 146

Watagheistio Sound, west en-
trance 146

Watcheeshoo Hill 155

Watoheeshoo Peninsula 155

Watcheeshoo trading post 155

Watch Rock 130

WattieRook 60

Weed Pond Beach 67

Weed Pond. Ledge 67

Weed Pond Shoal 6fi

West Bay 75,79

WestCape 35

West Clilf, beacon 43

West Cove (Labrador) 129

West Lake 36

Page.

West Point 43.108

West Rooks (Seven Islands) 170

West Sand 216

Western Narrows .... 216

Whale Channel 132

Whale Head 141

Whale Island (N. Coast) 130, 132, 159

Whale Patch 131

Whelp Rock 130

White Clifif 42

White Head 69,109

White Horse Reef 36

White Island Reef . 184

White Islet 183

White Point 55,108

White liock 57

Whittle Cape 123,147,149

WhittleRooks 149

Widow Point 81

Wild Fowl Reef. 180

Wilhausen Point 67

Wilkie Sugar Loaf 69

Winter Portage 83

Winds and weather 5

Wolf Bay 149

Wolf Island (Labrador) 149

Wolf Island (Magdalen Islands) 33,36

Wood Island 137,157

Wood Pillar Island 200

Wood Pillar Island beacon 200

Wreck Bay (Autioosti) - 40

Wye Rock 206

BOOKS FOR PUIIPOSES OF NAVUIATION IHIBLISHKD BY HYDROGRAPHIC

OFFICK.

No.

Title.

I'rioe.

100

«4

60
23
52

25
37

38
42

NORTH ATLANTIC OCEAN.

8vo. 1870.

1887...

1891.

General Examination of the Atlantic Ocean.

Supplement No. 1. 1886 .•".--•

General Directions for the Atlantic Ocean. Second edition

\ Nova Scotia and Bay of Fundy— Gnlf and River St. Lawrence.

The Navigation of the Caribbean Sea and the Gnlf of Mexico. Vol. I.

The West India Islands, including the Bahama Banks and Islands,

and the Bermuda Islands. 1887. Edition exhausted

Supplements. 1889, 1890 „• • V,;" " •. 4/ V '

The Navigation of the Caribbean Sea and the Gulf of Mexico. Vol.
II. Coasts from the Rio Grande del Norte to Cape Orange, with

adjacent islands and dangers. 1890

Supplement. 1891

Newfoundland and Labrador, 1884

Newfoundland and Labrador. Supplement. 1886

Supplement No. 2. 1891 - v;-.::;-'

Sailing Directions for the Kattegat, Sound, and the Great and Little

Belts to the Baltic Sea. 1881

Supplement No. 1. 1886 <; ••■;■";;■ "l

Sailing Directions for the English Channel. Part I. South Coast

ofEngland. 1872

Supplement. Second edition. 1889 ---• —

Sailing directions for the English Channel. Part II. 1877. Hydro-
graphic Offlce

Supplement. Second edition. 1889

Coasts and Ports of the Bay of Biscay. 1876

Supplement. Second edition. 1890 -

Winds, Cnrrenta, and Navigation of the Gulf of Cadiz, the Western
Coast of the Spanish Peninsula, and the Strait of Gibraltar. 1870.
Northwest and West, Coasts of Spain, and the Coast of Portugal

from Point Estaca to Cape Trafalgar. 1874 -.

Supplement. Second edition. 1890. Hydrographic Omco

General Examination of the Mediterranean Sea. 1870

Supplement No. 1. 1887 r'n'u'"

Mediterranean. Part L S. and SE. Coasts of Spain from Mala Bahia
to Cape Crenx. Balearic Islands, and N. Coast of Africa from Ceuta

to La Cala '

Supplement. Second edition. 1890 -

Mediterranean. Part II. South Coast of France ; West Coast of

Italy ; Tuscan Archipelago ; Corsica and Sardinia. 1878

Supplement. Second edition. 1890

Mediterranean. Part III. Coast of Tunis ; Sardinia ; Sicily and
Malta Channels ; Li pari Islands; Sicily; Strait of Messina ; Coast

ofTnpoli; Coast of Egypt ; Syria. 1879

Supplement. Second edition. 1890

Mediterranean. Part IV. Gnlf of Gioja to Cape Santa Maria di
Leuca, South Coast of Italy, the Adriatic Sea, Ionian Islands, the
C<jastH of Albania and Greece to Cape Malea, with Cerigo Island,

iuoindiug the Gulfs of Patras and Corinth. 1883 >

Supplement. Second editiou. 1890

$2. 00

.10

2.00

1.00
.10

L60
.10

1.00
.60
.10

.75
.10

1.50
.10

S.50
.10

2.50
.10

1.00

1.50
.10

2.00
.10

2.50
.10

2.36
.10

2.35
.10

265

'>&iiBiiaaaB<ia.M

266 BOOKS FOR PURPOSES O^^ NAVIGATION.

Booktfor purpotei of navigation publiihed by Hjidrographio Q^o«— Continued.

No.

Title.

50-51)
63 I

i I

Ifi

54
65

58
89

41b
41a

Prine.

NORTH ATLANTIC ocKAN— Continued.

The Azores, Madeiras, CanarieH, and Cape Verde Islands. 8vo. 1873

and 1874. Hydro(;rapliic Office

3 Supplements

Tlie West Coast of Africa. Part I. From Cape Spartel to Sierra

Leone. 1873

Supplement No. 1. 1886

The West Coast of Africa. Part I. From Cii'>« Spartel to Cape Lo-
pez, including the Azores, Madeiras, Canaries, and Cape Verde

Islands. Second edition. (In preparation)

The West Coast of Africa. Part II. From Sierra Leone to Cape Lo-
pez. 1875

Supplement No. 1. 1886

Memoir of the Dangers and Ice in the North Atlantic. (Pamphlet.)
1868

SOUTH ATLANTIC OCEAN.

The West Coast of Africa. Part III. From Cape Lopez to the Cape
of Good Hope, including the Islands in the Bight of Biafra, and

Ascension and St. Helena Islands. 1H77

Supplement No. 1. 1886

The East Coast of South America. From Cape Orange to Cape Vir-
gins, including Falkland, South Georgia, Sandwich, and South

Shetland Islands. 1889

Supplement. 1891

The Rio de la Plata. 1875

Supplement No. 1. 1886

Navigation of the Strait of Magellan. 1883

Remarks by Captain M. A. Leffevre, of the French Navy, on the voy-
age of the Vaudreuil through the Patagoniau Channels and Magel-
lan Strait. (Pamphlet.). 1874

PACIFIC OCEAN.

1867.

General Examination of the Pacific Ocean.

Supplement No. 1. 1886

The Navigation of the Pacific Ocean. 1874. (Edition exhausted) ..
The West Coast of South America, including Magellan Strait, Tierra

del Fuego, and the Outlying Islands. 1890

Supplement. 1890

The West Coast of Mexico and Central America, from the Boundary
Line between the United States and Mexico to Panama, includ-
ing the Gulf of California. 1887

Supplement. 1890

The Coast of British Colnmbia. From Juan de Fuca fltrait to Port-
land Canal, including Vancouver and Queen Charlotte Islands.

1891

Directory for Coast of Alaska and Bering Sea. 8vo. 1869. Bureau

of Navigation. (Edition exhausted)

Supplement No. I. 1886. Hydrographic Office. (Edition ex-
hausted)

The East Coast of Asia, Vol. 1, including Tartary, Korea. .Japan, and

adjacent islands. Hydrogrtipbic Office. (In preparation)

Reported Daugers to Navigation in the Pacific. Part I. North of

theEquator. 1871 •

Supplement. 1891. Hydrographic Office

Supplement to Reported Dangers in the North Pacific Ocean. 1880..

Supplement. 1887

Reported Dangers to Navigation in the Pacific Ocean. Part II.

South of theEquator. 1879

Supplement No. "i. 1887

Supplement. 1891. Hydrographic Office

92. oa
.•2a

2.00
.10

'i.00
.10

1.50
.10

LOO

L50
.10
.20

.20

L50
.10

1.20
.10

.50
.10

L60

LOO

LOO
.10

!outtnued.

Prine.

1873

12.00

.20

Sierra

2.00

.10

pe Lo-

Verde

pe Lo-

2.00

.10

phlet.)

.20

e Cape

ra, and

l.SO

.10

pe Vlr-

South

1.00

.la

1.50

.10

.20

he voy-

MageU

.20

1.50

.10

isted)

, Tierra

1.20

.10

tindary
inolud-

.50

.vy

to Port-

[alauda.

1.50

Bureau

tiou ex-

tan, and

forth of

• 1.00

1.00

.10

'art II. .

1.00

.10

BOOKS FOR PURPOSES OF NAVIGATION. 267

Book$ for purpoHi of iiaHgation, publiahedhy Uydrogtaphio Offivr — Contiiiiied.

24
39

76
33

72
9
13
17
71
66

57
49

90
91

8
8a

INDIAN UCKAN.

Sailiut; Directions oftheltuliiin Ocean, Mie wiiiils, iiioiihooum, cnrreutn,
and paMaseH, including also the Java Sea, Siilii Sua, Afiiera Sra,

and the PLilippine iHlaiulH. 1887

Supplenientn. 1889 and 1890 ...

Gflueral Examination of the Indian Ocean, with DiruotioiiH fur the

Navigation of Torres Straits, etc. 1870

Supplement No. 1. 1886

Physical Geography of the Red Sea, with Sailing Direotionx. 1872..

LIGHT-LISTS.

List of Lights (No. 1) of North and South America (excepting the

United States), including the West Indies and Pacitic Islands.

8vo. 1891

List of Lights (No. 5) of the North, Baltic, and White Seas, inclnd-

iug the Coasts of Denmark, Prussia, Russia, Sweden, and Norway.

8vo

List of Lights (No. (!) of the British Islands. 8vo. (Edition ex-
hausted)

List of Lights (No. 4) of the Atlantic Coaat of Europe, including Spain,
Portugal, France, Belgium, and Holland. 8vo. (Edition ex-
hansteid).

List of Lights (No. 3) of the Went Coast of Africa and the Mediter-
ranean Sea, including the West and North Coasts of Africa, the
Mediterranean, the Adriatic, thn Black Sea, and the Sea of Azof.
8vo

Supplement, 1890

List of Lights (No. 2) of the Sonth and East Coasts of Africa and the
East Indies, including the East India Islands, China, Japan, Aus-
tralia, Tasmania, and New Zealand. 8vo

Supplement. 1890

MISCELLANEOUS BOOKS.

Edition of 1891

List of Geographical Positions. 1883 . . .

The New American Practical Navigator.

Bowditch's Useful Tables. 1891

Projection Tables. 8vo. 1869

Azimuth Tables for parallels of latitude bftweeu 61° N. and 61° S ...

Arctic Azimuth Tables for paral' !.4 of latitude between 70° and 88°.
1881

Tables for Finding the Distance ot 1 1\ Object by two Bearings. 1874 .

The Route of Mail Steamers betweta the English Channel and New
York. 1873

The Development of Great Circle Sailing. 1889

Table of Meridional Parts for the Terrestrial Spheroid, Compression
T^^fiinr- I**89

Magnetism of Ships and the Deviations of the Compass. 8vo. 1867.

Magnetism of Ships and the Deviations of the Compass. Couiprising
the three reports of the Liverpool Compass Commission, with addf
tional papers by Mr. Archibald Smith, F. R. S., etc., and Staff-Cap-
tain F.J. Evans, R. N. 1869

Ship's Compasses, including the snbjeot of Binnacles and Swinging
Ship. 1869

The Way to Avoid the Center of our Violent Gales. 1868

Practical Hints in regard to West India Hurricanes. 1887

Nautical Monograph, No. 5. The Great Storm oflf the Atlantic Coast
of the United States, March lt-14, 1888. 1888.

General Instructions for Hydrographic Surveyors. 1868

International Signal Code. Revised and corrected to 1890, includ-
ing the semaphore and storm-signal service of the maritime conn-
tries, the Life-Saving Service and time-ball system of the United
States. 18911

Price.

91.00
.10

2.00

.25

.25
.25

.2&

.25
.15

.25
.1»

.7^

2.26
L25
1.50
4.25

.80
.20

.30
LOO

L20
3.00

3.00

.40
.10
.10
Not for
sale.
.20

3.00

• ■ ) a

268 BOOKS FOR PURPOSES OF NAVIGATION.

Booki for purpoBei of naflnation, publiihed by Ilydrograiihio O^^ce— Contlnned.

93
65

65te

65b

94
95

MISCKLLANEUUS BOOKS— COntiUlied.

FlagH of Mniitinie Nations. 5tli viUtion. 4to. 1883. Bnrean of
Nayiuatioii. (Etlition exlmuHtetl)

Joe and Ico Movenienta in the Buring Hea and Aiotio Basin. (Pam-
phlet.) 1890 ,

Ico a' d Ice Movements in North Atlantic Ouenn. 1890

Report on the Telegrn|ihio Determination of Ditt'erenoes of Longitude
in the West Indies and Central America. 1877.

Report on the Telegrnpliic Determination of Ditferences of Longitude
on the East Court of South America. 1880.

Report on the Telegraphic Determination of Longitude in the East
Indies, Cliinn, and Japan, l^!8t-^4'2.

Report of Telegraphic Determiiiations of Longitudes in Mexico, Cen-
tral America, and West Const of South America. 1885.

Report 'OD the Telegraphic Determination of Longitudes in Mexico,
Central America, the West Indies, and on the North Coast of South
America, wiili the Latitudes of tlie several Stations. To which iu
appeiuled a Report on Miignetic Observations in Mexico and the
West Indies. 1891.

Report of the International Meteorologio Conjjress at Paris, 1889

The average form of Isolated Submarine Peaks and the interval
which should obtain between deep-sea soundings taicen to disclose
the character of the bottom of the ocean. 1S9II.

Report on Uniform System for Spelling Foreign Geographical Names.
1891.

ILOO

.SM)

.30

Not for

sale.
Not for

sale.

.SO
.70

Not for
sale.

i^ootinaed.

Prloo.

u of

11.00

Pam-

.20

.30

itude

Not for

sale.

itude

Not for

Male.

Eaat

Not for

sale.

,Cen-

Notfor

sale.

sxico,

Notfor

South

Bale.

ioh io

d the

.20

terval

.70

Bclose

Barnes.

Notfor

sale.

AGENTS FOR THK SALE OF HYDROdllAPHIC OFFICE CHARTS, SAILING

. DIRECTIONS, ETC.

UMITKD 8TATK8.

N.C. Wallace, Millbridue, Me.

Albert W. B«e, Bar Harbor. Me,

Spear, May &. .Stover, 40> .Main street, Bocklaiid, Me.

George Hliss, Waldoboro, Me.

William O. McCobb, Booth Buy, Me.

Charles F. Haydeii, Bath, Me.

William Senior & Co., No. .'it Kxchanjte Btreet, Porthvnd. Me.

P. A. ChiHolm, No. l»)l Main street, Gloucester. .Mass.

Henry P. Ives.'^%2 Essex street, Salem, Mass.

Cbas. C. Hutchinson, No. ViC) Commercial street, Boston, Mass.

Samuel Thaxter & Sou, No. Iii5 State street, Boston, Mass.

D. W. Stevens, Vineyard Haven, Mass.

C. R. Sherman &, Son, New Bedford, Mass.

Geo. A. Stockwell, Providence, R. I.

J. M. K. South wick, 1S5 Thames street, Newport, R. I.

C. C. Ball, Block Island.

D. B. Hempstead, 25 Bank street. New London, Conn.
Sergt. P. Daniels, New London, Conn.

J)iB. H. Stivers, 72 Water street, Stonington, Conn.
R. D. Stevens, custoiu-house, Hartford, Conn.
H. H. Baboook, castomhonse, New Haven, Conn.
A. H. Kellara, New Haven, Conn.

T. S. &, J. D. NeguB, No. 140 Water street, New York City.
R, Merrill's Sons, 179 Water street. New York City.
Uiohael Rupp & Co., No. 39 South street. New York City.
D. Eggert's Sons, No. 74 Wall street, New York City.
John BlisB & Co., No. 128 Front street, New York City.
Thomas Manning, No. 53 Beaver street. New York City.
£. Stelger &, Co., 25 Park Place, New York City.
Frank M. Porch, custom-house, Bridgeton, N. J.
Riggs & Bro., No. 221 Walnut street, Philadelphia, Pa.
F. J. Sloane & Co., comer Pratt street and Speers Wharf, Baltimore, Md.
M. V. O'Neal, No. 502 East Pratt street, Baltimore, Md.
Wm. J. Pitts, 53 South Oay street, Baltimore, Md.
J. J. Chapman, No. 915 Pennsylvania avenne, Washington, D. C.
W. H. Lowdermilk & Co., 1424 F street NW., Washington, D. C.
J. H. Hlckcox, 906 M street NW., Washington, D. C.
R. Bell's Sons, South Fairfax street, Alexandria, Va. '
C. F. Greenwood & Bro., 158 Main street, Norfolk, Va.
Yiokery & Co., 124 Main street, Norfolk, Va.
Godfrey Hart, No. 24 South Front street, Wilmington, N. C.
W. N. Harriss, with Geo. Harriss & Co., North Water street, Wilmington, N. C,

269

,idfiS0^>

270 LIST OF A0ENT8.

Agtnttfor the mU of Hydroiirnphic Ojfflre phnrf», laHlng direel(on», «!?.— Contltined.

UNITKI) STATKfl— 0OlltitlUe<l,

W. A. VVIIwu, No, 116 Eftiit Hay iitr«et, Charlenloii, S. C.

Duviil Porter, No. Iti Hroiii{litoii atrmtt, S»rAiiniih,()a.

W. 8. Clierry A, Co., No. rt9 Buy Htroet, Havttunali, 0».

Horaci) Drew, JaokiionvlUe, Fla.

Koltert KanHon, TitiiHVille, Fla.

UreUforil Hroii.. I'altii Heuch, Fla.

Alfrt'd Broiit, office of llxhtUoune iatpeotor, Key Weat, Fla.

Babbitt & Co., Franklin atreet, Tampa, Flu.

C. D. Webster, "'i and 85 Tarpon avf-nne, Tarpon Springo, Flu.

J.E.Grady, Apalachioola, Fla.

Henry Horsier Si Co., Fenimcola, Fla.

J. R. Edwards, Mobile, Ala.

Jaa. I. Friar, Pasoagoula, MUg.

L. Frlgerlo, No. 1(11 Canal street. New Orleans, La.

Woodward, Wight &. Co., Noh. :(8, 40, 4-^ Canal street, New Orleans, La.

Chas. F.Trnbe, Galveston, Texas.

Rand, MoNally & Co., 144-154 Monroe street, Chioa|{o, 111.

Dodge &, Biirbeok, corner Fifth and D streets, San Diego, CaL

W. L. Banning, San Pedro, Cal.

Stolt &. Thayer, 47 South Spring street, Los Angeles, Cal.

H. A. C. MoPbail, Santa Barbara, Cal.

8. 8. Arnheim, No. H Stuart street, San Franoisoo, Cal.

Dillon & Son, No. 310 California street, Sau Francisoo, Cal.

Louis Weule, No. 418 Battery street, San Francisco, Cal.

Griifen &. Ueed, Astoria, Oregon.

J. K. Gill & Co., Nos. 28 and 30 First street, Portland, Oregon.

James Jones, Port Townsend, Wash.

Waterman &, Katz, Port Townsend, Wash.

E. C. Vangban, Tacoina, Wash.
Boeriuger & Co,, Taonuia, Wash,
O. Davies & Co., Seattle, Wash.
W. H. Piimphrey, Seattle, Wash.

VORKION PORTS,

Garrett Byrne, St. Johns, Newfoundland.

Robert H. Cogswell, Halifax, N. S.

J. & A. McMillan. St. John, N. B.

Hunter & Grant, Hamilton, Ontario.

T. Darling & Co., Nassau, Bahamas.

£. J. D. Astwoud, Turks Island.

Edwin W. Wilson, 41 and 43 Obispo street, Havana, Cuba.

Juan B. Carbo, U.S. vice-consul, Cienfnegos, Cuba.

J. P. Thorsen, St. Thomas, W. L

James Gall, Kingston, Jamaica.

G. Anciaux, U. 8. consulate, Barbados, W. I.

John A. Donnatien, Port Spain, Trinidad, W. I.

R. D. Mohnn, Greytown, Nicaragua.

At the consulate. Para, Brazil.

Arthur B. Dallas, Pernambuco, Brazil.

John Newton, 2 Calle de la Constitncion, Callao, Pern.

F. A. Markert, Guayraas, Mexico.

LIST or AOKNT«.

S71

Cuntlnned.

Agtnttfor tht «ii/« of llydrngrafthin Offlre oharln, latlinij (Urtcltoii$, «(c.— Cniitiiuie<l

POMRIUN POHTK— OOlltluueil.

M. W. Waltt A Co., 77 Oovoriimeiit iitre«t, Victoria, H.C

Philip, Bon &, Nephw, 41 to 5] South Cnatln «truet, I.lverpool, GiiKlainl-

AlnxRiider Dobbit* &. tittn, IH Clyde Place, OlUKow, 8ootlutiil.

V. A, M. Lepi^tit, ir> Rue ile Pnrln, Havre, France.

O. W. Lohiiiann, Sohllefiniihle 'il, Kreninn, Oorinany.

'Cbarlea Oaiipp A Co., Hongkong, China.

Rusiiell L. Webb, Manilla, Philippine Inlandi.

-M>

«*iV'.v

timmmmm

>..^*fM(girr«irrf**